2019 Audi A3 Owner Manual

2019 Audi A3 Owner’s Manual | OwnerManual

2019-Audi-A3

Index of /wp-content/uploads/2022/05/

2019 Audi A3 Owner Manual

2019 Audi A3 Owner’s Manual - Car Mechanic Workshop

Google Docs
Google Drive
Download [pdf]

File Info : application/pdf, 414 Pages, 113.99MB

2019 Audi A3

Owner's Manual 2019 A3
Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

Foreword
Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trustin us.
Your new Audi will allow you to experience the best in groundbreaking technology and premium quality equipment that a vehicle has to offer. We recommend that you read your Owner's Manual thoroughly so that you quickly become acquainted with your Audi and makeuseofall of its features.
In addition to explaining how the different features work, we provide manyuseful tips and information concerning your safety, how to care for your vehicle, and how to maintain your vehicle's value. We also give you useful tips and information on how to drive your vehicle more efficiently and in an environmentally-friendly manner.
Wehope you enjoy driving your Audi and we wish you safe and pleasant motoring.
AUDI AG
A WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do notidle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings. ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

8V2012721B)

Table of contents

About this Owner's Manual......

SUIMIMAFY: « « 225% : 222% : seen s eos
Quik aCCESS his: 6 i esi a 6 wees as ewe Controls ataglance.................. Indicator lights overview...........0.. 10

Display and operation............ 14

Instrumentcluster............... 14

Instrumentcluster overview........... 14

Coolant temperature indicator......... 15

Tachometer......... 0.0 eee ee eee

Fulellevélse. : 2 wes sy sews so eee so ees 16

Odometer icc eo sisiecs ores ee seven ee omens a 16

Outside temperature display........... 16

Multifunction steering wheel plus...... 17

Multifunction steering wheel.......... 20

Vehicle functions. ............0000 00s 21

MESSAGES cares 5 2 eneu 5 x awa § ¥ REG eB 24

Starting and driving.............

Opening and closing............. 30

Gentrabloeking si 2 2 ssc so wim 2 ween 2 30

Luggage compartment lid............. 36

Child safety lock..............0.-000. 38

POWer WiNdOWS!ns « saves ¥ 3 eas a ¢ aaa 5

Panoramic glass roof................- 40

POWEF top'. « « sees ¢ « ses gt ewes ce ce 41 Automatic power top . weicoe ss wesc ee eco 41 Wind deflector................00000. 44 Power top emergency operation........ 44

Lights and Vision................. 48

EXterior lighting sas y ¢ sews zo eee s 2 eee 48

Interior lightingie: + « sews ss wes se eee 51

Vision.

Windshield wipers...............0005 54

Digital.compass': « sci: «5 eews ee meee eee 56

58 58
PROMESEALES«css © canisen oo snosene © 0 acme 4 a 58 Head restraints. ..........0 0.00 eee eee 60

Stowing and using............... 62

Power sources ...... 00-00-00 eee eae

Storing

Luggage compartment ............... 63 Roof rack... eee eee 66

Warrant Goudie: ¢ sws s 0 wenn oe ve 68 Climate control system............... 68

DPINIIG): « wees ce ges se wesee sa eee a 2 ae 72
General information..............0.. 72 Steering... 6... c cee eee eee eee 73
Starting and stopping the engine (vehicles with an ignition lock)......... 74 Starting and stopping the engine (vehicles with convenience key)......... 75 Messages « sivas + © mavens 0 a savers 6 eroase 6 se 77 Starting the engine when thereis a THALGUNCCION acme + new = mean Ge Rem ses 77
Start/Stopisystem « sew. ee ews ve ees ee 78 Electromechanical parking brake....... 80 Starting fromastop..............005 81 Automatic transmission.............. 82

CGO: « & cain ¢ 5 Sates ¢ 4 Saw tf eae oe 90

Plug-in hybrid drive.............+.-5. 90

Refueling .......... 00.0 eee eee eee 101

Charging

102

Important safety precautions.......... 103

Charging at public charging stations.... 105

Charging the battery with the Audi

charging systeM........... ee eee eee 106

Charging system (version 1)........... 110

Charging system (version 2)........... rs

Indicator lights and messages......... 121

Emergency release ..........ceeseeeee 121

Climate control.................200. 121

Cleaning and maintenance information.. 122

Trailer towing.................... 124 Driving with atrailer................. 124

Driver assistance................. 126 Assist systems................... 126
Speed warning system.............--- 126
Cruise control system..............-. 126
Laptimer......... 0... cee eee eee eee 128 Audi adaptive cruise control........... 129 AUG PReISEMSEb. « sxevsue ie + enanene © x vunente © 6 on 136 Audi active lane assist................ 139

Table of contents

Audiside assist'. «ssi: ov onace ev ewe a oe 142 Audi drive select.......... 0.00 eee eee 146
PAE Cpals, sis: 5 6 eos oe wae 3 wae 4 149 Generalinformation................. 149 Parking system plus...........000000- 150 Rearview CaMeraien . 2 scsi a 6 sews 6 scree LS Park assist... 0.2.0.0... 0c eee eee eee 153 Adjusting the parking aid............. 157 Error'mesSages:. « ¢ esau ss een ec vee ee 158
Intelligent Technology........... 58 Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC).... 159 Brakes « sieves x 2 snare « @ amen wo srivete w © oearere 161 Electromechanical steering............ 162 All wheel drive (quattro).............. 162 Energy management................. 163 Notice about data recorded by the Event Data Recorder and vehicle control Modules... » wsivs + ee os ween ao ww + es 163
Infotainment system............ 165 Multi Media Interface............ 165
Traffic safety information............. 165 Introduction. .............. eee eee eee 165 MMI On/Off knob with joystick function.. 165 Infotainment system display.......... 166 MMI operation...........002.0ee eee 166 MMI TOUGH: « + some 2 + awam 6 2 aepme 5 2 ae 168 Control knob with joystick function... .. 170 Letter/number speller................ 172 Preettextisearch = swan: « x seme: 2 2 meme 2 oe 173 Menus and Symbols.............00005 174
Multifunction steering wheel.... 176 IMtroduction « & sessed 2 2 sere 3% samen 2 ¥ weer 176 Radio... 2.6... eee eee eee 176 Media: 2 sens: 2 sae 5 2 ems 5 x ee Gs 176 Telephones <x mcws v wae o ¥ waren © ¥ wasn 177 Navigation..................0.0000. 178
Voice recognition system........ 181 OPerating « « smsses s+ essen oo cesmere © eum @ & 180 Command overview information........ 181 GomMmanids » ver ¢ 2 ven = 2 sume 4 2 ees 8 182 External voice operation.............. 186

Mele HOMe ai: 2 2 see. 2 6 eevee e waver ee ee 188
Introduction... ... 6... eee eee eee 188
SGtUD = aus oo eRe & E REU o eee & Re 8 188 Using the Audi phone box............. 191 Using the telephone.................. 192 FAVOTIteS ssmm « x eeu » ¥ eee 5g eee & ee 195 MeSSAGES sevice & ewan ov mer wo mE 6 wore 195 Listening to voicemail................ 198 DiP@CtOry : sees ts sees ¢ 5 oe58 fe oes 3 Bes 198 Additional settings................0. 200 TEOUBLESHOOLIMG weuess «© cesses wo aiange 9 w enone 201

AGA GOMMBEE: esas se cows 5 x cares so ce 203 General information................. 203
Audi connect Infotainment............ 204 Using a Wi-Fi hotspot................ 204 Audi connect Infotainmentservices..... 204
Audi connect e-tron services........... 207 SECLINGS cama xo anes + nase se RENE 3 EEO 208
DatarPRiVvaGy iene 3 0 sccwexs o voctes ae ates so ons 209 Troubleshooting. .............20e0 00s 210

NAVIGAGIONT os: 6 eevee s & oro & emis 8 ¥en 211

Opening navigation.................. 211

Entering adestination................ 211

Personal route assistance............. 217

Home address ..........--.00 eee eee 218

Favorites... ......... 0.00.02. e ee eee 218

Directory contacts iis ss sees ss eis ss we 218

Alternative routes.............0.000. 219

Additional settings.................. 219

Mapes ¢ s secs 7 v meee Ye omen yo eee oe 220

Satellite map

223

Map update

224

Accessing traffic information.......... 225

e-tron navigation functions............ 227

Troubleshooting.............-.020-05 227

RAHI. e008 & 6 cise as worn so aman vo cewTe 228

Opening the radio................4.. 228

Radio functions as: <<: ese ss wees es pees 229

Radio menu

231

PresetS......... 0.00.0... 0.22 e eee 231.

Additional settings ..............00 ee 231

Troubleshooting wei es anise 2 wn oo mew 232

8V2012721B)

Table of contents
Bluetooth audio player............... Wi-Fi audio player................... Online media and Internet radio........ Multimedia connections.............. Playing Media): : sees s seeg te eeee ee es Additional settings.................. Supported media and file formats ...... Troubleshooting ..............eee eens
Operating: « sacs « = ews & x ewe 5 2 caw se TroubleshOOting wes s+ snes » a cxecene 6 0 enews
SYStEMSECCINGS :. «ewe ss eeu ss ee Setting the date andtime............. MMI settings............-.0-.0-005Connection manager................. System Update ssc. 2 ess ss eens oe ewes a Sound settings.............-.-.0000Volume settingS .........:eeeeeeereee Restarting the MMI.................. Softwarelicense information..........
Safety Titst's « cews s ¢ cease 5 ¢ quwe 4 e ewe Driving safety....................
Correct passenger seating positions..... Driver's and front passenger's footwell.. Pedalarea.... 0... 2. eee eee eee Active rollover protection system.......
Safety belts...................088 General notes: « 2e.% 22 es.6: erence ees
AlP DAG SYSTEIA oi:. 5 6 secs oe creseee oo ou Important information............... Frontiairbags', « essa «= ssw. sy eee ee ee Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System . Knee airbags.......... 2... eee eee eee

Siderairbagssevs x 5 soc vo wae wo wee © oe 294 Side curtain airbags.............0000. 297
CHARSYiea se maces oe wae ao we 301 Important information............... 301 Child Safety Seats ecic ss eas i eae ay tes 307 Securing child safety seats............ 312 LATCH system (lower anchorages and tethers for children) .................. 315 Additional information............... 320
Maintenance and Care........... 321 Checking and Filling............. 321
Fue biaiins x suiriea 2 o avawiae wi axamare wa annus fe a ana 321 Refueling. ........ 0... e cece eee eee 322 Emissions control system............. 324 Engine:compartment « 6 ssves « « soneos vo o00 325 Engine Oil... 6... eee eee eee eee 328 COOLING 'SVSECM: s 2 ewes x x ces go ere + oe 332 Brake fluidees « & snus vv ewaee ve emare 9 ¥ er 334 Electrical system. ...........000- 00s 334 Battenycn ss mem : 5 sme § ee oe eee ee 335 Windshield washer system............ 337 Service interval display............... 338
WVINGENS « « seers & ¢ poem 3 2 newR ox eES Eee 339 Wheelsiand Tires: « isis «wasn « sienna © 0 339 Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator . 357 Tire pressure monitoring system....... 359
Care and cleaning................ 362 General information ous eis cows 362 Car washes. « assis < + aavius wo cwavate o uhewees 362 Cleaning and care information......... 363 Taking your vehicle out of service....... 367
Troubleshooting................. 368
Emergencyassistance........... 368
Trunk escape latch. «2 nici seen e seers 368 General information 0.0.0.0... cee ees 368 Equipment.....................000. 368
Tire MODILIDY kit's mss se eons x e seme x oa 369
Replacing wheels.................04. 371 Spare tire... 02... cee eee eee eee 377

8V2012721B)

Fuses and bulbs.................. B79. FUSES 2. eee 379 Bil BSicc « « oean ¢ & ewe & nas ¢ eee Fe ee 381
Emergencysituations............ 383 General iss ¢ ¢ wars so ewe ob ee eo ae 383 Starting by pushing or towing.......... 383 JUPAS SEAREIG o coonese « onanens o> rawcens wo & renee « 383 Towing with atowtruck..............- 386 Raising the vehicle...............00.. 388
Customer information........... 389 Accessories and technical GIYGIIOES . & cisswrs & crane a voeveas a 6 emawen ¥en 389
Warranty......... 00.0.0. cece eee 389 Audi Literature Shop « eis se eens ss ees 389 Driving in other countries............. 389 Maintenance, repairs, and technical MOdITICALIONS xs s veanw + wees 2 x pom a 389 Accessories and parts................ 391 Reporting Safety Defects.............. 391 Declaration of compliance for telecommunications equipment and electronic systems............--.000- 392
Technical data.................... 394 Identification data................04. 394 Vehicle data... ..... eee eee eee 394
ENO: 5 scccans 2 & cussions « cave 9 6 ewan 2 wens 396

Table of contents

About this Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual applies to all versions of this model. It contains important information, tips, suggestions, and warnings for using your vehicle.
KEEP THIS GUIDE
Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times. This is especially important if you loan your vehicle to othersor sell it.
This owner's manual describes the equipment range specified for this model at the time of printing. Individual equipment options described mayonly be available at a later date or may only be offered in certain countries.
Some sections in this manual do not apply toall vehicles. When this is the case, the beginning of the section indicates the validity, for example "Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system". Optional or vehicle-specific equipment is also identified with an asterisk "*".
The illustrations in this manual are a guide. Some of the details in your vehicle maydiffer from the illustration.
All directions, such as "Left", "right", "front" and "rear", are based on the vehicle's direction of travel.
* Optional or vehicle-specific equipment b> The section continues on the next page.
=> A\ Cross reference to a "WARNING"within a section. If a page number is indicated, the WARNING is located outside of the section.
ZA\ WARNING
Text with this symbol contains information about safety and how to reduce the risk of serious personal injury or death.
@) Note
Text with this symbol contains information about reducing the risk of damage to your vehicle.
@ For the sake of the environment
Text with this symbol contains information on protecting the environment.

G) Tips
Text with this symbol contains additional useful information.

(aTZZZTOZAS

Quick access
Quick access
Controls at a glance
Fig. 2 Cockpit: right section
8

Quick access

©OOOCOLO

O©O®

Door handle
SidG-ASSISE « = + sear x o ews 3 foe «
Central locking switch ........... Lightswiteh cic ee soveee 2 @ sven @ a «
VENUS! « soe ¢ ¢ wees 2 ¢ ewe 5 © eer =
Lever for:
--Turn signals and high beams .... -- High beam assistant .......... -- Active lane assist ............. Multifunction steering wheel with:
-- Horn be -- Driver's airbag ............... -- Driver information system con-
HEOUSS oo seceie + a casmeie ts smote ot ee
-- Audio/video, telephone, navigation, and voice recognition con-
EOUS! 2 2 secs 2 2 avec 8 someon oo sees --L[k/steering wheel heating button . -- Shift paddles ................
Instrument cluster .............
Windshield washer system lever ..
Steering column, with the follow-
ing, depending on equipment: HIQitiomlocks « «series « snennee = 0 sme -- Starting the engine when thereis
amalfunction ................ Adjustable steering column ...... Lever for:
-- Cruise control system ......... -- Adaptive cruise control ........ Knee airbag .........0 ee eee eee
Instrument illumination .........
Hood release: s « eves se ems se eras
Data link connector for On Board Diagnostic System (OBDII) ......
Switch (depending on the equipment) for: -- Luggage compartment lid ...... -- Fuel filler door (plug-in hybrid
OIiVe) coos 2 2 woe ¢ y cous ye ogee oe
Power exterior mirror adjustment .
Power windows .............4.-
Depending on equipment:
--Parentalcontrol .............. -- Central power window switch ...

142 34 48 68
49 49 139
280
17,20
19,20 19, 20
86 14
54
74
77 73
126 129 292
51 327
325
36
101 52 38
38 38

@) Infotainment system display .....

166

@) Glove compartment ............

@) Drives for CD, DVD, SIM cards ....

234

@) Front passenger's airbag ........

280

@3) Depending on equipment, buttons for:

-- Driveselect® sass ¢ = eae = & gees x

146

-- Start/Stop system ............

--{|="| button (plug-in hybrid drive) .

eParkcassist 3 ss sswiees « & ssswens wv come

153

--Parkingaid ..................

150

--Emergency flashers ...........

-- Electronic Stabilization Control

(ES©) op < 2 sees « eee = oe g x oe

159

-- Infotainment system display ....

166

-- Front passenger airbag off indica-

EGON coeseae +o smncams 4 «mines « 2 eeanews © ee

288

@8 Deluxe automatic climate control .

@ Socket ...............000 0008,

@8) Selector lever (automatic transmis-

(0) 1)

@) Cupholders ..............0000.

G0 Infotainment system on/off button . 165

@) Infotainment unit ..............

165

@ Power top operation ............

63. Center armrest with storage compartment. Depending on vehicle

equipment,it may have:

-- Audi music interface ..........

239

-- Audi smartphone interface .....

251

--Audi phone box ...............

191

@4 Electromechanical parking brake . .

@) [START ENGINE STOP] button ....

G8 Audi music interface ............

239

Gi) Tips
Some the equipment listed here is only installed in certain modelsor is available as an op-
tion.

8V2012721B)
©O®

Quick access
Indicator lights overview
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster blink or turn on. They indicate functions or malfunctions.
With some indicator lights, messages may appear and warning signals may sound. The indicator lights and messages maybe covered by other displays. To show them again in the driver information system, select the second tab for messages with the multifunction steering wheel => page 17 or > page 20.
Some indicator lights in the display can display in several colors.
MMeTeelem lis
If the wa or indicator light turns on, check the instrument cluster display for more information.
Applies to: vehicles with monochrome display
If a message appears together with a central indicator light A or wa the central indicator light will indicate the priority of the warning. Ifa white indicator light also appears, the central indicator light will have its own color. For example, it appears together with Bw read the description for EE.
Some indicator lights turn on briefly as a function check when you switch the ignition on. These systems are marked with a V in the following tables. If one of these indicator lights does not turn on, there is a malfunction in that system.
The following indicator lights may be available, depending on the vehicle equipment:
Red indicator lights Central indicator light => page 10, Audi pre sense => page 137

Brake system 4 => page 24 Brake system ¥ => page 24
Electromechanical parking brake =>page 25
Electromechanical parking brake => page 25
Cooling system =>page 25
Engine oil pressure => page 329
Electrical system => page 334
Safety belt => page 26
Electromechanical steering V => page 162
Steering lock => page 26
Engine stop while driving => page 27
Transmission => page 88
Hood => page 27
Adaptive cruise control => page 131
e-tron: system warning => page 94
e-tron: charging system => page 121
Yellow indicator lights Central indicator light => page 10 Brake booster => page 24 Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) ¥ => page 27

8V2012721B)

Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) ¥ => page 27
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) => page 159
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ¥ => page 27
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ¥ => page 27
Safety systems / => page 26
Brake pads => page 24
Electromechanical parking brake =>page 25
Hill hold assist => page 27
Tire pressure => page 357, or > page 359
Tire pressure => page 357, or > page 359
Engine control
=> page 27
Engine control
=> page 28
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
v => page 325
Engine speed limitation => page 28
Engine oil level (MIN)
=> page 329
Engine oil sensor => page 329
Electrical system => page 334
Tank system => page 28
Washer fluid level => page 28
Windshield wipers => page 28

Quick access
Remote control key => page 77 Driver's door > page 28 Battery in remote control key => page 32 Bulb failure indicator => page 29 Headlight range control system => page 29 Adaptive light => page 29 Light/rain sensor => page 29 Transmission => page 88 Steering lock => page 26 Engine start system => page 26 Electromechanical steering => page 162 Suspension control => page 29
Power top => page 43
Active lane assist => page 140 Side assist => page 146 pre sense => page 139 e-tron: system warning => page 94
e-tron: Mileage => page 94, > page 102
11

Quick access
e-tron: vehicle sound => page 94 e-tron: charging system => page 121
Other indicator lights Turn signals => page 29

AcLy
PARK BRAKE

Cruise control system => page 127 Cruise control system => page 127
Adaptive cruise control => page 131
Adaptive cruise control => page 131
Adaptive cruise control => page 131
Adaptive cruise control => page 132
Active lane assist => page 140
Start/Stop system => page 78
Start/Stop system => page 78
Convenience key => page 77
Engine start system => page 26
Transmission => page 88
Electromechanical parking brake =>page 25
Electromechanical parking brake =>page 25
Electromechanical parking brake => page 25
Hill hold assist =>page 27

Speed warning system => page 126
Speed warning system => page 126
Cruise control system => page 126 Cruise control system => page 126
Park assist => page 153
Park assist => page 153
Adaptive cruise control => page 132
Adaptive cruise control => page 132
Active lane assist => page 140
Side assist => page 146
pre sense > page 139
High beam assistant => page 49
High beams => page 49
High beam assistant => page 49
e-tron: electric drive ready mode => page 96
e-tron: electric drive ready mode => page 94
e-tron: charging system
> page 121
e-tron: charging system > page 121
e-tron: gasoline engine => page 96
e-tron: system warning => page 94

e-tron: tank system => page 102
e-tron: charging system => page 121

Quick access

8V2012721B)

88-0400]

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster overview
The instrument clusteris the central information centerfor the driver.

anee ~\

EH-l0r
12/5/2016

Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit Fig. 3 Instrument cluster overview

[8-039]

Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster Fig. 4 Instrumentcluster overview

Vehicles with Plug-in hybrid drive": the instru-
mentcluster is different > page 93.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-

ing items may appear in the instrument cluster: _

WY Coolant temperature £ or boost indicator ..............-.

15, 23

WaGho Meter sis x 2 ewcsnss oo owen 2 ws seve

-- With OFF status indicator ...... 74,75
-- With READYstatus indicator ...74, 75, 78 ) Tab area

@) Central area with
-- Driver information system (Audi
virtual cockpit) Corrrnsnsssss ss -- Driver information system (ana-
log instrument cluster) ........ -- Indicator lights .............. 3) Status line (displayed on one or two lines)
© Trip odometer reset button ......
pS) Speedometer/conveniAence di5 splay
Fuellevel .............0.0 000%

17 20 10
16
16>

Instrument cluster

@® Speedometer
@ Left additional display
There may be additional indicator lights in the
tachometer (2), the speedometer(7), the status
line © and, depending on the instrumentcluster,
above or below the central area (4).
The following pages will primarily show illustrations of the multi-color analog instrument cluster*. The display and/or position of the element shown mayvary in monochrome instrument clusters or in the Audi virtual cockpit*.
@ Tips
-- Depending on vehicle equipment, the instrument illumination (needles and gauges) may turn on when the lights are off and the ignition is switched on. The illumination for the gauges reduces automatically and eventually turns off as brightness outside increases. This function reminds the driver to turn the low beams on at the appropriate time.
-- You can select the units used for tempera-
ture, speed, and other measurementsin the
Infotainment system > page 253. -- Speeds are displayed in mph (miles per
hour) or km/h (kilometers per hour).
Coolant temperature indicator
The coolant temperaturedisplay @ > page 14, fig. 4 or > page 14,fig. 3 only functions when the ignition is switched on. To reducethe risk of engine damage, please observethe following notes about the temperature ranges.
Cold range
If only the LEDs at the bottom of the gauge turn on, the engine has not reached operating temperature yet. Avoid high engine speeds, full accelerating and heavy engine loads.
Normal range
The engine has reached its operating temperature once the LEDs up to the center of the gauge turn on. If the & indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster display turns on, the coolant temperature is too high > page 25.
Vehicles without a coolant temperature indicator
The B indicator light turns on when the coolant temperature is high > page 25. Refer to 9@.
C) Note
-- Auxiliary headlights and other accessories in front of the air intake impair the cooling effect of the coolant. This increases the risk of the engine overheating during high outside temperatures and heavy engine load.
-- The front spoiler also helps to distribute cooling air correctly while driving. If the spoiler is damaged, the cooling effect will be impaired and the risk of the engine overheating will increase. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
-- Vehicles without a coolant temperature display: to promote a long engine service life, avoiding high engine speeds, full acceleration and heavy engine loads during approximately the first 15 minutes when the engine is cold is recommended. The amountof time that the engine is cold depends on the
outside temperature.
Tachometer
The tachometerdisplays the engine speedin revolutions per minute (RPM).
The beginning of the red zone in the tachometer indicates the maximum permissible engine speed for all gears once the engine has been broken in and when it is warmed up to operating temperature. Before reaching the red zone, you should shift into the next higher gear, choose the "D" or "S" selector lever position, or remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are different display formats available > page 93. >

8V2012721B)

Instrument cluster
@) Note The needle in the tachometer 2) > page 14, fig. 4 or > page 14,fig. 3 may only be in the red area of the gauge for a short time or there is a risk of engine damage. The location where the red zone begins varies depending on the engine.
@ For the sake of the environment
Upshifting early helps you to save fuel and reduces operating noise.
Fuel level
The display @) > page 14,fig. 4 or > page 14, fig. 3 only functions when the ignition is switched on. When the display has reached the reserve mark, a red LED appears and the ED] indicator light turns on > page 28. For the tank capacity in your vehicle, refer to the Technical Data > page 395.
@) Note
Never drive until the tank is completely empty. The irregular supply offuel that results from that can cause engine misfires. Uncombusted fuel will then enter the exhaust system. This can cause overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.
Odometer
<3 72 Olea

B8U-0340

The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the reset button ©) > page 14,fig. 4 or => page 14, fig. 3.
The odometer showsthe total distance that the vehicle has been driven.
Malfunction indicator
If there is a malfunction in the instrument cluster, DEF will appear in the trip odometer display. Have the malfunction corrected as soon as possible
@ Tips
Distances are displayed in mi (miles) or km (kilometers).
Outside temperature display
If your vehicle is stationary or if you are driving at very low speeds, the temperature displayed may be slightly higher than the actual temperature outside due to the heat radiating from the engine.
At temperatures below 41 °F (+5 °C), a snowflake symbol appearsin front of the temperature display > A\.
ZA WARNING
Do not assume the roads are free of ice based on the outside temperature display. Be aware that there maybe ice on roads even when the outside temperature is around 41 °F (+5 °C) and thatice can increase the risk of accidents.

3/3/2016

Fig. 5 Instrumentcluster: odometer
Trip odometer and odometer The trip odometer showsthe distance driven since it was last reset. It can be used to measure short distances.
16

Multifunction steering
wheel plus
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit

Fig. 6 Example: driver information system view (Audi virtual cockpit)

Fig. 7 Left side of multifunction steering wheel plus

Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.

The driver information system contains multiple tabs @ 9 fig. 6 that display various information ©.

The following tabs maybe available, depending on vehicle equipment:

First tab Second
tab?)

Vehicle functions > page 21 Messages

Instrument cluster

Third tab
Fourth tab Fifth tab

Radio > page 176 Media > page 176
Telephone* > page 177
Navigation* > page 178 Map* > page 178

a) This tab is only visible when thereis at least one indicator light or message displayed.

@ Button [<>

-- Switching tabs: press the [<>] button repeatedly until the desired tab is shown (for example,
Radio).

@ MEW] button

Switching views: see > page 18, Switching views.

@®|[=] button

Return to functions at higher levels.

©DJand[control buttons

Opening/closing the selection menu or options menu > page 18.

@ Left thumbwheel

-- Selecting a function in a menu/list: turn the left thumbwheel to the desired function (for example, selecting a frequency).
-- Confirming a selection: press the left thumb-
wheel %) © fig. 7.
-- Zooming in/out on the map: when a map is displayed, turn the left thumbwheel to zoom in and out on the map.

8V2012721B)

Instrument cluster
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit

curd (eT eran ests an ean rst)
BOrela

Fig. 8 Selection menu and options menu
Left control button
-- Opening/closing the selection menu: press the respective left control button on the multifunction steering wheel > fig. 8 . You can select and confirm a function in the selection menu using the left thumbwheel (for example, selecting a frequency band).
Right control button
-- Opening/closing the options menu: press the respective right control button on the multifunction steering wheel fig. 8. You can change any context-dependent functions and settings using the left thumbwheel (for example, additional station information).
G) Tips
The availability of a selection menu or options menu depends on the function that is selected.

Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
03:30" EOS

Fig. 9 Standard view: classic/sport*

Instrument cluster
Other function buttons
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit

Fig. 10 Enhanced view
Change view
> Press the [VIEW] button @) > page17,fig. 7 to switch from the default view > fig. 9 to the enhanced view fig. 10. To return to the default view, press the [VIEW] button again.
Setting the default view
Applies to: vehicles with sport view
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can choose between the classic and the sport view.
> Open the first vehicle functions tab using the <>} button on the multifunction steering wheel.
> Select on the multifunction steering wheel: left control button > Layout > Sport layout or Classic layout.
Adjusting the additional display
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the additional displays that can be selected mayvary.
> Open the first vehicle functions tab using the <>] button on the multifunction steering
wheel. > Select on the multifunction steering wheel:
right control button > Additional display. > Select the desired additional display.
@ Tips
Applies to: vehicles with sport view
Always set the desired default view before driving, becausethe display functions will not be available for several seconds.

Fig. 11 Right side of multifunction steering wheel plus
@ el button
-- Accepting a call: press the |<] button when there is an incoming call.
-- Ending call: press the [¢] button during a phone call to end the call.
-- Opening thecall list: if no phone callis in progress and there are no incoming calls, press the | button.
@ |] button
-- Switching the voice recognition system on: briefly press the |] button. Say the desired command after the Beep.
-- Switching the voice recognition system off: press and hold the [2] button. Or: say the command Cancel.
For more information about the voice recognition system, see > page 181, Voice recognition sys-
tem.
@ Right thumbwheel
You can adjust the volume of an audio source or a system message (for example, from the voice recognition system) when the sound is playing.
-- Increasing or decreasing the volume: turn the right thumbwheel up or down.
-- Muting or pausing: turn the right thumbwheel down. Or: press the right thumbwheel.
--Unmuting or resuming: turn the right thumbwheel up. Or: press the right thumbwheel.

8V2012721B)

Instrument cluster

@ ls] bei] button
-- Selecting the previous/next track or station: press the |<<] or [>>!] button.
-- Fast forwarding/rewinding audio files: press and hold the Kid] or [>>I button until the desired location in the file is reached.
©) [x] button / steering wheelheating [#
-- Steering wheelheating*: you can find additional information in > page 71.
-- Programmable steering wheel button - Opening a function: press the [+] button on the multifunction steering wheel.
-- Programmable steering wheel button - Requesting a function: press and hold the [+] but-
ton.
-- Programmablesteering wheel button in the Infotainment system, select: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings > Steering wheel button assignment.
©] button
-- Repeating the last navigation prompt: press the [| button when route guidanceis active.
-- Changing the voice guidance volume: when route guidanceis active, turn the right thumbwheel upward or downward during a navigation
prompt.
Multifunction steering wheel
Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster S3|Baayyal|
Fig. 12 Left side of multifunction steering wheel

Fig. 13 Right side of the multifunction steering wheel

Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.

@ Operating the driver information system
The driver information system contains multiple
tabs @ > page17,fig. 6 that display various information @) > page 17,fig. 6.
The following tabs may be available, depending on vehicle equipment:

First tab Second
tab?)
Third tab
Fourth tab Fifth tab

Vehicle functions > page 21 Messages
Radio > page 176 Media > page 176 Telephone* > page 177 Navigation* > page 178

a) This tab is only visible when thereis at least one indicator light or message displayed.
-- Switching tabs: press the [<>] button repeatedly until the desired tab is shown.
-- Opening/closing the menu: press the [=] but-
ton.
-- Selecting a function in the menu/list: turn the left thumbwheel to the desired function.
-- Confirming a selection: press the left thumbwheel to confirm your selection.
-- Returning to functions at higher levels: press the [>] button.
-- Scrolling within lists: turn the left thumbwheel quickly.
@|el button
-- Accepting a call: press the |<] button when there is an incoming call.
-- Ending call: press the |¢] button during a phone call to end the call.

-- Opening thecall list: if no phone call is in progress and there are no incoming calls, press the | button.
@|[2J Button
-- Switching the voice recognition system on: briefly press the [2] button. Say the desired command after the Beep.
-- Switching the voice recognition system off: press and hold the |] button. Or: say the command Cancel.
For more information about the voice recognition system, see > page 181, Voice recognition system.
@ Right thumbwheel
You can adjust the volume of an audio source or a system message (for example, from the voice recognition system) when the sound is playing.
-- Increasing or decreasing the volume: turn the right thumbwheel up or down.
-- Muting or pausing: turn the right thumbwheel down. Or: press the right thumbwheel.
-- Unmuting or resuming: turn the right thumbwheel up. Or: press the right thumbwheel.
© ls] / bei] Button
-- Selecting the previous/next track or station: press the |<] or [>>!] button.
-- Fast forwarding/rewinding audio files: press and hold the kid} or [DDI button until the desired location in the file is reached.
© [x] button / steering wheel heating* |[#
-- Steering wheel heating": you can find additional information in > page 71.
-- Programmable steering wheel button - Opening a function: press the [+] button on the multifunction steering wheel.
-- Programmablesteering wheel button - Requesting a function: press and hold the [+] but-
ton.
-- Programmablesteering wheel button in the Infotainment system, select: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings > Steering wheel button assignment.

Instrument cluster
@ [=] Button
-- Repeating the last navigation prompt: press the |} button when route guidance is active.
-- Changing the voice guidance volume: when route guidanceis active, turn the right thumbwheel upward or downward during a navigation prompt.
Vehicle functions
The trip computer is displayed in the first tab of the driver information system. Additional vehicle functions can be accessed depending on the vehicle equipment. > Press either the [=] button or the left control
button depending on the vehicle equipment. -- On-board computer > page 21, or > page 22 -- Efficiency program > page 23 -- Digital speedometer -- Lap timer > page 128 -- Assist > page 126 -- Reduced display -- Energy flow > page 99 --Lap times > page 128 -- Statistics > page 129 -- Sport displays > page 24 -- Layout > page 18
Trip computer (Audi virtual cockpit)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
Cniealraemniemeeseeeneiae)l crs
Fig. 14 Instrumentcluster: fuel consumption display

8V2012721B)

B8U-0402

Instrument cluster

Resetting values to zero
Requirement: the Fuel consumption, Short-term memory, or Long-term memorydisplay must be selected.
> To reset the values in the respective memory to
zero, press and hold the left thumbwheel on
the multifunction steering wheel for one second. Or > On the multifunction steering wheel, select: the right control button > Reset values*.
The following displays are available, depending on vehicle equipment:
-- Date and time > page 253 -- Plug-in hybrid drive: Range > page 95 -- Average consumption -- Short-term memory overview -- Long-term memoryoverview -- Energy consumers > page 22 -- Driver assistance > page 126
The short-term memorycollects driving information from the time the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If you continue driving within two hoursafter switching the ignition off, the new values are included when calculating the current trip information.
Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term memoryis not erased automatically. You can select the time period for evaluating trip information yourself.
Fuel consumption
The current fuel consumption can be shown using a bar graph > fig. 14. The average consumption stored in the short-term memoryis also displayed. If the bar is green, your vehicle is saving fuel using the following methods:
-- Recuperation: electrical energy can be stored in the battery when the vehicle is coasting or driving downhill. The bar will move toward (1.
Energy consumers*
The Energy consumersview lists other equipment thatis currently affecting fuel consumption. The display showsup to three equipment items. The equipment using the most power is

listed first. If more than three items using power are switched on, the equipment that is currently using the most power is displayed. A chart also showsyou the current total ofall other consume rs.
Tips The date, time of day, and time and date format can be setin the Infotainment system => page 253.
Trip computer (analog instrument cluster)
Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster
Fig. 15 Instrumentcluster: fuel consumption display
Resetting values to zero Requirement: the Fuel consumption, Short-term memory, or Long-term memory display must be selected. > To reset the values in the respective memory to
zero, press and hold the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel for one second. On-board computer In the trip computer, you can call up the following displays one after the other by turning the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel: -- Date > page 253 -- Remaining range -- Plug-in hybrid drive*: Tachometer > page 93, Range > page 95, Energy flow display => page 99
-- Short-term memory
-- Average consumption
-- Long-term memory

Instrument cluster

-- Engine oil temperature*
The short-term memorycollects driving information from the time the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If you continue driving within two hoursafter switching the ignition off, the new values are included when calculating the current trip information.
Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term memoryis not erased automatically. You can select the time period for evaluating trip information yourself.
@ Tips
The date, time of day, and time and date for-
mat can be setin the Infotainment system => page 253.
Efficiency program
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency program
Resetting values to zero
> To reset the values in the respective memory to
zero, press and hold the left thumbwheel on
the multifunction steering wheel for one second.
The efficiency program can help you to use less fuel. It evaluates driving information in reference to fuel consumption and showsother equipment influencing consumption. Economy tips provide advice for efficient driving.
The efficiency program receives distance and consumption data from the short-term memory.If the data in the efficiency program is deleted, the values in the short-term memoryarealsoreset.
The following additional displays may be available in the efficiency program, depending on vehicle equipment:
-- Other equipment: other equipment thatis currently affecting fuel consumption is listed in the efficiency program. The display shows up to three other equipment items. The equipment using the most power is listed first. If more than three items using power are switched on, the equipment thatis currently using the most

power is displayed. A chart also shows you the current total of all other consumers.
-- Economytips: in certain situations, economy
tips appear automatically for a short time in the efficiency program. If you follow these economytips, you can reduce your vehicle's fuel consumption. To turn an economy message off immediately after it appears, press any button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Engine oil temperature display and boost indicator
Applies to: vehicles with engine oil temperature display/boost indicator
Engine oil temperature indicator 2
Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster
The engine oil temperatureis only shown in the lap timer display > page 128.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
The engine oil temperature is only shownin the enhanced viewor in the sport view* > page 18.
When engine oil temperatures are low,the display --- °F (--- °C) appears in the instrument cluster.
The engine has reached its operating temperature when the engine oil temperature is between 176 °F (80 °C) and 248 °F (120 °C) under normal driving conditions. The engine oil temperature maybe higher if there is heavy engine load and high temperatures outside. This is not a cause for concern as long as the EE => page 329 or = = page 329 indicator lights do not turn on.
Boostindicator
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
The boost indicator is only shown in the enhanced view or in the sport view* > page 18.
The current engine load (meaning the current boost pressure) is indicated by a bar.

8V2012721B)

Instrument cluster
STAM hee eele
Applies to: vehicles with shift light indicator
The shift light indicator informs the driver when the rpm limit is reached.
Accessing the shift light indicator
Requirement: tiptronic mode mustbe activated => page 86.
> Select the sport view > page 18. The shift light indicator is displayed with green, yellow and red ranges in the upper areas of the tachome-
ter.
The shift light indicator will blink red when approaching the engine speed limit. Shift to the next highest gear at the right time.
Sport displays
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit and sport displays
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the sport displays may include the G-meter, the engine data and the tire pressure monitoring system.
Accessing the sport displays
> Open the first vehicle functions tab using the [<>] button on the multifunction steering wheel.
> Select on the multifunction steering wheel: left control button > Sport displays.
> Turn the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel until the desired sport display appearsin the instrumentcluster.
G meter*
The G meter displays the longitudinal and lateral acceleration. The maximum values that are reached are stored and displayed when the vehicle is stationary.
> To reset the stored values, select on the multi-
function steering wheel: right control button > Reset values.
Engine data*
The engine data displays the current power and
torque.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System*
The tire pressure monitoring system displays the
current tire pressures and temperature. Also see
=> page 359, Tire pressure monitoring system.
Messages
BRAKE@)/`C) Brake system
If this indicator light turns on, there is a malfunc-
tion in the brake system.
EG ©) Brakes: stop vehicle and check brake fluid level
Stop the vehicle and check the brakefluid level. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
GRNG / BH warning! No brake booster!
If the brake booster is not working, you have to use much moreforce when braking the vehicle. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
GRING / Brakes: malfunction! Stop vehicle safely
If the indicator light turns on and this message appears, there is a malfunction in the brake brake
system.
1f BES / Gand B also turn on, there is a malfunction in the ABS, ESC, and braking distribution.
Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance > A\.
GG t @ Parking brake: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle. See owner's manual
-- If the indicator light and the message appear when the vehicle is stationary or after switching the ignition on, check if you can release the parking brake. If you cannotrelease the parking
brake, see an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility. If you can release the parking brake and the message still appears, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

Instrument cluster

-- If the indicator light and message appear while driving, the hill start assist or emergency braking function may be malfunctioning. It may not be possible to set the parking brake or release it once it has been set. Do not park your vehicle on hills. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
GG / fe Brake pads: wear limit reached. You can continue driving. Please contact Service
The brake pads are worn. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon as possible to have the malfunction corrected.
Brake booster: limited function. You can continue driving. Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the brake booster. The brake booster is available, but its effectiveness is reduced. Braking behavior may be different from how it normally functions and the brake pedal mayvibrate. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Brake booster: deactivated. See owner's manual
The brake booster remains active for a brief period of time after switching off the ignition. Secure the vehicle from rolling by selecting "P" (automatic transmission) or shift into 1st gear (man-
ual transmission) and set the parking brake.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Read and follow the warnings in => page 325, General information before opening the hood and checking the brake fluid level.
-- If the brake fluid level is below the MIN marking, it can impair the braking effect and
driving safety, which increase the risk of an
accident. Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. -- If the brake system indicator light turns on together with the ABS and ESC indicator lights, the ABS/ESC regulating function may be malfunctioning. Functions that stabilize the vehicle are no longer available. This

could cause the rear of the vehicle to swerve, which increasesthe risk that the vehicle will slide. Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
PARK/(@)/S2 Electromechanical parking
PEL
If the in / ® indicator light turns on, the parking brake was set.
If the [MW / indicator light flashes, the brak-
ing force has not built up enough or it has decreased. Select the "P" selector lever position to help secure the vehicle. Make sure the indicator light is off before you start driving.
wg Parking brake: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle. See owner's manual
There is a malfunction in the parking brake. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. Do not park the vehicle on hills, because it could roll.
ES / ZING / (@) Parking brake: auto release
unavailable
If this message appears, press the brake pedal first and then release the parking brake.
FS / (ENG / (@) Parking brake: warning!
Vehicle parked too steep
There is not enough braking force to hold the vehicle in place. The brakes have overheated. The vehicle could roll away, even on a small incline.
G) Tips
For additional information on the parking brake, see > page 80.
meerUe
|| Turn off engine and check coolantlevel! See owner's manual
|| Stop vehicle and check coolant level! See owner's manual
The coolant level is too low.

8V2012721B)

Instrument cluster

Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the coolant level > page 332.
Plug-in hybrid drive*: refer to > page 101.
-- If the coolant level is too low, add coolant => page 333. Only continue driving once the indicator light turns off.
B Coolant temperaturetoo high! Pleaselet engine run while vehicle is stationary
Let the engine run at idle for a few minutes to cool off, until the indicator light turns off.
-- If the indicator light does not turn off, do not continue driving the vehicle. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Never open the hood if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. This increases the risk of burns. When you no longer see or hear steam or coolant escaping, you may open the engine compartment with caution.
-- The engine compartment in any vehicle can be a dangerous area. Stop the engine and allow it to cool before working in the engine compartment. Alwaysfollow the information found in > page 325, General information.
() Note
Do not continue driving if the B indicator light turns on as this increases the risk of engine damage.
BFaT
The ka indicator light monitors the safety sys-
tems.
If the ka indicator light turns on or blinks, there is a malfunction in a safety system.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

ZA WARNING
Have the safety systems inspected immediately. Otherwise, there is a risk that the systems maynotactivate during a collision, which increases the risk of serious injury or death.
Eva tlt
The A indicator light stays on until the driver's and front passenger's safety belts are buckled. Abovea certain speed, there will also be a warning tone.
(i) Tips
For additional information on safetybelts, see > page 268.
@- Steering lock
3] Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
The le--o| indicator light turns on if there is a malfunction in the electronic steering lock. You cannot turn the ignition on.
Do not tow your vehicle because it cannot be steered. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
|@--| Steering lock: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the electronic steering lock.
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Z\ WARNING
To reduce the risk of an accident, do not tow your vehicle when thereis a malfunction in the electronic steering lock.
=® Engine start system
SB Engine start system: malfunction. Please contact Service

Instrument cluster

Do not switch the ignition off because you may not be able to switch it on again.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Ee Engine start system: malfunction. Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the engine starting system.
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
*®& Enginestop while driving
If the S indicator light turns on, there may be a malfunction in the engine or fuel supply.
Moreforce is needed to steer and brake the moving vehicle when the engine is stopped. If the vehicle is rolling, try to bring it to a stop off to the side from moving traffic. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
ZX WARNING
If the engine stops while driving, you will need to use moreforce to brake the vehicle. This increases the risk of an accident. There will still be power steering if the ignition is switched on while the vehicleis rolling and thereis sufficient vehicle battery charge. Otherwise, you must use greater force when steering.

If the I indicator light turns on, the system has switched the ESC off. In this case, you can switch the ignition off and then on to switch the ESC on again. The indicator light turns off when the system is fully functional.
If the J indicator light turns on, ESC was switched off using the |£*| button > page 160.
Stabilization control (ESC/ABS): malfunction! See owner's manual
If the BA indicator lamp and the fs i ©) ABS indicator lamp turn on and the driver message appears, the ABS or electronic differential lock is malfunctioning. This also causes the ESC to malfunction. The brakes still function with their nor-
mal power, but ABS is notactive.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
@ Tips
For additional information on ESC and ABS, see > page 159.
*S Hill hold assist
Bw Hill hold assist: unavailable
When this message appears, hill hold assistis not available.
Manual control!
If this message appears, press the brake pedal. Continue driving with the help of the parking brake > page 80.

If the B indicator light turns on, the hood lock is not latched correctly.
Stop immediately and close the hood => page 327.
53/2 Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)
If the 3 indicator light blinks while driving, the ESC or ASR (Anti-Slip Regulation) is actively regulating.

<5 Engine control
If the B indicator light turns on if there is a malfunction in the engine control.
Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the engine checked.

8V2012721B)

Instrument cluster

EPC Engine control
Applies to: vehicles with gasoline engines
If the fa indicator light turns on if there is a malfunction in the engine control.
Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the engine checked.
Engine speedlimitation
Applies to: vehicles with engine speed limitation
If the Bw indicator light turns on, the engine will be automatically limited to the RPM displayed in the instrument cluster. This protects the engine from overheating.
The engine speed limitation deactivates once the engine is no longer in the critical temperature range and you have released the accelerator pedal once.
If the engine speed limitation was activated by an engine control malfunction, the B or EPC indicator light also turns on. Make sure the engine speed does not go above the speed displayed, for example when downshifting. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
BESee)
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive:For additional information on refueling, refer to => page 101.
fw Please refuel
The first time the indicator light turns on and the message appears, there are approximately 1.8 gallons (7 liters) of fuel in the tank on front wheel drive vehicles, or approximately 2.2 gallons (8.5 liters) of fuel in the tank on all wheel drive vehicles.
wy Please refuel immediately
If the indicator light turns on and this message appears, the fuel tank is almost empty. Refuel the vehicle immediately.

AN} Tank system: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the fuel tank system. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
() Tips
For more information on fueling, see => page 322.
G) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
If the engine turned off becausethe fuel level was too low,then you may need to refuel with up to 4.0 gallons (15 liters) of fuel in order for the vehicle to detect the new fuel level. Otherwise, the engine may notrestart.
@® Washer fluid level
If the ES indicator light turns on, the washer fluid is almost out. Fill the washer fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlight washer system* when the ignition is switched off => page 337.
>! Windshield wipers
If the => indicator light turns on, then there is a windshield wiper malfunction. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
<3 Driver's door*
B&B Driver's door: malfunction! Shift to P before leaving vehicle. See owner's manual
There is a malfunction in the driver's door. Select the P selector lever position (automatic transmission) to secure the vehicle.
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.

238

-& Bulb failure indicator
If the 8; indicator light turns on, a bulb has failed. The message indicates the location of the bulb.
Replace the bulb immediately.
Vehicle lights: system fault!
There is a malfunction in the headlights or the light switch. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Light bulbs are pressurized and can explode when theyare replaced, which increases the risk of injury.
-- With HID headlights (xenon headlights), the high-voltage component must be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of fatal injury.
Dynamic headlight range control
By Headlight range control: malfunction! See owner's manual
There is a malfunction in the dynamic headlight range control system, which maycause glare for other drivers.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
BOP NEE Lahm
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive light
By Audi adaptive light: malfunction! See owner's manual
There is a malfunction in the adaptive lights. The headlights still function.
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.

Instrument cluster
Light/rain sensor
Applies to: vehicles with light/rain sensor
a Automatic headlights/wipers: malfunction! See owner's manual
The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning.
The low beams remain switched on at all times for safety reasons when the light switch is in the AUTOposition. You can continue to turn the lights on and off using the light switch. You can still control all wiper functions that are independent ofthe rain sensor.
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
MSE amarace|
Applies to: vehicles with suspension control
If the ¢ indicator light turns on, then there is a malfunction in the suspension control. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Rete ere
If the a or B indicator light blinks, a turn signal is turned on. If both indicator lights are blinking, the emergencyflashersare on.
If an indicator light blinks twice as fast as usual,
a turn signal bulb has failed. Carefully drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

8V2012721B)

Opening and closing
Opening and closing Central locking
You can lock and unlock the vehicle centrally. You have the following options:
-- Remote control key > page 32 -- Sensorsin the front door handles* > page 33 -- Lock cylinder on the driver's door > page 35,
or -- Interior central locking switch > page 34
Turn signals
The turn signals flash twice when you unlock the vehicle and flash once when you lock the vehicle.
If they do not flash, then the ignition maystill be switched on or one of the doors, the luggage compartment, or the hood maybe open, for example.
Automatic locking (Auto Lock)
The Auto Lock function locks all doors and the luggage compartment lid once the speed has exceeded approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
The vehicle will unlock again if the ignition key is removed, the opening function in the central locking switch is activated, or one of the door handles is operated.
In the event of a crash with airbag deployment, the doors will also automatically unlock to allow access to the vehicle.
Selective door unlocking
The doors and luggage compartmentlid will lock when theyclose. You can set in the Infotainment system whether only the driver's door or the entire vehicle should be unlocked when unlocking => page 34.
Unintentionally locking yourself out
Only lock your vehicle when all of the doors and the luggage compartment lid are closed and the remote control keyis not in the vehicle. This reduces the risk of locking yourself out accidentally.

The following conditions prevent you from locking your remote control key in the vehicle:
-- If the driver's door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked by pressing the & button on the re-
motecontrol key or by touching the locking sensor* ona door. -- If the most recently used convenience key*is inside the luggage compartment, the luggage compartment lid will automatically open again after closing it. -- If the last convenience key* that was used is detected inside the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be locked from the outside for a brief time > ©.
ZA WARNING
-- If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition off and take the vehicle key with you. This applies particularly when children remain in the vehicle. Otherwise the children could start the engine or operateelectrical equipment such as power windows.
--No one, especially children, should stay in the vehicle when it is locked from the out-
side, because the windowscan no longer be
opened from the inside > page 35. Locked doors makeit moredifficult for emergency workersto getinto the vehicle, which puts lives at risk.

@) Note

Applies to: vehicles with convenience key

-- If the convenience key* that was last used is

detected inside the passenger compart-

ment, then the vehicle cannot be locked

from the outside. The turn signals will flash

several times to indicate this. If you do not

open the vehicle within a short time tore-

movethe vehicle key, then the vehicle will

lock automatically. This prevents the vehicle

from being left unlocked for long periods of

time. The keywill then be locked inside the

vehicle.

-- If the convenience key* that was used last is

detected inside the luggage compartment,

it will not be possible to lock the luggage

compartment and the luggage compart-

ment lid will open. The turn signals will

Opening and closing

flash several times to indicate this. The doorswill lock. Always take the convenience key with you, or unauthorized people may be able to enter the vehicle.
@ Tips
-- Do not leave valuables unattended in the vehicle. A locked vehicle is not a safe!
--The LED in the driver's door rail blinks when you lock the vehicle. If the LED lights up for approximately 30 seconds after locking, there is a malfunction in the central locking system. Have the problem corrected by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Fig. 16 Your vehicle key set
Remoteor convenience key* The convenience key* is a remote control key with special functions > page 33 and > page 75. You can unlock/lock your vehicle with the remote control key. To fold the key out and back in place, press the release button fig. 16. Number of keys You can check the number of keys assigned to your vehicle in the Infotainment system. To do this, select the [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Service & checks > Vehicle information. This way, you can makesure that you have all the keys when purchasing a used vehicle. Replacing a key
If a key is lost, see an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility. Have this key deactivated. It is important to bring all keys with

B8V-0376

you. If a key is lost, you should report it to your insurance company.
Electronic immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized use of the vehicle. Under certain circumstances, the vehicle may notbe ableto start if there is a key from a different vehicle manufacturer on the key chain.
Data in the master key
During driving, data that is relevant for service and maintenance is continuously stored on your master key. Your Audi service advisor can read out this data and tell you about the work your vehicle needs. This applies also to vehicles with a convenience key*.
G) Note
Protect the remote control key against high temperatures, direct sunlight, and moisture.
@) For the sake of the environment
XE Do not dispose of remotecontrol keys in household trash. They contain materials that can be recycled. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi ServiceFacility for more information.
@ Tips
-- The operation of the remote control key can be temporarily disrupted by interference from transmitters near the vehicle working in the same frequency range (such as a cell phone or radio equipment). Always check if your vehicle is locked.
-- For an explanation on conformity with the FCC regulations in the United States and the Industry Canada regulations, see => page 392.

8V2012721B)

B8X-0506 B8U-0317

Opening and closing

LED and batteries in the remote control key

Remotecontrol key synchronization
The remote control key must be synchronized if the vehicle does not lock/unlock with the remote control.
> Press the (@ remote control key button. > Insert the key in the driver's door lock within 30
seconds > page 35.
> Press the @ buttonorfj button.

Fig. 17 Remotecontrol key (rear side): opening the cover
LED on the remotecontrol key
The LED in the remote control key informs you of the key operation.
> If you press a button briefly, the LED blinks once.
> If you press and hold a button (convenience opening/closing), the LED blinks several times.
> If the LED does notblink, the remote control
key battery is drained. The = indicator light and the message Please change key battery appear. Replace the battery in the remote control key.
Replacing the remotecontrol key battery
> Pry the cover @) off of the key @ using a coin
fig. 17.
> Insert the new battery with the "+" facing up. > Press the cover back onto the keyuntil it clicks
into place.
@) For the sake of the environment
Discharged batteries must be disposedof using methods that will not harm the environment. Do not dispose of them in household trash.
G) Tips
Replacement batteries for the remote control key must meet the same specifications as the original battery.

eT ele aire Rem cr ale mSMe)melt eke) |
Fig. 18 Remote control key or convenience key: button programming
> To unlock the vehicle, press the @ button @
> fig. 18. > To lock the vehicle, press the & button @ > /A\
once. > To unlock the luggage compartmentlid, press
the <¥ button @) briefly.
> To open* the luggage compartment lid, press and hold the < button @) for at least one second.
> To trigger the alarm, press the [PANIC] button @. The vehicle horn and emergencyflashers are activated.
> To turn off the alarm, press the LPANIC] button
@ again.
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open any of the doors, the hood, or the luggage compartment lid within 45 seconds, the vehicle automatically locks again. This feature prevents the vehicle from being accidentally left unlocked for a long period of time. This does not apply if you press and hold the <¥ button @) for at least one second.

You can select in the Infotainment system if the entire vehicle or only the driver's door should unlocking when unlocking the vehicle > page 34.
Z\ WARNING
Read and following all warnings > A\ in Description on page 30.
@) Tips -- Only use the remotecontrol key when you
are within viewofthe vehicle. -- The vehicle can only be locked when the se-
lector lever is in the P position. -- Only use the panic function in an emergen-
cy.
Unlocking and locking with the convenience key
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
The doors and luggage compartment lid can be unlocked andlocked without using the remote control key.
Fig. 19 Door handle: sensor for locking
Unlocking the vehicle > Grasp the driver's or front passenger's door
handle. The door unlocks automatically. > Pull on the door handle to open the door. Locking the vehicle > Place the selector lever in the "P" position; oth-
erwise, the vehicle cannot be locked. > To lock the vehicle, close the door and touch
the sensor on the door handle once fig. 19, > AX. Do not hold the door handle while doing this.

B8v-0010

Opening and closing
Deactivating the unlock function
You can deactivate the unlock function with the convenience key (keyless access) for one locking and unlocking cycle.
> Place the selector lever in the "P" position; oth-
erwise, the vehicle cannot be locked. > Close the door.
> Press the f lock button on the convenience key and touch the sensor on the door handle (driver's door) one time within five seconds of pressing the button > fig. 19. Do not grasp the door
handle while locking the vehicle, or else the vehicle will not lock. > To check if the function has been deactivated,
wait at least 10 seconds and pull the door handle again. The door should not open.
After that, it will only be possible to unlock the vehicle using the remotecontrol key or by mechanically unlocking the lock cylinder. Keyless access will be active again after the next time the vehicle is locked/unlocked.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle can only be done at the front doors. The convenience key must no be more than approximately 5 feet (1.5 meters) from the door handle. It makesno difference whether the conveniencekeyis in, for example, your jacket pocket, purse, or briefcase.
If you hold the door handle while locking, this can impair the locking function.
The door cannot be opened for a brief period directly after Locking it. This allows you the opportunity to check that the driver's door is locked.
The settings in the Infotainment system determine if the entire vehicle or only one of the doors is unlocked when unlocking the vehicle => page 34.
Z\ WARNING
Read and following all warnings > A\ in Description on page 30.
G@) Tips
If your vehicle is left standing for a long period of time, note the following:

8V2012721B)

Opening and closing
-- The proximity sensor switchesoff after a few days to save energy. You then have to pull once on the door handle to unlock the vehicle and a second time to open it.
--To preventthe vehicle battery from discharging, the energy management gradually switches off convenience functions that are not needed. You then may no longer be able to unlock your vehicle with the sensors.
Central locking switch

`\ WARNING
- Read and following all warnings > A\ in Description on page 30.
-- The central locking switch also works when the ignition is switched off and automatically locks the entire vehicle when the & button is pressed.
-- The central locking switch is inoperative when the vehicle is locked from the outside.
-- Locked doors makeit more difficult for emergency workers to getinto the vehicle, which putslives at risk. Do not leave anyone behind in the vehicle, especially children.

Fig. 20 Driver's door: central locking switch
> To lock the vehicle, press the & button > A\.
> To unlockthe vehicle, press the @ button
> fig. 20.
When locking the vehicle with the central locking switch, the following applies:
-- The doors and the luggage compartment lid cannot be opened from the outside for security reasons, such as to prevent unauthorized opening while stopped at a light.
-- The LED in the central locking switch turns on when all doors are closed and locked.
-- Front doors: you can open the doorsindividually from the inside by pulling the door handle.
-- Rear doors*: pull on the door handle once to unlock the door. Pull on the door handle again to open the door.
-- In the event of a crash with airbag deployment, the doors unlock automatically to allow access to the vehicle.

Your vehicle locks automatically when it reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). You can unlock the vehicle again using the @ button in the central locking switch.
Setting the central locking system
You can adjust the central locking system to your preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings > Central locking.
Door unlocking - You can decide if All doors or only the Driver's door should unlock. The luggage compartmentlid also unlocks when All is selected. If you select Driver's door in a vehicle with a convenience key*, only the door whose handle you pull will unlock.
If you select Driver's door, all the doors and luggage compartmentlid will unlock if you press the @ button on the remotecontrol key twice.
Long press to open windows- The convenience
opening/closing function can be switched on/off > page 39.
Fold mirrors - If you switch the function on, the
exterior mirrors will fold in automatically when the vehicle is locked.

Confirmation tone - When checked off Y, a tone
will sound when you lock the vehicle ).
Mechanically unlocking and locki mar doors If the central locking fails, you must unlock or lock the doors separately.

Opening and closing
> Removethe cap from the opening > fig. 22. > Insert the keybit in the slot inside and turn the
key all the wayto the right (right door) or left (left door*).
Z\ WARNING
Read and following all warnings > A\ in Description on page 30.

B8V-0009

Cees CL ei

If the anti-theft alarm system detects a vehicle break-in, audio and visual warning signals are triggered. The anti-theft alarm system is switched on or off when locking or unlocking your vehicle. If the alarm is triggered, it will shut off auto-
matically after a certain amount of time.

Switching the alarm off manually

=o0SF&Osa

> To switch the alarm off, press the G button on
the remote control key or switch the ignition

on.

Break-in security feature
The alarm will sound if there is a break-in at the doors, hood, and/or luggage compartment lid.

Fig. 22 Front side of the door: emergency release
Unlocking and locking the driver's door
> To unlock the driver's door, turn the key to the
unlock position @) > fig. 21.
> To lock the driver's door, put the selector lever
in the P position and turn the key once to the
lock position > A\.
The settings in the Infotainment system determine if the entire vehicle or only one of the doors is unlocked when unlocking the vehicle > page 34.
Locking the front passenger's door/rear doors*
The mechanical lock is located on the edge of the front passenger's door and the rear doors". It is only visible when the door is open.

8V2012721B)

)_ This function is not available in all countries.
35

Opening and closing
Luggage compartment lid
Opening and closing the luggage compartment lid
Fig. 24 Driver's door: opening the luggage compartment lid
Opening the luggage compartmentlid
> Press and hold the < button on the remote control key for at least one second, or
> Movethe selector lever to the "P" position and pull the <2s switch* in the driver's door > fig. 24, or
>» Press the handle in the luggage compartment lid > fig. 23.
Closing the luggage compartmentlid > Use the inside grip to pull the luggage com-
partmentlid down and allowit to close using a
gentle push > /\.
Z\ WARNING
-- After closing the luggage compartment lid, makesurethat it is latched. Otherwise the luggage compartmentlid could open suddenly when driving, which increases the risk of an accident.
36

Bav--0014

-- Never drive with the luggage compartment lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases can enter the vehicle interior and create the risk of asphyxiation.
-- Never leave your vehicle unattended when the luggage compartmentlid is open. A child could climb into the vehicle through the luggage compartment. If the luggage
compartment lid was then closed, the child
would be trapped in the vehicle and unable to escape. To reduce the risk of injury, do not allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Always keep the luggage compartment lid and the doors closed when the vehicleis notin use. -- Always makesure no one is in the luggage compartment lid's range of motion when it is closing, especially near the hinges. Fingers or hands could be pinched.
@) Tips
-- When the vehicleis locked, the luggage compartment lid can be unlocked separately by pressing the << button on the remote control key. The luggage compartmentlid locks automatically when it is closed again.
-- In case of an emergencyor a faulty handle, the luggage compartmentlid can be opened manually from the inside > page 37.

Opening and closing

Mechanically unlocking the luggage (oYnny oe Tataat tae eMac m alias
Applies to: vehicles with emergencyrelease from inside
The luggage compartment lid can be released from the inside in an emergency.
+oog>&oOO

> Removethe screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit > page 368. Use the flat side of the reversible screwdriver blade.
» Use the screwdriver to pry the cover off 3) > fig. 26.
> Press the lever with the keyin the direction of the arrow (4) to release the luggage compartment lid.
Mechanically unlocking the luggage compartment lid from the outside
Applies to: vehicles with emergencyrelease from outside

Applies to: version 1 Fig. 25 Section of the luggage compartment: accessto the
emergencyrelease

8V2012721B) B8V-0319

Applies to: version 2 Fig. 26 Section of the luggage compartment: access to the emergencyrelease
Applies to: vehicles with emergency release from the outside: Note the information in > page 37, Mechanically unlocking the luggage compartment lid from the outside.
Applies to: version 1
> Fold the backrest on the rear bench seatforward > page 66.
> Pry off the cover using the key bit on the opened vehicle key (@) © fig. 25.
> Press the lever with the key in the direction of the arrow @) to release the luggage compartment lid.
Applies to: version 2
> Fold the backrest on the rear bench seatforward > page 66.

Fig. 27 Luggage compartmentlid: emergencyrelease lock cylinder
> Insert the key into the lock cylinder near the handle.
> Turn the key counterclockwise.

Opening and closing
Child safety lock
Applies to: vehicles with mechanical child safety locks
The child safety lock prevents the rear doors from being openedfrom the inside and the rear powerwindowsfrom being operated.

B8W-0085

B8U-0320

There is a malfunction in the child safety lock.
Press the button again.
If the message stays on, drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
ZA WARNING
-- If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition off and take the vehicle key with you. This applies particularly when children remain in the vehicle. Otherwise children could start the engine or operate electrical equipment (such as power windows), which increases the risk of an accident.
--A malfunction in the child safety lock could allow the rear doors to be opened from the inside, which increases the risk of an accident.
Power windows

Fig. 29 Rear door: manual child safety lock
> To activate or deactivate the child safety lock for the power windowswitches in the rear
doors,press the 6&3 switch in the driver's door
> fig. 28. The indicator light in the button turns on/blinks. > To activate or deactivate the manual child safety lock for the rear door handle, open the rear door and turn the key switch either in the direction of the arrow (to activate) or opposite the direction of the arrow (to deactivate) using with the vehicle key > fig. 29. This will disable the function of the rear door handle. > Makesure the child safety lock is working by checking the function on the rear power window switch and door handle.
Message in the instrument cluster display
Childproof catch: malfunction! Please contact Service

The driver can control all power windows.
rq2g=aae]y
Fig. 30 Driver's door: power windowcontrols
All power window switches are equipped with a two-stage function: Opening and closing the windows > To open or close the window completely, press
the switch down or pull the switch up briefly to the second level. The operation will stop if the switch is pressed or pulled again. > To select a position in between opened and closed, pressor pull the switch tothe first level until the desired windowposition is reached. >

338

Power window switches
@ Left front @ Right front @® Left rear* @ Right rear*
© Central switch* for opening or closing all side windowsat the same time
Z\ WARNING
-- If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition off and take the vehicle key with you. This applies particularly when children remain in the vehicle. Otherwise the children could start the engine or operate electrical equipment such as power windows.
-- Pay careful attention when closing the windows. Pinching could causeserious injuries.
-- When locking the vehicle from outside, the vehicle must be unoccupied since the windowscan no longer be opened in an emergency.
@) Tips
After turning the ignition off you can still open and close the windowsfor approximately 10 seconds. The power windowsdo not switch off until the driver's door or front passenger's door has been opened.
Convenience opening and closing
Applies to: vehicles with convenience opening/closing
All of the windows and the panoramicglass roof* can be opened or closed at the same time.
For power top convenience opening and closing,
refer to the information in > page 42.
Convenience opening feature
> Press and hold the &@ button on the remote control key until all windows and the panoramic glass roof* have reached the desired position. Or
> Hold the keyin the driver's door lock until all windowsand the panoramic glass roof* have reached the desired position.

Opening and closing
Convenienceclosing feature
> Press the f button on the remotecontrol key until all windows and the panoramic glass roof*
are closed > A\. Or
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Touch the sensor on one ofthe front door handles and continue touching it until all of the windowsand the panoramic glass roof* are closed. Do not place your hand in the door handle when doing this.
> Hold the keyin the driver's door lock in the lock position until all windows and the panoramic glass roof* are closed > A\.
Setting convenience opening in the Infotainment system
The function can be switched on/off in the Infotainment system > page 34.
Z\ WARNING
-- Never close the windowsor panoramic glass roof* carelessly or in an uncontrolled manner, because this increases the risk of injury.
-- For security reasons, the windowsand the panoramic glass roof* can only be opened
and closed with the remote control key at a maximum distance of approximately 6.5 feet (2 m) away from the vehicle. Always pay attention when using the & button to close the windowsand the panoramic glass roof* so that no one is pinched. The closing process will stop immediately when the f button is released.
Correcting power window malfunctions
You can reactivate the one-touch up/downfunction if it malfunctions.
> Pull the power window switch until the window is completely raised.
> Release the switch and pull it up again for at least one second.

8V2012721B)

Opening and closing
Panoramic glass roof
Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass roof
Fig. 31 Section of headliner: panoramicglass roof button
The button has twostages. In the second stage, the roof automatically runs to the end position (open/closed) when the button is operated briefly. The operation will stop if the button is pressed/pulled again.
@ Tilting/sliding
> To tilt the sunroof completely, press the switch briefly to the second level.
> To close the roof completely, pull the button down briefly to the second level or slide the button forward briefly to the second level
>A.
> To select an intermediate position, press/pull the switch in the first level until the desired position is reached.
Opening/closing
> To open the sunroof completely, slide the button back to just before the second Level.
> To close the roof completely, push the button forward briefly to the second level or pull the button down briefly to the second level > A\.
> To select an intermediate position, press/pull the switch forward/back in the first level until the desired position is reached.
Sunshade The sunshade can be opened and closed manually, depending on the position of the panoramic glass roof. The sunshade can be opened partially.

B8x-0200

WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury, always pay attention when closing the panoramic glass roof. Always switch the ignition off when leaving the vehicle and always take the vehicle key with you.
@) Note
Alwaysclose the panoramic glass roof when leaving your vehicle. Rain can cause damage to the interior equipment of your vehicle, particularly the electronic equipment.
@ Tips
-- For information about convenience opening/closing, see > page 39.
-- You can still operate the panoramic glass roof for about 10 minutes after the ignition is switched off. The switch is deactivated once the driver's or front passenger's door is opened.
-- The panoramic glass roof can only be opened when the temperature is warmer than -4 °F (-20 °C).
ECCae Cem sal eal]
Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass roof
If the panoramic glass roof detects resistance or an object in its path while closing, the roof will open again automatically. If the sunrooffails to close after removing the object and after trying to close a second time, you can perform an emergencyclosing.
> Within five seconds after the sunroof opens automatically, pull the switch until the roof closes.
If you release the switch early, the panoramic glass roof will open again.

Power top
Automatic power top
General information
Applies to: vehicles with power top
The power top opens and closes automatically. When open, the power top is stored completely
in the power top compartment. The power top can be opened or closed at speeds up to 30 mph
(50 km/h). The power top will not open when the temperature is below -5 °F (-15 °C).
Under normal conditions, the power top is windand waterproof. In rare cases, small droplets of water may form under extreme weather conditions such as torrential or prolonged rain. That is normal and no causefor concern.
Follow the care instructions to keep the power top free of leaks and to maintain its appearance => page 362, Care and cleaning. Also observe the following:
-- Open and stow the power top only when it is clean and dry. Stowing the power top when it is damp can create imprintsin it, and if it is left that way for long periods of time, mildew and other damage can form. To prevent scratching or damaging the power top, do not use any sharp-edged objects to remove ice and snow. The rear window maybe cleared ofice with a standardice scraper.
-- Do not leave the power top open for several weeksor the creasesin it may become discolored.
-- Do not open the power top when the temperature is below 32 °F (0 °C). The fabric in the power top loses elasticity in sub-zero tempera-
tures.

Power top
Opening and closing the power top
Applies to: vehicles with power top

B8V-0595

Fig. 32 Center console: power top switch

Requirement: the power top storage compart-
ment must be lowered > page 43 and the luggage compartmentlid must be closed.
> Switch the ignition on. > To open or close the power top, pull or press
and hold the switch @ until it is completely
opened or closed.

The status of the power top is shown in the in-
strument cluster display when operating the power top switch.

You can close the power top when the wind deflector is installed > page 44.

A message will appear in the instrument cluster if the power top cannot be opened or closed => page 43.

ZXWARNING

-- When operating the power top, make sure

the function is not affected by wind or other

factors and that it does not interfere with

other drivers.

-- Never drive when the power top is not

locked correctly. The wind from driving

could cause the power top to open. This can

result in injuries and damage tothe vehicle.

-- Make sure no one will be injured by the pow-

er top supports and other moving compo-

nents when opening and closing the top.

-- The headroom in the rear is reduced when

opening and closing the power top. Make

8V2012721B)

B8V-0009

Power top
sure the rear passengers keep enough distance from the power top to reduce the risk of injury. -- Visibility to the rear is limited when operating the power top. Avoid operating the top while driving in reverse.
@) Note
-- To prevent damage to the power top:
-- do notstore any objects in the power top storage compartment.
-- make sure there is enough space above the vehicle when opening or closing the
power top. --To reduce the risk of damage, make sure
there are no sensitive objects in the power
top storage compartment's range of motion.
@ Tips
-- To prevent the vehicle battery from draining unnecessarily, do not open or close the power top repeatedly when the engine is switched off.
-- A message will appear in the instrument cluster if there is a malfunction in the power top > page 43.
-- The power top can also be operated manually temporarily if there is a malfunction => page 44, Power top emergency operation. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility should diagnose and correct the cause of the malfunction as soon as possible.
-- If the vehicle is parked with the power top open, the vehicle interior is not protected from damaging weather or unauthorized access. Lock any items you leave behind in the luggage compartment. Close the power top before leaving the vehicle.
-- The side windowsautomatically lower slightly when opening or closing the power top.

Power top convenience opening and closing
Applies to: vehicles with power top
@)
%
if
Fig. 33 Turning the key to open and close
Convenience opening with the driver door lock
> Turn the key oncein the driver door lock to the opening position @).
> Turn the key to the opening position again within two seconds and hold it there until the power top opens completely.
Convenience closing with the driver door lock
> Turn the key once in the driver door lock to the
closing position @).
> Turn the key to the closing position again within two seconds and hold it there until the power top closes completely.
Releasing the key stops the opening or closing process immediately.
ZA\ WARNING
Read and follow the important safety precautions > A\ in Opening and closing the power top on page 41.

Power top storage compartment
Applies to: vehicles with power top

Power top
the power top is open. Becauseofthis, the cargo area in the luggage compartment is smaller when the power top is open than when it is closed.

Fig. 34 Luggage compartment: power top storage compartment lowered
Fig. 35 Luggage compartment: power top storage compartment raised
The power top storage compartment must be
lowered to open the power top. To avoid damage, make sure that are no sensitive objects in the
storage compartment's range of motion.
Raising the power top storage compartment > Press the trim on the handle in the direction of
the arrowtoraise the power top storage compartment © fig. 34. Lowering the power top storage compartment > Press the trim on the handle in the direction of the arrow to lower the power top storage compartment© fig. 35.
The power top storage compartment can be raised when the power topis closed. This pro-
vides more cargo space in the luggage compart-
ment.
The open power top is stored and protected in
the power top storage compartment. The power
top storage compartment cannotbe raised when

Applies to: vehicles with power top
B Powertop: malfunction! You can continue driving with limited functionality. See owner's manual
This message appearsif there is a malfunction in the system. Try to open/close the power top again. If the message still appears, then have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility correct the malfunction. Do notdrive more than 30 mph (50 km/h)until it is corrected.
Power top: malfunction! Unable to operate
This message appears when there is a malfunction. The power top can be operated manually => page 44.
Power top: operation currently not possible
If the power top is operated continually for a long period of time, the overload protection activates for approximately 15 to 30 minutes. You can open or close the power top again after that.
Z\ WARNING
Never drive when the power top is not locked correctly. The wind from driving could cause the power top to open. This can result in injuries and damage tothe vehicle.

8V2012721B)

Power top

Wind deflector
Applies to: vehicles with wind deflector
°oCg>&oQO

B8V-0281

Fig. 37 Rear of the vehicle: positioning the wind deflector

The wind deflector reduces air movement in the passenger compartment in order to makedriving more comfortable.
The wind deflector is located in the luggage compartment in a storage bag*.
Inserting and positioning the wind deflector
> Open the rear window on the passenger's side. > Removethe wind deflector from the luggage
compartment and fold it apart once. The wind deflector is installed in the correct position when the long side is toward the front and the wind deflector frame is at the top. > Insert both pins on the wind deflector @ into the mountsin the side trim panel on the driver's side. > Fold the handle (2) upwardand lift the center of
the wind deflector slightly @).
> Now guide the wind deflector into the mounts on the passenger's side (@) and presslightly in the middle of the wind deflector ©) until the handle locks in place.
> Raise the wind deflector completely.

Removing the wind deflector
> Fold the handle (2) upward and fold the wind deflector frame back.
> Fold the handle @) upwardand lift the center of
the wind deflector slightly @).
> Removethe wind deflector from the mountsin the side trim on the passenger's side.
> Pull the wind deflector out of the mounts on the driver side and lift it out.
> Fold the wind deflector together and storeit securely.
Z\ WARNING
-- Do not use the wind deflector to secure cargo.
-- Be careful when installing so you do not pinch your fingers.
-- Pay attention to the traffic when installing the wind deflector. Install the wind deflector from the side of the vehicle that is away from traffic.
C) Note
Do not lean against the vehicle when installing the wind deflector. Hard objects and decorations on clothing such as belt buckles can scratch the paint.
G@) Tips
-- The wind deflector works best when all of the windowsare rolled up while driving.
-- Only store the wind deflector in the storage bag* when it is dry.
Power top emergency operation
General information
Applies to: vehicles with power top
The powertop can be closed manuallyif thereis a malfunction.
> Set the parking brake. > Open all windows. > Switch the ignition off. > To reduce the pressure in the power top hy-
draulics, pull the switch to open the power top >

and hold for approximately 10 to 15 seconds @ © page 41, fig. 32.
Only close the power top manually in an emer-
gency. Have a second person assist. Drive imme-
diately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.

Power top

-- Thereis a risk of pinching the hands or other people during all of the power top emergen-
cy operation steps.
-- Makesureall windowsare lowered during emergency operation.
-- Do not reach into the power top supports or other moving components.
-- Never drive when the power top is not locked correctly. The wind from driving could cause the power top to open. This can result in injuries and damage to the vehicle.
The power top storage compartmentlid is not latched after the emergency operation is complete. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Step 1: Release the power top storage compartment lid
Applies to: vehicles with power top

Fig. 39 Opening the side covers
> Open the luggage compartment lid.
> Fold the rear seat backrests forward
=> page 66. > Removethe wheel wrench from the vehicle tool
kit. > Close the luggage compartmentlid. > Pull the release loop downfrom the rear tore-
lease the power top storage compartment lid > fig. 38. > Slide the covers on both sides of the vehicle in the direction of the arrow until they lock in place > fig. 39.

8V2012721B) B8Vv-0283

Fig. 38 Rear seats folded forward: release loop for the powertop storage compartmentlid
45

Power top

Step 2: Lift the power top storage

Step 3: Open the locking pin

compartment lid out

Applies to: vehicles with power top

aSatoN®sSOn

B8V-0285

Fig. 40 Lifting the power top storage compartmentlid out and setting up the supports
Fig. 41 Power top storage compartment lid: supports set
up
> Raise the power top storage compartmentlid out of the power top compartment and hold it
in place @ & A\ in General information on
page 45. > Secure the power top storage compartment lid
by pressing on the side supports on both
sides 2).
Z\ WARNING
-- Always makesure that the side supports on the open power top storage compartment lid are in place, even when the power top is not fully open or closed. Otherwise, the power top storage compartmentlid could
fall, which increasesthe risk of an accident.
-- Avoid touching the support rods and other
moving parts when opening the power top
storage compartment lid. If do you make contact, your hands could be pinched.
46

B8V-0286

y=,"

Fig. 42 Rear ofthe vehicle: opening the locking pin

> Removethe cap on the trip and insert the wheel wrench into the opening.
> Turn the wheel wrench clockwise until it stops to open the locking pin.
> Removethe wheel wrench.

Step 4: Close the power top
Applies to: vehicles with power top
>ar©S2oy

Fig. 44 Rear of the vehicle: lowering the edge of the power top
> Position yourself near the vehicle. > Hold the power top byits front edge and pull it
out completely = fig. 43 > A\ in Generalinformation on page 45.

B8V-0289

Power top

> Lift the rear edge of the power top. > Release the power top storage compartment lid
by pulling on the side supports to release them. > Close the power top storage compartment
lid @ and allow the rear edge of the power top
to lower(2).
Step 5: Lock the power top
Applies to: vehicles with power top
raQ3uooaOOw

-- When pressing the power top downonto the
windshield frame, make sure that you do not
pinch yourself or anyone else.
@Tips
Makesure the locking mechanisms are locked securely.

----W Vy
Fig. 46 Inside of the power top: locking the power top
» Press the power top onto the windshield frame > fig. 45 > A\ in General information on page 45.
> Insert the wheel wrench into the opening and turn it counterclockwiseuntil it stops > fig. 46.
> Removethe wheel wrench and seal the opening with the cap.
> Put the wheel wrench back into the vehicle tool kit.
ZXWARNING
-- When positioning the power top, avoid contact with the supports or other moving parts. Otherwise you could pinch your hands.
47

8V2012721B)

Lights and Vision

Lights and Vision Exterior lighting
Sistem cL Lats eal

B8V-0430

Audi adaptivelight
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptivelight
Adaptive light provides better visibility when it is dark by adapting the lights to the road conditions based on speed, such as on expressways, rural roads, at intersections, and in curves. The adaptive lights only function when the light switch is in the AUTO* position and the all-weather lights are switched off.

Fig. 47 Instrumentpanel: light switch with buttons
Light switch ©
Turn the light switch to the corresponding position when the ignition is switched on. 2and the selected position turn on (except position 0).
O - The daytime running lights automatically turn on. In vehicles for certain markets, you can switch the automatic daytime running lights on and off in the Infotainment system.
AUTO*- The headlights automatically adapt to the surrounding brightness.
300 - Parking lights
2D - Low beam headlights
Buttons
When you turn the light switch to the AUTO* or low beam headlight ZO position, you can activate the following:
220 - All-weather lights. The front lights are adjusted automatically so that there is less glare for the driver from his or her own lights, for example when roads are wet.
- Rear fog light(s)
Automatic headlight range control
Applies to: vehicles with headlight range control
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic headlight range control system that reduces glare for oncoming traffic if the vehicle load changes. The headlight range adjusts automatically.

AN WARNING
-- Automatic headlights* are only intended to assist the driver. They do notrelieve the driver of responsibility to check the headlights and to turn them on manually based on the currentlight and visibility conditions. For example, fog cannot be detected by the light sensors. So always switch on the low
beams ZO under these weather conditions
and when driving in the dark. --To preventglare for traffic behind your vehi-
cle, the rear fog lights should only be turned on in accordance withtraffic regulations.
0) Tips
-- Follow the regulations applicable to the country where you are operating the vehicle when stopping the vehicle and when using the lighting systems.
-- If the vehicle battery has been discharging for a while, the parking light may switch off automatically. Avoid using the parking lights for several hours.
-- The light sensor for the automatic headlights* is in the rearview mirror mount. Do not place anystickers in this area on the windshield.
-- Only the front headlights turn on when the daytime running lights are switched on*. In
vehicles in certain markets, the tail lights will also turn on.
--In cool or damp weather,the inside of the headlights, turn signals, and tail lights can fog over due to the temperaturedifference between the inside and outside. They will clear shortly after switching them on. This doesnotaffect the service life of the light-
ing.

Turn signal and high beam lever
Fig. 48 Turn signal and high beam lever
The lever operates the turn signals, the high beams and the headlight flasher.
Turn signals 15>
The turn signals activate when you move the lever into a turn signal position when the ignition is switched on. The respective a or B indicator light flashes.
@- Right turn signal @- Left turn signal
The turn signal blinks three times if you tap the lever (convenience turn signal). High beams ZO and headlight flasher Movethe lever to the corresponding position: @®)- High beams on (vehicles with High beam assistant* > page 49) @ - High beams off or headlight flasher The =o} indicator light in the instrument cluster
turns on.
ZA WARNING
High beams can cause glare for other drivers, which increasesthe risk of an accident. For this reason, only use the high beams or the headlight flasher when theywill not create glare for other drivers.

Lights and Vision
thm eee
Applies to: vehicles with high beam assistant
The high beam assistant automatically turns the high beams on or off depending on the surrounding conditions.
A camera on the rearview mirror mount can detect light sources from other road users. The high beams switch on or off automatically depending on the position of vehicles driving ahead and oncoming vehicles, the vehicle speed as well as other environmental factors and traffic conditions.
Activating high beam assistant
Requirement: the light switch must be set to AU-
TO, the low beams mustbe switched on and the
high beam assistant must be switched on in the Infotainment system = page 50.
> To activate the high beam assistant, press the
lever forward @) © page 49, fig. 48. The BY in-
dicator light in the instrument cluster display appears and the high beams are switched on or off automatically. The Ed indicator light turns on if the high beams were switched on.
Switching the high beams on or off manually
If the high beams did not switch on or off automatically as expected, you may switch them on or off manually instead:
> To switch the high beams on manually, push
the lever forward @). The Egg indicator light
turns on. To switch the high beams off again,
pull the lever back @).
> To switch the high beams off manually, pull the
lever back @). The high beam assistant is deac-
tivated.
Operating the headlight flasher
> To operate the headlight flasher when the high beam assistant is activated and high beams are
switchedoff, pull the lever back (). The high
beam assistant remains active.
Messagesin the instrumentcluster display
High beam assistant: malfunction! See owner's manual

8V2012721B)

Lights and Vision
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired. You can still switch the high beams on or off manually.
Headlight assistant: currently unavailable. No camera view
Headlight assistant: currently unavailable. Camera view restricted due to surroundings. See owner's manual
The camera viewis blocked, for example by a sticker or debris. Please clean the windshield.
The sensor is located in the interior rearview mirror mount. Do notplace any stickers in this area on the windshield.
Z\ WARNING
High beam assistant is only intended to assist the driver. The driver is still responsible for controlling the headlights and may need to switch them on and off manually depending on light and visibility conditions. It may be necessary to operate them manually in situations such as:
-- In adverse weather conditions such as fog,
heavy rain, blowing snowor spraying water. -- On roads where oncoming traffic may be
partially obscured, such as expressways. -- If there are road users with poor lighting,
such as bicyclists. --In tight curves and on steep hills. --In poorlylit areas. -- With strong reflectors, such as signs. -- If the area of the windshield near the sensor
is fogged over, dirty, icy or covered with a sticker.
NITIESTare datacom ce LULA
The functions are adjusted in the Infotainment
system.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings > Exterior lighting.

Automatic headlights* You can adjust the following settings in the Automatic headlights menu: Activation time® - You can adjust if the headlights switch on Early, Medium or Late according to the sensitivity of the light sensor. Headlight assistant* - You can switch the high
beam assistant* on and off.
Entry/exit lighting* You can switch the entry/exit lighting* on and off. When it is dark,it illuminates the area around the vehicle when unlocking the vehicle and after switching off the ignition and opening the driver's door. The entry/exit lighting only works when it is dark and the light switch is in the AUTO*position.
Daytime runninglights)
The daytime running lights can be turned on and
off. When daytime running lights are turned on,
the lights will stay on continuously whenever the ignition is switched on.
Emergency flashers
Fig. 49 Instrument panel: emergency flasher button
The emergency flashers makes other drivers aware of your vehicle in dangerous situations. > Press the A button to switch the emergency
flashers on or off. You can indicate a lane change or a turn when the emergencyflashers are switched on by using the >

B8V-0210

D_ This function is not available in all countries.
sO

turn signal lever. The emergency flashers stop
temporarily.
The emergencyflashers also work when the ignition is turnedoff.
Interior lighting
Front interior lighting
3>&oxgO

Lights and Vision Rear interior lighting
Appliesto: vehicles with rear reading lights
Fig. 52 Headliner: rear reading lights (example)
> To turn a reading light on or off, press the 7% or "S* button.

Applies to: vehicles with touch-sensitive reading lights
Fig. 51 Headliner: frontinteriorlights
Press the corresponding button in the headliner to activate the following:
ae" =nterior lighting on/off
4ionog-.Disoocornctornoltlaecdt asuwtiotmcahtiocn./aolflfy.. The interior light-
"* - Reading lights on/off
Applies to: vehicles with touch-sensitive reading lights
> To turn a reading light on or off, touch the sur-
face @ briefly > fig. 51.
> To activate the manual dimming function, touch the surface @ when the light is switched off and keep touching it until the desired brightnessis reached.

B8V-0617

Mc tacelm ce Label}
Appliesto: vehicles withinterior lighting
The Interior lighting can be adjustedin the Infotainment system.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings > Interior lighting.
You maybe able to adjust the brightness of the individual zones, depending on vehicle equip-
ment.
>» Press the right control button and select one of the zonesthat is shown.
The interior lighting turns on when you switch the headlights on while the ignition is on.
Mera rae ieyatla}
You can adjust the background brightness of the instruments and displayillumination.
2yg>iaots

Fig. 53 Instrumentillumination

8V2012721B)

Lights and Vision
> Press the knob to release it. > Turn the knob toward "-" or "+" to reduceor in-
crease the brightness. > Press the knob again to return it to its original
position.
G)Tips
Depending on vehicle equipment,the instrument illumination (needles and gauges) may turn on when the lights are off and the ignition is switched on. The illumination for the gauges reduces automatically and eventually turns off as brightness outside increases. This function reminds the driver to turn the low beams on at the appropriate time.
Vision
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
©
Fig. 54 Driver's door: knob for the exterior mirrors (example)
Turn the knob to the desired position: 0 - All adjustment functions are deactivated. C)/ © - Adjusts the left/right exterior mirror. Movethe knob in the desired direction. GA - Heats* the mirror glass depending on the outside temperature. ©) - Folds the exterior mirrors*. To fold the mirrors out, turn the knob to one of the other positions. In the Infotainment system, you can select if the mirrors fold in automatically when you lock the vehicle > page 34.

RAZ-0150

Front passenger's exterior mirror tilt function*
To help you see the curb when backing into a parking space, the surface of the mirror tilts slightly. For this to happen, the knob mustbe in the position for the front passenger's exterior mirror.
You can adjustthe tilted mirror surface by turning the knob in the desired direction. When you moveout ofreverse and into another gear, the new mirror position is stored and assigned to the key you are using.
The mirror goes back into its original position once you drive forward faster than 9 mph (15 km/h) or turn the ignition off.
ZA\ WARNING
Curved mirror surfaces (for example convex) enlarge the field of vision. However, they makeobjects in the mirror appear smaller and farther away. You may estimate incorrectly when you usethese mirrors to gauge your distance from the vehicles behind you when changing lanes, which increases the risk of an accident.
@) Note
-- Applies to: vehicles with power folding exterior mirrors: If the mirror housing was moved by outside forces (such as an impact when maneuvering), you must use the power folding function to fold the mirror all the wayout. The mirrors will make a loud noise when theylatch into place. The mirror housing must not be moved back into place by hand because this could impair the function of the mirror mechanism.
-- Applies to: vehicles without power folding exterior mirrors: If the mirror housing was moved by outside forces (such as an impact when maneuvering), you must moveit back in place by hand.
-- If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash, you mustfold the exterior mirrors in to reducethe risk of damage to the mirrors. Never fold power folding exterior mirrors* >

by hand. Only fold them in and out using the power controls.
@ Tips
If the power adjustmentfails, both mirrors can be adjusted by hand by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface.
Dimming the mirrors
Your vehicle is equipped with a manual or automatic* dimming rearview mirror.
Manual dimming rearview mirror
> Pull the lever on the bottom of the mirror back.
Automatic dimming rearview mirror*
> The interior and exterior mirrors dim automatically when light shines on them, for example from headlights on a vehicle behind you.
ZA WARNING
Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming rearview mirror
Electrolyte fluid can leak out from broken mirror glass. This liquid can irritate the skin, eyes and respiratory system. If there is contact with the fluid, flush immediately with plenty of water. Consult a physician if necessary. -- Repeated or long-term exposureto electro-
lyte fluid can lead toirritation of the airways, especially in people with asthma or other respiratory conditions. Take deep breaths immediately after leaving the vehicle or, if this is not possible, open all of the doors and windowsas wide as possible. -- If electrolyte fluid enters the eyes, flush them thoroughly with a large amount of clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical attention. -- If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with
the skin, flush the affected area with clean
water for at least 15 minutes and then clean with soap and water and seek medical attention. Clean affected clothing and shoes thoroughly before wearing again. -- If the fluid was swallowed and the person is conscious, flush the mouth with water for at

Lights and Vision
least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomiting unless this is recommended by medical professionals. Seek medical attention immediately.
@) Note
Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming rearview mirror
Electrolyte fluid can leak out from broken mirror glass. This liquid damages plastic surfaces. Clean this liquid as quickly as possible with a wet sponge.
@® Tips Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming rearview mirror -- If the light reaching the rearview mirror is obstructed, the automatic dimming mirror will not function correctly, -- The automatic dimming mirrors do not dim when the interior lighting is turned on or the reverse gear is selected.
Fig. 55 Left side: sun visor (example)
The sun visors can be moved out of their brackets and turned toward the doors (@). The sunshade can also be moved back and forth lengthwise in this position*. The mirror light switches on when the cover over the vanity mirror* @) opens.

8V2012721B)
B8X-0209

Lights and Vision
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers on
Fig. 57 Rear window wiper* operation
Move the windshield wiper lever S7 to the corresponding position: © - Windshield wipersoff @- Interval mode. To increase/decrease the wiper intervals, move the switch (A) to the left/right.
In vehicles with a rain sensor, the wipers turn on in the rain once the vehicle speed exceeds ap-
proximately 2 mph (4 km/h). The higher the sensitivity of the rain sensor that is set (switch @) to the right), the earlier the windshield wipers react to moisture on the windshield. You can deactivate the rain sensor mode in the Infotainment
system, which switches the intermittent mode on. To do this, select: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Rain
sensor.
@- Slowwiping @- Fast wiping
@- Single wipe. If you hold the lever in this position longer, the wipers switch from slow wiping to fast wiping.

B8v-0601

B8V-0600

©®- Clean the windshield . To eliminate water droplets, the windshield wipers perform one afterwipe after several seconds while driving in temperatures above 39 °F (4 °C). You can switch this function off by moving the lever to position © within 10 seconds ofthe afterwipe. The afterwipe function is reactivated the next time you switch the ignition on.
Clean the headlights. The headlight washer system operates only when the low beam headlights are switched on. If you movethe lever in position
©, the headlights will be cleaned in fixed inter-
vals.
Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper
©- Wipe the rear window &. The rear wiper
moves about every 6 seconds.
The rear wiper automatically switches on when the reverse gear is selected and the front windshield wipers are on and running.
@- Clean the rear window @. The number of wipes depends on howlong the lever is held in
position @).
ZX WARNING
-- The rain sensor* is only intended toassist the driver. The driver maystill be responsible for manually switching the wipers on based on visibility conditions.
-- The windshield mustnot be treated with water-repelling windshield coating agents. Unfavorable conditions, such as wetness,
darkness, and when the sun is low, can
cause increased glare, which increases the risk of an accident. Wiper blade chatter is also possible. -- Properly functioning windshield wiper blades are required for a clear view and safe driving > page 55, Replacing the front wiper blades.
() Note
-- If thereis frost, make sure the windshield wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield. Switching on the windshield wipers
when the blades are frozen to the windshield can damage the wiper blades.

8V2012721B)

-- The windshield wiper system must be switched off (lever in position @)) before using a car wash. This prevents the wipers from switching on unintentionally and causing damage to the windshield wiper system.
G) Tips
-- The windshield wipers switch off when the ignition is switched off. You can activate the windshield wipersafter the ignition is switched on again by moving the windshield wiper lever to anyposition.
-- Worn or dirty windshield wiper blades result in streaking. This can affect the rain sensor function. Check your windshield wiper blades regularly.
-- The washer fluid nozzles in the windshield washer system are heated* at low temperatures when the ignition is on.
-- When stopping temporarily, such as at a traffic light, the speed of the windshield wipers automatically reduces by one level.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Clean the wiper blades when you see wiper streaks. Use a soft cloth and a glass cleaner.
Windshield wiper
> Place the windshield wiper arms in the service position > page 55.
> Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield.
Rear window wiper
Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper
> Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window.
ZA\ WARNING
Dirty windshield wiper blades can impair vision, which increasesthe risk of an accident.
@) Note
If you see streaks again after cleaning the wiper blades, the blades mustbe replaced => page 55.

Lights and Vision
Replacing the front wiper blades
oh
Fig. 58 Removing windshield wiper blades
Windshield wiper service position/blade replacement position > To bring the wipers into the service position,
turn the ignition off and move the windshield wiper lever into position @) for at least two seconds > page 54, fig. 56. > To bring the windshield wipers back to the normal position, switch the ignition on and hold the windshield wiper lever in position @) until the windshield wipers go back to the normal position, or drive faster than 8 mph (12 km/h).
Removing the wiper blade
> Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield.
> Press the locking knob (@) > fig. 58 on the wiper
blade. Hold the wiper blade firmly. > Removethe wiper blade in the direction of the
arrow.
Installing the wiper blade
> Insert the new wiper blade into the mount on the wiper arm @) until you hear it latch into place.
> Place the wiper arm back on the windshield. > Turn the service position off.
Z\ WARNING
For safety reasons, the windshield wiper blades should be replaced once or twice each year.
© Note -- Only fold the windshield wipers away when they are in the service position. Otherwise,
55

B8R-0379

BFV-0288

Lights and Vision
you risk damaging the paint on the hood or the windshield wiper motor. -- You should not drive your vehicle or press the windshield wiper lever when the wiper arms are folded away from the windshield. The windshield wipers would move back into their original position and could damage the hood and windshield.
G) Tips
-- You can also usethe service position, for example, if you want to protect the windshield from icing by using a cover.
-- You cannotactivate the service position when the hood is open.

> Fold the window wiper arm back onto the rear window.
Z\ WARNING
For safety reasons, the windshield wiper blades should be replaced once or twice each year.
Digital compass
Switching the compass on and off
Applies to: vehicles with digital compass

Replacing rear wiper blade
Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper =aQSs2&N
Fig. 59 Rear window wiper: removing the wiper blade
Removing the wiper blade > Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window.
> Hold the wiper blade below the center in the direction of the arrow and pull it out of the retainer. Hold the windshield wiper arm securely while doing this.
Installing the wiper blade > Press the wiper blade mount into the retainer.
Securely hold the wiper arm at the upper plastic end.

@
Fig. 60 Rearview mirror: digital compassis switched on
> To turn the compasson or off, press the button @ until the compass display in the mirror turns on or off.
The digital compass only works when the ignition is turned on. The directions are indicated with abbreviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W (west), NW (northwest).
G) Tips
To prevent inaccurate compass readings, do not bring any remote controls, electrical devices or metallic objects near the mirror.

Adjusting the magnetic zone
Appliesto: vehicles with digital compass

Lights and Vision

B42-0405

Fig. 61 Magnetic zone map
The magnetic zone mustbe adjusted correctly for the compassto read accurately.
> Press and hold the button @ > page 56, fig. 60 until the number of the magnetic zone appears in the interior rearview mirror.
> Press the button () repeatedly to select the correct magnetic zone. The selection mode turns off after a few seconds.

To reduce the risk to yourself and other driv-
ers, calibrate the compass in an area where thereis no traffic.

If the display is incorrect or inaccurate, the compass mustberecalibrated.
> Press and hold the button @untila "C" ap-
pearsin the interior rearview mirror. > Drive in a circle at about 6 mph (10 km/h) until
a direction is displayed in the interior rearview mirror.

8V2012721B)

Seats
Seats General information
\. WARNING
Refer to the chapter Driving Safely => page 260, Driving safety for important information, tips, suggestions and warnings that you should read and follow for your own safety and the safety of your passengers.
® Note
Applies to: vehicles with manually adjustable head restraints
To reduce the risk of damage, be very careful when adjusting the seat to make sure the head restraints do not hit the headliner or the panorama glass roof*.
Front seats
Manual seat adjustment
Applies to: vehicles with manual adjustable seats =oo2o2aODS
Fig. 62 Front seat: manual seat adjustment
The settings depend on the vehicle equipment. Adjusting the seat position > To adjust the seat forward or back, pull the lev-
er @ and slide the seat.
> To adjust the seat up or down, pull or press the
lever ©). Adjusting the backrests
> To adjust the backrest so thatit is higher or
lower, turn the handwheel (7).
58

Adjusting the upper thigh support > To increase or decrease the upper thigh sup-
port,lift the handle @). A spring moves the support forward.
Adjusting the angle of the seat surface > To adjust the angle of the seat surface, pull or
press thelever (3).
Adjusting the lumbar support > To adjust the lumbar support, press the button
@ atthe applicable location.
Adjusting the massage function > Switching the massage function on or off @).
A WARNING --To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust
the front seats when the vehicle is stationary. -- Exercise caution when adjusting the seat height. Adjusting the seat carelessly or without checking can pinch hands and fingers. -- The front seat backrests must notbe reclined too far back when driving, because this impairs the effectiveness of the safety belts and airbag system, which increases the risk of injury.
® Tips The massage function switches off automatically after approximately 10 minutes.
eyaeslar leieeidat lald
Applies to: vehicles with power adjustable seats
Fig. 63 Front seat: power seat adjustment
The settings depend on the vehicle equipment. >

8V2012721B) B8W-0269

Adjusting the backrests
> To adjust the backrest so thatit is higher or lower, press the button @ forwardor backward.
Adjusting the seat position
> To movethe seat forward or backward, press
the button @) forward or backward.
> To move the seat upward or downward, press the button @) upward or downward.
Adjusting the lumbar support
> To adjust the lumbar support, press the button @) atthe applicable location.
Adjusting the upper thigh support
> To can increase or decrease the upper thigh support,lift the handle @). A spring moves the support forward.
Adjusting the massage function
> Switching the massage function on or off ©).
Z\ WARNING
--To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust the front seats when the vehicle is stationary.
-- The power adjustmentfor the front seats also workswith the ignition switched off or with the ignition key removed. To reduce the risk of injury, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle for this reason.
-- Exercise caution when adjusting the seat height. Unsupervised or careless seat adjustment could cause parts of the bodyto get pinched, which increasesthe risk of injury.
-- The front seat backrests must notbe reclined too far back when driving, because this impairs the effectiveness of the safety belts and airbag system, which increases the risk of injury.

Seats
@ Tips The massage function switches off automatically after approximately 10 minutes.
VA
Applies to: vehicles with entry assistance
Entry assistance makesit easier for the rear passengers to enter and leave the vehicle.
Fig. 64 Front seat: controls on the seat backrest: 1) backrest release, 2) power entry assistance
Power entry assistance > Lift the handle @ and fold the seat backrest
forward.
> Briefly press the button @). The seat automati-
cally moves all the way forward. When the seat is moved back,it will stop in its original position. The operation will stop if the button is pressed again. If you press and hold the button @) while the backrest is in the upright position, the seat will move until you release the button.
Z\ WARNING
-- Always makesurethe front seats are upright and securely lockedin place.
-- Power entry assistance also works when the
ignition is switched off!) or whenthe igni-
tion key is removed, so that rear seat passengerscan still moveto the front of the vehicle in an emergencysituation. To reduce the risk of injury, children should never be

D Requirement: the vehicle battery must havea sufficient charge level.
59

Seats left unattended in the vehicle for this rea-
son.

B4G-0044

ceased
Applies to: vehicles with a front center armrest
There is a storage compartment under the armrest.

Fig. 65 Armrest between the driver' s/front passenger's
seats.
> To adjust the angle, raise the armrest from the starting position notch by notch.
> To bring the armrest back into the starting po-
sition, raise it out of the top notch and foldit back down.
The armrestcan slide forward and back.
Head restraints
ame esr)
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints

Applies to: version 2 Fig. 67 Frontseat: adjusting the head restraint
Adjust the head restraints so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head. If that is not possible, try to adjust as close to this position as possible.
Applies to: version 1
> To move the head restraint upward or downward, slide it until it locks into place > fig. 66.
Applies to: version 2
> To adjust the head restraint upward or forward, slide it > fig. 67 until it locks into place.
> To adjust the head restraint downwardor backward, press the side button and slide the head restraint in the desired direction until it locks into place.
Z'\WARNING
Alwaysread and follow the applicable warnings > page 263, Proper adjustment of head restraints.

B8V-0028

Rear head restraints

Applies to: version 1 Fig. 66 Front seat: adjusting the head restraint
60

Fig. 68 Outer rear head restraints: release point (example)

8V2012721B)

If there are passengersin the rear seat, fold the head restraints up on the occupied seats at least
to the next notch > A\.
Adjusting the head restraints
> To adjust the head restraint up, hold it at the sides with both hands and slide it upward until you feel it click into place.
> To adjust the head restraint down, press the button @) © fig. 68 and slide the head restraint downward.
Removing the head restraints
To remove the head restraints, the backrest must be folded forward partially.
> Removethe screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit > page 368.
> Release the backrest > page 66. > Press the button @) 9 fig. 68 and slide the head
restraint up as far as it can go.
» Place the screwdriver in position in the
opening, press the button @) and pull the head restraint out of the backrest at the same time
of.
> Fold the backrest down until it latches securely => page 63.
Installing the head restraints
To install the head restraints, the backrest must
be folded forward partially.
>» Release the backrest > page 66. > Slide the posts on the head restraint down into
the guides until the postsclick into place. You should not be able to pull the head restraint out ofthe backrest. > Fold the backrest down until it latches securely => page 63.
Z\ WARNING
-- Alwaysread and follow the applicable warnings > page 263, Proper adjustment of head restraints.
-- Only removethe rear seat head restraints when necessaryin order to install a child safety seat > page 301, Child safety. Install the head restraint again immediately once the child safety seat is removed. Driving

Seats with the head restraints removed or not in the upright position increases the risk of serious injury.
61

Stowing and using
Stowing and using
Power sources
When the ignition is switched on, you may be able to use the electric power sources for external devices, depending on the vehicle equipment.
12 volt sockets
You can connectelectrical accessories to the 12 volt sockets. The power usage must not exceed 120 watts.
The 12 volt sockets are labeled with the & or 12V symbol. They are located in the front center console*, in the rear* and on the side trim panel in the luggage compartment".
USB ports
Applies to: vehicles with USB port
You can charge mobile devices using the USB ports. The USB ports are labeled with the «> or [4symbol or CHARGE ONLY.
ZXWARNING
-- To reducethe risk of fatal injury, store all connected devices securely when driving so that they do not move around inside the vehicle when braking or in the eventof an accident.
-- Incorrect usage can lead to serious injuries or burns. To reducethe risk of injuries, never leave children unattendedin the vehicle with the vehicle key.
@) Note
-- Read the operating manualsfor the connected devices.
--To reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle electrical system, never attempt to charge the vehicle battery by connecting accessories that provide power to the power sources.
-- Do not connect any device whose network class (voltage) does not match the network class designed for the socket.
-- Disconnect the connectors from the power sources carefully to reduce the risk of damaging them.

Storing
Cet melts (Te
zzSg=&a |
Fig. 69 Rear benchseat: cup holder*
Your vehicle has cup holdersin the front center console, in the door pockets, in the rear bench seat* and/or in the rear center console".
Rear cup holders* > Fold the center armrest* downward. > To open the cup holders, press inward on the
trim@.
> To place the beverage container in the cup holder, push the arm outward.
> Then push the arm against the beverage container so that the arm lies closely againstit.
> To close the cup holders, push them back into the slot.
ZA WARNING
-- Do not put any hot beverages in the cup holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot beverages could spill, which increases the risk of injury.
-- Do not use any breakable beverage containers (for example, made out of glass or porcelain). You could be injured by them in the event of an accident.
@) Note
Beverage containers in the cup holders should always have a lid. Otherwise, the liquid inside could spill and cause damage tovehicle equipment.

Stowing and using

Other storage
Applies to: sedan Fig. 70 Luggage compartment: bag hooks*
There are additional storage compartments, compartments and holdersat other locations in the vehicle: -- Glove compartment: the glove compartment
can be locked* using the key -- Retainer* for the vehicle key and cell phone in
the front center console -- Storage compartment under the front center
armrest* -- Storage compartment on the rear side of the
front seat*. The compartment can hold a maximum weight of 2 lbs (1 kg). -- Garment hooks* on the B-pillar -- Garment hooks* above the rear doors* -- Side bag hooks*in the luggage compartment -- Applies to: sedan: Bag hooks* under the rear shelf => fig. 70
Z\ WARNING
--To reducethe risk of injury, make sure all storage compartmentsare always closed while driving.
-- Loose objects can be thrownaround the vehicle interior during sudden driving or braking maneuvers, which increases the risk of an accident. Store objects securely while driving.
-- Only use the storage compartmentsin the door trim panels to store small objects that will not stick out of the compartment and impair the function of the side airbags.
-- Make sure your view toward the rear is not blocked, for example by hanging clothing or objects in the vehicle.

B8V-0434

-- No heavy or hard objects may be placed on the storage compartment behind the rear seat backrest. Thereis a risk of injuring the vehicle passengers when braking suddenly.
-- Applies to: vehicles with garment hooks: Only lightweight clothing should be hung from the garment hooksin the vehicle. Do not use clothes hangersto hang clothing. The pockets of the clothing must not contain any heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged objects. This could impair the effectiveness of the side curtain airbags.
() Note
Objects on the rear shelf that rub against the rear window can damage the rear window heating wires.
Luggage compartment
General information
All pieces of luggage or objects must be securely fastened in the luggage compartment. Note the following to maintain good vehicle handling:
> Distribute the load evenly in the luggage com-
partment.
> Stow heavy luggage as far forward in the luggage compartment as possible.
» Use non-elastic cords attached to the tie-downs to secure objects.
Z\ WARNING
-- Applies to: sedan: The storage compartment mustnotbe used to transport heavy objects, hard objects, or animals. Such objects endanger vehicle occupants and increase the risk of injury during sudden driving or braking maneuversor in an accident.
-- The luggage compartmentcover mustalways be securely fastened when in useto reduce the risk of an accident.
-- The luggage compartmentcover is not a surface for storing objects. Objects placed on the cover increase the risk ofinjury to all vehicle occupants during sudden driving or

8V2012721B)

Stowing and using
braking maneuversor in the eventof an accident. -- Loose objects can be thrownaround the vehicle interior during sudden driving or brak-
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of
an accident. Always stow objects securely in the luggage compartment and secure them at the tie-downs. Usestraps suitable for heavy objects. -- If pieces of luggage or objects are secured to the tie-downs with unsuitable or damagedstraps, this can increase the risk of injury during braking maneuversor accidents. -- When transporting heavy objects, the vehicle characteristics will change due to the shift in the center of gravity, which increases the risk of an accident. You may need to adapt your driving style and speed to the current conditions. -- The cargo netis only strong enough to secure light objects. Heavy objects are not adequately secured. Attempting to secure heavy objects increases the risk ofinjury. -- Never exceed the permitted axle and load and vehicle weight > page 395. -- Never secure a child safety seat to the tiedowns. -- Never leave your vehicle unattended, especially if the luggage compartmentlid is open. Children could enter the luggage compartment and close the luggage compartment lid from the inside. This creates the risk of fatal injury, since the children would be locked in and may notbe able to escape by themselves. -- Do not allow children toplayin or on the vehicle. Close and lock the luggage compartment lid as well as all other doors when you leave the vehicle.
-- Never transport passengersin the luggage
compartment. Every passenger mustbe correctly secured with the safety belts in the vehicle > page 268. -- Be careful when releasing the backrest and folding it forward. To reducethe risk of being pinched, pay attention and check when folding backrests forward.
64

-- The backrest mustbe securely latched so objects cannotslide forward out of the luggage compartment during sudden braking.
-- The backrest mustbe latched securely to ensure that the safety belt is protecting the center seating position.
-- Alwayspull forward on the backrest to make sure it is check if it is correctly locked in place.
@) Note
--To reduce the risk of damage, movethe rear
head restraints down > page60 beforefolding the rear backrests forward.
-- When folding the backrest forward, make sure the outer safety belts arein the belt
guide recess so that they do not get pinched in the backrest lock and damaged. Other objects should be removed from the rear bench seatto protect the backrest from damage. -- If you movethe front seat back when the rear seat backrest is folded forward, you could damage the head restraints on the rear seat. -- Make sure that the heating grid strips for the rear window defogger are not damaged by abrasive objects.
G@) Tips
-- The tire pressure must be adapted to the load > page 350.
-- You can purchasestrapsat specialty stores.
Luggage compartment cover
Applies to: vehicles with luggage compartment cover =oqxS=&Ob
partment cover

Follow the safety precautions > page 63.
Removing
> Unhinge the straps @ and pull the cover @) in the direction of the arrow out of the holder @).
Installing > Slide the cover @) horizontally into the desig-
nated holder (2) in the side bracket until the cover is lined up. > Hook the straps into the luggage compartment
lid @.
eae melee Coma Coles
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable cargo floor

Stowing and using Tie-downs and luggage compartment net
Fig. 73 Luggage compartment:location of the tie-downs (example)

Fig. 72 Luggage compartment: lowered cargofloor
The cargo floor can lower to expand the storage area in the luggage compartment.
> Lift the cargo floor in order to lower it. > Pull the cargo floor back slightly and insertit in
the lowerposition @).
To make loading and unloading easier, bringing the cargo floor back into position @) after transporting bulky items is recommended.

(example)
Follow the safety precautions > page 63.
Tie-downs
There are tie-downs (@) in the luggage compartment to secure pieces of luggage and objects.
» Use the tie-downs to secure the cargo.
Cargo net
Applies to: vehicle with cargo net
Use the cargo net (2) to securelighter objects in the luggage compartment
>» Fold the clip for the tie-downs upward. » Attach the hooksfor the cargo netto the tie-
downs.

8V2012721B)

Stowing and using

Increasing the cargo area
Appliesto: vehicles with folding backrests aoS2&o|O
The rear seat backrests can be folded forwardeither separately or together. Follow the safety precautions > page 63. Folding the backrest forward/back > Push the corresponding head restraint down-
ward > page 60. > Pull the release lever @) in the direction of the
arrow and fold the backrest forward. > Fold the backrest down until it latches securely.
When you can no longer see the red mark on
the pin @,,the seatis latched.

and fold down the pass-through cover in the direction of the arrow > fig. 76. > Applies to: version 1: To close the passthrough, fold up the pass-through cover and the center armrest > fig. 76.
Opening/closing the pass-through from the
luggage compartment
> Applies to: version 2: To fold the backrest forward, pull the release lever on the respective seat in the direction of the arrow. The backrest will fold forward automatically after it has been released.
> Applies to: version 1: To open the pass-through, press the lever in the rear seat backrest downward.
> To close the pass-through, fold the backrest back until it latches securely.
Roof rack
Applies to: vehicles with roof rack
2232&a3

Pass-through
Applies to: vehicles with pass-through

Fig. 77 -Applies to: vehicles without roofrail-Roof: mounting points

B8V-0693 B8P-1962

Fig. 76 Version 1: left side: backrest: pass-through cover;
Version 2: right side: luggage compartment: release lever
Follow the safety precautions > page 63.
Opening/closing the pass-through from the vehicle interior > Applies to: version 1: To open the pass-through,
fold down the center armrestin the backrest

Fig. 78 -Applies to: vehicles with roof rail-Roofrail: mounting points
If luggage or cargo is to be carried on the roof, you must observethe following:

8V2012721B)

-- Only approved roof racks may be used on your vehicle. These roof racks are the basis for a complete roof rack system. Additional attachmentsor carrier systems are needed to transport luggage and sports equipment. Roof racks and attachments from the Audi Genuine Accessories program are recommended.
-- When installing the roof rack, make sure that it is mounted only at the designated points on the roof > fig. 77 or > fig. 78.
-- Note the permitted axle load, permitted total weight, and permitted roof load of your vehicle => page 395. The roof load is the total of the
weight of the roof rack, the attachments and
the cargo you are carrying. However, you must also note the permitted load of the carrier system being used.
ZA WARNING
-- Follow the installation instructions provided with the roof rack system. If you do not secure the roof rack system and objects on the roof correctly, they could come loose from the vehicle and causean accident.
-- The risk of an accident increases when using a roof rack system, because it changes the driving characteristics by shifting the center of gravity and/or the increasing the surface area exposed to wind. You may need to adapt your driving style and speed to the current conditions.
@) Note
-- If you use other roof luggage rack systems or do notinstall the racks as intended, any damage to the vehicle is not covered by the warranty. Carefully follow the assembly and installation instructions included with the roof rack carrier system.
-- Makesure that the luggage compartment lid and the panoramic glass roof* do not come into contact with objects on the roof when theyare open.
@ For the sake of the environment
Your vehicle will use more energy due to the increased wind resistance. Removethe roof rack when you are no longer using it.

Stowing and using 67

Warm and cold
Warm and cold Climate control system
The climate control system circulates, warms or cools, and removes humidity from the air in the vehicle interior. It is the most effective when the windowsand panoramic glass roof* or power top" are closed. If there is a build-up of heat inside the vehicle, ventilation can help to speed up the cooling process.
Pollutant filter
The pollutant filter removes pollutants such as dust and pollen from the air.
Key recognition
Various settings are stored and assigned to the vehicle key being used.
These settings are different when the power top* is open or closed.
Presets
Several functions can be presetin the Infotain-
ment system.
Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Air conditioning
Z\WARNING
Poor visibility can lead to accidents. -- For safer driving, keep all windowsfree of
ice, snow and fog. -- Become familiar with the correct use and
function of the climate control system as quickly as possible, especially with the defrosting and defogging functions. -- When the temperatureis below freezing, only use the windshield washer system after

the windshield has been warmedbythe climate control system. The washer fluid could freeze on the windshield and impair visibili-
ty.
@) Note
-- If you suspect that the climate control system is damaged, switch the system off to prevent further damage and haveit checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Repairs to the Audi climate control system require special technical knowledge and special tools. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
@) For the sake of the environment
-- Energy can be saved by switching off the A/C mode on the climate control system.
-- In vehicles with the efficiency program", you
can see other consumption information and
more economytips.
Gi) Tips
--To preventinterference with the heating and cooling output and to prevent the windowsfrom fogging over, the air intake in front of the windshield mustbe free ofice,
snow,or leaves.
-- Condensation from the cooling system* can drip and form a puddle of water under the vehicle. This is normal and does not mean there is a leak.
-- The energy management system may tem-
porarily switch off certain functions, such as the seat heating" or rear window defogger. These systems are available again as soon as the energy supply has been restored.

Automatic climate control system
Applies to: vehicles with automatic climate control system

Warm and cold

B8V-0590

Fig. 79 Automatic climate control system: controls (example)

The functions can be switched on and off by pressing the buttons or adjusted by turning the knob. The LED in a button will light up when the function is switched on.
Automatic climate control system
The automatic climate control system automatically maintains a temperature once it has been set. In all heating mode functions except defrost, the blower only switches to a higher speed once the engine coolant has reached a certain temperature.
AUTO Automatic mode or "eco" mode*
Automatic mode maintains a constant temperature inside the vehicle. Air temperature, airflow
and air distribution are controlled automatically. AUTO mode switches off once a button in the climate control system is pressed.
Applies to: vehicles with eco mode: When automatic mode is active, pressing the AUTO button
briefly activates the "eco" mode. In "eco" mode,
all settings are lowered slightly to save fuel. When in "eco" mode, Eco is shown in the display. To exit "eco" mode, press the AUTO button again.
A/C Cooling mode
The cooling mode only functions with the blower turned on. You can turn the cooling system on or off by pressing the A/C button. The air is not

cooled and humidity is not removed when cooling mode is switched off. This can cause fog on the windows. The cooling mode switches off automatically when there are cold outside tempera-
tures.
@ / @ Temperature
The temperature for the driver's and front passenger's side can be adjusted separately with the
dials @/@). Temperatures between 60 °F
(+16 °C) and 84 °F (+28 °C) can beset. If outside of this range, LO or HI will appear in the climate control system display. In both settings, the climate control runs constantly at the maximum cooling or heating level. The temperatureis not regulated.
Synchronization: By pressing the AUTO button for two seconds, the temperature setting for the driver is transferred to the front passenger's side. This applies a temperature change to the front passenger's side.
S$ Blower
Using the regulator $, you can manually adjust the volume ofair generated by the blower to your preference. The blower should always run at a low setting to prevent the windows from fogging and to ensure a continuous exchange ofair inside the vehicle. To have the blower regulated automatically, press the AUTO button.

8V2012721B)

Warm and cold
85/ 23/ & Air distribution andair vents
The air distribution can adjusted with the buttons. To have the air distribution regulated automatically, press the AUTO button.
The round air ventsin the cockpit are adjustable => page 71.
To keep the front side windows from fogging up in damp weather, we recommend opening the side air vents and tilting them to the side.
Foot vents are located under the front seats and adjustable vents on the end of the center console to heat the rear of the vehicle.
Defrosting
The windshield and side windowsare defrosted or cleared of condensation as quickly as possible. The maximum amount ofair flows mainly from the vents below the windshield. Recirculation mode switches off. The temperature should be set at +72°F (22°C) or higher. The temperatureis controlled automatically. In the §& setting, the A/C cooling mode switches on automatically, depending on the outside air temperature.
The AUTO button switches the defroster off.
< Recirculation mode
The recirculation mode can be turned on manually or automatically*.
-- Switching manual recirculation mode on and off: Press the <> button.
-- Automatic* recirculation mode: autorecirculation needs to be activated in the Infotainment system. Select in the Infotainment system: MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Air conditioning > Auto recirculation. The air quality sensor that is designed for diesel and gasoline exhaust automatically switches the recirculation mode on or off depending on the level of pollutants in the outside air.
In recirculation mode,the air inside the vehicleis
circulated and filtered. This prevents the unfiltered air outside the vehicle from entering the vehicle interior. Switching recirculation mode on when driving through a tunnel or when sitting in traffic is recommended > A.

Pressing the <> button, AUTO or the ® button
switches recirculation mode off.
@ Rear window defogger
If the rear window defogger is activated when the ignition is switched on, the battery management determines based on the battery charge if it is possible to turn on. Otherwise, the rear window defogger functions with the engine running and switches off automatically after approximately 10 - 20 minutes, depending on the outside temperature.
To prevent the rear window defogger from switching off automatically, press and hold the ® button for more than two seconds. This remains stored up to approximately 15 minutes after turning off the ignition.
a Seat heating*
Pressing the a button switches the seat heating on at the highest setting (level 3). The LEDs indicate the temperature level. To reduce the temperature, press the button again. To switch the seat heating off, press the button repeatedly until the LED turns off.
After approximately 10 minutes, the seat heating automatically switches from level 3 to level 2.
Z\ WARNING
-- You should not use the recirculation mode for an extended period of time, because no fresh air is drawn in and the windowscan fog when cooling mode is switched off. This increasesthe risk of an accident.
-- Individuals with reduced sensitivity to pain or temperature could develop burns when using the seat heating function. To reduce the risk of injury, these individuals should not useseat heating.
C) Note
To reduce the risk of damage to the seat heat-
ing elements, do not kneel on the seats or place heavy pressure on one areaof the seat. >

-- The setting for the seat heating on the driver's side is assigned to the keythat is in use.
-- If the front passenger's seat heating is turned on, it will not turn on again automatically if more than 10 minutes have passed between switching the ignition off and switching it on again.
Adjusting the vents

Warm and cold
If the steering wheel heating cannot be switched on, the message: Steering wheel heating: off appears. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.

--\

Aol

Fig. 80 Cockpit: adjusting the air vents

The following settings are possible:
-@ Air flow amount -@Air flow direction
To adjust the air flow amount,turn the ridged outer adjusting ring ©.To stop the air flow, turn the adjusting ring all the wayto the right.
To adjust the air flow direction, turn the air vent
grill insert @.

Steering wheel heating
Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating
The steering wheel rim can be heated.
> Press the @ button on the multifunction steering wheel to switch the steering wheel heating on and off. The message Steering wheel heating: on/Steering wheel heating: off appears in the instrument cluster display.
The temperature is maintained at a constant level when steering wheel heating is switched on.
The steering wheel heating settings are stored automatically and assigned to the vehicle key thatis in use.

8V2012721B)

Driving

Driving
General information
A new vehicle must be broken in within the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km) so that all moving parts work smoothly together, which helps to increase the service life of the engine.
Do notdrive higher than two-thirds of the maximum permitted engine RPM during the first 600 miles (1,000 km) and do notusefull acceleration. The engine can be increased RPM gradually during the next 300 miles (500 km).
Sy Tolesas eA Lal |
Applies to: RS models
When driving in a sporty style, for example ona driving track, the wear on all vehicle components is greatly increased, especially on the engine, transmission, tires, brakes, and suspension. This can result in increased wear. Also notethe following points:
-- Makesure the vehicle is in good condition.
Makesure to check the brake pads, tire tread, and tire pressure (when tires are warm). -- Beforehand, warm up the engine by driving no
higher than two-thirds of the maximum permitted engine RPM. The engine oil temperature must be brought to a minimum of 140 °F (60 °C). -- Before stopping the vehicle, allow the engine and brakes to cool back down to a regular operating temperatureby driving normally.
If necessary, use the following functions:
-- Audi drive select* Dynamic mode > page 146 -- Launch Control > page 87 -- Limit ESC > page 160
@ Tips
Wear caused by load does notconstitute a vehicle fault as defined by the terms of the war-
ranty.

Reducing the risk of vehicle damage
@) Note
When driving on poor roads, over curbs, and on steep ramps, make sure that components
that hang below the vehicle, such as the spoiler and exhaust system, are not struck because they could be damaged. This especially applies to vehicles with low ground clearance and vehicles that are heavily loaded.
Driving through water on roads
Note the following to reduce the risk of vehicle damage when driving through water, for example on flooded roads:
-- The water must not be any higher than the bottom of the vehicle body.
-- Do not drive faster than walking speed.
ZA WARNING
After driving through water or mud, the effectiveness of the brakes may be reduced due to moisture on the brake rotors and brake pads. A few careful brake applications should dry off the brakes and restore the full braking effect.
@) Note
-- Vehicle components such as the engine, transmission, suspension, or electrical system, can be severely damaged bydriving through water.
-- Alwaysswitch the Start/Stop system* off when driving through water > page 78.
@ Tips
-- Determine the depth before driving through
water. -- Do notstop the vehicle, drive in reverse, or
switch the engine off when driving through
water.
-- Keep in mind that oncoming vehicles may create waves that raise the water level and makeit too deep for your vehicle to drive through safely.
-- Avoid driving through salt water, because this can cause corrosion.

aire el Neola(elt ry driving
The amount of fuel consumption, the environ-
mental impact, and the wear to the engine,
brakes, and tires depends mostly on your driving style. Note the following information for efficient and environmentally-conscious driving:
-- Do not let the engine run while the vehicle parked.
-- Use the Start/Stop system > page 78. -- Turn off electrical equipment that is not need-
ed, for example seat heating*. -- Anticipate upcoming traffic situations while
driving to avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. -- Utilize the engine braking effect. -- Avoid driving short distances or at high speeds when possible. -- Avoid adding extra weight to the vehicleif possible, for example by not leaving roof racks or bike racks installed when they are not needed. -- Have maintenance performed regularly on the vehicle. -- Do not drive with winter tires during the summer. -- Make surethe tire pressure is correct
=> page 350.
G) Tips
The amountof noise produced bythe vehicle can increase significantly when driving with a sporty style. Show respect to others around you and the environment with the way you operate your vehicle, especially at night.

Driving
Steering
Adjusting the steering wheel position The steering wheel position is fully adjustable up and down and forward and back.
Fig. 81 Steering column: steering column adjustmentlever
> Tilt the lever > fig. 81 downward > A\.
> Bring the steering wheel into the desired position.
> Push the lever against the steering column untilit is secure.
Z\ WARNING
Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjustment and an incorrect seating position can cause serious injuries. -- Only adjust the steering column when the
vehicle is stationary so that you do not lose control of the vehicle. -- Adjust the driver's seat or steering wheel so that there is at least 10 inches (25 cm)distance between your chest and the steering wheel > page 261, fig. 218. If you do not maintain this distance, the airbag system will not be able to provide its full protection. > page 261, fig. 218. -- If your physical characteristics prevent you from sitting at least 10 inches (25 cm)or more away from the steering wheel,see if an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility can provide adapters that will help. -- If your faceis level with the steering wheel, the airbag does not provide as much protection during a collision. Always make sure that the steering wheel is level with your chest.

8V2012721B)

Driving

-- Always hold the steering wheel with your hands in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to reduce the risk of injury if the airbag deploys.
-- Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o'clock position or with both hands on the rim or the center of the steering wheel. Holding the steering wheel incorrectly significantly increases the risk of injury to the hands, arms and head if the airbag deploys.
Starting and stopping the engine (vehicles with an ignition lock)
Starting the engine
Applies to: vehicles with ignition lock
The ignition is switched on and the engine started with the key in the ignition.
Fig. 82 Ignition lock: position of the ignition key
Switching the ignition on or off > To switch the ignition on, turn the ignition key
to position @). Vehicles without the Start/Stop system*: the needle in the tachometer moves into the READYposition. > To switch the ignition off, turn the ignition key to position @). The needle in the tachometer moves into the OFF position. Starting the engine > Press the brake pedal and movethe selector lever to the "P" or "N"position. > Turn the keybriefly to position @). The ignition key automatically returns to position @). Do not press the accelerator pedal when doing this.

Equipmentthat uses lot of electricity is switched off temporarily when you start the engine.
If the engine does not start immediately, stop the starting procedureby turning the ignition key to position @ and repeatafter 30 seconds.
Start/Stop system*
See the information in > page 78, Start/Stop system.
ZA\ WARNING
--To reduce the risk of asphyxiation, never allow the engine to run in confined spaces.
-- Never removethe ignition key from the ignition lock while the vehicle is moving. Otherwise the steering lock will engage and you will not be able to steer the vehicle, which increased the risk of an accident.
(1) Note
Avoid high engine speed, full throttle, and heavy engine load if the engine has not reached operating temperature yet. You could damage the engine.
(@) For the sake of the environment
Do not let the engine run while parked to warm up. Begin driving immediately. This reduces unnecessary emissions.
G) Tips
--If itis difficult to turn the key to position
®, turn the steering wheel back and forth
slightly to release the steering wheel lock. -- Some noise after starting the engine is nor-
mal and is no cause for concern.

Stopping the engine
Applies to: vehicles with ignition lock

Stopping the engine
> Bring the vehicle to a full stop. > Turn the keyto position @). The needle in the
tachometer moves into the OFF position.

Engaging the steering lock

Requirement: the selector lever mustbe in P.

> Removethe ignition keyin position @)
> page 75, fig. 83 > A.
> Turn the steering wheel until you hear the steering wheel lock.
The locked steering helps prevent vehicle theft.
Z\ WARNING
-- Never turn off the engine before the vehicle has come to a complete stop. Switching it off before the vehicle has stopped may impair the function of the brake booster and power steering. You would then need to use moreforce to steer and brake the vehicle. The fact that you cannot steer and brake as usual mayincrease the risk of accidents and serious injuries.
-- Never removethe ignition key from the ignition lock while the vehicle is moving. Otherwise, the steering lock could suddenly engage and you would notbeable to steer the vehicle.
-- If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition off and takethe vehicle key with you. If you
do not do this, the engine could be started and electrical equipment such as the power
windowscouldbeactivated. This can lead to serious injuries. -- For safety reasons, always park the vehicle with the selector lever in the P position. Otherwise, thereis the risk that the vehicle could roll unintentionally.
@) Note
If the engine has been under heavyload for an extended period of time, heat builds up in the engine compartmentafter the engine is switched off and thereis a risk of damaging the engine. For this reason, let the engine run at idle for approximately two minutes before shutting it off.
@) Tips
For up to 10 minutes after stopping the engine, the radiator fan may turn on again automatically or it may continue to run, even if the ignition is switchedoff.

Driving
Starting and stopping
the engine (vehicles with convenience key)
Starting the engine
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
The [START ENGINE STOP] button switches the ignition on and starts the engine.
©a2>&oeOS

Fig. 83 Center console: START ENGINE STOP button

Plug-in hybrid drive*: refer to the information for starting the vehicle under > page 92.

Starting the engine

> Press the brake pedal and movethe selector lever to the "P" or "N" position.
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button briefly.
The engine will start.

Equipment that uses a lot ofelectricity is switched off temporarily when you start the engine.

If the engine does not start immediately, the starting procedure stops automatically after a short time. If this is the case, repeat the starting
procedure after approximately 30 seconds.

Switching the ignition on or off
If you would like to switch the ignition on without starting the engine, follow these steps:

> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button with-

out pressing the brake pedal. Vehicles without

the Start/Stop system": the needle in the tach-

ometer moves into the READYposition.

> To switch the ignition off, press the button

again. The needle in the tachometer movesinto

the OFF position.

8V2012721B)

Driving
If the Ee indicator light blinks and the message Please turn steering wheel appears when switching the ignition on, the steering lock has been engaged. In this case, turn the steering wheel slightly to the left or right.
Start/Stop system*
See the information in > page 78, Start/Stop system.
Z\WARNING
To reducethe risk of asphyxiation, never allow the engine to run in confined spaces.
@ Note
Avoid high engine speed, full throttle, and heavy engine load if the engine has not reached operating temperature yet. You could damage the engine.
@ For the sake of the environment
Do notlet the engine run while parked to warm up. Begin driving immediately. This reduces unnecessary emissions.
G) Tips
-- Some noise after starting the engine is normal and is no cause for concern.
-- If you leave your vehicle with the ignition switched on, the ignition will switch off after a certain amountof time. Make sure that electrical equipment such as the exterior lights are switchedoff.
Stopping the engine
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
Plug-in hybrid drive*: refer to the information under > page 92.
> Bring the vehicle to a full stop. > Move the selector lever into the "P" position. > Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button
=> page 75, fig. 83.

Steering lock")
The steering locks when you turn the engine off using the [START ENGINE STOP} button, move the selector lever into the P position and open the driver's door. The locked steering helps prevent vehicle theft.
Emergencyoff function
If it is absolutely necessary, the engine can also be turned off while driving at speeds starting at 4 mph (7 km/h). To stop the engine, press the START ENGINE STOP] button twice in a row or press and holdit one time.
ZA WARNING
-- Never turn off the engine before the vehicle has come to a complete stop. Switching it off before the vehicle has stopped may impair the function of the brake booster and power steering. You would then need to use moreforce to steer and brakethe vehicle. The fact that you cannot steer and brake as usual mayincrease the risk of accidents and serious injuries.
-- If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition off and take the vehicle key with you. If you
do not do this, the engine could be started
and electrical equipment such as the power windowscould be activated. This can lead to serious injuries. -- For safety reasons, always park the vehicle with the selector lever in the P position. Otherwise, thereis the risk that the vehicle could roll unintentionally.
@) Note
If the engine has been under heavyload for an extended period of time, heat builds up in the engine compartment after the engine is switched off and thereis a risk of damaging the engine. For this reason, let the engine run at idle for approximately two minutes before shutting it off.

)_ This function is not available in all countries.
76

Driving

@) Tips
For up to 10 minutes after stopping the engine, the radiator fan may turn on again automatically or it may continue to run, even if the ignition is switched off.
Messages
Pressing the start/stop button again will switch off the engine
This message appears when you press the START ENGINE STOP} button while driving => page 76, Emergencyoff function.
Engine start system: malfunction! Please contact Service
The engine automatic start system has a malfunction. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired. To start the engine, turn the key to position @) > page 74 or press and hold the [START ENGINE STOP] button until the engine is running.
Key not recognized. See owner's manual
This message appearsif there is no convenience key inside the vehicle or if the system does not recognize the key. The convenience key may not be recognized, for example, if it is covered by an object that disrupts the signal (such as a briefcase), or if the key battery is weak. Electronic devices such as cell phones can also interfere with the signal.
To still be able to start or stop the engine, refer to > page 77.
Remote control key: hold back of key against the designated area. See owner's manual
If the indicator light turns on and this message appears, there is a malfunction > page 77.
B Key notin vehicle?
B Remote control key: key not detected. Is the keystill in the vehicle?
The BS indicator light turns on and this message appearsif the convenience key was removed from

the vehicle when the engine was running. If the convenience keyis no longer in the vehicle, you cannot switch the ignition on or start the engine once you stop it. You also cannotlock the vehicle from the outside.
Please press the brake pedal
This message appearsif you do not step on the brake pedal to start the engine on a vehicle with an automatic transmission.
Please select N or P
This message appears when starting or stopping the engine if the selector lever is not in the "N" or "P" position. The engine will not start/stop.
Starting the engine
when thereis a malfunction
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
It may not be possible to start the engine under certain circumstances, for example,if the battery in the vehicle keyis drained,if interferenceis affecting the key orif there is a system malfunction.

Fig. 84 Steering column/remote control key: starting the engine if there is a malfunction

As long as the message Key not recognized. See owner's manual or Remotecontrol key:
hold back of key against the designated area. See owner's manual appears, you can start the vehicle with the emergencystarting function.

> Press the brake pedal.

> Hold the master key in the location indicated in

the illustration P) © fig. 84.

8V2012721B) B8V-0062

Driving

> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button > A\ in

Stopping/starting the engine

Starting the engine on page 76. The engine will Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system

start.
> Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the

ao=31SeSSD$

malfunction repaired.

@) Tips You can display the message that appears during an emergencyby pressing the START ENGINE STOP] button.
Start/Stop system
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
The Start/Stop system can help increase fuel economy and reduce CO2 emissions.
In Start/Stop mode, the engine shuts off automatically when the vehicle is stopped, such as at a traffic light. The ignition remains switched on during this Stop phase. The engine will restart automatically when needed.
The Start/Stop system is automatically activated once the ignition is switched on.
Basic requirements for Start/Stop mode
-- The driver's door mustbe closed. -- The driver's seat belt much be fastened. -- The hood mustbe closed. -- The vehicle must have driven faster than 2 mph
(3 km/h) since the last time it stopped.
@) Note
Alwaysswitch the Start/Stop system off when driving through water > page 79.
@ Tips The engine stops shortly before the vehicle comes to a stop )). The full function of the brake booster and the power steering is still available.

=,
Fig. 85 Instrumentcluster: engine switched off (Stop phase)
> Brake the vehicle to a stop. The engine stops shortly before the vehicle comes to a stop or if the vehicle is stationary ). Keep your foot on the brake pedal. The ey indicator light appearsin the display. The needle in the tachometer also moves into the READYposition.
> The engine starts again when you remove your foot from the brake pedal. The indicator light turns off.
Additional information
The engine stops in the "P", "N" and "D" selector lever positions.
If you select the "R" selector lever position during a Stop phase, the engine will start again.
Shift to "P" quickly to prevent the engine from s"tRaMrting unintentionally when shifting through
You can control if the engine will stop or not by reducing or increasing the amount of force you use to press the brake pedal. For example, if you only lightly press on the brake pedal in stop-andgo traffic or when turning, the engine will not switch off when the vehicleis stationary. If you press the brake pedal harder, the engine will switch off.
@ Tips
-- Press the brake pedal during a Stop phase to keep the vehicle from rolling.

D_Incertain countries.
78

Driving

-- The ignition will turn off if you press the START ENGINE STOP] button* during a Stop phase. The needle in the tachometer moves into the OFF position.
(er eileen)
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
Starting and stopping the engine automatically
The system checksif certain conditions are met before and during the Stop phase, and determines if the engine stops and howlong it remains stopped. For example,if power usage is high, the engine will not be stopped. Along with other conditions, the following factorsinfluence the automatic engine start or stop:
-- Environmental conditions (slopes,inclines, elevation, temperature)
-- Battery (charge status, temperature, power usage)
-- Engine temperature -- Assist systems -- Driving behavior
Depending on the engine, the indicator light may appear if the engine is not stopped.
Ignition is switched off automatically
To prevent the vehicle battery from draining, the ignition will switch off automatically under the following conditions:
-- If the Start/Stop system has stopped the engine
-- If the vehicle is stationary -- If you haveexited the vehicle
In this case, the activated low beam is replaced
by the parking light. The parking lights will switch off after approximately 30 minutes or when you lock the vehicle.
If the Start/Stop system has not turned off the engine or if you have switched the Start/Stop system off manually, the ignition will not be automatically switched off and the engine will continue to run > A\.

ZXWARNING
To reduce the risk of asphyxiation, never allow the engine to run in confined spaces.
G)Tips
If you select the "D" or "N" selector lever position in a vehicle with an automatic transmission after shifting into reverse, the vehicle mustbe driven faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) in order for the engine to switch off again.
Manually switching the Start/Stop system col
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
Ifyou do not wish to use the system, you can switchit off manually.
2z3g=&as)

Fig. 86 Center console: Start/Stop system button
> To switch the Start/Stop system off/on manually, press the || button. The LED in the button turns on when the system is switched off.

@ Tips
If you switch the system off during a Stop phase, the engine will start again automatically.

Messagesin the instrument cluster display
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system

Start/stop system: deactivated. Please start engine manually

This message appears when specific conditions

are not met during a Stop phase. The Start/Stop

system will not be able to restart the engine. The

engine must be started manually.

8V2012721B)

Driving
Start/stop system: malfunction! Function unavailable There is a malfunction in the Start/Stop system. Drive the vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Service Facility as soon as possible to have the malfunction corrected.
Electromechanical
parking brake
@23S=&a|
Fig. 87 Center console: parking brake
Your vehicle is equipped with an electromechanical parking brake @) 9 fig. 87. The parking brake is designed to prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally and replaces the hand brake. Setting/manually releasing the parking brake > Pull the switch to set the parking brake. The
LED in the switch turns on. The im indicator light also turns on. > To release the parking brake manually, press the brake or accelerator pedal whilethe ignition is switched on and press the switch at the same time. The LED in the button and the indicator light will turn off. Releasing the parking brake automatically Requirement: the driver's door must be closed. > To start driving and release the parking brake automatically, press the accelerator pedal as usual. In addition to releasing the parking brake automatically, other convenience and safety functions are available when you start driving > page 81, Starting from a stop.

Preventing the automatic parking brake release
The vehicle could begin rolling unintentionally when the parking brakeis released if the vehicle is ona hill or towing a trailer.

> To prevent the parking brake from releasing automatically, pull and hold the switch and
press the accelerator pedal. The parking brake remains set and preventsthe vehicle from roll-
ing backward. > You can release the switch again once you
are sure that you are giving enough driving
force to the wheels by pressing the accelerator
pedal.

Emergencybraking function

You can use the emergencybraking function in an
emergencysituation, or if the standard brakes are malfunctioning or the pedal is obstructed.

> Pull and hold the switch. > As soon as you release the
ate, the braking stops.

switch or acceler-

Pulling and holding the switch while driving the vehicle activates the emergency braking function. The hydraulic brake system will brakeall four wheels. The braking effect is similar to heavy
braking > A\.

To reducethe risk of activating the emergency braking by mistake, a warning tone (buzzer) sounds when the switch is pulled. Emergency braking stops as soon as the switch is released
or the accelerator pedal is pressed.

Parking

> Press the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. > Pull the © switch to set the parking brake. > Place the selector lever in the "P" position.
> Turn the engine off > /\.
> Turn the steering wheel when parking on in-
clines so that the wheelswill roll into the curb if the vehicle starts moving.

ZA\ WARNING

-- Ifa gear is engaged while the vehicle is sta-

tionary and the engine is running, do not

press the accelerator pedal inadvertently.

8V2012721B)

Pressing the accelerator pedal will cause the
vehicle to move, and this could result in an accident.
-- Emergencybraking should only be used in an emergency, when the when the standard brake pedal is malfunctioning or obstructed. During emergency braking, your vehicle will brake similar to heavy braking. ESC and the associated components (ABS, ASR, EDL) cannot overcome the lawsof physics. A full brake application while driving through curves or in poor road or weather conditions can cause the vehicle to slide or the rear of
the vehicle to swerve, which increases the risk of an accident.
-- If the power supply fails, you cannot set the parking brake onceit is released. In this case, park the vehicle on level ground and secureit by engaging the "P" gear. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
-- If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition off and take the vehicle key with you. This applies particularly when children remain in the vehicle. Otherwise, children could start the engine, release the parking brake, or operate electrical equipment such as power
windows, which increasesthe risk of an accident.
-- No one, especially children, should remain in the vehicle when it is locked. Locked doors makeit moredifficult for emergency work-
ers to enter the vehicle, which puts lives at risk.
@) Note
Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running, because this increases the risk of an accident.
G) Tips
When stopping at a traffic signal or stopping in city traffic, you can set the parking brake manually. The vehicle does not have to be held with the brake pedal. The parking brake eliminates the tendency to creep when a selector lever position is engaged. As soon as you press the accelerator pedal, the parking

Driving
brake releases automatically and the vehicle
starts to move > page 81.
Gi)Tips
-- Occasional noises when the parking brake is set and released are normal and are not a cause for concern.
-- The parking brake goes through a self-test cycle at regular intervals when the vehicleis stopped. Any noises associated with this are normal.
--If there is a power failure, the parking brake will not setif it is released, and it will not release if it is set > A\. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Starting from a stop
Various convenience and safety functions may be available when the vehicle begins driving, depending on vehicle equipment.
Starting on hills with the parking brake set
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed.
> To start driving comfortably when on hill, set the parking brake and begin driving as usual. The braking force of the parking brake does not release automatically until the wheels build up enough driving force.
Starting on hills with hill hold assist
Hill hold assist makes it easier to start on hills. Requirement: the driver's door must be closed and the engine must be running.
> To activate hill hold assist, press and hold the brake pedal for several seconds. The vehicle mustbe facing uphill.
After releasing the brake pedal, the braking power is maintained briefly > A\ to preventthe vehicle from rolling back when starting. This allows you to begin driving moreeasily.
81

Driving

ZA\ WARNING
Applies to: vehicles with hill hold assist
-- If you do not begin driving immediately or the engine stalls after releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle may begin to roll backward. Press the brake pedal or set the parking brake immediately.
-- The intelligent technologyofhill hold assist cannot overcome the limitations imposed by natural physical laws. The increased comfort offered by hill hold assist should not cause you to take safety risks.
-- Hill hold assist cannot hold the vehicle in place on all hills (for example, if the ground is slippery or icy).
--To reducethe risk of an accident, always makesurethe vehicle is situated safely
while stationary.

transmissions and allow the vehicle to accelerate without a noticeable interruption in traction.

Selector lever positions
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission

Lee
rs 74 0 as

8)Sa|

10/09/2014
--
Ryx)
a
Fig. 88 Instrumentcluster: selector lever positions
28sS3a|

Automatic transmission
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
The automatic transmission is controlled electronically. Upshifting and downshifting occur automatically.
When a moderatedriving styleis used, the transmission selects the most economical driving mode. The transmission upshifts at a lower RPM and downshifts at a higher RPM to improvefuel efficiency.
In the "S" selector lever position, the transmission switches to a sporty mode after a kick-down
or when the driver uses a sporty driving style characterized by quick accelerator pedal movements, heavy acceleration, frequent changes in speed and traveling at the maximum speed.
If desired, the driver can also select the gears
manually (tiptronic mode) > page 86, Manual shifting (tiptronic mode).
The S tronic is a dual-clutch transmission. Power is transferred using two clutches that work independently from one another. They replace the torque converter used in conventional automatic

Fig. 89 Selector lever lock
The selected selector lever position is shown hear the selector lever > fig. 89 and in the instrument cluster display > fig. 88.
» Switch the ignition on. >In the "P/N" position, you mustrelease the se-
lector lever lock > page 82. > Move the selector lever into the desired posi-
tion. The engaged selector lever position is shown in the shift gate.
Selector lever lock
The selector lever lock prevents you from selecting a gear accidentally, causing the vehicle to roll.
The selector lever is locked in the "P" and "N" positions when the ignition is switched on. You mustpress the brake pedal to select another position. You mustalso press the interlock button if you are moving from the "P" and "N"position. >

Driving

The selector lever lock only functions when the vehicle is stationary or at speeds below approximately 1 mph (2 km/h). At higher speeds, the lock is automatically deactivated in the "N" position.
The selector lever is not locked when shifting quickly through "N", for example from "R" to "D/S". This makes it possible to free the vehicle when it is stuck by "rocking" it. The selector lever lock engages if the lever stays in the "N" position longer than approximately two seconds when the brake pedal is not pressed.
Ignition key safety interlock*
Applies to: vehicles with ignition lock
You can only removethe key from the ignition after switching the ignition off if the selector lever is in the "P" position. The selector lever will be locked in the "P" position as long as the keyis not in the ignition.
P - Park
This selector lever position prevents the vehicle from rolling. You can only shift into Park when the vehicle is stationary > A.
To shift in and out of the "P" selector lever position, press the selector lever lock (button in the selector lever handle) and press the brake pedal at the same time.
The selector lever will be locked in the "P" position if there is a power failure > page 89, Releasing the selector lever in an emergency.
R - Reverse
Only shift into reverse gear when the vehicleis stationary and the engine is running at idle speed >A.
To select the "R" selector lever position, press the selector lever lock while pressing the brake pedal.
N - Neutral
The transmission is in idle in this position.
D/S - Normal position for driving forward
In the "D/S" selector lever position, the transmission can be operated either in the normal "D"

mode or in the "S" sport mode. To select the "S" sport mode, pull the selector lever back briefly. Pulling the lever back again will select the normal"D" mode. The instrumentcluster display showsthe selected driving mode.
In the normal mode "D", the transmission automatically selects the suitable gear ratio. It depends on engine load, vehicle speed and driving style.
The engine's power reserves are used fully in the Sport mode "S". Shifting may become noticeable when accelerating.
To move from selector lever position "N" to "D", you mustpress the brake pedal and the vehicle
mustbe traveling less than 1 mph (2 km/h) or be stationary > A\.
Z\ WARNING
Read and follow all WARNINGS. -- The vehicle can roll even if the ignition is
switched off. -- Never select "R" or "P" while driving, be-
cause this increases the risk of an accident. -- Power is still transmitted to the wheels
when the engine is running at idle. To prevent the vehicle from "creeping", you must keep your foot on the brakein all selector lever positions (except "P") when the engine is running. Otherwise, this increasesthe risk of an accident. -- Do not inadvertently press the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped if a gear is engaged. Pressing the pedal increases risk of accident becausethe vehicle will move, even if parking brakeis set.
-- To reduce the risk of an accident, do not
press the accelerator pedal when changing the selector lever position while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. -- Never leave your vehicle with the engine running while in gear. If you must leave your vehicle when the engine is running, set the parking brake and movethe selector lever to the "P" position. --To reducethe risk of an accident, the selector lever must be in the "P" position and the

8V2012721B)

Driving
parking brake must be set before opening the hood and working ona running engine. Alwaysread and follow the applicable warnings > page 325, General information. -- Read and following all WARNINGS > A\ in Driving tips on page 85.
@ Note
Never let the vehicle roll downhill with engine off and the selector lever in the "N" position, because this could damage the automatic transmission and catalytic converter.
@) Tips
-- Audi drive select: sporty shifting characteristics can be selected using the Dynamic driving mode = page 146 "S" will appear in the instrumentcluster display instead of +p"
-- If you accidentally select "N" while driving, take your foot off the accelerator pedal immediately and wait for the engine to slow downtoidle before selecting "D" or "S".
-- If there is a power failure, the selector lever will not move out of the "P" position. The emergencyrelease can be used if this happens > page 89.
@ Tips
If the selector lever does not engage, thereis a malfunction. The engine is disabled to prevent the vehicle from driving off unintentionally. To allow the selector lever to engage again, proceedas follows: -- Briefly press the brake pedal. -- If the vehicle does not move forward or in
reverse even though a drive position is se-
lected, proceed as follows: -- If the vehicle does not movein the desired
direction, the system may not have engaged the drive position correctly. Press the brake pedal and select the drive position again. -- If the vehicle still does not move in the de-
sired direction, there is a system malfunction. See an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance to have the system checked.

G) Tips Plug-in hybrid drive*: the transmission switches automatically to the normal mode "D"if the || button > page 96is pressed while in sport mode "S".
Driving tips
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
2eoo&S2O
Fig. 90 Section of the center console: selector lever with interlock button
Starting the engine
> Select the "P" or "N" selector lever position. At low temperatures (below 14 °F (-10 °C)), the engine can only be started when the selector lever is in the "P" position.
Starting from a stop
» Press and hold the brake pedal. > Press and hold the interlock button in the selec-
tor lever handle, select the desired selector lever position such as "D" > page 82 and release the lock button. > Wait a momentuntil the transmission shifts. You will notice a slight movement when the gear engages. > Release the brake pedal and press the accelera-
tor pedal > A\.
Various convenience functions are available for starting on hills > page 81.
Stopping temporarily > Keep the vehicle stationary using the braking
pedal, for exampleat traffic lights. > Do not press the accelerator pedal when doing
this.

> To prevent the vehicle from rolling when you start driving, set the parking brake when stop-
ping on steep hills > A\ and >@.
> The parking brake will release automatically and the vehicle will start moving once you press the accelerator pedal. Requirement: the driver's door mustbe closed.
Stopping/parking
If the selector lever is not in the "P" position when you open the driver's door, the vehicle
could roll. In vehicles with a convenience key*,
the following message appears: Shift to P, otherwisevehicle can roll away. Doors do notlock if lever is not in P A warning tone will also sound.
> Press and hold the brake pedal > /\. > Set the parking brake. > Select the "P" selector lever position.
Under certain circumstances, such as driving in
the mountains,it may be useful to switch temporarily to the manual shift program in order to manually adjust the gears to the driving conditions > page 86.
When parking ona level surface, simply place the selector lever in the "P" position. On inclines, activate the parking brake first and then move the selector lever to the "P" position > page 80. This prevents the locking mechanism from being loaded too heavily and will make it easier to move the selector lever out of the "P" position.
ZA\ WARNING
-- The vehicle can roll even when the engine is switched off.
-- Unintended vehicle movementcan lead to serious injuries.
-- Never leave your vehicle with the engine running while in gear. If you must leave your vehicle when the engine is running, set the parking brake and movethe selector lever to the "P" position.
-- Power is still transferred to the wheels when the engine is running at idle. To prevent the vehicle from "creeping", you must keep your foot on the brake when the engine is running and the selector lever is in the "D", "S"

Driving

or "R" position or "tiptronic" mode is selected.
-- Do not inadvertently press the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped if a gear is engaged. Pressing the pedal increases risk of accident because the vehicle will move, even if parking brakeis set.
--To reduce the risk of an accident, do not
press the accelerator pedal when changing the selector lever position while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running.
-- Never engage the "R" or "P" selector level positions while driving. It could cause a crash.
-- Before driving down a steep slope, reduce your speed and shift into a lower gear with "tiptronic".
-- Do not ride the brakes or press the brake pedal too often or too long when driving downhill. Constant braking causes the brakes to overheat and can substantially reduce braking performance, increase braking
distance, or cause completefailure of the
brake system.
-- Ifyou must stop on an incline, always hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake or parking brake to prevent it from rolling back.
-- Never hold the vehicle on an incline with a slipping clutch. The clutch opens automatically when it becomes too hot from the overload. The fs} indicator light turns on anda message appears > page 88 when the clutch is overloaded.

@) Note

-- When stopping on an incline, do not try to

hold the vehicle in place by pressing the ac-

celerator pedal while a driving gear is se-

lected. This can cause the automatic trans-

mission to overheat and can damage it. Set

the parking brake or press the brake pedal

to preventthe vehicle from rolling.

-- Allowing the vehicle to roll when the engine

is stopped while the selector lever is in the

"N" position will damage the automatic

transmission, because it is not lubricated

8V2012721B)

Driving

under those circumstances > page 386, Towing with a tow truck. -- The transmission can overheat and be damaged under certain driving and traffic conditions such as frequentstarts, creeping for a long time, or stop-and-go traffic. When the E83 or FJ indicator light turns on, stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and let the transmission cool > page 88.
@)Tips
For safety reasons, the parking brake only releases automatically when the driver's door is closed.
Hill descent control
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
The hill descent control system assists the driver whendriving downhills.
Hill descent control is activated when the selector lever is in the "D" or "S" position and you press the brake pedal. The transmission automatically selects a gear that is suitable for the hill. Hill descent control tries to maintain the speed that was selected at the time of braking, within physical and technical limitations. If may still be necessary to adjust the speed with the brakes. Becausehill descent control cannot shift down farther than 3rd gear, it may be necessaryto shift into tiptronic mode in very steep areas. In this case, shift into 2nd or 1st gear in tiptronic mode to use the engine's braking force to relieve the brakes.
Hill descent control switches off once the hill levels out or if you press the accelerator pedal.
On vehicles with a cruise control system* => page 126,hill descent control is also activated when the speedis set.
Z\WARNING
Hill descent control may not be able to maintain a constant speed under all conditions. Alwaysbe ready to apply the brakes.

Manual shifting (tiptronic mode)
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
The tiptronic mode allows the driverto shift the gears manually.
Fig. 91 Center console: shifting manually with the selector lever
Fig. 92 Steering wheel: shifting manually with the shift paddles*
Shifting with the selector lever You can shift into tiptronic mode while the vehicle is stationary or while driving. > To shift into tiptronic mode, push the selector
lever from the "D/S" position to the right in the tiptronic shift gate. Once the transmission has
switched modes,the selector lever position M
is shown in the instrument cluster display => page 82, fig. 88. For example, M4 means the fourth gear is engaged. > To shift up a gear, tap the selector lever for-
ward @) © fig. 91.
> To shift downa gear, tap the selector lever
backward ©). Shifting with the shift paddles*
You can operate the shift paddles in the "D/S"or "M"(tiptronic shift gate) selector lever positions. >

B8V-0606

Driving

> To shift up one gear, tap the shift paddle @) > fig. 92.
> To shift down a gear, tap the ©) shift paddle. > Applies to: RS models: To select the lowest/
highest possible gear, press and hold the shift
paddle @)/@).
If the shift paddles are tapped while in the "D/S" selector lever position, automatic mode switches off briefly. To switch from manually shifting back to automatic shifting immediately, tap the shift paddle 4) ° fig. 92 for 1 second.
To keep shifting using the shift paddles, move the selector lever to the right out of the "D/S"position into the tiptronic shift gate.
The transmission automatically shifts up or down beforecritical engine speed is reached.
Applies to: RS models: When accelerating, the transmission will not automatically shift to the next gear shortly before the maximum permitted engine RPM is reached. Shift to the next highest gear at the right time.
The transmission only allows manual shifting when the engine speed is within the permitted range.
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
Kick-down enables maximum acceleration.
When you pressthe accelerator pedal down beyond the resistance point (called kick-down), the automatic transmission downshifts into a lower gear, depending on vehicle speed and engine RPM. It shifts up into the next higher gear once the maximum permitted engine RPM is reached.
Applies to: RS models: In tiptronic mode, the transmission does not automatically shift down into a lower gear. If you must accelerate, for example to pass a vehicle, you must shift manually.

ZX WARNING
Please note that the wheels could spin on slick or slippery roads when kick-down is active.
ETT eel ace) |
Applies to: vehicles with S tronic transmission and Launch Control Program
The launch control program provides the best possible acceleration when starting from a stop.
Requirement: the engine mustbe at operating temperature and the steering wheel must not be turned.
> Deactivate )) the Start/Stop system* => page 79. The LED in the |#] button turns on.
> With the engine running, press the |& OFF] button briefly one time. The B indicator light turns on and the message Stabilization control (ESC): sport. Warning! Limited stability appearsin the instrument cluster display.
> Pull the selector lever back out of the "D/S" position briefly to select the S position, or press it toward the right into the tiptronic position or select the Dynamic driving mode in drive select* > page 146.
> Press the brake pedal firmly with your left foot and holdit all the way down for at least one second.
> At the same time, press the gas pedal all the way down with your right foot until the engine reaches and stays at a high RPM level.
> Removeyour left foot from the brake pedal
within five seconds > /\.
ZA WARNING
-- Always adaptyour driving to the traffic flow. -- Only use Launch Control when road and traf-
fic conditions allow it and other drivers will not be endangered or impacted by your driving and the vehicle's acceleration. -- Please note that the drive wheels can spin and the vehicle can break away when sport >

8V2012721B)

D_ Itis not possible to deactivate the system with all versions of the transmission.
87

Driving

mode is switched on, especially when the road is slippery. -- Once the vehicle has started moving, press the | OFF] button briefly to turn the sport mode off.
C) Note
When accelerating using Launch Control,all vehicle componentsare subject to heavy loads. This can result in increased wear.
G) Tips
After accelerating using the Launch Control, the temperature of some vehicle components mayincrease greatly. If that happens, the function will not be available for a few minutes to reduce the risk of damage. After a cool-down period, Launch Control will be available again.
Miche smelt)
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
75 Transmission: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle
Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe location and secureit so it does not roll. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
5 Transmission: too hot! Please stop the vehicle!
The transmission is too hot and can become damaged. Stop and let the transmission cool with the engine running (at idle) in the "P" selector lever position. Then the indicator light and the message turn off, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. If the indicator light and the driver message do notturn off, do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
fs} Transmission: malfunction: You can continue driving

Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
| Transmission: malfunction! You can continue driving with limited function. No reverse gear
There is a system malfunction in the transmission. The transmission is switching to emergency mode. This mode onlyshifts into certain gears or may no longer shift at all. The engine maystall. You cannot engage the reverse gear. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
[@] Transmission: malfunction! You can continue driving in D until engine is off
Drive the vehicle away from moving traffic and park. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
fal Transmission: too hot. Please adapt driving style
The transmission temperature has increased significantly. Drive very cautiously or take a break from driving until the temperature returns to the normal range and the indicator light turns off.
Transmission: please press brake pedal and select gear again
If the transmission malfunctions because the temperatureis too high, a message appears when the transmission is cooled.

838

Driving

Releasing the selector lever in an Caleta
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission =o©2éS&O
Fig. 94 Selector lever: using the emergencyrelease to moveout of the Park position
To maneuver or tow the vehicle, the emergency release must be used to movethe selector lever out of the "P" position. The emergency release mechanism is located in the right area under the selector lever shift gate. Using the emergencyrelease can be complicated. We recommend contacting an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance,if necessary. You will need the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit to release it > page 368. Usethe flat side of the reversible screwdriver blade. Removing the shifter boot > Set the parking brake to secure your vehicle
from rolling away. If this is not possible, secure your vehicle from rolling using another method. > Switch the ignition off.
> To loosen the shifter boot, carefully insert the
flat side of the screwdriver sidewaysinto the slit near the shifter boot > fig. 93.

B6V-0228]

> Carefully pry the shifter boot out with the screwdriver while gripping the bootat the fold and pulling it upward and out until all four corners are released.
> Fold the shifter boot up around the shifter knob > fig. 94.
Selector lever emergency release
> Press and hold the yellow release button with the screwdriver > fig. 94.
> Press the release button in the selector lever (@) and movethe lever into the "N" position.
> Clip the shift cover back into the shift gate after using the emergencyrelease.
Z\WARNING
-- Only activate the emergency release while on level surface or a slight slope.
-- The parking lock mayonly be released using the emergencyrelease if the parking brake is set. If it is not working, secure the vehicle from rolling using the brake pedal or other
suitable means, such as blocking a front and
a rear wheel. An unsecured vehicle mayroll
away, which increases the risk of an accident.

8V2012721B)

e-tron
e-tron
Plug-in hybrid drive
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
General information
The plug-in hybrid drive is a drive conceptthat allows you to choose between driving with the electric motor, with the gasoline engine or using a combination of both.
All work done on the high-voltage system must only be performed bycertified high-voltage technicians at authorized Audi dealers or authorized Audi Service Facilities in accordance with Audi guidelines.
The high-voltage system is composed ofthe following high-voltage components: the high-voltage battery, the power electronics, the electric motor, the high-voltage A/C compressor, the high-voltage heater, the charging system and charging port as well as the orange high-voltage wiring.
The pedal referred to in this section of the Owner's Manual is the equivalent of the accelerator pedal (gas pedal) in a standard vehicle.
High-voltage battery
The high-voltage battery is located on the vehicle underbodyin front of the rear axle and does not require any maintenance from the driver. Additional information about the high-voltage battery can be found under > page 106.
Z\ WARNING
The voltage in the high-voltage system is lifethreatening. Touching a damaged high-voltage component can resultin a fatal electric shock. The componentsin the high-voltage system are marked with a warning label which warns against the high-voltage. -- The voltage level in the high-voltage system
is still dangerous and potentially life-threatening when the ignition is switched off. -- Never perform work on orange high-voltage cables or on high-voltage components. Only

authorized repair facilities that are certified may perform work on the high-voltage sys-
tem.
-- Never damage, alter or remove the orange high-voltage cable or disconnectit from the high-voltage system.
-- Never perform any work using cutting, shaping or sharp-edged tools or heat sources near the high-voltage system and high-voltage cables.
-- Audi regulations mustbe followed during all workperformed on the high-voltage system and high-voltage components.
-- When working on the high-voltage system and high-voltage components, make sure the remote control key is kept far enough away from the vehicle so that there is no risk of the ignition being inadvertently switched on.
-- Gases that escape from the high-voltage battery can be poisonous or flammable.
-- Damage to the high-voltage battery could cause the high-voltage battery to leak immediately or in the future, and poisonous or flammable gases could escape. Do notinhale the gases!
-- Do not expose yourself to any leaking fluids and do not come into contact with them.
-- The high-voltage battery electrolytefluid is caustic. If electrolyte fluid comes into con-
tact with the skin, flush the affected area for
at least 15 minutes with clean water. Then wash the affected area with soap. Have the affected area examined by a medical professional. -- In the event of a technical emergency, inform the respondersthat the vehicleis equipped with a high-voltage battery.
ZA WARNING
Never leave the vehicle unattended when in drive ready mode > page 92 with a gear engaged. The vehicle can start moving ("creeping") even if the gasoline engine is switched off, since the electric motor is still operating. This may causecollisions and severe or fatal injuries. When the vehicle enters drive ready

e-tron

mode, the status message e-tron READY appearsbriefly in the instrument cluster display and the needle in the power meter points to READY > page93. -- Makesure that the selector lever is in the P
position and the ignition is switched off when leaving the vehicle.
@) Note
-- The high-voltage system can be damaged if the vehicle underbody comes into contact with the ground. Immediately drive your vehicle to an authorized repair facility and have it inspected.
-- The electric drive motor can become very hot during operation. Do not stop the vehi-
cle if there is oil, fuel residue or other flammable substances under or nextto the vehicle.
Special considerations for the high-voltage Pe laclays
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
Please first read and note the introductoryinformation and heed the warnings > page 90.
All batteries age with use and over time. There are things you should know about the care of the high voltage battery that will help it keep giving you good service and reliability over time. Please read and keep the following information in mind while you enjoy the performance and economy of your vehicle.
-- Be sure to charge the high voltage battery before leaving the vehicle parked and unused for a longer period of time. Ideally the high-voltage battery should have a charge level between 40 % and 60 % when parked for a long time.
--If the battery charge level is below 3 %, never park the vehicle for more than 21 days without charging the high-voltage battery. Should you have to park the vehicle for a long time, make sure that the charge level is sufficient to help prevent the battery from aging prematurely.
-- Frequent and consecutive charging of the highvoltage battery when the charge level is above 98 % can also decrease the capacity of the

high-voltage battery. Make sure the charge level is below 98 % when you start the charging process. -- Should the vehicle be parked for longer than 2 days at temperatures below - 13 °F (-25 °C), the high-voltage battery could freeze and not be able to provide energyto the electric motor. The battery will start working again, once it warms up. The battery can be warmed up when the outside temperature rises or when the vehicle is garaged appropriately. The batterywill also warm up when being used (switching on the air conditioner, the heater or by driving the vehicle). Should you have to park your vehicle at very low temperatures for longer than 1 day, makesure that the high-voltage battery does not freeze by parking the vehicle in a garage that is heated or protected from the outside
temperature.
-- The high-voltage battery can be damaged and the capacity can be decreased when the vehicle is parked for longer than 24 hours when the ambient temperatureis higher than 118 °F (48 °C). Always make sure that the high-voltage battery is not exposed to temperatures above 118 °F (48 °C) for a long time.
-- Never park the vehicle in areas that arelikely to
be flooded, such as beaches or river banks, and
never drive the vehicle in WATER, on flooded roads or through water that is higher than the bottom of the vehicle body. The high-voltage battery, along with other vehicle components, can be damagedseverelyif the high-voltage battery is exposed to open water especially for a longer time. However, you can drive through water on roads under certain conditions => page 72.
Failure to heed any of these requirements can age the battery prematurely and lead to a permanent decrease of the high-voltage battery's capacity.
(i) Tips
Always makesure that the high-voltage battery is not exposed to extremely low and high temperatures as well as to water especially for a longer time. Failure to protect and care for the high voltage battery can lead to

8V2012721B)

e-tron
serious damage and/or a decrease of the capacity void coverage under the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.
Starting/driving the vehicle
Appliesto: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
The vehicle is started and stopped with the START ENGINE STOP] button. Please also read the information under > page 75, Starting the engine.
Establishing drive ready mode
See > A\ in Introduction on page 90.
Requirement: a charging cable must not be connected to the vehicle > page 121 and the selector lever must be in the "P" or "N" position.
-- Press the brake pedal. -- Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button.
When the vehicle enters drive ready mode, the status message e-tron READY appearsbriefly in the instrument cluster display and the needlein the power meter points to READY > page 93.
Driving
The vehicle starts with the electric motor after establishing the drive ready mode and if the conditions for electric drive mode have been met => page 96.
The conditions to drive are essentially the same as for the automatic transmission > page 82.
You and your passengers should anticipate the possibility of a sporty acceleration.
Ending drive ready mode
-- Place the selector lever in the "P" position. -- Switch the ignition off with the
START ENGINE STOP] button.
Vehicle sound»)
The vehicle generates an electronic engine sound so that your vehicle can be heard from the outside when in electric drive mode. The vehicle sound automatically fades out at higher speeds

when the sounds from the tires and wind start increasing.

Switching the ignition on/off
You can switch the ignition on without establishing drive ready mode.

--To switch the ignition on or off, press the START ENGINE STOP] button. Do not press the
brake pedal while doing this.

When the ignition is switched on, the needle
stays pointed at OFF @) > page93,fig. 96 or OFF is displayed @) > page 93,fig. 96.

No indicator lights stay turned on when the ignition is switched off.

Ignition is switched off automatically
To prevent the vehicle battery from draining, the ignition will switch off automatically under the following conditions:
-- If the vehicle has already been driven -- If the vehicle is stationary -- If the gasoline engine is not running -- If the driver's door is opened --If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled --If the brake pedal is not pressed

In this case, the activated low beam is replaced by the parking light. The message Side marker
lights will switch off automatically in 30 minutes. See owner's manual appearsin the instru-
ment cluster display. The parking lights will switch off after approximately 30 minutes or when you lock the vehicle.

If the gasoline engine was not stopped, the mo-
tor continues running and the ignition does not automatically switch off > A\.

ZX WARNING

To reduce the risk of poisoning, never allow

the engine to run in confined spaces.

D_ Notavailable in all markets.
92

@ Tips
The vehicle cannot start when outside temperatures are below -18 °F (-28 °C) => page 94.

e-tron

Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
The power meter showsthe status of the plug-in hybrid drive and the availability of the plug-in hybrid system.
>a|&|S%s

Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit Fig. 95 Power meter overview (diagram)
atoi=&Ea]||y]

8V2012721B)

Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster Fig. 96 Power meter overview (diagram)
Selecting the power meter display format
> Open the first Vehicle tab (trip computer) using the [<>] button on the multifunction steering wheel.

> Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit:

Select on the multifunction steering wheel:

right control button > Left dial > Tachometer or

Power meter > Combination view.

® ©©& ©0®@ © ®©® ©80

e-tron

For additional information, see > page 21, Trip computer(Audivirtual cockpit). » Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument
cluster: Open the Tachometer display by turning the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel.
When opening the driver's door, the charge level is shownin the instrument cluster when the ignition is switched on, or the charge level and the remaining charge time for the high-voltage battery is displayed when charging.
The power meter gives feedback about the particular accelerator pedal position and shows the current demand (%)for electricity or fuel regardless of which engine is active.
An economical driving and recuperation range is shown in green > page 97, Energy recovery (recuperation). A driving range that is not economical is shownin orange.
Vehicle not drive ready (OFF)
Recuperation (CHARGE) Vehicle ready to drive (READY) or coasting
Efficient driving with electric motor and/or gasoline engine (EFFICIENcy) Economic driving while the electric motor or gasoline engine is in the partial power range
Driving in full power range
100% output
BOOST: the electric motor supports the combustion engine
High-voltage battery charge level
EV mode: active --*", standby, <8
or currently unavailable. 2x5" Speed limit for electric driving in EV mode (80 mph / 130 km/h)

Indicator lights and messages
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

Also notethe indicator lights in > page 10.

The gasoline engine is active when the tor light turns on.

indica-

Be Drive system: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle
There is a malfunction in the plug-in hybrid system. The brake booster and the power steering may stop working. Stop the vehicle immediately or as soon as possible. Park the vehicle in a safe place outdoorsthat is not near buildings, roof overhangs, carports or similar structures. Switch the ignition off. Have the problem corrected by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Be Electric drive: overheated! Safely stop vehicle and check coolant
The coolant level is too Low or the coolant temperature is too high.
Stop the vehicle in the outdoors as soon as it is safely possible. Switch the ignition off.
Read the important safety precautions > A\ in Coolant on page 101 and check the coolant level =>page 101.
If the coolant level is OK, the malfunction may be
caused by the system overheating. Let the vehicle's electric drive system cool down for some time.
If the message turns off after cooling down and switching the ignition back on, you can continue driving. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
If the indicator light stays on, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty.
Bea Drive system: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the plug-in hybrid system. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Be Drive system: malfunction! Restart not possible. Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the plug-in hybrid system. Do not open the hood. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service

e-tron

B8V-0674

Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Be Battery temperature too low. Vehicle cannotbe started. See owner's manual
The outside temperatureis too low. The vehicle can no longer start at temperatures below -18 °F (-28 °C). Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
#7]POWER Warning! Limited performance
If the indicator light turns on and this message appears, there may be an engine control malfunction. The Ga: indicator light in the instrument cluster also turns on. The engine output is reduced. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
e-tron mode: EV currently unavailable
This message appearsif the <SY button is pressed but the conditions for electric drive mode are not
met.
Drive system: engine must be running. Please exit EV e-tron mode
It may be necessary for the gasoline engine to
run longer for technical reasons, such as when
condensation accumulates in the engine. Driving exclusively in electric mode is not possible in this phase.
BS Vehicle sound: malfunction! Pedestrians cannothear vehicle. Please contact Service
The vehicle sound is no longer functioning. Drive extremely carefully, since others may not hear your vehicle. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

Range display
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
Fig. 97 Instrumentcluster: range display
The range can be displayed in the trip computer. You can access the range display with the multifunction steering wheel buttons > page 17, Multifunction steering wheel plus or > page 20, Multifunction steering wheel. Depending on the selected plug-in hybrid mode, the display gives the following information: @ Remaining electric motor range or combined total range @ Remaining gasoline engine range @ Remaining electric motor range G@) Tips
The values given are based on the latest consumption values.
Roem eee)
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
els Sete ae Le
Smeal
Vets ETCeCeTeanTaireneaaur) arte)

8V2012721B)

Fig. 98 Infotainment system: e-tron range monitor
Opening the range monitor The range monitor in the Infotainment system showsthe relationship between energy consumers and electric range > fig. 98. The three largest >
95

e-tron
energy consumerswill be listed in sequential order. Switching off the consumersincreases the electric range. > Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] but-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Range & statistics > Range.
Opening the statistics
The statistics in the Infotainment system show the distances driven without emissions (electric) and with fuel. The values are taken from the short-term memory and long-term memory of the on-board computer. > Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] but-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Range & statistics > e-tron statistics. > To switch between the short-term and longterm memory, turn the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel.
Setting plug-in hybrid drive modes
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
You can select between one electric mode and two hybrid modes.
TSg=©axr|.
Fig. 99 Center console: Button <SY
> Press the $Y button repeatedly until the desired drive mode is displayed in the instrument cluster/Infotainment system display.
You can change modes when the vehicleis stationary or while driving. If the vehicle operating conditions will not allow you to set the mode manually, the last active mode is selected. The active mode is displayed the first time the <-$" button is pressed.

<SV e-tron mode: EV - EV mode is electric driving only. EV mode is active at the beginning of every trip depending on the operating condition of the vehicle. The LED in the <$¥ button turns on. The B indicator light also appears in the instrument cluster. The gasoline engine remains turned off, as long as the conditions for electric driving are met > page 96, Conditions for electric driving.
© e-tron mode: Hybrid - The electric motor and the gasoline engine work efficiently together in hybrid mode. The high-voltage battery will be used to the fullest extent when this mode is switched on. This mode is best suited for long distances.
*S e-tron mode: Battery Hold - The electric motor and the gasoline engine work together in Battery Hold mode, so that the high-voltage battery charge level is maintained as much as possible.
@ Tips
-- Applies to: Battery Hold mode: The highvoltage battery charge level can still decrease depending on the driving behavior.
-- If you select the sport driving mode "S", the Battery Hold mode is automatically selected.
-- If the <8' > page 96 button is pressed while in sport driving mode "S", the transmission switches automatically to normal mode "D".
-- When temperaturesare below approximately 14 °F (-10 °C), the vehicle heat output in EV mode is reducedin order to attain higher ranges. If the windowsfog up or a higher heat output is desired, switch on the Hybrid or Battery Hold mode.
Conditions for electric driving
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
The EV mode can only be switched on if the following conditions are met:
--The charge level of the high-voltage battery mustbe sufficient.
-- The temperature of the high-voltage battery must be adequate (outside temperatures not >

below approximately 14°F / -10°C and not above 104°F / 40°C) -- The speed mustnot be higher than approximately 80 mph (130 km/h). -- Kick-down mustnot be activated. --The sport drive mode "S" must not be selected.
EV mode is switched off if one or more of the conditions are not met. The gasoline engine will start automatically. The indicator light turns on as a message in the instrument cluster. The LED in the <8 button and the B indicator light turn off. If the Tachometer display is selected on vehicles with an Audi virtual cockpit in the instrument cluster*, the indicator light is hidden => page 93.
Electric drive mode will not continue automatically. Reactivate the EV mode > page 96.
@ Tips
-- It may be necessary for the gasoline engine
to run longer for technical reasons, such as when condensation accumulatesin the en-
gine. Driving exclusively in electric mode is not possible in this phase. -- Applies to: Automatic transmission: Before driving downhill a long distance on a steep hill, decrease your speed and select a lower gear. When driving with a trailer, the "S" selector lever position must be selected. This makesuse of the engine braking effect and reduces the load placed on the brakes. If you need to brake additionally, brakein intervals and not continuously.
Plug-in hybrid functions
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
The functions described below activate automatically depending on the driving style.

e-tron
Full-throttle acceleration (boost)
The boost function is activated by pressing the accelerator pedal all the way down. The vehicleis powered by both the gasoline engine and the electric motor when in full acceleration. Boostis
only available for a short time, becauseit uses a large amount of energy. Availability depends on
the high-voltage battery charge level.
Coasting
The gasoline engine switches off and disengages at speeds up to approximately 112 mph (180 km/h)if the accelerator pedal is not pressed and the "D"position is selected. Driving conservatively like this can reduce fuel consumption.
Energy recovery (recuperation)
When braking, the electric motor will act as a generator creating electric energy that is then stored in the high-voltage battery. This also occurs when the vehicle is coasting or driving downhill.
If the brakes are applied early and evenly, the electric motor will brake the vehicle 2) => page 93,fig. 96. By doing this, a large amount of the kinetic energy is recovered and may be stored as electric energy in the high-voltage battery. The conventional brakes are also activated when the brakesare pressed very hard.
The strength of recuperation can depend on the following factors:
-- If you are in tiptronic mode > page 86. Or -- If the sport driving mode "S"was selected.
The energy recovery is shownin the energy flow display in the instrument cluster display/Infotainment system > page 99.

8V2012721B)

e-tron

BET Meleaiaimee aiare)
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

Driving situations Conditions

Vehicle behavior

- Cautious driving and reserved ac- The kinetic energy of the vehicle is used to

celeration.

movethe vehicle.

Constant driving and - Release the accelerator pedal

coasting (gliding)

early and entirely.

The gasoline engine turns off automatically and disengages when you release the
accelerator pedal completely. The vehicle glides without being propelled.

Energyrecovery (recuperation)

- Brake early and evenly with short pedal movements.

The electric motor brakes the vehicle. By
doing this, a large amount of the kinetic energy is recovered and maybe stored in
the high-voltage battery in the form of electric energy.

Driving in city traffic

- Accelerate moderately and brake The kinetic energy of the vehicle is used to

early and evenly.

movethe vehicle.

Driving on highways and expressways

- Intentionally take your foot off of The gasoline engine turns off automati-

the gas pedal to allow for pro-

cally and disengages when you release the

longed coasting.

accelerator pedal completely. The vehicle

glides without being propelled.

-- Reduce the vehicle speed by releasing the accelerator pedal and not by braking.

Fuel consumption can be reduced by coasting.

- Use the "S" selector lever position A sporty driving style increases fuel con-

and tiptronic mode sparingly.

sumption.

- Do not run the gasoline engine to The temperature of the gasoline engine

warm the engine while the vehicle rises very slowly and the fuel consump-

is parked

tion increases considerably.

- Use the rear window/exterior mir- This conserves the energy in the high-volt-

Driving in cold weather

ror defogger and the seat heating sparingly.

- Park the vehicle in a garage over-

age battery so that it is available to run the vehicle in electric mode.
This reduces exposure of the high-voltage

night.

battery to cold temperatures. The re-

quired temperature range for the high-

voltage battery will then be reached more

quickly after you start driving.

Energy flow display
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

B8V-0675

Comfort Auto
DTT Sic

e-tron

Fig. 100 Instrument cluster: energy flow display

Fig. 101 Infotainment system*: energyflow display

An energy flow display can be shown in the in-
strumentclusterdisplay/Infotainment system )).
The image is animated in the Infotainmentsys-
tem).
Display of energy flowindicator in the instrument cluster display
> Open the first Vehicle tab (trip computer) using the [<>] button on the multifunction steering wheel.
> Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit: Select on the multifunction steering wheel: left control button > Energy flow.

> Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster: Open the Energy flow indicator by turning the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel.
Image in the Infotainment display!)
> In the Infotainment system, select: [MENU button > Vehicle > left control button > Audi drive select.

Component @ Gasoline engine @ High-voltage battery
Motion arrow

Color
Orange Gray Green Green (animated in the Infotainment sys-
tem ?))
Gray
Green Orange
Green-orange

@) Motion arrow

Green

@) Notavailable in all Infotainmentsystems.

Meaning The gasoline engine is running The gasoline engine is off High-voltage battery charge level The high-voltage battery is charging
The vehicle is not in drive ready mode Electric driving Driving with the gasoline engine Driving with the gasoline engine and electric mo-
tor (boost)
Recuperation

)) Notavailablein all Infotainment systems.
99

8V2012721B)

e-tron
Vehicle tool kit and tire mobility kit
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

nn ies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

©¥g=©a6zB

The term "vehicle battery" refers to the 12 volt battery in your vehicle.

Fig. 102 Luggage compartment:vehicle toolkit andtire mobility kit
The vehicle tool kit and the tire mobility kit (Tire Mobility System)are located in the side trim pan-
el @ and in the luggage compartment.
Additional information about the vehicle tool kit may be found under > page 368 and information about the tire mobility kit under > page 369.
@ Tips
The vehicle must not be operated without the
tire repair set.
Wala mar lary lela
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
This section contains information you should know about transporting yourvehicle.
A lithium-ion high-voltage battery system equipped in your vehicle has passed test 38.3 in accordance with the UN Tests and Criteria handbook and is manufactured in accordance with a quality managementprogram. The vehicle may be transported with the high-voltage battery installed as conventional class 9 hazardous materials without additional official authorization for air and sea shipment (current law IATA-DGR and IMDG code 01.01.2018).

Fig. 103 Engine compartment: connectorsfor a charger and jump start cables
The vehicle is equipped with one vehicle battery and one high-voltage battery.
If the vehicle battery is drained, it can be charged with a charger or you can jump start the vehicle using another vehicle's battery in the same way as a conventional vehicle.
Read the information about charging the vehicle battery > page 336 and for jump starting the vehicle > page 383.
> Open the hood > page 327. » Removethe fuse box cover (8) to access the
positive terminal ) > page 328. > Clamp the terminal clamps from the charging
device or jump start cable to the positive terminal @) and to the body ground point ©).
() Note
You mustnotgive a jump start with your vehicle. This could causesignificant damage to the electrical system in your vehicle.

100

Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

Refueling
Opening the fuel filler door
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

e-tron
2g>aa

8V2012721B) B8V-0559

Fig. 104 Engine compartment: coolant expansion tank

Your vehicle has two coolant expansion tanks that are separate from each other:

@: expansion tank for gasoline engine and electric motor.

@®):expansion tank for the high-voltage area.

The expansiontank
>/\.

must not be opened

> Switch the ignition off. > Open the hood > page 327.
> Always check the coolant level in both coolant
expansion tanks @) and using the outer
markings. > When you fill coolant in the expansion tank @),
please refer to > page 332, Cooling system.
> Do notdrive anyfarther if the coolant level in the expansion tank is low. Contact an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately > A\.

ZA WARNING
-- Read and follow the warnings in => page 325, General information before opening the hood and checking the coolant level.
-- The expansion tank may only be opened and filled by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Coolant can enter the inside of the highvoltage battery when filling the expansion tank and cause a shortcircuit, which increasesthe risk offire.

Fig. 105 Driver's door: Button A)
The tank system mustbe vented beforerefueling
> Switch the ignition off with the START ENGINE STOP] button.
> Pull the M switch.
> The fuel filler door will open automatically after venting is complete.
Read and follow the directions for inserting the fuel pump nozzle > page 101.
Read and follow the instructions for refueling => page 322.
Inserting the fuel pump nozzle
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

Fig. 106 Fueling procedure: insert the fuel pump nozzle correctly

Makesure when inserting the fuel pump nozzle

that you do not press on the fuel filler door open-

er @ withthe fuel pump nozzle. See the label in

the fuel filler door ©. Otherwise, a valve will

close in the fuel filler neck and fueling will stop

even if the tank is not full.

101

e-tron

You must vent the tank system again if you press on the fuel filler door opener. The fuel pump nozzle can stay in the fuel filler neck when doing this. Vent the tank system bypulling the A) switch again in the driver's door > page 101.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
iy Fuel filler door open. Please press button again to refuel
Fueling is possible for a little while after pressing
the Gf) button. You must press the f button
again if the time limit is exceeded.
AN] Fuel filler door: malfunction! Unlock fuel filler door manually. See owner's manual
There is a malfunction. You must manually unlock the fuel filler door > page 102.
fw Warning! Vehicle performance maybelimited
The fuel tank is almost empty. You mustanticipate a significant power loss. Drive immediately to agas station.
|"POWER Warning! Limited performance
The gasoline engine is no longer available because there is not enough fuel. Drive immediately to a gas station.
Fuel filler door emergency release
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
You must use the emergencyrelease to open the fuel filler door when there is a malfunction => page 324.
The tank is not vented. You can onlyfill a small amount offuel in the tank.
> Fill only until the automatic fuel pump nozzle turns off for the first time when it is operated correctly.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

G) Tips
Pressure can escape if you open the tank cap after using the emergencyrelease. This can create noises.
Charging
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
Twooptions are available for charging the vehicle:
-- Charge at a public charging station with a special charging cable* > page 105.
-- Charge with household and industrial* sockets using the Audi charging system > page 106.
Using the charging equipment
Pay attention to the following information for safe handling of the charging equipment:
-- Secure the charging equipment against any strain, such as being run over,falling, pulling, bending, and crushing.
-- Do not submerge the charging equipment in water and do notcover it with snowor ice.
-- Only pull at the plugs when removing the charging cable from the vehicle and from the power supply.
-- Put the cap on after using the charging cable. -- Only operate the Audi charging system ina
power supply system with a frequency of
50 Hz/60 Hz. -- Only operate the Audi charging system at a hu-
midity level between 5% and 95% (non-condensing). -- The Audi charging system is protected against dust and splashing water (IP54 (USA: enclosure 3R)) or protected against dust and jet streams of water (IP55 (USA: Enclosure 3))
Depending on the country,different warnings may be on the charging equipment.

102

Symbol
<4000m
st WY SBS
Ys

Meaning
Operate the Audi charging system at a temperature range of -22 °F (-30 °C) to +122 °F (+50 °C).
Operate the Audi charging system at a maximum elevation of 13,000 ft (4,000 m)abovesea level. The Audi charging system's equip= ped with a ground conductor that is

not connected.

The Audi charging system is equip-

dpuecdtwoirth a connected ground con-

sDyosntoetm oipnerpaotweelrthnee)tAwuodrlkcshtahragtinagre

not grounded (for example, IT net-

works). Only operate the Audi

charging system in grounded power

networks.

Surfaces can become very hot when in direct sunlight.

Incorrect use increases the risk of electric shock.

Pay attention to the applicable owner's manual, particularly the safety precautions.
Pay attention to all applicable disposal regulations when disposing. Do not use any extensions cords or cable reels. Do not use anytravel adapters.
Do not use any power strips.
Do not use any charging cables with damage tothe electronics or the connecting wires.

e-tron
Grounding instructions
Audi charging systems must be grounded. Ifit should malfunction or break down, grounding provides a path of least resistance for electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock. Audi charging systems are equipped with a cord having an equipment grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.
A WARNING Improper connecti: on of the equi. pmentgrounding conductor is able to result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician or serviceman if you are in doubt as to whether the productis properly grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the product - if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
Important safety precautions
Z\ WARNING
Sockets that are installed incorrectly can causeelectric shock or fire when charging the high-voltage battery using the vehicle charging connection. -- Read all information and safety precautions
for the Audi charging system before using the Audi charging system. -- Monitor the Audi charging system when it is being used near children. -- Installation and setup of the household connection for the Audi charging system may only be performed by a qualified electrician. The qualified electrician is thereby fully responsible for adhering to applicable standards and regulations. -- Makesure that the selected charging connector is suitable for drawing the current specified on the Audi charging system. -- Make sure that the household socketis grounded and shielded from water.

8V2012721B)

103

e-tron
-- The Audi charging system may only be used with a power network that is grounded properly. It cannot be used with non-grounded power networks(such as IT networks).
-- Please follow the safety precautions in the assembly instructions for the Audi charging dock* or the Audi charging clip*.
Z\WARNING
If you are not familiar with the socket or the electrical installation or it has not been checked by qualified experts, never use it for charging. Even very low charging currents can cause serious damage and in particular fires if the socket or electrical installation is in bad condition. If necessary, get expert assistance from a qualified electrical installation specialist.
Z\ WARNING
Incorrect handling of the connector contacts can causeelectric shock or fire. -- Do not touch the contacts for the vehicle
charging port and for the Audi charging sys-
tem.
-- Do not insert any objects into the vehicle charging portor into the Audi charging sys-
tem.
-- Protect the sockets and connectors against any moisture, water and other fluids.
Z\ WARNING
Using a damaged or incorrect charging cable or socket, using the Audi charging system incorrectly, or disregarding the safety precau-
tions could cause short circuiting, electric shock, explosions, fires, and burns.
-- Do not use the Audi charging system if it is damagedand/or dirty. Check the cable and connector for damage and dirt before using.
-- The Audi charging system mustonly be connected to sockets that are installed correctly and that are not damaged, or to electrical equipment that is functioning correctly.
-- Never use the Audi charging system with an extension cable, a cable reel, a power strip,

or an adapter, for example, a travel adapter or timer.
-- Disconnect the Audi charging system from the power network during a thunderstorm.
-- Do not modify or repair any electrical com-
ponents.
-- Never submerge the Audi charging systems
or the connectorsin water.
-- The Audi charging system mustonly be cleaned when the control unit is completely disconnected from the power supply and from the vehicle. Use a dry towel to clean.
--Ifa110 volt household socket is used for charging, only connect one vehicle at a time to the same circuit. Use a different circuit if an additional vehicle needs to be charged at the same time. Note the maximum permitted current draw for the circuit. Contact a qualified electrical technician if there is any doubt.
-- If Audi charging systems do not function according to the specifications in the operating manual, they must not be used. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Audi charging systems are intended for use in private and semi-private areas (for example, private property and companyparking lots). Depending on the country, charging in mode 2 maybe forbidden in public areas and public spaces. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.
-- Do not disconnect the vehicle charging cable from the socket or the vehicle charging port while the vehicle is charging. End the charging process before removing the vehicle charging cable from the socket in order to reduce the risk of damaging the connector contacts from sparks.
ZA WARNING
The componentsin the Audi charging system can trigger sparks which can cause flammable or explosive fumesto ignite. --To reduce the risk of explosions, especially in
garages, makesure the control unit is at

104

least 19 inches (50 cm) abovethe floor when charging. -- Do not use the Audi charging system in areas at risk for explosions. -- The Audi charging system is only intended for use on Audi vehicles and vehicles within the Volkswagen Group. Using the device on vehicles made by another manufacturer is not authorized.
@) Note
Makesure that you always use the correct power plug provided with the Audi charging system for the country in which it is being used. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for moreinformation.
@ Tips
-- Only use the factory-provided charging cable from Audi or the Volkswagen Group to charge your vehicle.
-- For an uninterrupted charging process, we recommend only charging using sockets that are connected to a separately protected circuit.
-- Using either NEMA sockets with a current rating of at least 30 A or industrial sockets in accordance with IEC 60309 when charging is recommended.
-- When charging the high-voltage battery using household or industrial* sockets, the electrical installation can be used at full capacity. Having a qualified electrician regularly inspect the electrical installations that are used for charging is recommended.
-- The vehicle radio and TV systems may have limited reception when charging the vehicle.
Charging at public charging stations
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
Use the charging cable supplied at the public charging station for charging. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.

e-tron
> Follow the operating instructions at the charging station to charge the high-voltage battery.
> Unlock the vehicle if necessary > page 30. > Make sure that the selector lever is in the P po-
sition and drive ready mode is switched off. > Turn the lock until it is vertical to open the cov-
er on the charging unit > page 109,fig. 113. > Slide the cover carefully to the side if necessary. > Removethe lock on the charging port
=> page 109, fig. 114. > Removethe cap from the charging cable. > Connect the cable to the vehicle charging port. > If acharging timer is not set, the charging proc-
ess will start automatically depending on the charging station > page 110, Setting the charging timer. > The vehicle operating status is indicated by the status LED > table on page 113. > Also read the information found in > page 112, After charging.
(i) Tips
Only charge your vehicle at charging stations that conform to the following standards, depending on the country:
-- GB/T 18487.1 and GB/T 20234 (China)
-- IEC 61851 and IEC 62196 (Europe) -- SAE J1772 (North America, Japan)
G) Tips
-- It is not possible to charge using the charging timer at some charging stations.
-- You can use your Audi charging system if there is a household or industrial* connection available at the charging station.

8V2012721B)

105

e-tron
Charging the battery with the Audi charging system
(Gieleneine) ad (li
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

until the temperature has lowered back within the normal range.
Changing and attaching the power/vehicle cable
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

B4G-0681

Fig. 107 Audi charging system overview (example)
@ Power cable
@ Power plug (for industrial sockets)*
@®) Power plug (for household sockets)
@ Control unit
© Vehicle charging connector (connector for the vehicle)
© Vehicle cable
The power cable @) is plugged into the upper end
of the control unit and the vehicle cable ©) is
plugged into the lower end of the control unit @).
Thereare different charging systems depending on the market and the equipment:
-- Charging system (version 1) > page 110 -- Charging system (version 2) > page 115
@ Tips
-- Using the control unit while operating the charging dock* > page 107 or charging clip* = page 107 is recommended. When this is not possible, always position Audi charging systems on secure surface during the charging process.
-- To reducethe risk of overheating during operation, do not place the Audi charging system in direct sunlight for long periods of time. If the control unit is overheated, the charging process is automatically paused

Fig. 108 Control unit: removing and attaching the cable
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may not be able to change the vehicle cable.
Requirements:
> The charging process for the high-voltage battery must be ended.
> The vehicle charging connector mustbe removed from the vehicle charging port.
> The power cable must be removed from the socket.
Loosening the cable
> If necessary, loosen the screw @) > fig. 108 using the screwdriver provided.
> Lift the lever @ all the way up.
> Pull the connector @) out just until you feel resistance.
> Close the lever @ until it is resting on the con-
nector (2).
> Remove the connector (2) completely.
Attaching the cable
> Lift the lever @ up slightly.
> Insert the connector @) into the control unit just until you feel resistance.
> Lift the lever @ all the wayup.
> Insert the connector (2) all the way into the control unit.
> Close the lever @).
> Tighten the screw (3) using the screwdriver provided.

106

ZA\ WARNING
-- Always remove the power cable from the socket before changing the power cable or vehicle cable.
-- Alwaysfollow the instructions given when charging the high-voltage battery.
-- Only change cablesin a dry environment. -- The Audi charging system may only be used
as a complete unit consisting of the power cables, the control unit, and the vehicle cable. We recommend using only cables approved by Audi.
Charging dock
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive and charging dock
2é=&3
a
Fig. 109 Opening/closing the charging dock
3Z3&|
a

e-tron
Mounting the charging system in the charging dock
> Open the door on the charging dock. » First insert the control unit in the bottom tabs
on the charging dock and then into the upper tabs. > Push the control unit toward the rear and letit lock into place. > Guide the vehicle cable through the opening @) > fig. 110. > Wrap the extra cable length around the adapter ©. > Plug the power cable into the socket in the charging dock. > Close the door. > After charging, you can place the vehicle charging connector () > page 106, fig. 107 in the holder on the charging dock door > fig. 109.
Removing the charging system from the charging dock
> Open the door on the charging dock. » Removethe power cable connector from the
socket in the charging dock. >» Unwrap the cable from the adapter (8). > To loosen the control unit from the holder,
press the release tabs above the control unit in the direction of the arrow © fig. 110.
(i) Tips
-- Alwayskeep the door on the charging dock closed.
-- Do not place any objects on the door or the charging dock.

Fig. 110 Charging dock: mounting the charging system
You can store the charging system in the charging dock.
Opening/closing the charging dock
> If necessary, you can unlock/lock the charging dock using the key provided by turning it to the unlocked position or locked position @) > fig. 109.
> Opening/closing the door on the charging dock.

(eerie mat)
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive and charging clip
Fig. 111 Charging clip: charging system connected

8V2012721B) RAZ-0075|

107

e-tron
Connecting the charging system to the charging clip > First insert the control unit in the bottom tabs
on the charging clip and then into the upper tabs. > Push the control unit in the direction of the arrow toward the rear > fig. 111 and letit lock into place. > Wrap the extra cable length around the charg-
ing connector mount (4).
> Plug the power cableinto the socket(2). > After charging, you can hook the vehicle charg-
ing connector () > page 106, fig. 107 to the charging connector mount (@) © fig. 111. Removing the charging system from the charging clip > Remove the power cable connector from the
socket (2).
> Unwind the cable from the charging connector
mount (4).
> To loosen the control unit from the bracket,
push the locking mechanism@) upward
> fig. 111.
Mey Sadie)
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
Fig. 112 Storage bag
> Store the charging system and the special charging cable* in the bag before transporting.
> Secure the bag using the tie-downs > page 65. The flat hook mustbe secured tothe left side of the tie-downs.
ZA\ WARNING
-- If the vehicle charging cable is not secured or positioned correctly, it can slide out of

place and endanger vehicle occupants when braking, when changing directions, or in an accident. -- Never transport the Audi charging system or the special charging cable* without securing them. -- Store the Audi charging system or the special charging cable* in the storage bag in the luggage compartment. -- Alwaystransport the storage bag in the lug-
gage compartmentand never in the passenger compartment(for example the seats or in front of them).
() Note
Alwayslift or transport the Audi charging system as an entire unit and never by the cables.

Charging time
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

The length of the charging process using the Audi charging system may vary based on the following factors:

-- The sockets that are used (household or industrial* sockets)
-- The system voltage and current strength that are specific to a country
-- The value set for the charging power level on the control unit (50% or 100%).
-- Fluctuations in the system voltage -- The temperature outside the vehicle -- The temperature of the high-voltage battery -- Settings for the climate control inside the vehi-
cle -- Current capacity of the charging connector -- Whether the ignition is on or off

Example charging times

Connection
Household socket (100 V, 10 A) Household socket (120 V, 10 A) Household socket (220 V, 8A)

Charging time at 100% charge
approximately 10 hours
approximately 8.2 hours
approximately 5.2 hours

108

Connection

Charging time at 100% charge

Household socket
(230 V, 10 A)

approximately 3.8
hours

Industrial socket (200 V, approximately 2.3

16 A)

hours

Industrial socket (220 V, approximately 2.3

16 A)

hours

Industrial socket (230 V, approximately 2.3

16 A)

hours

Industrial socket (240 V, approximately 2.3

16 A)

hours

@ Tips
-- Multiple versions of charging cablesare offered due to the different power supply systems in different countries. The maximum charging power maypotentially be unavailable because of this. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.
-- Charging may take longer when temperatures are extremely high or low.
--The charging time at public charging stations mayvary from the times given in the table > table on page 108.

ETSMCs Tale)
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
2ay=+ge

e-tron
e3o+yS >@oO
Fig. 114 Radiator grille: charging port cap
> Unlock the vehicle if necessary > page 30. > Make sure the "P" selector lever position is en-
gaged, the parking brakeis set, and ready mode is switched off > page 92. > Turn the lock until it is vertical to open the cover on the charging unit > fig. 113. > Slide the cover carefully to the side if necessary. > Removethe lock on the charging port > fig. 114.
> Insert the plug @) or @) into the socket
=> page 106,fig. 107. > Plug the vehicle charging connector (5)
=> page 106, fig. 107 into the vehicle charging port > fig. 114. The charging process starts automatically if no charging timer is set.
@) Tips Removeice and snow from the cover using a hand brush and solvent-free deicing spray.

Fig. 113 Radiator grille: opening the charging unit cover

8V2012721B)

109

e-tron

Charging system (version 1)
Charging overview
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

RAZ-0076,

The meaning ofthe different status displays for the charging system and the vehicle can be found under > page 112, Status displays.
ZA WARNING
The control unit is malfunctioning if the LED @ is red. Disconnect the control unit from the power supply. Refer to this chapter => page 112, Status displays.

I9IxfSNc
Fig. 116 Radiator grille: vehicle charging port and button module
There are different control units depending on the vehicle equipment. Check the image > fig. 115 or > page 115,fig. 118 to see which control unit applies to your vehicles. The charging unit is located behind the Audi rings on the front ofthe vehicle.
@ © Button/LED
@ Displayfield
@ Arrow buttons @[CK] Button
© Charging timer button
© Status LED
@ Immediate charging button

G) Tips
-- The device runs a self test after power has been restored to the control unit.
-- You can activate a PIN for the control unit => page 114.
-- The vehicle cannot be started if a charging
connector is connected.
(eae Tse Tiare)
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
You can switch between the immediate charging
@ and charging timer ©) options > page 110,
fig. 116 during the charging process if a charging timer has been set. Press the desired button to do this > page 110,fig. 116.
You havedifferent charging options:
Immediate charging
To start the charging process immediately, press
the button @ > page 110, fig. 116. The LED in the button will turn on.
Setting the charging timer
You can delay the charging time with the charging timer in the Infotainment system 2). You can set twodifferent timers.
> If a timer has been set, press the button G) => page 110, fig. 116. The LED in the button will turn on.
> To set a charging timer, select: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Charge > right control button > Program timer.
> Select Individual timer or Repeat timer.

D_ Notavailablein all Infotainment systems.
110

e-tron

> Set the departure time, the date or day of the week.
> You can specify a preferred charging time with the charging timer, for example if you would like to use the off-peak rate.
> You can activate the auxiliary air conditioning with the charging timer while charging byselecting Air conditioning with the control knob. AV appearsin the box. This activation is separate from the Infotainment system settings in the climate control menu > page 121.
> Press the [BACK] button.
> To activate the desired timer, confirm the set-
ting with the control knob. A ¥ appearsin the box.
Power save mode
Power save mode is automatically switched on when the control unit has not been operated for more than one minute. The LED @) > page 110, fig. 115 stays on. All other displays turn off.
> To switch power save mode on or off, press the
® button @ > page 110,fig. 115.
Power save mode ends automatically when the vehicle charging connector is plugged into the vehicle.
The LED @ blinks when the high-voltage battery is charging.
@) Tips
-- Auxiliary climate control is powered electrically if you select climate control using the charging timer. This mayalso be used in confined spaces such as garages.
-- Using the auxiliary climate control while charging can also reduce the charge level of the high-voltage battery.
-- The high-voltage battery also chargesin power save mode.
-- If the charging process is in progress, it will not be interrupted when power save mode switches on.
-- The charging process can be interrupted at any time. Press the active button on the vehicle to do this > page 110,fig. 116.
-- The climate control output while charging depends on the capacity of the electrical

connection. Additional information on climate control can be found under > page 121.
Setting the charging power level
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
The control unit automatically recognizes the voltage and the available current strength. You can set whether you would like to charge with the full or half of the charging power.
> Press the [OK] @) > page 110, fig. 115 button on the control unit.
> Enter the PIN if necessary. > POWER and SETPIN appear in the display
field. > Select POWER using the arrow buttons (3).
> Press the [OK] button @).
> The charging power display appears. The current set value (50% or 100%) is marked with a frame.
> If necessary, change the setting using the arrow button @) to move downward or upward.
> Press the [OK] button @).
G) Tips
-- If a household socketis used for the charging process, the charging power level is automatically set to 100%. If multiple electri-
cal consumersare connected to circuit,
the charging power maybe limited to 50% when charging with a household socket in order to relieve the load on the electrical installation. --If an industrial socket is used for the charging process, the charging power level is automatically set to 50%. To receive the maximum charging power, the value must be set to 100%. -- A selected value remains set until the power cable is connected again.

8V2012721B)

111

e-tron
Nilaie leet ile]
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive 3aiBr£ee
Fig. 117 Radiator grille: unlocking and removing the vehicle charging connector
After completing the charging or climate control process, the vehicle enters a sleep mode. No displays are visible on the charging unit during this period. Deactivating sleep mode > Unlock the vehicle > page 30. Or > Open the driver's door. Or
> Press the Z) button > page 110,fig. 116.

Unlocking the vehicle charging connector
> Press the release (@) > fig. 117. > Removethe vehicle charging connector (2).
Closing the charging unit
> Put the cap back on the charging port => page 109, fig. 114.
> Carefully slide the cover back in its original position.
> Turn the lock to the horizontal position => page 109, fig. 113.
() Note
If you drive with an open charging unit, both the cover and the electronics installed behind it could be damaged.
(i) Tips
The instrument cluster will indicateif the charging unit is open while driving. Check before every drive after charging if the cover is locked.

Status displays
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

You can check the operating status using the LED
on the control unit @,the display field @)

Charging system: control unit

LED on the control

Syymmbbooll| E Error coddie

unit®

=> page 110, fig. 115, and the status LED on the vehicle ©) > page 110,fig. 116

Meeanain.ing

So`loultuition

OmD
D > AND

Blue Green

White

AP Gray 330,340 Red

Flashing Self test

On BIShing
On
On

Cable inserted correctly. Cable iinserted and charg = ing.
Self test completed suc-
cessfully, cable is not con-
nected or is connected incorrectly to the vehicle charging port.
Coarabble fleauilntisye.rtetedd iincorrectttly

Insert the cable correctly.
Check the cable and insert eitsbcolrerectly or replace the

112

e-tron

Symbol| Error code

LED on the control
uni.t @

Meaning

Solution

200, 210, 260, 410,
a Gimd 450, 460, Red 490, 500
eae 180,190 |Red

ane

130, 140,
470

Red

Safsey 330700,, 331900, Red

Cee=s 480

Re©d

`wy 110

Red

On
On
On On Flaassnhi; ng
Flashing

Erroriin the controbunit.

Thehaetcionngtorrolnoutnciaot.oils eovder-
enough.
Chioacmleme uins imcaalftuinocntiti oonitnhge.ve-
sEtrarlolratiinotnh.e household in-
Fault in the household installation.

Ground fault interrupter (GFI) triggered in the control unit.

Disconnect the control unit from the power supply and have the malfunction corrected at an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
hear Acolollowdothwen caornotrpoelrautnaitittion
the specified temperature range.
Have the malfunction corAruecdtie: ddebaylearnoaruatuhtohroirzieP zded Audi Service Facility.
---- Hhunchhe eckeleactdricMal e aicaatil-
fied electrician.
Havethe electrical installation up to the control unit checked by a qualified electrician.
Reset the ground fault in-
terrupter with the [OK] @)
button > page 110, fig, 715. Have the electrical installation checked by a qualified electrician if the same display appears.

Vehicle: charging unit
LED on vehicle ©)
On

Meaning
Hpirg.'ohg-cveosvltsoargiesacgoembplbaettteerdy.chhargi. ng

Green

Flashing

The high-voltage battery is charging or the vehicle is being air con-
ditioned/heated.

Blinks for approximately one minute after leaving the vehicle

Charging timer was programmed but the charging process has not started yet. The LED in the button © > page110,fig. 116 also
turns on.

Solution
Removethe charger, put the cap ochnaarngid. ncglounsie`t.the cover on the

8V2012721B)

113

e-tron

LED on vehicle©)
On
Yellow
Flashi` ng
On Red

Meaning
No power supply was recognized even though the charging cable is
plugged in.
TpohseiatsAieolne.ctor lever in notin the P
The charging connector could not be correctly locked in the vehicle charging port.
Fault in the charging system. The

Solution
Have the power supply or power supply system inspected. Check the status display on the control unit > table on page 112. See an
authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility for assistance if necessary.
pMoosvieutttiohne. selector lever into the P
Check if the charging connector is inserted correctly > page 110. Remove the charging connector and insert it into the charging port again. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance if necessary.

Flashing

oo babteny carnage

Or: too

Tl9howe.oTuhtesi. hdie. gthe-mvpoelrtaatguerbeaitst. ery

could not be fully charged.

See an authorized Audi dealer or aasustih.sotraniczeeidf:AundeiceSsesravriyc.e Facility for

@ Tips The operation status indicated by the LED ©)
on the vehicle is also displayed in the instrumentcluster display/Infotainment system.
Audi charging system PIN
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
The control unit can be locked by entering a 4digit PIN of your choice. If a PIN is activated, the selected PIN must be entered before every use.
We recommend locking your control unit to protect it against unauthorized access by a third party.

> Select the desired value by pressing the arrow
buttons (@) up or down.
» Use the right arrow button @) to go to the next digit.
> Press the left arrow button @) to go to the pre-
vious menu.
> Enter all of the digits.
> Press the [OK] button @) afterthe last digit.
> REPEATPIN appearsin the display field. > Enter the PIN again using the arrow buttons
®.
> Press the [OK] button @).
> PIN OK appearsin the displayfield if both en-
tries match. > The PIN is now activated.

Activating the PIN
> Press the [OK] (@) > page 110,fig. 115 button on the control unit. POWER and SETPIN appear in the displayfield.
> Select SET PIN using the arrow button @). > Press the [OK] button @). ENTER PIN appearsin
the displayfield.

Deactivating the PIN Requirement: the control unit must be unlocked.
> Enter the numerical code 0000. Proceed as if you wereactivating the PIN > page 114.
> The PIN is deactivated.
Locking the control unit

Requirement: the PIN mustbe activated.

114

e-tron

> Press the @) button @ page 110,fig. 115 on the control unit.
Unlocking the control unit
Requirement: the PIN mustbeactivated.
> Press any button on the control unit. > PIN? appearsin the display field. > Enter the PIN.
> Press the [OK button @).
@) Tips
-- The PIN is deactivated in the factory default settings.
-- If you do not remember your PIN, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- If the first PIN entry differs from the second entry,the first PIN entry is displayed.
- If nothing is entered within 20 seconds of
this, the set value is not changed.
Charging system (version 2)
Charging overview
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

RAZ-0077

There are different control units depending on the vehicle equipment. Check the image = page 110, fig. 115 or > fig. 118 to see which
control unit applies to your vehicles.

The charging unit is located behind the Audi rings on the front of the vehicle.

On/Off button, charging power level,

and LED

Status LED

a Network/house

& Vehicle

0 Control unit

J Reset

Charging timer button

Status LED

Immediate charging button

©/|O|@|©

The meaning ofthe different status displays for
the charging system and the vehicle can be found under > page 117.

@) Tips
-- The device runs a self test after power has been restored to the control unit. If a self test is successful, all indicator lights will illuminate green for two seconds.
-- The vehicle cannotbe started if a charging
connector is connected.

Charging
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

You can switch between the immediate charging
© and charging timer @) options > page 115,
fig. 119 during the charging process if a charging
timer has been set. Press the desired button to do this > page 115,fig. 119.

Immediate charging

To start the charging process immediately, press

the button © > page 115,fig. 119. The LED in

the button will turn on.

8V2012721B)

Fig. 119 Charging unit: vehicle charging connection and button module

115

e-tron
Setting the charging timer
You can delay the charging time with the charging timer in the Infotainment system )). You can set twodifferent timers.
> If a timer has been set, press the button @) => page 115,fig. 119. The LED in the button will turn on.
> To set a charging timer, select: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Charge > right control button > Program timer.
> Select Individual timer or Repeat timer. > Set the departure time, the date or day of the
week. > You can specify a preferred charging time with
the charging timer, for example if you would like to use the off-peak rate. > You can activate the auxiliary air conditioning with the charging timer while charging byselecting Air conditioning with the control knob. AV appearsin the box. This activation is separate from the Infotainment system settings in the climate control menu > page 121. > Press the [BACK] button. > To activate the desired timer, confirm the setting with the control knob. A V appearsin the box.
@) Tips
-- Auxiliary climate control is powered electrically if you select climate control using the charging timer. This mayalso be used in confined spaces such as garages.
-- Using the auxiliary climate control while charging can also reducethe charge level of the high-voltage battery.
-- The charging process can be interrupted at any time. Press the active button on the vehicle to do this > page 115,fig. 119.
-- The climate control output while charging depends on the capacity of the electrical connection. Additional information on climate control can be found under =>page 121.

Setting the charging power level
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
The control unit automatically recognizes the voltage and the available current strength. You can set whether you wouldlike to charge with the full or half of the charging power. With the charging power level, you can reducethe risk of the electrical installation becoming overheated.
> To set the charging power level, press the button @ > page 115,fig. 118.
The charging power display appears. The set value is displayed.
G) Tips
-- If a household socketis used for the charging process, the charging power level is automatically set to 100%. If multiple electrical consumersare connected to circuit, the charging power maybe limited to 50% when charging with a household socketin order torelieve the load on the electrical installation.
-- If an industrial socket is used for the charging process, the charging power level is automatically set to 50%. To receive the maximum charging power, the value must be set to 100%.

Nile lae tials]
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

After completing the charging or climate control process, the vehicle enters a sleep mode. No displays are visible on the charging unit during this period. Always removethe vehicle charging connector first after charging.
The vehicle charging connector is locked during and after charging. You must unlock the connector to removeit.

Unlocking the vehicle charging connector when the vehicle is locked

> Unlock the vehicle. The connector will unlock

for 30 seconds.

))_ Notavailablein all Infotainment systems.
116

> Remove the connector.
> If the connector is not removed within 30 seconds,it will lock again automatically.
Deactivating sleep mode
> Unlock the vehicle > page 30. Or > Open the driver's door. Or > Press the button © > page 115,fig. 119.
Unlocking the vehicle charging connector when thevehicle is unlocked
> If necessary, deactivate sleep mode. > Press the button with the illuminated LED @) or
© 2° page 115,fig. 119. Or
> Press the @ button in the driver's door > page 34, fig. 20or the @ button on the remotecontrol key.
> The connector will unlock for 30 seconds. > Remove the connector. > If the connector is not removed within 30 sec-
onds,it will lock again automatically.

e-tron
Closing the charging unit
>» Put the cap back on the charging port => page 109,fig. 114.
> Carefully slide the cover back in its original position.
> Turn the lock to the horizontal position => page 109,fig. 113.
If you drive with an open charging unit, both the cover and the electronics installed behind it could be damaged.
The instrument cluster will indicate if the charging unit is open while driving. Check before every drive after charging if the cover is locked.

Semele
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
You can check the mode status using the LED on the control unit @or @) > page 115,fig. 118,
Charging system: control unit

and the status LED on the vehicle G) > page 115, fig. 119

aLED

`lumi

blinking green Illuminat-

7 , -- iand y_ellow

2illumi- nated

Off
LED illuminated in white
chargianugdpower Off level
illuminated

aq
0
O30

Tw.isihloelveccrhhhaaerragatieendwgoitirhnlfirrmaeisdtturecudec.dtIurte
ower g Pawel
The charging infrastructure wisi.tovherrheedautciendg.pIotwewri.ll charge
Vehicle is charging.

ptreehiseheeter.rSrIoefrtwshiyelsletraerumotrocmcoaootnlitsci`inaduloelwsyn,;
then you can only charge with reduced power.
After the system cools down, the error will automatically reset.

oa)

Tchha:rgiiengt.rPoloE sunitf S20dy) f(2k

Plug the vehicle charging cchoanrngeicntgor inpotrto the vehicle
SIGIR OE:

117

8V2012721B)

e-tron

yweallnowna

LED illuminated
red

Flashi. ng yellow

The charging infrastructure is overheating. Charging is
interrupted.
The charging infrastructure is overheating. Charging is interrupted.
The charging infrastructure is limited. Charging is interrupted.

After the system cools down,
the error will automatically
reset.
After the system cools down, the error will automatically reset.
The error will reset automatically once the networkis stable again.

T.minahtleefrAurunudcpittiec. odhn.airnggi.nCghsayrsgti.en_gm,_iiss

dSo |reeeraecvltiee. crdieobeFryacLaaiiunlaititahayouu.ratiuh4 zroeradinzeAeucddoiAr`udi.

Check and change charging

The charging infrastructure is insufficient. Charging is in-
terrupted.

infrastructure, if necessary. Have the malfunction corrected by an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi

Service Facility.

118

e-tron

LED
illuminated
red

The Audi charging system is rclufuuncmtieondin,g. ChChaarrgignig ng iis

Have the malfunction corrected by an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi

pests

Service Facility.

Illuminated res
Flashin red 9

Teahtefacuolntt,roClhuanrigtinhgasliantgeecrh:ni- Hreacvteedthbiey marniaakurtunheotriioznecdoArudi.

rupted ;

dealer or authorized Audi

PRES

Service Facility.

Tihse cacfhtarigiongnet.iTnhfrea,stn ructd If the error continues, have eondvereris oe eater the malfunction corrected by
not'oresené: The ar P nd con- an authorized Audi dealer or
vecharsnanitonhector ©" authorized Audi Service Fa-
rupted the chargi. ng process. cility.

The control unit has a techni- Have the malfunctio: n cor- .

|rcualptfaeudlt. , ChargSiIngng is inter- dkeacatlaedr ohrysaauntihoouriiwzaendaAeuddMiuth

prea.

Service Facility.

OE 0
*a (flashes)

[Residual current has been
detected. Charging is interrupted.

Press and hold the *2 button for longer than two seconds.
If the error continues, have
the malfunction corrected by an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility.

The control unit has a serious Hethsolyielvfeuanncatuitheriz-ed

Creal +I t-- echnical -- BEfEaSu:lt. Charagrignigng.!is

AAuuddiiSdeeravliecreoFracaiultithyo.rized

Thereis an overvoltage in

The error will reset automat-

the charging infrastructure. ically once the network is

Charging is interrupted.

stable again.

The charging infrastructure Have the malfunction cor-

and control unit are malfunc- rected by an authorized Audi

tioning. Charging is inter- dealer or authorized Audi

rupted.

Service Facility.

Ox6)

The charging infrastructure
fis faulty. Charging is inter-
rupted.

Hveeredhi. ae luftunhcotirnedAu-di
dealer ory authorized Audi
Service Facility.

8V2012721B)

119

e-tron

LED flaSshiing

Illuminatetedal

The charging infrastructure Have ave th me manlrfaunncetion cor- 7

ivsafparueltdy.: Charging is inter-

dneeaslteerdobryaeuthaourtihzoerdizAeuddAiqui

pre.

Service Facility.

Off

IlLuminated

CO &36-s T-|ishfeauLlEtyD. oCnhatrhgeicno_gni--trs--olinutneri-t

red

rupted.

Vehicle: charging unit

dSHreeearcavvtleiee: cdrtehobeFryacmaaiiunlaatiltharyouu.rtniih.czoteridioznAeucddoAir.udi.

Removethe charger, put the cap

Hpriogchesvsolitsacgoembpaltetteerdy.charging

ochnaarngdic. nlgousneit: .the cover on the

Flashing ESE

The high-voltage battery is charging or the vehicle is being air con-
ditioned/heated.

Blinnkss fifor etei-

Charging timer was programmed

aRfitieartellePaavnitnesgntiihneetvsehicle

but the started

ycehta.rggiingng

P process

has

not

On Yellow

No power supply was recognized even though the charging cable is plugged in.

Have the power supply or power supply system inspected. Check
the status display on the control unit > table on page 117. See an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility for assistance if necessary.

Flashi3 ng

Tpohseivtstieolne.ctor lever in notin the P

pMoosvieatteihoen.selector lever into the P

On Red

The charging connector could not
be correctly locked in the vehicle charging port.

Check if the charging connector is inserted correctly. Remove the charging connector and insert it into the charging port again. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance if necessary.

Fault in the charging system. The

cgi GenteSenniahebe See an authorized Audi dealer or

iasining

Or: The outside temperatureis too low. The high-voltage battery could notbe fully charged.

authorized Audi Service haailayten ¥

120

@) Tips
The operation status indicated by the LED G) on the vehicle is also displayed in the instrumentcluster/Infotainment system.
Indicator lights and
messages
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
If the 09 indicator light turns on, the high-voltage battery is charging or is already completely charged.
If the 105} indicator light stays on, there is a malfunction in the charging system. Have the problem corrected immediately by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Charging connector still attached. Vehicle cannotbe driven
This message appears when the charging system is still connected to the vehicle. Remove the connector > page 112, After charging.
Incompatible charging system. Please check charging system
This message appears when the charging system is incompatible. Only charge using the charging system that is designed for your vehicle.
B@ac charging system: malfunction! Please contact Service
This message appearsif there is a malfunction in the charging system. Have the problem corrected immediately by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Warning! Charging unit cover is unlocked. See owner's manual
This message appearsif the charging unit cover is open. Close the cover and lock it > page 112.

e-tron
Emergency release
Charging unit cover emergencyrelease
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive o6x2=| a

You can release the cover using the emergency release.
> Turn the cover lock to the horizontal position. > Unlock the vehicle. > Open the hood > page 327, Opening and clos-
ing the hood. > Carefully pull on the knob (@) until thereis re-
sistance.
> Turn the cover lock to the vertical position => page 109, fig. 113.
> Slide the cover carefully to the side if necessary.
Climate control

Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive

Your vehicle has auxiliary air conditioning

The auxiliary air conditioning is activated depending on the outside temperature and the tempera-
ture set on the climate control unit. You can immediately switch the climate control on or off => page 122 as wellas set a timer > page 122.

Auxiliary climate control

The auxiliary climate control controls the temper-

ature in the vehicle interior entirely with electric

power.It turns on only if the high-voltage battery

charge level is sufficient and there is enough fuel

in the tank.

8V2012721B)

121

-- The temperaturethat the climate control system adjusts to depends on the last temperature you set in the climate control unit => page 69.
-- Using the auxiliary climate control while charging can also reducethe charge level of the high-voltage battery.
-- The climate control system does not automatically switch on or off earlier if the highvoltage battery charge or fuel level is too low.
Switching on and off
Appliesto: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
Switching the auxiliary climate control on/ off:
> Select the [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Auxiliary air conditioning > Turn on auxiliary heating/AC or Turn off auxiliary A/C.
@ Tips
-- The auxiliary climate control can also be switched on and off immediately when a timer is set.
-- If the bloweris switched off with the $
=> page 69,fig. 79 button, then the auxiliary air conditioning also switches off immediately.
Setting the timer
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
By setting the departure time, you determine when your vehicle should reach the desired temperature. You can set the timer in the auxiliary air conditioning menu in the Infotainment system.
Auxiliary climate control: setting the timer
> Select: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Auxiliary A/C > right control button > Program timer.
>» Set the time and the date. > Press the [BACK] button. > Confirm the setting with the control knob toac-
tivate the timer. A V appearsin the box.
122

When you reprogram a timer, the next calendar day is automatically entered in the Infotainment system. To activate the auxiliary climate control for the next day, confirm the setting (V in the Infotainment system).
Error messages
(A - The high-voltage battery charge level is too low to heat/air condition the vehicle using only electric power.
If one of the following symbols appearsin the display, then you cannot switch on the auxiliary climate control:
2-- - There is a system malfunction.
fh - The fuel level is too low.
(i) Tips
-- You can set the timer a maximum of seven days in advance.
-- You can operate the climate control system in the vehicle when the high-voltage battery is charging using the charging timer => page 110 or > page 116. The climate control output depends on the power socket capacity.
-- Make sure the time and date match in the Infotainment system settings so that the timer can function correctly > page 253.
-- The auxiliary climate control can continue to run after the departure time is reached.
Cleaning and
maintenance
information
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
When washing your vehicle with a pressure washer, always follow the operating instructions provided with the pressure washer.This is especially important in regard to the pressure and spraying distance. Do not direct cleaning spray at the charging unit in the radiator grille or at the charging dock*/charging clip*. Keep a distance of at least 16 in (40 cm).
Do not remove snow and ice with a pressure
washer.

Never use cone nozzles or high pressure nozzles.
The water temperature must not be above 140 °F (60 °C). Remove contaminants on the Audi charging system with a dry towel. Remove contaminants on the charging dock*/ charging clip* with a wet towel dampened with alcohol-free cleaning solution.
-- Never immersethe Audi charging system and connectorsin water.
-- The Audi charging system mustonly be cleaned when the control unit is completely disconnected from the power supply and from the vehicle.
To decrease the risk of discoloration, never clean the charging dock*/charging clip* with harsh cleaning solutions or solutions that contain alcohol.

e-tron

8V2012721B)

123

Trailer towing
Trailer towing
Driving with a trailer
eT re eeleurl tela}
Your vehicle is primarily intended for transporting people and luggage. However, if you drive
with a trailer, follow the technical requirements,
the operation and driving tips, and the legal regulations.
Driving with a trailer affects the vehicle's fuel consumption, performance and wear. It also re-
quires higher concentration from the driver.
Z\ WARNING
Do not transport any peoplein a trailer due to the risk offatal injury.
Technical requirements
Certain requirements must be met when towing a trailer.
Trailer hitch
Only use a trailer hitch with a removableball hitch mount and ball hitch. The trailer hitch must be permitted for the vehicle, the trailer and the permitted total weight of the trailer being pulled. Aboveall, it must be securely and safely attached to the vehicle trailer.
Never mount a trailer hitch on the bumper. The trailer hitch must be mounted in a way that does not impair the function of the bumper. Do not make any changesto the exhaust system and the brake system.
Check regularlyif the trailer hitch is securely mounted. Alwaysfollow the instructions given by the trailer hitch manufacturer.
Trailer brakes
If the trailer has its own brake system, then follow the manufacturer specifications. However, the brake system on the trailer must never be connected to the vehicle brake system.

Engine cooling system
Driving with a trailer means a higher load on the engine and the cooling system. The cooling system must be designed for additional load and contain enough coolant > ©.
(1) Note
Longer inclines cannot be driven without a suitable cooling system, especially if the outside temperatures are high. Otherwise, this increases the risk of engine damage.

Operating instructions

Towing capacity
Your vehicle can only be operated with class 1 or class 2 trailers.

Load distribution
Poor cargo load and distribution can negatively impact vehicle handling. To have the lowest impact as possible, load the trailer according to these criteria:
-- Store objects in the vehicle luggage compartment,if possible. The vehicle should always carry the heaviest possible load and the trailer should havethe lightest possible load.
-- Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heavy objects are as close to the axle as possible.
-- Secure objects so that they do not slide. -- Utilize the maximum permitted tongue weight
if possible.

Tires
Set the tire pressure on your vehicle for a "full load"; see the tire pressure sticker > page 350. If necessary, also adjust the tire pressure on the trailer according to the manufacturer's specifications.
The trailer and the vehicle should be equipped with winter tires when driving in winter temperatures.

Outside mirrors

If you cannotsee the traffic behind the trailer

with the standard exterior mirrors, then you

124

must attach additional exterior mirrors. Adjust them so you have a sufficient visibility behind you.
Exterior lighting
Follow the legal regulations regarding the lighting equipment on your trailer. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.
Before you start driving, check all lighting equipment on the trailer while it is hitched to the vehicle.
The headlight range control automatically adjusts the light range of the headlights.
Safety chains
Makesure the safety chains are correctly applied when pulling a trailer. The chains should hang enough so that the trailer can drive around curves. However, they must not touch the ground.
i) Tips
-- Block the wheels with chocks when parking on inclines if the trailer is loaded.
-- Having the vehicle inspected between the inspection intervals is recommended if you towa trailer frequently.
-- Avoid driving with a trailer during the vehicle break-in period.

Trailer towing
Hill
When you start driving uphill or downhill, trailers may tilt or sway sooner than when driving ona level surface. If small swaying movements have already occurred, you can stabilize the trailer by firmly braking immediately. Never try to "straighten out"the trailer by accelerating.
Downshift before driving on hills to utilize the engine braking effect > A\.
Brakes
When using a trailer with overrun brakes, first
brake gently then quickly. This reduces the risk of jerking while braking if the trailer wheels lock up.
Engine coolant temperature
Pay attention specifically to the coolant temperature display when there are high outside temperatures, and when driving on long inclines => page 15. Shift to a higher gear in a timely manner.
JN WARNING Constant braking causes the brakes to overheat and can substantially reduce braking performance, increase braking distance, or cause completefailure of the brake system.

Driving with a trailer
Driving with a trailer requires extra caution.
Speed
Adhereto the legal speed limits. Follow the legal regulations specific to the country.
As the speed increases, the driving stability of the trailer decreases. Therefore you should not exceed the maximum legal speed limit when
there are unfavorable road, weather, and/or wind
conditions. This especially applies when driving downhill.

8V2012721B)

125

Assist systems
Assist systems
Speed warning system
Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system
The speed warning system helps you to stay below a specified maximum speed that can beset, changed or deleted in the Infotainment system.
The speed warning system warns you if you are exceeding the maximum speed that you haveset. A warning tone will sound as soon as your speed exceeds the stored value slightly. The oe) indicator light will appear at the same time in the instrumentcluster display along with a message. The be) indicator light and the message turn off if the speed falls back below the stored maximum speed.
Setting a threshold is recommended if you would like to be reminded when you reach a certain maximum speed. Situations where you may want to do so include driving in a country with a general speed limit or if there is a specified maximum speed for winter tires.
Setting the warning threshold
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Speed warning > Manual.
G) Tips
Regardless of the speed warning system, you should always monitor your speed using the speedometer and makesureyou are following the legal speed limit.
Cruise control system

ZA WARNING
-- Alwayspay attention to the traffic around your vehicle when the cruise control system is in operation. As the driver, you are always responsible for controlling your vehicle speed and the distance between your vehicle and other vehicles.
-- For safety reasons, cruise control should not
be used in the city, in stop-and-go traffic, on
winding roads, and when road conditions are
poor (such as ice, fog, gravel, heavy rain, and conditions that could lead to hydroplaning), because this increases the risk of an accident. -- Switch the cruise control off temporarily when driving in turning lanes, highwayexits, or in construction zones.
--To reduce the risk of an accident, you should
only resume the stored speedif it is suitable for the currenttraffic conditions.
() Note
Before driving downhill a long distance ona steep hill, decrease your speed and select a lower gear. This makes use of the engine braking effect and reduces the load placed on the brakes.
G) Tips
The brake lights turn on when the brakes are applied automatically.
Switching the system on
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system

BFV-0220

Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
The cruise control system assists the driver in maintaining a constant speed above approxi-
mately 15 mph (20 km/h). The system maintains
the desired speed by braking and accelerating.

Fig. 121 Lever: switching on the cruise control system
Requirement: switch the ignition on.

126

Assist systems

> To switch the system on, pull the lever toward you to position @).
The Gg or {§] indicator light and the corresponding message will appear in the instrument cluster.
Z\ WARNING
If the brakes are malfunctioning (for example, overheating) while the cruise control system is switched on, it may shut off automatically.
Preselecting or activating a cruise control ey -t-fe)
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
When the vehicle is stationary, you can preselect the cruise control speed or activate the speed while driving.
Requirement: the system must be switched on.
> To preselect a cruise control speed when the ve-
hicle is stationary, tap the lever toward @)/G)
=> page 126,fig. 121. > To activate the cruise control speed, pull the
lever toward position @ while driving, or > To set the current driving speed as the cruise
control speed, press the button (@) on the lever.
The active cruise control speed is indicated with the Gg or BS indicator light in the instrument cluster.
Changing the cruise control speed
Appliesto: vehicles with cruise control system
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed
in increments, tap the lever toward @/C)
=> page 126,fig. 121. > To increase or decrease the cruise control speed
continuously, press and hold the lever to-
ward @)/G).
Overriding or deactivating the cruise control speed
Appliesto: vehicles with cruise control system
You can override or deactivate the cruise control system. When you deactivate the system, your

cruise control speed will be stored and you can resume that speed.
Requirement: the system must be switched on and activated.
Overriding > To temporarily override the cruise control
speed, press the accelerator pedal. > Once you release the accelerator pedal, the sys-
tem will adjust back to the stored cruise control speed.
If you override the cruise control system for a long period of time, the cruise control system will be deactivated. The indicator light is displayed and the cruise control speed will be saved.
Deactivating > To deactivate the cruise control speed, press
the lever toward (2) (not locked into place) => page 126,fig. 121. > Press the brake pedal.
ZA\ WARNING
Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal could override the cruise control. This will prevent braking interventions by the system.
Seem eLal
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
When you switch the system off completely, the cruise control speed will be deleted.
Requirement: the system must be switched on.
> To switch the system off, press the lever toward @ (locked into place) > page 126, fig. 121, or
> Switch the ignition off.
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
Gr / Speed control system: currently unavailable. See owner's manual

8V2012721B)

127

Assist systems

If the indicator light turns on and this message appears, the cruise control system has been deactivated. There is a temporary malfunction, for example the brakes are overheating. Switch the cruise control system on again later.
Lap timer
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
You can measure and analyze lap times with the lap timerin the display.
Opening the lap timer
> Open the first Vehicle tab (trip computer) using the [<>] button on the multifunction steering wheel.
> Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster: Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel and select Lap timer in the
menu.
» Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit: On the multifunction steering wheel, select: left control button > Lap times.
Operating the lap timer
> On the multifunction steering wheel, turn the left thumbwheel %) > page 17 or @ > page 20 until the desired menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster.
> Press the left thumbwheel to confirm the selection.
ZA WARNING
Your focus should always be on driving your vehicle safely. As the driver, you have complete responsibility for safety in traffic. Only use the functions such as the lap timer in such a way that you always maintain complete control over your vehiclein all traffic situations.
@) Tips
You can retrieve information from the trip computer while the lap timer stopwatch is running.

yee lial)
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
Requirement: the lap timer must be open > page 128.
Timing laps
> To start timing, select Lap 1 - press OK or Start lap 1 in the menu.
» Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit: To start timing automatically when you start driving, select Start lap 1 by driving off or Start by driving off in the menu.
> To measurethe lap time, select New lap - press OK or Newlap in the menu. This starts timing the next lap at the same time.
After completing, the difference between the last lap and the previous best lap time will be indicated witha "/[ or ""/.
Pausing timing and displaying a split time
> To insert a pause fh select Pause in the menu. > To continue timing, select Press OK to resume
or Resume in the menu. > To display a split time, select Split time in the
menu. The split time appears for approximately 10 seconds in the instrument cluster. The timing of the current lap continues.
Resetting timing
> Using the multifunction steering wheel, select Reset or Reset times in the menu.
G) Tips
--A maximum of 30 lap times (analog instrument cluster) or 99 lap times (Audi virtual cockpit*) can be measured.
--If timing is paused, you can continue it later even if you switch the ignition off.
-- Saved lap times cannotbe individually deleted from the total results.
--The saved lap timer values will remain after switching the ignition off.

128

Assist systems

Lap statistics
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
Displaying lap statistics
You can display the number oflaps driven, the fastest lap "+", the slowest lap "--", and the average time "@"in the instrument cluster.
> Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster: Select Statistics in the menu using the multifunction steering wheel.
> Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit: On the multifunction steering wheel, select: left control button > Lap statistics or Statistics.
> Turn the thumbwheel downor up to display the individual lap times.
> To return to the lap timing that was begun, press the left thumbwheel.
Resetting lap statistics
Appliesto: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
> On the multifunction steering wheel, select:
the right control button > Reset statistics.
0) Tips" -- The lap statistics list the lap times for the
last 30 laps. -- Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cock-
pit: The fastest and slowestlap times from up to 99 timed laps will be displayed.
Audi adaptive cruise control
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control

The adaptive cruise control system is a combination of speed and distance regulation. It assists the driver by both regulating the speed and maintaining a distance to the vehicle driving ahead, within the limits of the system. If the system detects a vehicle driving ahead, the adaptive cruise control can brake and accelerate your vehicle. This increases driving comfort during long trips on highways and in stop-and-go traffic.
What can adaptive cruise control do?
The adaptive cruise control system usesradar. The radar is subject to designated system limits => page 130.
On open roads with no traffic, it functions like a
cruise control system. The stored speed is maintained. When approaching a vehicle ahead and the system detectsit, the adaptive cruise control system automatically brakes to match that object's speed and then maintains the stored distance. As soon as the system does not detect a vehicle driving ahead, adaptive cruise control accelerates up to the stored speed.
Within the limits of the system, adaptive cruise control can brake in stop-and-go traffic until the vehicle is stationary and then begin driving again under certain conditions > page 133, Driving in stop-and-go traffic.
Which functions can be controlled?
When you switch adaptive cruise control on, you can set the current speed as the "control speed" = page 131, Switching on and off.
When driving, you can stop cruise control = page 133 or change the speed > page 132 at any time.
You can also set the distance to the vehicle ahead and set the adaptive cruise control driving program > page 134.

8V2012721B) B8V-0126

Fig. 122 Detection range

129

Assist systems
General information
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control/Audi pre sense front
Fig. 123 Frontof vehicle: sensor
The radar sensor area > fig. 123 must not be covered with stickers, deposits or any other obstructions as it may impair the function of the adaptive cruise control or the pre sense front. For information on cleaning, see > page 362. The same applies for any modifications made in the front area. The function of the adaptive cruise control system or pre sense front is limited in some conditions: -- Vehicles can only be detected when they are
within the sensor range > page 129,fig. 122. -- The system has a limited ability to detect vehi-
cles that are a short distance ahead, off to the side of your vehicle or moving into your lane. -- Objects that are difficult to detect such as motorcycles, vehicles with high ground clearance or an overhanging load are detected late or not detected at all. -- When driving through curves > page 131. -- When the vehicle is stationary > page 131.
Z\ WARNING
Alwayspay attention to the traffic around you when adaptivecruise control is switched on. As the driver, you arestill responsible for your own speed and the distanceto other vehicles. The adaptive cruise control is used to assist you. The driver must always take action to avoid a collision. The driver is always responsible for braking at the correct time. -- For safety reasons, do not use adaptive
cruise control when driving on roads with
130

a
B8U-0349

manycurves, when the road surfaceis in poor condition and/or in bad weather (such as ice, fog, gravel, heavy rain and hydroplaning). Using the system under these conditions could result in a collision. -- Switch adaptive cruise control off temporarily when driving in turning lanes, on expresswayexits or in construction zones. This prevents the vehicle from accelerating to the stored speed when in these situations. -- The adaptive cruise control system will not brake byitself if you put your foot on the accelerator pedal. Doing so can override the speed and distance regulation. -- Adaptive cruise control does not respond to people, animals,or crossing or oncoming objects. -- The function of the radar sensorscan be affected by reflective objects such as guard
rails, the entrance to a tunnel, heavyrain or
ice.
@) Note
The sensor can be displaced by impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel housing and underbody. This can impair the adaptive cruise control. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check their function.
G) Tips
For an explanation on conformity with the FCC regulations in the United States and the Industry Canada regulations, see > page 392.

Assist systems

Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control/Audi pre sense front

Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control

B4M-0231

Fig. 124 Example:driving into a curve
When driving into a curve > fig. 124 and out of a curve, the system mayreact to a vehicle in the neighboring lane and apply the brakes. You can prevent that by pressing the accelerator pedal briefly.

Stationary vehicles
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control

22©g2&Es.|}

Fig. 127 Instrument cluster: adaptive cruise control
ACC: you can set any speed between 20 and 95 mph (30 and 150 km/h).

Indicator lights and messages in the instrument cluster display inform you aboutthe current sit-
uation and setting.

Switching adaptivecruise control on

Fig. 125 Example: vehicle changinglanes and stationary vehicle

> Pull the lever toward you into position @)
> fig. 126.

The adaptive cruise control system only reacts to

Storing the speed and activating regulation

vehicles that being system has already

moving orto vehicles that the" detected as moving. For ex-

[0 store ulation,

tprheescsutrhreentSEsTpebeudtatnodnac©tifivga. t1e2t6he>r/e\g.-

ample, it can react when a vehicle that has al-

The stored speed is shown in the tachometer

ready been detected (@ turns or changeslanes,

LED line @ and appearsbriefly in the informa-

but adaptive cruise control does notreact to a stationary vehicle (2). Press the brake pedal to slow the vehicle down.

tion line @ © fig. 127. > To activate the regulation while stationary, you
mustpress the brake pedal.

Switching adaptive cruise control off

> Push the lever away from you into position @ until it clicks into place. The message ACC: off appears.

The stored speed in the LED line is erased.

131

8V2012721B)

Assist systems

fi RAZ-0344}

@® Indicatorlights
B - Adaptive cruise control must be switched on. No vehicles are detected ahead. The stored speed is maintained.
B - Avehicle driving ahead was detected. The adaptive cruise control system regulates the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead and brakes/accelerates automatically.
EB - Adaptive cruise control must be switched on. A vehicle was detected ahead. Your vehicle remains stopped and will not start driving automatically.
B - The automatic braking is not enough to maintain a sufficient distance to a vehicle driving ahead. You mustintervene > page 135, Driverintervention request.
@ Instrument cluster display
If adaptive cruise control is not shownin the instrument cluster display, you can call it up using the multifunction steering wheel buttons => page 17.
Based on the graphicsin the display, you can determine if the system is maintaining a distance to a vehicle ahead and what that distance tothis ve-
hicle is:
No vehicle - No vehicle was detected driving ahead.
Silver vehicle - A vehicle was detected driving ahead.
Red vehicle - Requestfor driver intervention => page 135.
The five distance bars on the gauge (4) represent the set distance (refer to > page 134 for information on how to change the distance). If you
fall below the selected distance, the distance
bars become red from the bottom upward.
ZX WARNING
If you press the [SET] button when driving at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the vehicle accelerates automatically up to 20 mph (30
km/h), which is the minimum speed that can be set.

G) Tips -- If you switch the ignition or the adaptive
cruise control system off, the set speed is erased for safety reasons. -- The Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) and the Anti-Slip-Regulation (ASR) are automatically switched on when the adaptive cruise control is switched on.
Changing the speed
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Fig. 128 Operating lever: changing the speed
> To increase or decrease the speed in incre-
ments,tap the lever in the @/@) direction.
> To increase or decrease the speed quickly, hold
the lever toward @)/G) until the red LED @)
=> page 131, fig. 127 reaches the desired speed. You can also preselect the speed when adaptive cruise control is not active by moving the lever in
the desired direction @)/@). Activate the previ-
ously selected speed by pulling the lever into po-
sition @ > page 131, fig. 126.
After each change, the new stored speed appears briefly in the status line > page 131, fig. 127©. When adaptivecruise control is active, the or a indicator light turns on, and when adaptive cruise control is not active, the indicator light turns on. In the Audi virtual cockpit*, the indicator light turns on instead.

132

8V2012721B)
B4M-0233

Assist systems

Driving in stop-and-go traffic
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Fig. 129 Instrumentcluster: safe start monitor
The adaptive cruise control system assists you in stop-and-go traffic. If a vehicle that is detected ahead stops, your vehicle will brake and stay at a stop, within the limits of the system. > To resume driving with adaptive cruise control,
tap the accelerator pedal or > Pull the lever toward you into position @)
=> page 133, fig. 130. Starting to drive with adaptive cruise
control!)
As long as the message ACC autom. go is displayed and the object detected ahead starts to move, your vehicle will continue driving > A\. You can activate ACC: autom. go again for a short time bypulling the lever to position @). The ACC: autom. go start mode ends when the brake pedal is pressed. For safety reasons, your vehicle will only start to drive automaticallyif: -- The driver's safety belt is fastened -- All doors and the hood are closed -- Your vehicle is not stationary for more than
three minutes Safe start monitor If an obstacle is detected when you start driving, you will be alerted to the danger by the BA indicator light and the image in the instrument cluster display > fig. 129 > A\. An audio signal will also sound. Your vehicle will drive more slowly

when starting. This may also occur in some situations when there is no apparent obstacle. -- Press the brake pedal to slow your vehicle
down.
ZA\ WARNING
If the message ACC: autom. go") appears, your vehicle will start driving, even if there is an obstacle between your vehicle and the vehicle driving ahead. This increases the risk of an accident.
©Tips If adaptive cruise control is active and your vehicle does not start driving even though the message ACC: autom. go") appears, you can start driving by tapping the accelerator pedal.
Interrupting cruise control
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Fig. 130 Operating lever
Requirement: adaptive cruise control must be switched on.
Overriding cruise control
> To accelerate manually, pull the lever toward you into position @) and holdit there, or press the accelerator pedal. The message ACC: override appears.
> To resume cruise control, release the lever or
take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Interrupting cruise control while driving > Movethe lever into position (). The message
ACC: standby appears. Or

D_ This is not available in some countries.

133

Assist systems

> Press the brake pedal. > To resume the stored speed, movethe lever in-
to position @).
Interrupting cruise control when stopped > Push the lever away from you into position @).
The message ACC: standbyappears. > To resume cruise control, press the brake pedal
and pull the lever toward you into position @).
Z\ WARNING
It is dangerous to activatecruise control and resume the stored speed when the current road, traffic or weather conditions do not permit this. This increases the risk of an accident.
Setting the distance
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Fig. 131 Operating lever: setting the distance
> Tap the switch to display the distance that is currently set > fig. 131.
> To increase or reduce the distance in increments, tap the switch upward/downward again. The distance between the twovehicles will change in the instrument cluster display.
When approaching a vehicle driving ahead, the adaptive cruise control system brakes to match that vehicle's speed and then adjusts to the set
distance. If the vehicle driving ahead accelerates,
then the adaptivecruise control will also accelerate up to the speed that you haveset. The higher the speed, the greater the distance => A\. The Distance 3 setting is recommended. That is equal to the general recommendation of "half the speed shown on the speedometer".

B4M-0234

The distances provided are specified values. Depending on the driving situation and how the vehicle ahead is driving, the actual distance may be moreor less than these target distances.
If you change the time gaps, the value you have just set appearsbriefly in the instrument cluster display, for example for Distance 3. This only occursif the adaptive cruise control is not currently shown in the display > page 131, fig. 127.
Distance 1: this setting corresponds to a distance of 92 feet (28 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100
km/h), or a time distance of 1 second.
Distance 2: this setting corresponds to a distance of 118 feet (36 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100 km/h), or a time distance of 1.3 seconds.
Distance 3: this setting corresponds to a distance of 164 feet (SO m) when traveling at 62 mph (100 km/h), or a time distance of 1.8 seconds.
Distance 4: this setting corresponds to a distance of 219 feet (67 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100 km/h), or a time distance of 2.4 seconds.
Distance 5: this setting corresponds to a distance of 328 feet (100 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100 km/h), or a time distance of 3.6 seconds.
ZA WARNING
When setting the distance, the driver is re-
sponsible for adhering to any applicable legal regulations.
(i) Tips
Your settings are automatically stored and assigned to the remote control key being used.

Setting the driving program
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control

Depending on the selected driving program and
distance, driving behavior when accelerating will vary from dynamic to comfortable.

Setting the driving program on vehicles without drive select*

> Select in the Infotainment system: MENU but-

ton > Vehicle > left control button > Driver as-

sistance > Audi adaptive cruise control >

134

Driving program > Comfort, Standard or Dynamic. Setting the driving mode on vehicles with
drive select*
See > page 147. @) Tips Your settings are automatically stored and assigned to the remotecontrol key being used. Driver intervention request
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Fig. 132 Instrumentcluster: request for driver intervention
The request for driver intervention instructs you to take over if the adaptive cruise control braking function is not able to maintain a sufficient distanceto the vehicle driving ahead > fig. 132. PeMeeNAL eReeC lul ile)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
This function measures the time between the vehicle driving ahead and showsthis in the instrument cluster display.
Fig. 133 Instrumentcluster: distance indicator/warning

Assist systems
Description
At speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 km/h), this function measures the distance to the vehicle ahead as time.
> Switch the adaptive cruise control display on in the instrument cluster display > page 17.
The B indicator light turns on if you fall below the set distance.
Setting the warning threshold
You can set, change or delete the warning threshold in the Infotainment system.
> In the Infotainment system, select: [MENU button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Distance warning.
Z\ WARNING
-- Read and follow the warnings on > A\ in General information on page 130.
-- The driver is always responsible for adhering to the regulations applicable in the country wherethe vehicle is being operated.
(i) Tips
You mayfall below he warning threshold briefly when passing or when quickly apProaching a slow vehicle. There is no warning in this scenario. A warning is given onlyif you fall below the warning threshold for an extended period of time.

tLe [Ly
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control

ACC: unavailable
The system cannot guaranteethatit will detect vehicles correctly and it has switched off. The sensor was moved or is faulty. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

ACC: currently unavailable. No sensor view

ACC: currently unavailable. Sensor vision re-

stricted due to surroundings. See owner's man-

ual

8V2012721B)

135

Assist systems

This message appearsif the sensor view is obstructed, for example by leaves, snow, heavy spray or dirt. Clean the sensor > page 130,
fig. 123.
ACC: currently unavailable. Incline too steep
The road exceeds the maximum possible angle for safe adaptive cruise control operation. The adaptive cruise control cannot be switched on.
ACC: only available in D, S orM
Select the "D/S" or "M" selector lever position.
ACC: currently unavailable. Parking brake applied
The adaptive cruise control system switches off automatically if the parking brake is set. The adaptive cruise control is available again after releasing the parking brake.
ACC: currently unavailable. Stabilization control input
This message appearsif the Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) is taking action to stabilize the vehicle. In this case, adaptive cruise control switches off automatically.
ACC: Please take over!
This message appearsif the vehicle rolls back when starting on slight incline, even though ACCis active. Press the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling or starting to move.
ACC: currently unavailable. Park assist active
The systems switch off when Park assist* is active. The systems are available again after completing the parking process.
Distance warning: malfunction! Please contact Service
The system cannot guarantee thatit will detect vehicles correctly and it has switched off. The radar sensor was movedor is faulty. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Distance warning: currently unavailable. Sensor view limited due to surroundings.

This message appearsif the sensor view is obstructed, for example by leaves, snow, heavy spray or dirt. Clean the sensor > page 130,
fig. 123.
Distance warning: currently unavailable. See owner's manual
This message appearsif the system has a temporary failure. If this occurs multiple times, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Fasten seatbelt
The system is not completely available if the driver's seat belt is unfastened.
Stat. obj. ahead
This message appearsif you would like to switch the system on and thereis a stationary object directly in front of your vehicle.
Door open
The system is not available when the vehicleis stationary and the driver's door is open.
Audi pre sense
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
Within the limits of the system, the pre sense functions can initiate measures in particularly dangerous situations to protect the vehicle passengers and other road users.
-- Due to the interlinking of various vehicle sys-
tems, critical driving situations can be detected by pre sense basic and measures for preventative occupant protection are can be initiated.
-- The pre sensefront uses the data from the radar sensors and calculates the probability of an accident > page 130. An impending collision with vehicles can be detected within the limits of the system. In this case, the system warns the driver visually, acoustically and with a jerk on the brakes if necessary. If needed, it can initiate a partial or full deceleration to reduce the collision speed or to avoid the collision under certain circumstances. In conjunction with pre >

136

RAH-8970.

sense basic, the front safety belts are also re-
versibly tensioned when needed. The pre sense front is also active when adaptive cruise control* is switched off.
ZA WARNING
Also follow the general instructions found in => A in Generalinformation on page 130.
G) Tips
-- Certain pre sense functions switch off when driving in reverse.
-- The pre sense functions may notbe available if there is a malfunction in the ESC system or the airbag control module.
-- Note that the reversible belt tensioner on the front passenger's side deactivates when the front passenger's airbag is deactivated.
-- Switch the pre sense off when you are not using public streets or when loading the ve-
hicle onto a vehicle carrier, train, ship, or other type of transportation. This can pre-
vent an undesired intervention from the pre
sense system.
NUT Te sia
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense basic
The pre sense basic functions are activated at a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or higher.
The following functions can be triggered under certain conditions within the limits of the sys-
tem:
--Tensioning of the safety belts (for example, during heavy braking): the front safety belts have reversible belt tensioners. If a collision does not occur, the safety belts loosen slightly and are ready to trigger again.
-- Initiating the closing of the windows and the panoramic glass roof* (for example when under- or oversteering).
Audi drive select*: the trigger times are adjusted depending on the mode selected.

Assist systems
Audi pre sensefront
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense front
Audi pre sense
Fig. 134 Instrumentcluster: approach warning
Description Within the limits of the system and depending on the situation and speed, pre sense front can warn you about impending collisions with stationary, stopped, and moving vehicles and initiate appropriate braking measures. If detection is not possible, then pre sense front does notreact. The following functions trigger in conjunction with pre sense basic at corresponding vehicle speeds: -- Reversible tensioning of the front safety belts -- Closing the windows and panoramic glass roof*
Early warning/acute warning The system can provide visual and audible warnings when dangerous situations are detected. The early warning mayoccur if: --a vehicle driving ahead brakes strongly, -- your vehicle is traveling at speeds between ap-
proximately 20 to 50 mph (30 to 85 km/h) and it approaches a stationaryvehicle. -- your vehicle is traveling at speeds between approximately 20 to 155 mph (30 to 250 km/h) and it approaches a vehicle thatis clearly traveling more slowlyor a vehicle in your direction of travel that is stopped. When this warning occurs, it may only be possible to avoid a collision by swerving or braking strongly. The message Audi pre sense wA => fig. 134 and a warning tone will warn you about the danger.

8V2012721B)

137

Assist systems

If there is an impending collision with vehicles, therewill also be an acute warningin the form of sharp braking. If you do not react to the acute warning, pre sense front can brake with increasing force within the limits of the system. This reduces the vehicle speed in the event of a collision.
Automatic deceleration
Depending on the speed, pre sense front can decelerate automatically shortly before a collision:
--if there are stationary vehicles when you are traveling at speeds up to approximately 28 mph (45 km/h)
-- if there are vehicles driving or stopped ahead when you aretraveling at speeds up to approxi-
mately 155 mph (250 km/h)
Automatic braking force increase
If pre sense front determines that you are not braking strongly enough when a collision is imminent,it can increase the braking force, depending on the situation and speed:
-- if there are stationary vehicles when you are traveling at speeds up to approximately 50
mph (85 km/h)
-- if there are vehicles driving or stopped ahead when you aretraveling at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h)
Z\WARNING
Pre sense front cannot overcome the laws of physics. It is a system designedto assist and it cannot prevent a collision in every circumstance. The driver must always intervene. The driver is always responsible for braking at the correct time. Do notlet the increased safety provided temptyou into taking risks. This could increase your risk of a collision. -- Keep in mind that pre sense front can pro-
vide warnings or brake unexpectedly. Always secure any cargo or objects that you are transporting to reduce the risk of damage or injury. -- The system can deployincorrectly due to system-specific limits.

-- Please note that the sensor does not always detect all objects. This increases the risk of a collision.
-- Pre sense front does not react to vehicles traveling toward you in the same lane, to people, groupsof people, animals, objects that are crossing the road, or objects that are difficult to detect > A\ in Generalinformation on page 130.
ZA WARNING
Pre sense front mayberestricted or not available in the following examplesituations: -- If there are other reflective objects nearby,
such as guardrails or vehicles -- When driving into a tunnel -- In heavy fog, rain, spray, or snow -- If the radar sensor is dirty, coveredin ice,
damaged, or covered --Incurves -- If the ESC was restricted or switched off
() Note
The sensor can be displaced by impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel housing and underbody. Pre sense front can be impaired by this. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check their function.
G) Tips
-- You can cancel the braking with increasing force that is initiated by the system by braking yourself, by accelerating noticeably or by swerving.
-- Certain pre sense front functions switch off when ESC is switched off (sport mode) or when driving in reverse.
-- If you restrict or switch off the ESC, the pre sensealso switches itself off > page 160.
Settings in the Infotainment system
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Audi pre sense.

138

Assist systems

System - The pre sense functions can be switched on/off.
If the system is switched off, it switches on again automatically once the ignition is switched on again.
Prewarning - The early warning can be switched off permanently or the pre sense front warning point can be set (Early/Medium/Late).
Set the warning time for the early warning to Early at first. If this causes undesired early warnings to appear, then set the warning time to Medium. The Late warning time should only be set in special circumstances.
G) Tips
If the system is switched off, it switches on
again automatically once the ignition is switched on again.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
By udi pre sense: malfunction! Please contact Service
This message appears when the pre sense function is affected. For example, this could be caused bya faulty sensor. If the message stays on, drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction corrected.
Audi pre sense: currently limited. Sensor view limited due to surroundings.
This message appearsif the sensor view is obstructed, for example by leaves, snow, heavy spray or dirt. Clean the sensor if necessary => page 130, fig. 123.
Audi pre sense: currently restricted
This message appearsif the ESC is restricted or switched off, for example.
Audi pre sense: currently limited. See owner's manual
This message appears when there is a temporary failure in a subsystem, such as the ESC. If this message appears repeatedly, drive to an author-

ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction corrected.
Audi pre sense: emergency braking system off
This message appearsif the pre sense functions are switched off through the Infotainment system or if the system is not ready.
Audi active lane assist
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
Active lane assist (lane departure warning) detects lane marker lines within the limits of the system using a camerain the windshield. If you are approaching a detected lane marker line and it appears likely that you will leave the lane, the system will warn you with corrective steering. You can override this steering at any time. If you pass over a line, the steering wheel will vibrate lightly. In order for this warning vibration to oc-
cur, it must first be switched on in the Infotain-
ment system. Active lane assist is ready for operation when the lane marker line is detected on at least one side of the vehicle.
The system is designed for driving on expressways and highwaysand therefore only activates at speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
If you activate a turn signal when active lane assist is ready and it classifies a lane change as critical because of vehicles traveling alongside you or approaching you, therewill be noticeable corrective steering shortly before you leave the lane. This will attempt to keep your vehicle in the lane.
Applies to: vehicles without Audi side assist
The system will not warn you before crossing a lane marker line if you have activated the turn signal. In this case, it assumes that you are changing lanesintentionally.
Z\WARNING
-- The system warns the driver that the vehicle is leaving the lane using corrective steering. |>

8V2012721B)

139

Assist systems
The driver is always responsible for keeping
the vehicle within the lane.
-- The system can help you keep the vehicle in the lane, but it does not drive by itself. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel.
-- Corrective steering may notoccur in certain situations, such as during heavy braking.
-- There may be cases where the camera does not recognize all lane marker lines. Corrective steering can only take place on the side of the vehicle where lane marker lines are
-- e Othee r re oad structures or objects could possibly be identified unintentionally as lane
marker lines. As a result, corrective steering
may be unexpected or may not occur. -- The cameraview can be restricted, for exam-
ple by vehicles driving ahead or by rain, snow,heavy spraylight shining into the camera or by dirt on the window.This can result in active lane assist not detecting the lane marker lines or detecting them incorrectly. -- Under certain conditions such as ruts in the road, an inclined roadway or crosswinds, the corrective steering alone may not be enough to keep the vehicle in the middle of the lane.
-- For safety reasons, active lane assist must
not be used when there are poor road and/or weather conditions such as slippery roads, fog, gravel, heavy rain, snow and the potential for hydroplaning. Using active lane assist under these conditions mayincrease the risk of a crash.

SCR moll
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist

B4M-0064|

Faingd.l1o3r5 Turn signal lever: switching Active lane assist on

B4M-0090

Fig. 136 Windshield: camera windowfor active lane assist

> Press the button to switch the system on and

off > fig. 135. The indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster turns on or off.

140

Assist systems

Analoginstru- Audi virtual mentcluster cockpit*

Green lines i

Green line(s) (left/right)
1X

Red line

(left/right)

Yellow lines
an

Gray line(s) (left/right)
71%

Meaning on
the corresponding side
Active lane assist is activated and ready to provide warnings.
Active lane assist will warn you before the vehicle leaves a lane. The steering wheel will also vibrate lightly.
Active lane as-
sist is activated, but is not
ready to provide warnings.

If the system is switched on but is not ready to provide warnings, one of the following could be the cause:

-- Thereis no lane marker line
-- The relevant lane marker lines are not detected (for example, markings in a construction zone or because they are obstructed by snow,dirt, water or lighting)
-- The vehicle speed is below the activation speed of approximately 40 mph (65 km/h)
-- The lane is too narrow or too wide
-- The curve is too narrow -- The driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel

@ Tips
-- Make sure the camera's field of view > fig. 136 is not obstructed bystickers or anything else. For information on cleaning, see > page 362.
-- In certain markets: if the system is switched
on, it will switch on automatically each time
the ignition is switched on.

Display in the instrument cluster
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist

Fig. 137 Instrumentcluster: active lane assist is switched on and ready to provide warnings

You can open the active lane assist display using the buttons in the multifunction steering wheel => page 17 or > page 20.

Displayin the instrument cluster Green line(s) (left or right)
Red line (left or right)
Gray line(s) (left or right)

Meaningon thecorresponding side
Activelane assistis activated and ready to provide warnings.
Active lane assist will warn you before the vehicle leaves a lane. The steering wheel will also vibrate lightly.
Active lane assistis activated, but is not ready to provide warnings.

Messagesin the instrumentcluster display

If the active lane assist switches off automatically, the indicator light in the display turns off and one of the following messages appears:

B Audi active lane assist: malfunction! See owner's manual

Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.

Audi active lane assist: currently unavailable. No camera view

This message appearsif the camerais unable to

detect the lines. This could happen if:

8V2012721B)

141

B4H-0761

Assist systems

-- The camerafield of view > page 140,fig. 136 is dirty or covered in ice. Clean this area on the windshield.
-- The camerafield of view is fogged over. Wait until the fog has cleared before switching the active lane assist on again.
-- The system has been unableto detect the lanes for an extended period of time due to road conditions. Switch active lane assist back on when the lines are morevisible.
Audi active lane assist: currently unavailable
There is a temporary active lane assist malfunction. Try switching the active lane assist on again later.
HB audi active lane assist: Please take over steering!
This message appearsif you are not steering by yourself. Active lane assist is activated, but is not ready to provide warnings.
ZA\WARNING
Note that messages maybe delayed or not displayed on vehicles with accessories mounted on the steering wheel, such as a steering wheel spinner knob. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel.

@ Tips In certain markets: certain settings are stored automatically and assigned to the remote control key in use.
Audi side assist
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist

B8V-0059

Setting the vibration warning
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
You can adjust individual Audiactive lane assist settings in the Infotainment system.
> Select in the Infotainment system: MENU button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Audi active laneassist.
Vibration warning You can switch the additional vibration warning in the steering wheel on or off.
ZX WARNING
With the vibration warning switched off, there
will also be no visual warning in the instrumentcluster display when crossing a lane
marker line.
142

Fig. 139 Display on the exterior mirror
Side assist (lane change assist) helps you monitor your blind spot and traffic behind your vehicle. Within the limits of the system, it warns you about vehicles that are coming closer or that are traveling with you within sensor range @) > fig. 138. If a lane change is classified as critical, the display @) in the exterior mirror turns on > fig. 139.
The display in the left exterior mirror provides assistance when making a lane change to the left, while the display in the right exterior mirror provides assistance when making a lane change to the right.
Information stage
As long as you do notactivate the turn signal, side assist informs you about vehicles that are >

Assist systems

detected and classified as critical. The displayin
the mirror turns on, but is dim.
The display remains dim in the information stage so that your view towardthe front is not disturbed. Warning stage If the display in a mirror blinks brightly when you activate a turn signal, side assist is warning you about detected vehicles that it has classified as critical. If this happens, check traffic by glancing in the exterior mirrors and over your shoulder => A\ in General information on page 144.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
The display in the mirror can also blink if you have not activated a turn signal: if you are approaching a detected lane marker line and it appears you will be leaving the lane, side assist will warn you about detected vehicles that it has classified as critical.
@Tips
You can adjust the brightness on of the display on the rearview mirror > page 144. General information
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
Fig. 140 Driving situations

Fig. 141 Rear of the vehicle: position of the sensors

Side assist functions at speeds above approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).

Approaching vehicles
In certain cases, a vehicle will be classified as critical for a lane change even ifit is still somewhat far away. The faster a vehicle approaches, the sooner the display in the outside mirror will
turn on.

@ Vehicles traveling with you
Vehicles traveling with you are indicated in the exterior mirror if they are classified as critical for a lane change. All vehicles detected by side assist are indicated by the time they enter your "blind spot", at the latest.

@ Vehicles you are passing
If you slowly pass a vehicle that side assist has detected (the difference in speed between the vehicle and your vehicle is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)), the display in the exterior mirror turns on as soon as the vehicle enters your blind spot.
The display will not turn on if you quickly pass a vehicle that side assist has detected (the difference in speed is greater than approximately 9
mph (15 km/h)).

Functional limitations

The radar sensors are designed to detect the left

and right adjacent lanes when the road lanes are

the normal width. In some situations, the display

in the exterior mirror may turn on even though

there is no vehicle located in the area that is criti-

cal for a lane change. For example:

B8U-0348

8V2012721B) B8U-0342|

143

Assist systems

-- If the lanes are narrow or if you are driving on the edge of your lane. If this is the case, the system mayhave detected a vehicle in another lane that is not adjacent to your current lane.
-- If you are driving through a curve. Side assist mayreact to a vehicle that is one lane over from the adjacent lane.
--If side assist reacts to other objects (such as high or displaced guardrails).
-- In poor weather conditions. The side assist functions are limited.
Do not cover the radar sensors > fig. 141 with stickers, deposits, bicycle wheels or other objects, because theywill impair the function. For information on cleaning, see > page 362.
ZA WARNING
-- Alwayspay attention to traffic and to the area around your vehicle. Side assist cannot replace a driver's attention. The driver alone is always responsible for lane changes and similar driving maneuvers.
--Insome situations, the system may not function or its function maybe limited. For example:
--If vehicles are approaching or being left behind very quickly. The display may not
turn on in time.
-- In poor weather conditions such as heavy
rain, snow or heavy mist.
-- On very wide lanes,in tight curves,or if
thereis a rise in the road surface. Vehicles in the adjacent lane may not be detected because they are outside of the sensor range.
C) Note
The sensors can be displaced by impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel housing and underbody. This can impair the system. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check their function.
@) Tips
-- If the window glass in the driver's door or front passenger's door has been tinted, the

display in the exterior mirror may be incor-
rect.
-- For an explanation on conformity with the FCC regulations in the United States and the Industry Canada regulations, see => page 392.
Switching on and off
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
The system can be switched on/off in the Infotainment system.
If the system is activated, the displays in the exterior mirrors will turn on briefly when the ignition is switched on.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Audi side assist. Off switches the system off.
Setting the display brightness
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
The display brightness can be adjustedin the Infotainment system.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Audi side assist.
The display brightness adjusts automatically to the brightness of the surroundings, both in the information and in the warning stage. In very dark or very bright surroundings, the automatic adjustment will set the display to the minimum or maximum level. In such cases, you may notice no change when adjusting the brightness, or the change mayonly be noticeable once the surroundings change.
Adjust the brightness to a level where the display in the information stage will not disrupt your view ahead. If you change the brightness, the display in the exterior mirror will briefly show the brightness level in the information stage. The brightness of the warning stage is linked to the brightness in the information stage and is adjusted along with the information stage.

144

Assist systems

@ Tips -- Side assist is not active while you are mak-
ing the adjustment. -- Your settings are automatically stored and
assigned to the remote control key being used.
Tmt lait
Appliesto: vehicles with rear cross-traffic assist iSre} =a2+
Fig. 143 Infotainment system: rear cross-traffic assist dis-
play Activating rear cross-traffic assist
The rear cross-traffic assist is activated automatically if you turn on the parking aid > page 149 or shift into reverse gear. The rear cross-traffic assist can warn the driver of a potential collision with approaching cross-traffic when driving in reverse at speeds up to approximately 7 mph (12 km/h). Within its limits, the system monitors the areas behind and next to the vehicle using the radar sensors when leaving a parking space > page 143,fig. 141. Moving objects that are approaching, such as cars, are detected > fig. 142. If the system detectscritical cross traffic when backing out of a parking space, it will react as follows:

-- Visual indicator: an indicator appears in the Infotainment system display with a red arrow symbol. The arrow points in the direction from which the object is approaching > fig. 143.
-- Audible warning signal: a continuous tone may sound as an additional indicator when driving in
reverse.
-- Automatic brake activation: a brief activation of the brakes may also warn you of a potential collision with an approaching object.
The audible warning signal and the automatic brake activation occur only when driving in reverse.
ZX WARNING
--The rear cross-traffic assist is an assist system and cannotprevent a collision byitself. The driver must always intervene. The driver is always responsible for braking at the correct time.
-- Please note that the rear cross-traffic assist may activate the brakes unexpectedly. Se-
cure any cargo that you are transporting to
reducethe risk of damage or injury. -- An additional brake activation maybe trig-
gered within 10 seconds after an automatic brake activation. --If there is an acoustic warning signal from the rear cross-traffic assist, then the parking system may not warn you of detected obstacles under certain circumstances. -- The view of the radar sensors may be impaired by leaves, snow,heavy sprayor dirt. Clean the area in front of the sensors => page 143, fig. 141.
ZXWARNING
--The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide alerts about people and cannot warn you about every type of approaching objects, such as cyclists. Always monitor the traffic as well as the vehicle's surroundings with di-
rect eye contact.
--The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide alerts if your vehicleis parallel or diagonally

8V2012721B)

145

Assist systems

parked or if your vehicle is pulled too far into the parking space sothatit is hidden by adjacent vehicles.
G@) Note
Also read the information in >@© in General information on page 144.
@) Tips
-- You can cancel the automatic brake activation with increasing braking force if you apply the brakes yourself or accelerate considerably.
--In some situations, rear cross-traffic assist may warn you even if there is no crosstraffic in a critical area, for example when backing into a parking space or maneuvering.
-- The rear cross-traffic assist also switches off when you switch off the ESC.
-- For an explanation on conformity with the FCC regulations in the United States and the Industry Canada regulations, see => page 392.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
8 Audi side assist: malfunction! Please contact Service
The system cannot guarantee thatit will detect vehicles correctly and it has switched off. The sensors have been moved or are faulty. Have the system checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility soon.
Audi side assist: currently unavailable. No sensor view
Audi side assist: currently unavailable. Sensor vision restricted due to surroundings. See owner's manual
The radar sensor vision is impaired. Do not cover the area in front of the sensors with bike wheels,
stickers, dirt or other objects. Clean the area cov-
ering the sensors, if necessary > page 143,
fig. 141.
Audi side assist: currently unavailable

Side assist cannot be switched on at this time because thereis a malfunction (for example, the battery charge level may be too low).
Rear parking aid: obstacle detection restricted
The rear cross-traffic assist is not available. Either the ESC is switched off, or the radar sensors maybe covered by a bike rack,stickers, leaves, snowor other objects. Switch the ESC on, or clean the area in front of the sensorsif necessary => page 143, fig. 141. If this message continues to be displayed, drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Audi drive select
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
Audi drive select makes it possible to experience different types of vehicle settings in one vehicle.
The driver can select from three modes, Comfort,
Auto and Dynamic,using the si button in the center console or by using the Infotainment system. This allows you to switch between a sporty and a comfortable driving mode, for example. In the Individual* mode, the settings can be adjusted to your personal preferences. This makesit possible to combine settings such as a sporty engine setting with light steering.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
The vehicle setup in each mode depends on the vehicle's features. However, the engine and steering are always affected.
Engine and automatic transmission
Depending on the mode, the engine and automatic transmission* respond more quickly or in a more balanced manner to accelerator pedal movements. In the sporty dynamic mode, the transmission shifts at higher speed ranges.
Suspension control (Audi magnetic ride)*
The suspension control uses sensorsto record information regarding steering movements,

146

Assist systems

B8V-0646

braking and acceleration operations by the driver, as well as information about the road surface, driving speed, and load. With Audi drive select you can adjust the suspension control to sporty (dynamic), comfortable (comfort) or balanced (auto).
Steering
The steering adapts in terms of steering assistance. There are different modes > page 147.Indirect steering that moves easily as in comfort mode is especially suited to long drives on a highway. The dynamic mode provides sporty, direct steering.
For vehicles with progressive steering* the steering performanceis moreagile.
Audi adaptive light*
The illumination on curves in adaptive light is adapted to the selected mode.
Audi adaptive cruise control*
The behavior when accelerating can be adjusted from comfortable to sporty, depending on the drive select mode. Adaptive cruise control also responds to the driving behavior of the vehicle ahead in a more conservative or sporty manner.
@)Tips
--In some models, the maximum vehicle
speed can only be reached in the auto and dynamic modes. --The "S" selector lever position automatically engages if the dynamic mode is selected.

Selecting the driving mode
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
You can choose between comfort, auto, dynamic and individual*.
Fig. 144 Center console: drive select button
>» Press the sta & fig. 144 button repeatedly until the desired mode is displayed in the instrument cluster/Infotainment system. Or
> In the Infotainment system, select: [MENU
button > Vehicle > left control button > Audi drive select. » Select and confirm the desired setting. You can change the driving mode when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. If traffic permits, after changing modes,briefly remove your foot from the accelerator pedal so that the recently selected mode is also activated for the engine. Comfort - Provides a comfort-oriented vehicle setup and is suited for long drives on highways. Auto- Provides an overall comfortable yet dynamic driving feel and is suited for everyday use. Dynamic - Gives the driver a sporty driving feel and is suited to a sporty driving style. Individual* - > page 147.

Adjusting the Individual mode You can adjustthe vehicle settings to your personalpreferences.

> Select: MENU button > Vehicle > Audi drive select > Individual > right control button.
After you have closed the settings, you will automatically drive in the Individual* mode.

The systems you can adjust depend on the equip-
ment and engine in your vehicle. The following table gives an overview of the characteristics. >

8V2012721B)

147

Assist systems

Engine/transmission

comfortable

Steering

comfortable

Engine sound*

subtle

Audi adaptive cruise control* comfortable

Suspension control*

comfortable

quattro*

balanced

Applies to: RS models: quattro balanced

a) Subtle in the selector lever position "D" and sporty in "S".

Your Individual* mode settings are automati-
cally stored and assigned to the remote control key being used.

balanced balanced subtle/sporty® balanced balanced balanced neutral

sporty sporty sporty sporty sporty sporty sporty

148

Parking aid
General information
Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus/rearview camera/park assist
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, various parking aids will help you when parking and maneuvering.
The parking system plus assists you when parking by audibly and visually indicating objects detected in front of and behind the vehicle => page 150.
The rearview camera showsthe area behind the vehicle in the Infotainment system display. The lines in the rearview camera image help you to park or maneuver > page 151.
Park assist helps you to locate suitable parking spaces when parallel or perpendicular parking, and also helps when leaving a parallel parking space > page 153.
Z\ WARNING
-- Alwayslook for traffic and check the area around your vehicle by looking at it directly as well. The parking system cannot replace the driver's attention. The driver is always responsible when entering or exiting a parking space and during similar maneuvers.
-- Please note that some surfaces, such as clothing, are not detected by the system.
-- Sensors and cameras haveblind spots in which people and objects cannot be detected. Be especially cautious of small children and animals.
-- Alwayspay attention to the area around the vehicle - using the rearview mirror, too.
-- The sensors can be displaced by impacts or damage to the radiator grille, bumper, wheel housing and the underbody. The parking system maybe impaired as a result. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check their function.

Parking aid
C@) Note
-- Some objects are not detected or displayed by the system under certain circumstances:
-- objects such as barrier chains, trailer draw
bars, vertical poles or fences -- objects above the sensors such as wall ex-
tensions -- objects with certain surfaces or structures
such as chain link fences or powder snow -- If you continue driving closer to a low ob-
ject, it may disappear from the sensor range. Note that you will no Longer be warned aboutthis obstacle. -- Maintain enough distance from the curb to reduce the risk of damage to the rims.
@) Tips
-- The system mayprovide a warning even though thereare no obstacles in the cover-
age area in some situations, such as:
-- certain road surfaces or when thereis tall grass
-- external ultrasonic sources such as from cleaning vehicles
-- in heavy rain, snow,or thick vehicle ex-
haust -- We recommend thatyou practice parking in
a traffic-free location or parking lot to become familiar with the system. Practice parking in good light and weather conditions. -- You can change the volume and pitch of the signals as well as the display > page 157. -- What appearsin the infotainmentdisplay is somewhat time-delayed. -- The sensors mustbe kept clean and free of snowand icefor the parking aid to operate.

8V2012721B)

149

Parking aid

Parking system plus
plead |) dled)
Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus/park assist

Fig. 146 Infotainmentsystem: visual distance display

The parking system plus uses audio and visual warnings to help you avoid obstacles when parking.

Sensorsare located in the front and rear bump-
ers. If these detect an obstacle, audible and visual signals warn you.

Makesure the sensorsare not covered by stickers, deposits or any other obstructions as it may impair the function of the system. For information on cleaning, see > page 362.

The display field begins approximatelyat:

®@

4 ft (1.20 m)

3 ft (0.90 m)

5.2 ft (1.60 m)

3 ft (0.90 m)

©*

3 ft (0.90 m)®

2) Applies to: vehicles with park assist

Audio signals
The closer your vehicle gets to a detected obstacle, the shorter the time between the audible sig-

RAH-8914

B8V-0686

nals. A continuous tone sounds when an obstacle is less than approximately 1 foot (0.30 m) away from the front or rear of the vehicle. A continuous tone sounds when an obstacle is less than approximately 0.7 feet (0.20 m) away from the sides* of the vehicle. Do not continue driving forward or in reverse >@ in General information on page 149.
Visual warnings
The visual warnings in the Infotainment system display help you to detect the critical vehicle area and to estimate the distance to an obstacle
fig. 146.
Red segments showidentified obstacles that are in your vehicle's path. The red lines mark the expected direction of travel according to the steering angle. A white segment indicates an identified obstacle that is outside of the vehicle's path.
As your vehicle comes closer to the obstacle, the
segments movecloser to the vehicle. The collision area has been reached when the next to last segment is displayed. Obstacles in the collision
area, including those outside of the vehicle's
path, are shown in red. Do not continue driving forward or in reverse > A\ in General information on page 149, >@ in General information on page 149!
@ Tips
-- The segmentsin the side area* are detected and analyzed when passing. If you switch the ignition off and on again or open the door,or if the vehicle is stationary for a period of time, the surrounding area may have
changed in the meantime. Therefore, the side area* will be displayed in black. -- If the distance to an obstacle remains constant, the volume of the distance warning
gradually lowers after a few seconds until it is muted (this does not apply to the continuous tone). If the obstacle comes closer than
it was before the sound was muted, the
tone will sound again. If the obstacle becomesfarther away than it was before the
sound was muted, no tone will sound. Pay
attention to the vehicle's surroundings when you start todrive.

150

Switching on and off
Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus/park assist

Parking aid
--The "P" selector lever position is engaged and released again
Rearview camera
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera

B8V-0643 B8V-0629

Fig. 147 Center console: parking aid button
Switching on and off
Requirement: the vehicle speed must be under approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
> Press the Pt button in the center console. A short confirmation tone sounds and the LED in the button turns on.
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically when reverse gear is engaged while the engine is running. A brief tone will sound.
If Activate automatically is switched on in the Infotainment system and if the vehicle approaches an obstacle at speeds under approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the parking aid will switch on automatically. Audible signals will sound once the obstacle is within the sensor detection area.
Switching off automatically
The system switches off automatically when driv-
ing forward faster than 6 mph (10 km/h).
@) Tips
If you press the Pa button to switch the parking aid off, it can only be reactivated automatically when one of the following conditions is
met:
-- The vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h) -- The ignition is switched off and back on
again -- The parking brake is set and then released

Fig. 148 Illustration: cross parking
The rearview camera helps you to park or maneuver using the orientation lines. General information
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera anoS=&a O|
Fig. 149 Area covered @ and area notcovered (2) by the rearview camera (example)

Fig. 150 Luggage compartmentlid: location of the rear-

view camera (example)

151

8V2012721B)

Parking aid

The rearview camerais located abovethe rear license plate bracket. Make sure that the lens for the parking system > fig. 150 is not covered by deposits or any other obstructions because this can affect the function of the parking system. For information on cleaning, see > page 362.
The rearview camera coverage area includes () > fig. 149. Only this area is shown in the Infotainmentdisplay. Objects that are in area Q), which is not covered, are not displayed.
ZA WARNING
-- Alwaysread and follow the applicable warnings > A in General information on page 149.
-- If the position and the installation angle of
the rearview camera was changed, for exam-
ple after a collision, do not continue to use the system for safety reasons. Haveit checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. -- Only use the rearview camerato assist you if it shows a good, clear picture. For example, the image maybe affected by the sun shining into the lens,dirt on the lens, or if there is a malfunction. -- Use the rearview camera onlyif the luggage compartment lid is completely closed. If the luggage compartmentlid is open the orientation lines and blue surfaces are hidden. Makesure any objects you may have mounted on the luggage compartmentlid do not block the rearview camera. -- The cameralens enlarges and distorts the field of vision. The object appears both altered and inaccurate on the screen. --Incertain situations, people or objects in the display appear closer or farther away:
-- For objects that do not touch the ground, such as the bumper ofa parked vehicle, a trailer hitch or the rear of a truck. Do not use the orientation lines in this case.
--If driven from a level surface onto an incline, or a downwardslope.
-- If driven toward protruding objects. -- If the vehicle is carrying too much load in
the rear.

@) Note
-- Alwaysread and follow the applicable warnings >@ in General information on page 149.
-- The orange-colored orientation lines in the Infotainment display show the vehicle path based on the steering wheel angle. The front of the vehicle swings out more than the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty of distance so that an exterior mirror or a corner of the vehicle does not collide with any obstacles.
SCR
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera
Switching on and off
Requirement: the vehicle speed must be under approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
> Press the Pa button in the center console. A short confirmation tone sounds and the LED in the button turns on.
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically when reverse gear is engaged while the engine is running.
Switching off automatically
The system switches off automatically when driv-
ing forward faster than 6 mph (10 km/h).
@ Tips
-- The visual display* in the right section of the display should help you detect the critical vehicle area.
-- You can change the volume ofthe signals and the display > page 157.

152

i Park assist
This view may be used whenparking in a garage or ina parking space.

Parking aid

Fig. 152 Infotainment system: aligning the vehicle
> Turn the Infotainment system on and shift into reverse gear.
> The orange orientation lines @showthe direction of travel of the vehicle. Turn the steering wheel until the orange orientation lines align with the parking space > fig. 151. Use the markings to help you estimate the distance from an obstacle. Each marking represents approximately 3 feet (1 meter). The blue area represents an extension of the vehicle's outline by approximately 16 feet (5 meters) to the rear.
> While driving in reverse gear, adjust the steering wheel angleto fit the parking space using the orange orientation lines for assistance > A\ in Generalinformation on page 152, >@) in General information on page 152. Area @)represents the rear bumper. Stop the vehicle, at the latest, when the red orientation line ders an object.

Fig. 153 Diagram: street parking options
Park assist helps you to locate suitable parking spaces and to park in them. You can back into parallel @) and perpendicular (2) parking spaces and also drive forward out of parallel parking spaces. You can also drive forward into perpendicular parking spaces if you havealready started driving and the front of the vehicle is in the space @,or if you have already driven pastit @). In sit-
uation @), the vehicle will back up, moveinto the correct position, and then start to drive forward
into the parking space.
The parking space can be between twovehicles or behind a vehicle. The driver parks as usual with park assist controlling the steering.
The parking system plus functions > page 150 that assist you when parking are a component of the parkassist.
The park assist sensors are on the sides of the front and rear bumper. Make sure the sensors are not covered bystickers, deposits or any other obstructions as it may impair the function of the >

153

8V2012721B)

Parking aid
system. For information on cleaning, see
=> page 362.
When parking spaces are small, the parking system signals a continuous tone when an obstacle is less than approximately 0.7 feet (0.20 m) away. Do not continue driving farther.
ZA WARNING
-- Alwaysread and follow the applicable warnings > A\ in General information on page 149.
-- Please note that park assist only controls the steering. The driver is always responsible for braking and accelerating.
-- The driver must decide if the parking space displayed is suitable for the vehicle.
-- The vehicle will change position when parking. Make sure you do not endanger any other drivers.
-- When using parkassist to drive into or out of a parking space, the steering wheel turns quickly on its own. Reaching into the steering wheel spokes while this is happening can result in injury.
@) Note
-- Alwaysread and follow the applicable warnings >@ in General information on page 149.
-- Park assist guides the vehicle either away from curbs or onto them if other vehicles are parked on the curb. Make sure that your vehicle's tires and rims are not damaged. Take over steering at the right time.
-- Certain conditions around the parking space mayresult in the vehicle not being parked as expected. -- Objects such as pillars or posts. -- Ground covering such as gravel, snow or ice
G) Tips
-- The Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) mustnot be switched off during the parking process > page 160.
-- Parking in tight curves with park assist is not possible.
154

SYieee ie Rela
Applies to: vehicles with park assist =x& 3©a
Fig. 155 Infotainment system: finding a parking space
> To switch the park assist on, press the P@ button > fig. 154. The LED in the button will turn on and the display for finding a parking space will appear in the Infotainment system > fig. 155.
> To switch park assist off, press the Pe button. The LED in the button turns off. G) Tips The system preselects a space from the available parking options as soon as a space is detected. You can change the suggested location.

Parking aid

Parking space search
Applies to: vehicles with park assist
Fig. 157 Infotainment: notification to continue driving in reverse (example: when parallel parking)
Searching for parking spaces > Drive forward to the row of parking spaces at a
low speed. For the best parking results, the vehicle should be approximately 3 feet (1 m) from the row of parking spaces. > The parking space search is first done on one side of the lane. To switch the side for the parking space search, activate the turn signal for that side. Selecting the parking space > If the system finds a parking space that could be suitable for the vehicle length and width, it will be displayed > fig. 156. The system automatically suggests a parking option. > Make sure that the parking space is suitable for your vehicle. > To switch between parallel @), forward perpendicular or reverse perpendicular © parking, turn the control knob to the desired mode. Only the parking options that are currently possible are suggested. > Drive forward until the instructions for automatic parking appear in the instrument cluster > AQ in Description on page 154, >@) in Description on page 154. As soon as the vehicle

has reached the correct position, a P appearsin the display over the selected parking space. > Keep the vehicle as parallel as possible to the parked vehicles or to the side of the road. > If you would like to park using the system, follow the instructions in the instrument cluster.
Park assist only displays parking spaces that are suitable for the length and width of the vehicle.
@) Note
-- Parking spaces classified as suitable by the system may have been detected incorrectly. The driver must decide if the parking space displayed is suitable for the vehicle.
-- Certain conditions near the parking space may cause the parking process tofail, such as if the parking space is near trees or posts, or if the ground is covered, for example, with gravel, snow,or ice.
G) Tips
-- You can select a space from all of the parking options found. The possible parking space will be displayed until you are too far awayfrom it.
--If you did not drive past a suitable parking space too quickly, the system can also be activated afterwards by pressing the Pe button and activating the turn signal.
-- If suitable parking spacesare available on both sides of the road at the same time (such as on a one-waystreet), the direction of the turn signal can also be changed in order to usepark assist.
-- Park assist will switch off if your speed exceeds approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
Starting the parking process
Applies to: vehicles with park assist
The responsibility is with the driver when parking.
Requirement: a suitable parking space must be found and selected > page 155. The vehicle must initially be stationary.
> Select the reverse gear after stopping briefly. > Removeyour hands from the steering wheel. >

8V2012721B)

155

Parking aid
> Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. When the traffic situation allows, press the accelerator pedal accordingly > A\ in Description on page 154, >@) in Description on page 154.
> Follow the visual instructions and the warning tones until the parking process has ended. The arrowson the vehicle indicate the necessary direction oftravel.
Park assist automatically steers the vehicle into the parking space while the driver presses the pedals. The maximum parking speed is 4 mph (7 km/h).
Interrupting the park assist
If the speed is too high and you take over steering, park assist switches off. To continue parking, press the Pe button again. The parkassist indicator appears again in the display.
@) Tips
You can also cancel the direction of travel specified by the system by switching between forward and reverse gears. Based on the position of the vehicle, the system then calculates the additional steering and driving directions for maneuvering.
Driving out of a parallel parking space
Applies to: vehicles with park assist
The responsibility is with the driver when leaving a parking space.
If you parked the vehicle in a parallel parking space, park assist can help you drive out ofit.
> Start the engine. > Press the Pe button > page 154, fig. 154. > Wait until a message appears that requests the
direction to travel in for exiting the parking space. > Activate the appropriate turn signal. The message Start automatic unparking procedure appears. > Removeyour hands from the steering wheel. > Press the control knob to start the procedure for exiting the parking space. > Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. When the traffic situation allows, press the accelera-

tor pedal accordingly > A\ in Description on page 154, >@) in Description on page 154. > Follow the visual instructions > page 156 and the warning tones until the vehicle has finished exiting the parking space. > Drive in the direction indicated by the arrows on the vehicle. > The procedure has ended when additional corrective movementsare no longer necessary. Take over steering.
Park assist automatically steers the vehicle out of the parking space while the driver presses the pedals. The maximum speed for exiting a parking space is 3 mph (5 km/h).
Interrupting the park assist
If the speed is too high and you take over steering, park assist switches off. To continue exiting the parking space, switch the engine off and on. Then press the Pe button again. Otherwise, leave the parking space without using park assist.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with park assist
Park assist: canceled. Steering input by driver. Please take over steering!
Park assist was canceled because the driver took over steering. To continue parking, press the & button again.
ro" Parkassist: time limit exceeded
Park assist: canceled. Time limit exceeded. Take over steering!
The parking process was not completed within approximately six minutes of activating park assist. To continue parking, press the Pe button again.
Park assist: canceled. Speed too high. Please take over steering!
The speed entering the parking space is too high. Drive no faster than 4 mph (7 km/h).
ro="| Park assist: canceled. Stabilization control (ESC) input. Please take over steering!

156

Parking aid

The ESC took action to stabilize the vehicle. Take over steering. Complete parking without using park assist or drive out of the parking space.
rox Park assist: currently unavailable. Stabilization control (ESC) off
The ESC was switched off. The ESC must be switched on touse park assist.
Park assist: malfunction! Please contact Service.
Park assist: malfunction! Take over steering! Please contact Service.
Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. You cannot park with park assist if there is a system malfunction.
Park assist: currently unavailable.
Parkassist: currently unavailable. Please take over steering!
Parking with parkassist is not possible. Try parking again or switch the ignition off and back on again if necessary.
Park assist: ended. Please take over steering and continue driving.
The processof exiting the parking space with park assist has ended. Please take over steering.
Park assist: canceled. Parking space too small. Please take over steering!
Parking in this space with parkassist is not possible. Park without using park assist or find a larger parking space.
Park assist: canceled. Obstacle detected. Please take over steering!
Parking with park assist was stopped because the vehicle could collide with an obstacle.
Park assist: ended
Park assist: ended. Please take over steering!
Parking with park assist has ended.
Parkassist: unavailable in current Audi drive select mode

ro" Park assist: canceled. Unavailable in current Audi drive select mode. Please take over steering!
Park assist is not available in certain Audi drive select modes. Select a different mode in drive select > page 146.
Parkassist: stabilization control (ESC) input
The displayed parking space was rejected because the ESC took action to stabilize the vehicle.
Park assist: not stopped long enough
After engaging the reverse gear, park assist must stop briefly in order to activate the steering. Follow the instructions in the display.
ro" Park assist: canceled. Unable to leave parking space automatically. Parking space too small.
The parking space is too small for the vehicle to automatically leave the space. Leave the parking space without using park assist.
roe"| Park assist: canceled. Please take over steering!
Parking with park assist was stopped.
Adjusting the parking aid
Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus/rearview camera/park assist
The functions are adjusted in the Infotainment
system.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Parking aid. Or
> When the parking aid is active, select in the Infotainment system: right control button*.
End system* - Stop the parking aid
Activate automatically - Switch automatic activation on/off
Front volume*- Volume for the front and side* area
Rear volume - Volume for the rear area

8V2012721B)

157

Parking aid
Entertainment fader - The volume of the audio/ video source is lowered when the parking system is turned on.
G) Tips
-- Several menus can be accessed with the right control button only when the parking aid is active.
-- The newlevel is demonstrated briefly* when the volume is adjusted.
-- Certain settings are automatically stored and assigned to the remotecontrol key being used.

faulty, only obstacles that are in areas (@) and @)
are shown > page150,fig. 145. If a front sensor
is faulty, only obstacles that are in areas (3) and
@ are shown.

Error messages
Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus/rearview camera/park assist
wm Rear parking aid: malfunction! Obstacles cannotbe detected
w Front parking aid: malfunction! Obstacles cannot be detected
w Parking aid: malfunction! Obstacles cannot be detected
When one of these messages appears, thereis a system malfunction. The LED in the Pbutton also blinks when switching it on. The relevant message only appears again when you manually activate the parking aid with the button.
Rear parking aid: obstacle detection restricted
The rear cross-traffic assist* > page 145, Rear cross-traffic assist is not available. Either the ESC
is switched off, or the radar sensors may be covered by a bike rack, stickers, leaves, snow or other objects. Switch the ESC on, or clean the area in
front of the sensorsif necessary > page 143, fig. 141. If this message continues to be displayed, drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Parking system plus*/Park assist*
If a sensor or speaker is faulty, the P4 symbol will appear in front of/behind the vehicle in the Infotainment system display. If a rear sensor is

158

Intelligent Technology
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) supports driver safety. It reduces the risk of slipping and improves driving stability. ESC detectscritical situations such as the vehicle oversteering and understeering or the wheels are spinning. The brakes are applied or the engine torque is reduced in order to stabilize the vehicle. When the ESC engages, the B indicator light blinks in the instrument cluster.
The following systems are integrated in the ESC:
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when braking. The vehicle can still be steered even during hard braking. Apply steady pressure to the brake pedal. Do not pump the pedal. A pulsing in the brake pedal indicates that the system is acting to stabilize the vehicle.
Brake assist system
The brake assist system can decrease braking distance. It increases braking power when the driver presses the brake pedal quickly in emergencysituations. You must press and hold the brake pedal until the dangerous situation is over. In vehicles
with adaptive cruise control*, the brake assist system is more sensitive if the distance detected
to the vehicle driving ahead is too small.
Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR)
ASR reduces drive power when the drive wheels begin spinning and adapts the power to the road conditions. This makes it easier to start, accelerate and drive up hills.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
The EDL applies the brakes to wheels that are slipping and transfers the drive power to the other wheels. This function is not available at higher speeds.

Intelligent Technology
In extreme cases, EDL automatically switches off
to keep the brake on the braked wheel from overheating. The vehicle is still functioning correctly. EDL will switch on again automatically when conditions have returned to normal.
Power steering
The ESC can also supportvehicle stability through steering.
Selective wheel torque control
Selective wheel torque control is used when driving on curves. Braking is targeted toward the wheelson the inside of the curve as needed. This allows moreprecise driving in curves.
Automatic post-collision braking system
The automatic post-collision braking system can help to reduce the risk of sliding and of additional collisions after an accident. If the airbag control module detects a collision above a certain vehicle speed, the vehicle is braked by the ESC.
The vehicle does not brake automatically if one of the following occurs:
-- The driver presses the accelerator pedal -- The ESC, the brake system, or the vehicle elec-
trical system is not functioning
A WARNING
--The ESC and its integrated systems cannot overcome the limits imposed by natural physical laws. This is especially important on slippery or wet roads. If the systems begin acting to stabilize your vehicle, you should immediately alter your speed to match the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the increased safety provided temptyou into taking risks. This could increase your risk of a collision.
-- Please notethe risk of a collision increases when driving fast, especially through curves and on slippery or wet roads, and when driving too closeto objects ahead. Thereis still a risk of accidents because the ESC and its integrated systems cannot always prevent collisions.

8V2012721B)

159

Intelligent Technology

-- Accelerate carefully when driving on smooth, slippery surfaces such as ice and snow.The drive wheels can spin even when these control systems are installed and this can affect driving stability and increase the risk of a collision.
@ Tips
-- The ABS and ASR only function correctly when all four wheels have a similar wear

condition. Different tire sizes can lead to a reduction in engine power.
-- You may hear noises when the systems described are working.

Scale Rolie medal

The ESCis automatically switched on whenthe ignition is switched on.

z5gS function of the ESC will be limited or switched

2|&oO

off. The amount of stabilization control will differ depending on the level.

The following examples are unusual situations whereit may makesense to switch sport mode
on in order to allow the wheelsto spin:

Fig. 158 Uppercenter console: ESC button

-- Rocking the vehicle to free it when it is stuck -- Driving in deep snowor on loose ground -- Driving with snow chains

The ESC is designed to function in levels. Depend-
ing on the level that is selected, the stabilization

Behavior
Operation
Indicator lights Messages*

Sport mode on

ESC/ASR off

Sport modeoff or ESC/ASR on

The ESC and ASR stabiliza-
tion functions are limited >A.

The stabilization function is The full stabilization func-

not available > A\. ESC and_|tion of the ESC and ASR is

ASR are switched off.

available again.

Press the |£| button briefly.

Press and hold the |#°"| button longer than three sec-
onds.

Press the |£%] button again.

Egiturns on.

Band ea turn on.

Egliturns off or [ig and aa turn off.

Stabilization control (ESC): Stabilization control (ESC): Stabilization control

sport. Warning! Limited off. Warning! Limited sta- (ESC): on

stability

bility

/\ WARNING
You should only switch sport mode on or switch ESC/ASR off if your driving abilities and road conditions permit.

~The stabilization functionis limited when
sport mode is switched on. The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle could
swerve, especially on slick or slippery road
surfaces.

160

-- Thereis no vehicle stabilization when ESC/ASR are switchedoff.
@) Tips
-- ESC/ASR cannotbe switched off or sport mode cannotbe switched on if the cruise control system* or the adaptive cruise control* is switched on.
-- Malfunctions in the Audi magnetic ride* may makeit impossible to switch the ESC/ASR off or to switch sport mode on.
Brakes
You can apply the vehicle's brakes using the brake pedal.
Operating noise
Noises may occur when braking depending on the speed, braking force, and outside conditions such as temperature and humidity.
Braking effect
The response time from the brakes depends on the weather and environmental conditions. To ensure the optimum braking effect, the brake system is cleaned at regular intervals. This is done by applying the brake pads to the brake rotors for a short period of time when driving at high speeds when the windshield wipers are switched on.
If the brake system becomes damp, for example after driving in heavyrain, the braking effect may be delayed. Other factors that could temporarily increase the responsetime of the brakes include:
-- Wetconditions -- Low temperatures, ice, and snow -- Roads covered in salt -- Dirty brake pads
Corrosion
Corrosion may form on the brakerotorsif there is no heavy braking, if the vehicle is not driven for long periods of time, or if the vehicle is not driven frequently or for long distances. In this case, braking heavily several times while driving at high speeds can clean the brake rotors > A\.

Intelligent Technology

Brake pads
New brake pads do not achievetheir full braking effect during the first 250 miles (400 km). They
mustbe "broken in"first. However, you can compensate for the slightly reduced braking force by
pressing firmly on the brake pedal. Avoid heavy braking during the break-in period.
Brake pad wear depends largely on the way the vehicle is driven and on operating conditions. Brake pad wear increases when driving frequently in the city or short distances or when using a very sportydriving style.
Z\WARNING
-- Only apply the brakes for the purpose of cleaning the brake system when road and traffic conditions permit. You must not endanger other road users and increase the risk of an accident.
-- Due to the risk of injury, only have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility work on the brake system. Incorrect repairs could impair the function.
-- Never let the vehicle roll while the engine is stopped because this increases the risk of an accident.
-- Depending on vehicle equipment, the brake pedal may move downward automatically during autonomous braking maneuvers. To reducethe risk of injury, do not place your foot under the brake pedal.

C) Note

-- Never let the brakes "rub" by pressing the

pedal lightly when braking is not actually

necessary. This can cause the brakes to over-

heat and increases braking distance and

causes wear.

-- Before driving on long stretches with steep

hills, reduce the vehicle speed and shift to a

lower gear to use the engine braking effect.

This reduces the load on the brakes. If you

need to brake additionally, brake in intervals

and not continuously.

8V2012721B)

161

Intelligent Technology
@ Tips -- If you retrofit your vehicle with a front spoiler, wheel coversor similar items, make sure that the air flow to the brakes is not obstructed. Otherwise the brake system can overheat. -- Also refer to the information about brake fluid > page 334.
Electromechanical steering
The electromechanical steering supports the driver's steering movements.
Power steering adapts electronically based on the vehicle speed.
Indicator lights and messages
a Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
If this indicator light turns on and stays on and
this message appears, the power steering may have failed.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for
assistance.
eB Steering: system fault! You can continue driving
If the indicator light turns on, the steering wheel may be moredifficult to move or more sensitive than usual. The steering wheel may also be turned to the side when driving straight.
Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction corrected.
@) Tips If the & or El indicator light only stays on for a short time, you may continue driving.

All wheel drive (quattro)
Applies to: vehicles with all wheel drive
In all wheeldrive, all four wheels are powered.

General information
In all wheel drive, the driving power is divided between all four wheels. This happens automatically depending on your driving behavior as well as the current road conditions. Also see > page 159, Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC).
The all wheel drive conceptis designed for high engine power. Your vehicle is exceptionally powerful and has excellent driving characteristics both under normal driving conditions and on snowand ice. Always read and follow safety precautions > A\.

Winter tires
By using all wheel drive, your vehicle has good forward motion with standard tires in winter con-
ditions. However, using winter or all season tires on all four wheels in the winter is recommended,
because this will improve the braking effect.

Snowchains
If there are snow chain laws, snow chains must
also be used on vehicles with all wheel drive = page 355, Snow chains.

Replacing tires
For vehicles with all wheel drive, only wheels with the same rolling circumference should be used. Avoid using tires with different tread depths => page 346, New tires or wheels.

Is this an offroad vehicle?
Your Audi is not an offroad vehicle - there is not enough ground clearance. For this reason, avoid difficult terrain.

Z\ WARNING

-- Also, in vehicles with all wheel drive, adapt

your driving style to the current road and

traffic conditions. Do not let the increased

safety provided temptyou into taking risks,

because this increases the risk of an acci-

dent.

162

Intelligent Technology

-- The braking ability of your vehicleis limited
to the traction of the wheels. In this way,it
is not different from a two wheel drive vehicle. Do not be tempted to accelerate to a high speed when the road is slippery, because this increases the risk of an accident.
-- Note that on wetstreets, the front wheels
can "hydroplane"if driving at speeds that are too high. Unlike front wheel drive vehicles, the engine RPM does notincrease suddenly when the vehicle begins hydroplaning. Adaptyour speed to the road conditions to reduce the risk of an accident.
Energy management
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent energy management system for distributing electricity. This significantly improves the starting ability and increases the vehicle batterylife.
@ Tips
-- If you drive short distances frequently, the vehicle battery may not charge enough
while driving. As a result, convenience functions for electrical equipment may be tem-
porarily unavailable. -- The vehicle battery will gradually drain if
the vehicle is not driven for long periods of time, or if electrical equipment is used when the engine is not running. To ensure
that the vehicle can still be started, the electrical equipmentwill be limited or switched off.
Notice about data
recorded by the Event
Data Recorder and vehicle control modules
Event Data Recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
ing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR

is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
-- How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
-- Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
-- Howfar (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
-- Howfast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Audi will only access the EDR and/or similar data or give it to others with the consent of the owner or lessee or in accordance with applicable law. States vary in their access/disclosure restrictions for EDR data, but typically such data can be accessed/disclosed in the following circumstances:
-- when the vehicle owner (or lesseeif the vehicle has been leased) agrees; or
-- upon the official request by the police; or -- upon the order of a court of law or a govern-
ment agency; or -- for the defense of a lawsuit through the judicial
discovery process.
-- Audi mayalso use the data, once retrieved from the vehicle under permissible circumstances,in
an anonymous format.

8V2012721B)

163

Intelligent Technology
-- for research about vehicle operation and safety performance or provide the data to a third party for such research purposes.
Vehicle control modules Your vehicle is also equipped with a number of electronic control modules for various vehicle
systems, such as engine management, emission control, airbags, and safety belts.
These electronic control modules record data during normal vehicle operation that may be needed by trained technicians for diagnostic and repair purposes. The recording capability of these modules is limited to data (no sound is recorded). Only a small amount of data is actually recorded over a very limited period of time, or stored when a system fault is detected by a control module. Some of the data stored mayrelate to vehicle speed, direction, or braking, as well as restraint system use and performancein the eventof a crash. Stored data can also only be read and downloaded with special equipment that is directly connected to the vehicle.
@ Tips
Your vehicle may be equipped with Audi connect. Your use of certain Audi connect features requires wireless services that are provided by a third party wireless telecommunications provider. For details regarding how information obtained through Audi connectis collected, processed, transmitted, used, and shared, please see your contract with the wireless telecommunications provider.
164

Multi Media Interface

Multi Media Interface
Traffic safety information
Audi recommends performing certain Infotainment system functions, such as entering a destination, only when the vehicle is stationary.Always be preparedto stop operating the Infotainment system in the interest of your safety and the safety of other road users.
Z\ WARNING
Only use the Infotainment system when road,
traffic, weather, and visibility conditions per-
mit and alwaysin a way that allows you to maintain complete control over your vehicle.

©) Buttons for opening menus directly . 167

(@ [MENU] button oss ss eves 2 x neues 3s

167

@ [BACK] button ...... 2 ee

166

MMI On/Off knob with joystick function
(ey eYTe-latire]

[RAH-8837,
[RAH-8838,

G@) Tips
Certain functions are not available while driving.
Introduction

Fig. 159 MMI control panel

The Multi Media Interface, or MMI for short,
combines various systems for communication,
navigation* and entertainment in your Audi. You can operate the MMI using the MMI control panel, the multifunction steering wheel or the voice recognition system*.

MMI control panel overview

@ Control knob with joystick function*

ee eee eee eee 166, 170

@ MMI touch control pad* .........

168

@® Left control button .............

167

@ Right control button ............

167

Fig. 160 MMI On/Off knob with joystick function
Switching the MMI on/off: the MMI can be switched on/off manually. -- Switching on manually: press the On/Off knob
@ briefly > fig. 160, or press the [MENU] but-
ton © © page 165, fig. 159 or one ofthe but-
tons used to open a menu G).
-- Switching off manually: press and hold the On/Off knob (@) > fig. 160 until the MMI switches off. If the MMI has been switched off manually, it does not switch on again automatically the next time the ignition is switched on.
Additional functions: -- Adjusting the volume: turn the On/Off knob @
> fig. 160.
-- Muting: press the On/Off knob @ © fig. 160 briefly.
-- Selecting the previous/next function (for example, a radio station/track): press the On/Off knob @) ° fig. 160briefly toward the left KK or right Do.
-- Fast forwarding/rewinding (for example songs): press and hold the On/Off knob @) => fig. 160 toward the left Kd or right DDI.
Z\WARNING
To reduce the risk of an accident, adjust the volume of the audio systems so that signals >

8V2012721B)

165

Multi Media Interface
outside of the vehicle, such as police and fire
sirens, can be heard easily at all times.
@) Tips
The MMI switches off automatically if the engine is not running and the vehicle batteryis low.
Infotainment system display
Switching on/off
The Infotainment system display automatically extends and retracts when you switch the ignition on and off.
> When it is extended, press the [o] button to switch the Infotainment system display on or off.
When the MMI is switched on and the displayis switched off, you can operatecertain functions using the On/Off knob with the MMI joystick function > page 165.
@) Tips There maybe delays when switching on the display.

MMI operation
Selecting and confirming a function
Fig. 161 Operating the control knob
Selecting and confirming a function in a menu/list
> Selecting a function: turn the control knob @) to the desired function (such as selecting a fre-
quency).
> To confirm your selection: Press the control knob @).
Returning to functions at higher levels > Press the [BACK] button (%) > page 165,
fig. 159.
Coy eYTae mM Ana ale

166

Fig. 162 Diagram: main menu

Opening the main menu
> Press the [MENU] button © > page 165, fig. 159. The MMI menus (such as Radio) are displayed > fig. 162. Then you can select and confirm a function using the control knob.
Opening a menu directly
> Press the applicable button to directly open the menus () > page 165,fig. 159 in the direction
of the desired menu (such as |RADIO}). Then
you can select and confirm a function using the control knob.
MCo}iT thie Ehecomnattroellabeutmtoansl eco) eee Ley

Multi Media Interface
Options menu: using the options menu, you can select and confirm context-dependentfunctions as well as settings within a menu item (such as
Radio).
Requirement: the options menu symbol [+] must be displayed in the Infotainment system display => fig. 163. Then you can select and confirm a function using the control knob.
Opening and closing the options menu: Press the right control button > fig. 163. Then you can select and confirm a function using the control knob.
Informati= on about menu paths
This guide showsyou at a glance the paths for opening a desired menu and its settings and functions.
Example of a path
> Select: [RADIO] button > left control button > FM.
Following the path
> Press the [RADIO] button. > Press the left control button. > Turn the control knob to the FM menu item to
select it. > Press the control knob to confirm the selected
FM menu item. > The selected and confirmed function is execut-
ed. In this example, the FM frequency band is
set.

Fig. 163 Control buttons on the MMI control panel
Selection menu: through the selection menu, you can open additional functions within a menu item (such as Radio).
Requirement: the selection menu symbol must be displayed in the Infotainment system display > fig. 163.
Opening and closing a selection menu: Press the left control button > fig. 163. Then you can select and confirm a function using the control knob.

8V2012721B)

167

RAH-8776
pS4
= Aen 8748

Multi Media Interface
MMI touch
MMI touch control pad
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
Angeles, CA
4p 5
B ¥ DAoSwneyteisiroatl w: SiUOs Angeles, CA
Q
Fig. 164 Example: entering a navigation destination using the MMI touch
You can enter data using handwriting recognition on the MMI touch control pad. The MMI touch control pad is on the surface with the control knob.
Entering letters, numbers and symbols
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch

Requirement: it must be possible to enter text or numbers and the symbol (@) > fig. 165 must appear in the Infotainment system display.
-- Initial entry: write an individual upper case or lower case letter or number/symbol on the MMI touch control pad using your finger. A symbol that is recognized clearly by the system is displayed in the Infotainment system display @ © page 168,fig. 164, confirmed with an audible signal if necessary, and transferred to the input field.
-- Entering spaces: move your finger across the MMI touch control pad from left to right.
-- Deleting characters: move your finger across the MMI touch control pad from right to left.
-- Selecting the input suggestion: press the control knob.
-- Switching directly to the resultslist: turn the control knob tothe right.
-- Opening thespeller: select the right control button > Open speller. Text or numbers are entered using the speller > page 172.
Oe mame ETL
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
~~
S Figueroa St i

Fig. 165 Display when MMI touch is active
The MMI touch allows you to enter data on the MMI touch control pad using handwriting recognition.

Fig. 166 Moving the crosshairs

168

Multi Media Interface

Requirement: a map mustbe displayed => page 220.
-- Showing and hiding the crosshairs: press the control knob to show the crosshairs (2) => fig. 166, or press the MMI touch control pad.
Press the [BACK] button () > page 165,
fig. 159 to hide the crosshairs again. -- Moving the crosshairs on a map: move the
crosshairs shown in the desired direction using your finger on the MMI touch control pad > fig. 166.
Moving the crosshairs quickly: when the crosshairs are visible @ > fig. 166,slide your finger quickly across the MMI touch control pad in the desired direction. The crosshairs will come to a stop after several seconds.

-- Showing/hiding the crosshairs: press the control knob to show the crosshairs @) © fig. 167. Press the BACK] button (7) > page 165, fig. 159 to hide the crosshairs again.
-- Moving the standard map/satellite map): movethe crosshairs shownin the desired direction using two fingers on the MMI touch control pad © fig. 167.
-- Moving the map quickly: when the crosshairs are visible, pull two fingers across the MMI touch control pad quickly in the desired direction. The map will come to a stop after several seconds.
Zooming in/out on the map
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch

Moving the map
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch

RAH-8744] RAH-8750)

Fig. 167 Moving the map
Requirement: a map mustbe displayed => page 220.

Fig. 168 Zooming in and out on the map
Requirement: a map mustbe displayed => page 220.
-- Zooming in/out on the map: press the control knob to show the crosshairs. Touch the MMI touch control pad with twofingers and pull your fingers apart or together > fig. 168.
Press the BACK button () to hide the crosshairs => page 165, fig. 159.
Adjusting the sound focus
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
Requirement: the balance/fader function must be selected > page 257.

D AUDI AGprovides access to services from third party providers. Permanentavailability cannot be guaranteed, because that dependson thethird party provider.

169

8V2012721B)

Multi Media Interface
-- Moving the crosshairs for sound focus: move your finger in the desired direction on the MMI touch control pad.
-- Storing the crosshairs location: press the control knob twice or press the [BACK] button (7) => page 165,fig. 159.
Using the DVD main menu
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
Requirement: a DVD mustbe playing => page 241.
-- Selecting a menu item: moveyour finger up/ down or left/right on the MMI touch control pad.
-- Confirming a selection: press the control knob.
G) Tips
The volume of the voice guidance prompts for the MMI touch* can be adjusted separately => page 258.
Control knob with
joystick function

Appliesto: vehicles with joystick function
2

&
Fig. 169 Operating concept for the control knob with joystick function
You can push the control knob up or down (@ or
to the rightorleft @).
Opening the entertainmentsliding menu
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
Opening the entertainment sliding menu: push the control knob downto open the entertain-

RAH-8515|

ment sliding menu @) > page 174, fig. 173. Then you can select and confirm a function.
Closing the entertainment sliding menu: push the control knob up to close the entertainment sliding menu or press the [BACK] button @) => page 165,fig. 159.
Additional functions
Applies to: vehicles with joystick function
Displaying the input field/switching to speller input
Push the control knob upwardto reach the beginning of a list in the central area or the input field. If the input field is already open, switch directly to the speller in the input field by pushing the control knob up again > page 172.
On the map
Requirement: a map mustbe displayed => page 220.
-- Displaying the input field: push the control knob up.
-- Displaying route guidance: when route guidanceis active, you can also display the route guidance by pushing the control knob up => page 215,fig. 188.
-- Zooming in/out on the map (zoom): turn the control knob to the right/left to zoom in/out on the map.
-- Additional options on the map: see => page 222
Applies to: vehicles without MMI touch with joystick function
-- Showing/hiding the crosshairs: press the control knob. The crosshairs are shown on the map. Press the [BACK] button to hide the crosshairs.
-- Moving the crosshairs: when the crosshairs are visible, turn the control knob in the direction the crosshairs should move. Press the control knob and hold it until the crosshairs are in the desired point on the map.
Adjusting the sound focus
Applies to: vehicles without MMI touch with joystick function
Requirement: the balance/fader function must be selected > page 257.

170

Multi Media Interface

-- Moving the sound focus using the crosshairs: the crosshairs can be moved horizontally. Turn the control knob to the left or to the right. Press the control knob to move the crosshairs vertically. Turn the control knob tothe left or to the right. Press the control knob again to save the setting.
Using the DVD main menu
Requirement: a DVD mustbe playing => page 241.
-- Selecting a menu item: move the control knob with joystick function up or down or tothe left or right.
-- Confirming a selection: press the control knob.
Coy oYTa em an -weT1 (red elay Qe Lila Maa alec ay the control knob
Applies to: vehicles with joystick function

Requirement: the selection menu symbol 3 must be displayed in the Infotainment system display
> fig. 170.
Opening andclosing the selection menu: push the control knob to the left > fig. 170 to open the selection menu. Then you can select and confirm a function using the control knob.
Press the [BACK] button (7) > page 165,fig. 159 to return to the function one level up.
Opening andclosing the options menu: push the control knob to the right > fig. 170 to open the options menu. Then you can select and confirm a function using the control knob.
Press the [BACK] button () > page 165,fig. 159 to return to the function one level up.

Applies to: MMI control panel with control knob and joystick function Fig. 170 Openingthe selection/options menu with the control knob

171

8V2012721B)

Multi Media Interface
Letter/number speller

cyAUIS, (oN
ai i ee co aly

Coeasto PEELE Crt
Ss)

Fig. 171 Diagram: letter/number speller
You can enter letters, numbers and symbolsin the MMI using the letter/number speller. This option is available when the input field @) is active.
-- Opening and closing the letter/number speller: move the control knob up/down when the input field is active, or select: right control button > Open speller/Closespeller.
-- Entering characters: turn the control knob to the desired character using the character selection @. Press the control knob to confirm the character. Your input is displayed in the input
field @). Once you have entered all of the char-
acters, select and confirm the button @to go
to the results list or push the control knob down.
-- Entering accented characters (such as 4, ¢, fi, 6)*: turn the control knob with the character
selection @9 to a character. To open the selected accented characters, press and hold the control knob. Turn the control knob with the character selection @0 to an accented character. Press the control knob to insert the accented character. To close the accented characters without selecting a character, press and hold
the control knob again, or select and confirm
a6] (7). Select and confirm an accented charac-
ter.
-- Deleting characters: select and confirm 1 @ and press the control button. To delete all char-

acters in the input field, press and hold the control knob on &] until all characters in the input field are deleted. -- Entering special characters: select and con-
firm 82] ©, [464] Z or [123] @).Select and
confirm the desired special character (for example, a hyphen or period) with the number speller.
-- Input assistance: in some cases such as in navi-
gation*, there is a word suggestion* @) based on available entries while you are entering data. You can select this suggestion by pushing the control knob upward. -- Resultslist: in some cases, such as in the directory, the system switches automatically to the results list based on logical deduction @). Select and confirm a suggestion from the list.
Requirement: the input field @) must be active.
-- Switching between speller and MMI touch*: the handwriting recognition for the MMI touch control pad* is activated automatically. Simply start writing.
Overview of symbolsin the speller
The symbolsin the letter/number speller are explained in the following table:

172

Multi Media Interface

® |e (RO) © |O|O| © © © |O|O

Symbol/Description LIST] orl Input field
Results list
t
&
18? aou TSSABS

Description
Switches to the resultslist.
Displays the current input.
Displays a list with suggestions based on the letters already entered. Switches from lower case to upper case letters or from upper case to lower case letters. Opens additional speller options, for example Close speller and Clear inputfield.
Character sets and special characters
Displays accented characters (such as 4, ¢, fi, 6).
Switches from letter to number input or from number to letter in-
put.

-- Character selection
A ea)

Adds a space in the input field. Highlights the selected character. Inserts the suggested word* when you push the control knob up.
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.

G) Tips
Accented charactersare not available for every letter.
Free text search
Applies to: vehicles with free text search
aLe
bert, Simon
Een Eta Cmca
Oe)
CC
Fig. 172 Example: free text search on telephone
Using the free text search, you can select the order that the search terms are entered in the input field.
Free text search is available in the Vehicle*, Ra-
dio*, Media*, Telephone*, Navigation* and Audi
connect* menus.

Opening free text search
> Select: [MENU] button > desired menu item (such as Telephone).
> Keep turning the control knob tothe left until the free text search input field @ appears, or
> Push the control knob up to open the input
field @.
The handwriting recognition for the MMI touch control pad* is automatically activated. Simply start writing.
Free text search for an entry
> Enter one or more search terms in anyorder into the input field. The individual search terms must be separated by spaces when entering.
An input suggestion to completethe entry* @) is shown depending on the input. Additional entries that contain the entered search term arelisted In
the resultslist @).
If the desired term is still not displayed, enter additional letters until it is displayed.
It is often enough just to enter the first letters of the search term in order for it to display in the

8V2012721B)

173

Multi Media Interface
resultslist. For example, in the Telephone*
menu, write the initials of the contact being
searched, separated by a space.
Selecting the input suggestion to complete the entry
Requirement: an input suggestion to complete
the entry* @) mustbe displayed.
> MMI touch input*: press the control knob.

Menus and Symbols

OX etla ee Temata Leo)
eae nana
BICC

_ Basteig

Selecting an entry from the results list
Requirement: at least one entry mustbe dis-
played in the resultslist @).
> MMI touch input*: turn the control knob to the right. Select and confirm an entry from the list.
> Speller input: select and confirm [LIST] @ = page 172, fig. 171, or
> Push the control knob down. Select and confirm an entry from the list.

Qe i]

Fig. 173 Diagram: menus and symbols

Symbol/Description

Description

Selected text

Selected function

TMC

TMC/online traffic information reception > page 225

Entertainment sliding menu

Displays information about the media source that is currently selected or a situation (such as an incoming call). Depending on vehi-
cle equipment, operation might also be possible using the open entertainmentsliding menu (such as selecting a radio station or ac-
cepting a call) > page 170.

Jukebox* importing process

Copy audio/video files to the Jukebox > page 235

Repeat track

The track currently playing is repeated. > page 245

shhuutftflle

ASlhluffifllees on the playlist are played in random order > page 245,

Anew

Access information by pressing the control knob when the selected

text is active

Telephone signal
strength bars

Telephone signal strength

Exclamation point on the telephone

Indicates missed calls

174

® ® |@O|@| © © |O| © |®| © |® ©

Multi Media Interface

Symbol/Description Data connection signal strength bars*
eeSEITTE,
Mute Roaming
Importing process Options menu* Bluetooth* Scroll bars
Input PME fieNEld MMI touch*
Knob Check boxes
Selection list

Description
Reception strength of the active data connection or PIN: Enter PIN (SIM) PUK: enter the PUK
Network coverage for the active data connection > page 208 2G: GSM network 3G: UMTS network LTE*: LTE network
The audio source is muted > page 257
Outside the mobile network for the connected cell phone or the inserted SIM card
Import/update the contacts in the directory or the call lists
Select and confirm context-dependent functions as well as settings within a menu item
Bluetooth device connected > page 236 or > page 188
Indicates a long list. Movewithin lists by turning the control knob.
Information that can be changed using the letter/number speller = page 172 or the MMI touch* > page 168.
Operation using the MMI touch control pad is possible
Setting for the selected function by turning the control knob You can swit: ch certai:n functi: ons on [Fy or off by pressi: ng the con trol knob.
Settings for the selected function that are accessed by pressing the control knob

8V2012721B)

175

Multifunction steering wheel

Multifunction steering wheel
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel
In the driver information system display, you can control numerous Infotainment functions using the multifunction steering wheel plus* > page 17 or the multifunction steering wheel* > page 20.
You can control additional Infotainment functions using the MMI control panel > page 165 in the Infotainment system display.
Z\WARNING
Direct your full attention to driving. As the driver, you have complete responsibility for safety in traffic. Only use the functions in such a way that you always maintain complete control over your vehiclein all traffic situations.
Radio
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel and radio
Requirement: radio mode mustbe started => page 228 and the radio/media tab mustbe displayed.
> Press either the =Ibutton or the left control button > page 18, depending on vehicle equip-
ment.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following functions maybe available in the driver information system.
-- Selecting the frequency band: select and confirm a frequency band.
-- Selecting a station from the presetslist*: select: Presets > the desired radio station.
-- Selecting a station from the station list*: select and confirm a radio station.
-- Selecting a station from the presetslist: select: Presets > the desired radio station.
-- Opening a media source: select and confirm To media.

Additional settings
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
-- Select: right control button > desired entry.
Depending on the function selected, the following additional settings may be possible:
-- Show "NowPlaying"screen: see > page 232.
Media
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel and media
Requirement: a media drive must contain audio/ video files > page 234 and the radio/media tab mustbe displayed.
> Press either the =lbutton or the left control button > page 18, depending on vehicle equip-
ment.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following functions maybe available in the driver information system.
-- Selecting a media source: select and confirm a source such as the "SD card".
-- Playing an audio/videofile: select and confirm a track/file.
-- Pausing/resuming playback: pressthe right thumbwheel @) > page19,fig. 11. To resume playback, press the right thumbwheel again.
Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster
-- Switching to radio: select and confirm a frequency band (such as FM).
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
-- Switching to the radio: select and confirm Switch to radio.
-- Opening additional track information: select: right control button > Show "NowPlaying" screen. For additional information, see => page 244.
@ Tips
-- The media drives do notplay files that are protected by DRM and thatareidentified with the symbol ff.
-- Please note that within a media source in the driver information system, only playlists that were selected through the MMI control panel can be played > page 242.

176

Multifunction steering wheel

-- Alwayspay attention to the Infotainment system display. Additional operation through the MMI control panel may be necessary, depending on the selected function.
Telephone
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel and telephone
Requirement: a cell phone must be connected to the MMI > page 188 and the telephone tab must be displayed.
> Press either the [=lbutton or the left control button > page 18, depending on vehicle equip-
ment.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following functions maybe available in the driver information system.
-- Accessing a contact: select and confirm Call list / Favorites / Directory. Select and confirm a
contact.
-- Directory contacts: the driver information system only displays directory contacts that have a phone number stored. If several phone num-
bers are stored with a contact, the list of stored numbersis displayed first when the entry is selected. For more information about the displayed symbols,refer to > page 198. -- Recentcalls: the recent calls list contains all in-
coming, outgoing and missed calls.
-- Caller information*: the name, phone number or Unknownappearsin the driver information
system display depending on whether the caller has been stored in the directory and if the phone number has been transmitted.
Functions during an incomingcall
-- Accepting a call: press the left thumbwheel when thereis an incoming call.
-- Declining a call: select and confirm Decline when thereis an incoming call.
-- Ending a phone call: select and confirm End call.
Functions during a phone call

Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster
-- Making an additional phone call: select Hold > button > Directory or Call list > an entry in
the list. -- Accepting an incoming call when there is an
active call and a call on hold: select and confirm Replace. The active call is replaced with the incoming call.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
-- Making an additional phone call: select: Hold call > left control button > Directory or Call list
>anentry.
-- Accepting an incoming call when there is an active call and a call on hold: select and confirm Answer. The active call is replaced with the incoming call.
Additional functions include:
Mute: if you select and confirm this function, the other person on the phone cannot hear you. You will still be able to hear the other person.
Holding/resuminga call: you can place the existing call on hold and resume it again.
Swap call: you can alternate between two phone calls at the same time. One ofthe calls will be on hold. Selecting End call will end the active phone call. A call that was placed on hold stays on hold and can be taken off hold with Resume held call.
Conferencecall: a call on hold and up tofive active parties (depending on the cell phone service provider) can be added to a conferencecall. To make an additional call, put all participants in the current conferencecall on hold using Hold conference. By pressing the left control button, you can makeadditional calls from the directory or the call list. Resume conferencetakes all participants off hold.
@) Tips
-- The phone functions can only be controlled with the multifunction steering wheel if the phone equipment was installed at the fac-
tory.
-- The telephone functions depend on the cell phone and whether they are supported by your cell phone service provider or not.

8V2012721B)

177

Multifunction steering wheel

-- The Call waiting function must be activated in your cell phone and in the MMI in order to be alerted when thereis an incoming call during an active call. The call options depend on the cell phone and service provider. You can obtain more information from your cell phone service provider.
Navigation
oy Tela R em LS
Appliesto: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel and
navigation system
Requirement: the navigation tab mustbe displayed.
If you have not started route guidance, a compass will display in the driver information system. The map is displayed in the Audi virtual cockpit*.
> Press either the =lbutton or the left control button > page 18, depending on vehicle equip-
ment.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following functions maybe available in the driver information system.
-- Accessing last destinations: select and confirm Last destinations > the desired destination.
-- Accessing favorites*: select and confirm Favorites > the desired destination.
Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster
-- Showing navigation when route guidanceis active: select and confirm Route guidance.
-- Showing the compass when route guidanceis inactive: select and confirm Compass.
-- Starting route guidance to the stored home address: if necessary,first select and confirm Cancel route guidance and then Favorites > Home address.
-- Canceling active route guidance: select and confirm Cancel route guidance.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
-- Starting route guidance to the stored home
address: if necessary,first select and confirm
Cancel route guidance and then Favorites > Home address.

-- Canceling active route guidance: select: right control button > Cancel route guidance.
Additional settings
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
-- Select: right control button > desired entry. Depending on the vehicle equipment and the function selected, the following additional settings may be possible: -- Map display > page 222. -- Map colors > page 222. -- Map orientation > page 222. -- Automatic zoom > page 223.
Navigation view with route guidance tate)
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and Audi virtual cockpit
Fig. 174 Diagram: standard map when route guidanceis active (Audi virtual cockpit)
Requirement: a destination must be entered = page 211, route guidance mustbe started and the navigation tab must be displayed. Depending on the vehicle equipment and the selected view > page 18, the following information will be displayed in the driver information sys-
tem:
@ Map content (such as points of interest or traffic information) @ Currentvehicle position (@) @)A bar graph appears when there is an upcom-
ing turn. The fewer the bars that are shown, the shorter the distance is until the turn. If thereis
not an upcoming turn, the distance to the destination/stopover and the calculated arrival time is displayed in the right speedometer.

178

Multifunction steering wheel

@ Name of the street where you are currently driving
SecAU ALM eM i CeETia-eiTaece)
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and analog instrument cluster
asta
(1)5 300yrd

RAH-7514)

RAH-7513

The following functions are also available when route guidance is active:
-- Repeating the last voice guidance message: press the |.4] button.
-- Adjusting the voice guidance volume: turn the right thumbwheel up or down while a voice guidance message is playing.
Z\ WARNING
The route calculated by the navigation system is a recommendation for reaching your destination. Obeytraffic lights, stopping restrictions, one-waystreets, lane change restric-
tions, etc.
@) Tips
-- Also see the chapter > page8, Controls at a glance.
-- An exclamation point "!" in front of the street name indicates that the information about this street or this section of the route is not complete in the navigation data contained in the MMI. Obeytraffic laws in oneway streets and pedestrian zones.

Fig. 176 Example: turning maneuverin the instrument. cluster
Requirement: a destination must be entered = page 211, route guidance mustbe started and the navigation tab mustbe displayed.
Depending on vehicle equipment,the following information may be shown in the driver information system.
Distance to the next maneuver Distance to the destination or stopover Calculated arrival time
Name of the current expressway, highway or street. If the O symbol is displayed in front of the street name, you should turn onto the street shown. Direction arrow for the upcoming maneuver
Lane recommendation
A bar graph appears when a direction arrowis displayed. The fewer the bars that are shown, the shorter the distance is until the turn.

®©O0O

8V2012721B)
CO®@

179

Voice recognition system

GLOEVAL COMMANDS
+ Telephone
+ Audi connect
* Navigation * Directory
* Radio + Media + Sound * Help + Help Speech dialog system
* Help Telephone
* Help Audi connect
* Help Navigation * Help Map * Help Radio * Help Media
TELEPHONE
+ Enter number + Delete number / correction
+ Directory
* Call (XY) + business/ private / land line / mobile

+ Favorites
* Call (XY)
* Enter number * Redial
* Read new text message + Navigate to (XY) + Enter address/destination + Online destinations * Cancel route guidance
* Map
+ Line (XY)
* Next page / previous page * Cancel * No, I meant(XY) * Correction

Call list Redial Call mailbox Enter PIN / delete PIN Telephone favorites

. TEL

NAVIGATION
+ Navigate to (XY) + Start / cancel route guidance
+ Directory + Last destinations + Navigation favorites + Drive home + Enter address + Enter country / town/ street / state + Exclude route / Exclude route for (XY) km /m

+ Block route for (XY) miles / Block the next section
* Routelist * Calculate alternative routes * Online destinations * Special destination

MAP.
+ Map
* Day map / Night map * 2D driving position map / 2D north position map / 3D map / Destination map / Overview map

AUDI CONNECT
* Audi connect * Travel information / Parking information * Fuel prices * Weather

L
Flight information + City events * Online news
* Twitter

+FRMadio presets
* FM/AM SIRIUS XM
+ Station (XY) / Frequency(XY) * Traffic announcementon / off

JCuDk/ebDoVxD

M6 ED}IA

SD card 1/SD card 2

Audi music interface / iPod / USB / Bluetooth /

Wi-Fi / Medium (XY) Media favorites / Artists / Albums / Genres/ Tracks / Playlists / Videos

Folder up

Random playback on / off

Fig. 177 Command overview

180

Voice recognition system
Operating
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system
You can operate many Infotainment functions
conveniently by speaking.
Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be switched on. A system language supported by the voice recognition system mustbe set. There must be no phone calls in progress and the parking aid must not be active.
> Switching on: press the [%] button @ > page 19, fig. 11 or @) > page20, fig. 13 briefly on the multifunction steering wheel and say the desired command after the Beep.
> Switching off: press and hold the |] button. Or: press the [5] button.
> Pausing: say the command Pause. To resume, press the |] button.
> Correcting: say the command Correction.
Input assistance
The system guides you through the input with visual and audio feedback.
-- Visual input assistance: after switching on voice recognition, a display with a selection of possible commands appears. This command display can be switched on or off. Select: MENU] button > Settings > left control button > MMI settings > Speech dialog system.
-- Audio input assistance: to have the possible commands read, turn the voice recognition system on and say Help.
For the system to understand you:
Speak clearly and distinctly at a normal volume. Speak louder when driving faster.
Emphasize the words in the commands evenly and do notleave long pauses.
Close the doors, the windows,and the sunroof*
to reduce background noise. Make sure that passengers are not speaking when you are giving a voice command.

Voice recognition system
Do not direct the vents toward the hands-free mi-
crophone, which is in the roof headliner near the
front interior lights.
Only use the system from the driver's seat because the hands-free microphone is directed toward that seat.
Additional settings
See > page 258.
ZA WARNING
-- Direct your full attention to driving. As the driver, you have complete responsibility for safetyin traffic. Only use the functions in such a way that you always maintain complete control over your vehiclein all traffic situations.
-- Do not use the voice recognition system in
emergencies because your voice may change in stressful situations. The system may take longer to dial the number or may not be ableto dial it at all. Dial the emergency
number manually.
G) Tips
-- The dialog pauses when thereis an incoming phone call and will continue if you ignorethe call. The dialog ends if you answer the call.
-- There are no voice guidance* prompts when a dialogis active.
-- You can select an item in the list using either the voice recognition system or the control knob.
Command overview information
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system
The following overviews describe the commands that can be used to operate the MMI using the voice recognition system.
Alternative commands are separated using a "/", for example say: Telephone / (or) Navigation / (or) Radio.

8V2012721B)

181

Voice recognition system

Sequences of commands used to perform an action are identified with a ac">m , for examplesay: Enter address > (then) Enter country/state.
The majority shown are main commands. This system also recognizes synonyms in certain cas-

es. For a Business address, you can also say business, work,office or at the office.

Commands

Global commands
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system

You can always use the global commands,regardless of the menu selected.

Function

Say:

Opening a menu

Telephone/ Directory / Navigation / Radio / Media / Audi connect* / Car / Tone

Having the possible commands read aloud

Help / Help speech dialog system / Help Telephone / Help Navigation / Help Map / Help Radio / Help Media / Help
Audi connect*

Telephone functions

Call (XY), for example, Call "John Smith" / Enter number / Redial / Directory / Read out new text message / Read out new e-mail

Navigation functions*

Drive me to (XY) or Navigate to (XY), for example Navigate to

John Smith /
Enter address / Cancel route guidance / Map / Online destinations* / Online destination (XY)*

Accessing favorites

Favorites > follow the system prompts

Selecting an entry from list

Line (XY)

Scrolling through a list

Next page / Previous page

Correcting the command given

Correction

Switching the voice recognition sys- Cancel tem off

Telephone
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and telephone

Requirement: A cell phone must be connected to the MMI > page 189 and the Telephone menu
must be open > table on page 182.

You can say the following commands depending on the selected menu item:

Function Calling a contact from the directory Selecting a specific contact number
Selecting a phone number with an address card open

Say:
Call (XY), for example Call "John Smith"
Call (XY) business/ private / landline / cell phone, for example, Call "John Smith" private
Call / Call work / Call private / Call landline / Call cell phone work

182

Voice recognition system

Function
Calling a contact from your favorites list Displaying the call list Calling the last number dialed Dialing a phone number
Correcting the phone number that was entered Showing contact information
Listening to messages
Entering the PIN (SIM)
Correcting the PIN entry Correcting data input Closing the full-screen command list

Say: Telephonefavorites > after being prompted, say the desired contact > Dial Call list Redial Enter number > when prompted, say the telephone numberin groupsofindividual numbers, for example. 888 555 1212 > Dial Correction / Delete number
Directory > say the desired contact when prompted, for example John Smith Call voicemail Enter PIN > when prompted, say the PINin individual numbers > Save Correction / Delete PIN No I meant(XY) Close

@) Tips
-- Contacts in the directory can selected using the full name ("first name last name" and "last name, first name") as well as with only the first or last name. This appliesto cell phonesthat transmit namesseparated into first and last names.

-- Please note that commands can only begiven for the primary phone* > page 189.
-- For more information on supported mobile devices, visit www.audi.com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.

Audi connect Infotainment
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and Audi connect Infotainment

Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect Infotainment must be met > page 203.

Function

Say:

Accessing Audi connect Infotainment services

Audi connect > follow the system prompts

Audi connect Infotainment services Weather / Online news/ Fuel prices / Parking information / Travel information / Twitter / Traffic information

Search areas for Audi connect Info- Near destination / Nearby / In a new city
tainment services

Correcting data input

No I meant(XY)

8V2012721B)

183

Voice recognition system

@ Tips
Always read the chapter > page 203, Audi
connect.

eremele elite elTalat 9)
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and Audi connect Infotainment

Requirement: a cell phone with an active MAP (Message Access Profile) must be connected to the MMI > page 195.

Function Text editing commands
Reading out a new message Reading a message Replying to the open text message Forwarding the open text message Correcting data input

Say: Read out / Add / Delete / Record everything again / Replace with (XY) / Add recipient / Send
Read out new text message / Read out new e-mail Read out text message / Read out e-mail Reply Forward > Add recipient / Insert template / Send No I meant (XY)

@) Tips
-- For more information on supported mobile devices, visit www.audi.com/bluetooth or

contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. -- Alwaysread the chapter > page 203, Audi
connect.

Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and navigation system

Requirement: the Navigation menu must be open > table on page 182.

You can say the following commands for entering a destination depending on the selected menu item:

Function

Say:

Opening the list of previous naviga- |Last destinations tion destinations

Accessing favorites

Navigation favorites

Selecting the home address

Home addressor Drive home

Entering an address with guidance Enter address > follow the system prompts from the system

Individual commands for entering a Enter country/state / Enter city / Enter ZIP code / Enter

destination

street / Enter house number

Making a correction while entering a Correction destination

Navigating to a contact

Drive me to (XY) or Navigate to contact, for example Drive me to "John Smith"

Navigating to a specific address for Navigate to contact (XY) business/ private,

a contact

for example "Navigate to John Smith private"

184

Voice recognition system

Function
Navigating to favorites
Starting route guidance with an address card open Entering a new destination/stopover when route guidance is active Starting route guidance after entering a destination Canceling current route guidance Calculating alternative routes Entering a point of interest by selecting a search area with guidance from the system Destination input categories
Search areas for entering points of interest Entering an online destination*
Correcting data input Closing the full-screen command list

Say: Navigation favorites > Line (XY) / Line contents > Start route guidance when prompted Navigate / Navigate to private address / Navigate to business address Enter address > enter the desired address when prompted > confirm the new destination/stopoverif prompted Start route guidance
Cancel route guidance Calculate alternative routes Point of interest > Change search area > category or subcategory when prompted,for example "restaurant"
Audi Service / Train station / Airport / Hotel / Hospital / Parking area / Rest area / Restaurant/ Gas station etc. Nearby / Along the route / Near destination / Near stopover / In newcity / In a new state/country Online destination (XY), for example "Online destination "Lakeview Hotel"" No I meant(XY) Close

Requirement: you must be in the Navigation or Map menu. You can say the following commands for more settings in Navigation:

Function General map options Map type
Showing the routelist Showing the remaining distance/ time when route guidance is active Speed limit prompt Setting voice guidance for active route guidance Blocking a certain section on the
route

Say: Map / Day map / Night map / Automatically change map color 2D heading-up map / 2D north-up map / 3D map / Destination map / Overview map / Standard map*/ Satellite map*® Route list
Destination information
Howfastcan I drive here? Voice guidance on / Voice guidanceoff / Voice guidance shortened / Voice guidance complete / Voice guidancetraffic Block route for (XY) meters/kilometers/yards/miles / Block next route / Avoid next section of route

a) AUDI AGprovidesaccessto services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that

depends on the third party provider.

8V2012721B)

185

Voice recognition system
@) Tips -- . Desti-- nations may have to be spelled when entered, depending on which region you are

in and which menu language you have se-- Alelcwtaeyds. read the chapter > page 203, Audi
POnnecs

Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system

Requirement: the Radio must already be open.

You can say the following commands depending on the selected frequency band:

Function

Say:

Selecting the frequency band

FM* / SiriusXM* / FM/AM

Selecting a station from the station Channel (XY) / Frequency (XY) list

Selecting a station from the presets Radio presets > Line (XY)

Setting the frequency

Frequency (XY) / Frequency (XY) HD 1

Correcting data input

No I meant(XY)

Closing the full-screen command list

Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system

Requirement: you must be in the Media menu.

You can say the following commands depending on the active media:

Function Selecting a source directly
Selecting audio/video*files inthe Jukebox* Selecting audio files on an iPod (source: Audi music interface*) Navigating within a folder structure/list Selecting shuffle Correcting data input Closing the full-screen command list

Say: Jukebox* / CD / DVD / SD card 1/ SD card 2 / Audi music interface* / iPhone* / USB* / Bluetooth* / Wi-Fi* / Medium (XY), for example "John's player" Media favorites / Artists / Albums / Genres/ Tracks/ Playlists / Videos Artists / Albums / Genres/ Tracks/ Playlists / Composers / Podcasts / Audio books Folder up / Line (XY)
Shuffle on / Shuffle off No I meant (XY) Close

External voice operation Anaplpvlioeiscteo:opveerhaitci:loens with voice recognition system and exter-
Reqquirement:

The ignition and the MMI mustbe switched on.
No phone call is in progress.
The parking aid as well as the Audi voice recognition system mustnot be active.

186

A mobile device must be connected to the MMI with the Handsfree profile > page 188.
The mobile device being connected must have voice control that can be controlled externally.
> Switching on: press and hold the [2] button on the multifunction steering wheel* and say the desired command after the external speech dialog begins.
> Continuing/resuming the dialog: the system remains ready to use for a short time after ending the dialog. You can start a new external dialog during this time. Press the [2] button if needed, and say a new command. Or: select and confirm Resume on the MMI control unit.
> Switching off: press and hold the [2] button. Or: select and confirm Cancel on the MMI control unit.
@ Tips
-- There are no voice guidance" prompts when a dialog is active.
-- This function depends on the cell phone used. You can obtain moreinformation from your mobile device service provider or from your mobile device user guide.
-- AUDI AGsimply provides access to control your mobile device with voice operation and does not assume anyresponsibility for the content and commands within the external voice control.

Voice recognition system

8V2012721B)

187

Telephone

Telephone
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
To make phone calls in your vehicle using the MMI, connect your cell phone to the MMI via Bluetooth.
Handsfree
After you have connected your mobile device to the MMI via Bluetooth, you can use the handsfree system and operate telephone functions through your MMI. You can makecalls using the antenna on your mobile device.
With the Audi phone box', calls are made using the exterior antenna on the vehicle. Using the external antenna helps when thereis a low signal and also provides better reception quality =>page 191.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Medical experts warn that mobile devices can interfere with the function of pacemakers. Always maintain a minimum distance of about 7.9 inches (20 cm) between the mobile device antennas and the pacemaker.
-- Do not carry the mobile device in a pocket directly over the pacemaker when the phone is switched on.
-- Switch the mobile device off immediately if you suspectit may be interfering with the pacemaker.
-- Do not use the voice recognition system* = page 181 in emergencies because your voice may change in stressful situations. The system may take longer to dial the number or may not be able to dial it at all. Dial the emergency number manually.
-- Switch your mobile device off in areas where there is a risk of an explosion. These locations are not always clearly marked. This mayinclude gas stations, fuel and chemical storage facilities or transport vehicles, or locations where fuel vapors (such as propane
or gasoline vapor in vehicles or buildings),
chemicals or large quantities of dust particles (such as flour, sawdust or metal) may

be present in the air. This also applies to all other locations where you would normally turn your vehicle engine off. -- The demands oftraffic require your full attention. Always read the chapter => page 165,Traffic safety information.
@) Note Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in General information on page 203.
G) Tips
-- The Bluetooth connection range is limited to inside the vehicle. It can also be affected by local conditions and interference with other devices.
--To learn which Bluetooth connections and which of the functions in your mobile device are supported, check with your mobile device service provider or the database for mobile devices at www.audiusa.com/ bluetooth.
Setup
Connecting a cell phone using Bluetooth
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
MyPhone Does this PIN match the one on your
Bluetooth device? PIN: 967536
Fig. 178 Displaying the PIN forenteringin the cell phone
Requirement The vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on.
The Bluetooth settings must be open on your mobile device during the connection setup. The Bluetooth function and visibility of the MMI = page 256 and mobile device must be switched on.

188

The mobile device that will be connected must not be connected to any other Bluetooth device.
The MMI must not be connected to a mobile device.
Connecting a mobile device
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > Connect mobile device > Find new devices > Next. The available Bluetooth devices are shown in the Infotainment system display, or
> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > MMI settings > Connection manager => page 254.
> Select and confirm the desired cell phone from the list of displayed Bluetooth devices.
> The MMI generatesa PIN for the connection
setup > fig. 178. >» Select and confirm Yes. > Enter the PIN for connecting on your cell
phone, or
> when the PIN is displayed on your cell phone, confirm the PIN on your cell phone and in the MMI. The time allowed for entering the PIN is limited to approximately 30 seconds.
» Pay attention to any additional system prompts displayed on your cell phone, for exampleif the system should connect automatically in the future. Depending on the cell phone, you may have to confirm downloading the directory separately.
After connecting successfully
After connecting successfully, information about the connected profiles will appear. You can also change the profiles later:
> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > MMI settings > Connection manager => page 254.
In addition, the cell phone contacts are automatically loaded in the MMI directory. This process can take several minutes, depending on the number of contacts.
You can also make your connected cell phone the default phone by selecting Set as default telephone in the Connection manager > page 256.

Telephone
C@) Note
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in General information on page 203.
G@) Tips
-- Making phone calls through the MMI is only possible using the Handsfree Bluetooth profile.
-- You can apply additional settings to connected mobile devices using the Connection manager > page 254.
-- You can also search for the MMI on your mobile device using the Bluetooth device search.
-- You only haveto pair your device one time. Bluetooth devices that are already paired automatically connect to the MMI when the
Bluetooth function is switched on, when
they are within range, and when the ignition is switched on. The last connected mobile device is given first priority. -- Authorizing the MMI connection on your mobile device will make it possible to connect automatically. -- Pay attention to any system promptsdisplayed on your cell phone, for exampleif the system should connect automatically in the future. Depending on the cell phone, you mayalso need to download the directo-
ry and confirm access to your text messages separately.
-- When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth connection to the mobile device will automatically disconnect. Depending on your mobile device, phone calls in progress may be automatically redirected from the MMI to your mobile device so that you can continue the call on your phone.
-- You can obtain more information from your mobile device service provider or from your mobile device user guide. For information on using the telephone, visit www.audiusa. com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Applies to: vehicles without secondary phone: Several cell phones can be paired to >

8V2012721B)

189

Telephone

the MMI, but only one cell phone can be actively connected to the MMI. -- Applies to: vehicles without secondary phone: If a Bluetooth device is already connected to the MMI,it will be disconnected when another device connects to the MMI.
Operating two mobile devices through the ih
You can connect twocell phones to the MMI, for example your business cell phone as the primary phone and your private cell phone as the secondary phone. You can be reached in your vehicle through both cell phones.
The first connected cell phone is displayed as the primary phone in the MMI. The second cell phone is connected as the secondary phone.
The directory from the connected primary phone will always be displayed. If you would like to use the directory from the secondary phone, you must switch the primary and secondary phone
=> page 190.
Connecting a cell phone as the primary phone
Connect your cell phone to the MMI via Bluetooth. The first connected cell phone is displayed as the Primary phone in the MMI.
See > page 188, Connecting a cell phone using Bluetooth.
Connecting a cell phone as the secondary phone
Requirement: a cell phone must be connected to the MMI as the primary phone.
Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right control button > Connect secondary telephone.
See > page 188, Connecting a cell phone using Bluetooth.
Example: you have connected your business cell phone to the MMI as the primary phone and your private cell phone as the secondary phone. To be able to call contacts from your private cell phone directory, you must switch the primary and sec-

ondary phone, since the directory from the primary phone is always displayed.
Switching the primary and secondary phone
Requirement: a primary phone and a secondary phone must be connected.
Select: [MENU] button > Telephone> right control button > Switch primary and second. phone.
G) Tips
-- Please note that only the directory from the primary phone is always displayed.
-- You can see if a cell phone is connected as the primary phone or secondary phone in the Connection manager > page 254.
-- The device name of the connected primary phone is shown in the Telephone menu (such as myPhone).
-- If the primary phone does not connect automatically to the MMI when the ignition is switched on, for example because it is out of the vehicle range or the Bluetooth function is switched off, then a previously paired secondary phone is automatically connected as the primary phone.
-- You can send and receive messages on your primary phone as well as on your secondary phone > page 192,fig. 180. You do not need to switch your primary phone and secondary phone for this.
-- You can also makeyour connectedcell phone the default phone byselecting Set as default telephone in the Connection manager > page 256.

190

Using the Audi phone box
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box
Fig. 179 Storage compartmentunder the center armrest: Audi phone box with connections
You can charge your mobile device battery using the Audi phone box. You can makecalls through the exterior antenna* on the vehicle. Using the external antenna* helps when thereis a low signal and also provides better reception quality. Requirement: a cell phone must be connected through Bluetooth > page 188. The options beloware available: -- Connecting to the external vehicle antenna*:
Lay the cell phone with the display facing up on the cell phone symbol in the Audi phone box
=> fig. 179. Make sure there are no objects between the Audi phone box and the mobile de-
vice. -- Charge cell phone wirelessly: Place a Qi-capa-
ble cell phone centered on the @ symbol in the Audi phone box with the display facing up => fig. 179. The cell phone will charge. -- Charge a cell phone using the USB adapter: Connect your cell phone to the Audi music interface using a USB adapter (2). You can charge your mobile device using specific USB adapters > page 239, fig. 209.
ZA WARNING
-- Loose objects can be thrown around the vehicle interior during sudden driving or braking maneuvers, which increases the risk of

RAH-8906|

Telephone
an accident. Store objects securely while driving. --The mobile device may become hotduring wireless charging. Pay attention to the temperature of your mobile device and becareful when removing it from the Audi phone box. -- An alternating magnetic field is used for wireless charging. Maintain a minimum distance of approximately 2.4 in (6 cm) to the Audi phone box charging plate. The thresholds for prolonged exposureat this distance
comply with ICNIRP1998. Therefore, interactions such as irritation of sensory organs,
malfunctions of active implants (such as pacemakers, infusion pumps,or neurostimulators) or effects on passive implants (such as prosthetic limbs)is highly unlikely. If you have an implant, consult a medical specialist if you have any questions.
@) Note
Applicable to U.S.A.
Operation of the Audi phone boxis subject to the following requirements ofthe Federal Communications Commission: -- This is a CONSUMER device. -- BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE-
VICE with your wireless provider and have your provider's consent. Most wireless providers consent to the use of signal boosters. Some providers may not consent to the use of this device on their network. If you are unsure, contact your service provider. -- You MUSToperatethis device with approved antennas and cables as specified by the manufacturer. Antennas MUSTbeinstalled at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. -- You MUSTcease operating this device immediately if requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless service provider. -- WARNING: E911 location information may not be provided or may be inaccurate for calls served by using this device.

8V2012721B)

D_ The Qi standard makes it possible to charge your mobile device wirelessly.

191

Telephone
@) Note
Applicable to Canada
In Canada, operation of a Zone Enhancer,
such as an Audi Phone Box,is subject to the
following requirementsof the Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada (ISED): -- This is a CONSUMER device. -- BEFORE USE, you MUST meetall require-
mentsset out in CPC-2-1-05. -- You MUSToperate this device with approved
antennas and cables as specified by the manufacturer. Antennas MUST NOTbe installed within 20 cm of any person. -- You MUSTcease operating this device immediately if requested by ISED or a licensed wireless service provider. -- WARNING: £911 location information may not be provided or maybe inaccurate for calls served by using this device.
G) Tips
-- The Audi phone boxis not availablein all countries. For additional information, contact an authorized Audi dealership.
-- Placing the mobile device in a bag or protective sleeve inside the Audi phone box can interfere with the connection to the external antenna"*.
-- Metallic objects in the Audi phone box block the wireless charging of your mobile device and calls made using the exterior antenna"*.
-- The charging time and temperature will vary depending on the mobile device being used.
-- Your mobile device can only be charged in the Audi phone box when the ignition is switched on.
--To reduce the risk of malfunctions, make sure the mobile device is positioned correctly in the Audi phone box.
-- The maximum charging output is 5 watts. -- Strong transmission quality cannot be guar-
anteed if more than one mobile deviceis in the box. -- Only one mobile device at a time can be charged wirelessly in the Audi phone box.
192

-- Audi recommends using Audi Genuine Accessories. Audi has verified their reliability, safety, and suitability.
-- You can purchase a USB adapter from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility, or at specialty stores.
-- If you place your remote control key together with your mobile device in the Audi phone box, it may cause your mobile device to stop charging if wireless charging is active.
Using the telephone
Opening the telephone
Applies to: vehicles with telephone

(2 Sd Favorites
©--r Directory EET number
Va message (mobile device)
Fig. 180 Example: telephone functions in selection menu

RAH-8725|

am
LR otaOna)
SB Text message (Additional phone)
(Q 6-- a= E-mail (MyPhone)

Fig. 181 Example: additional telephone functions in selection menu

Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI > page 188.
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button.

The following phone functions are available > fig. 180/> fig. 181:
©) Callliste « cscs se exces a oem 9 2 mee
@) Presets sacs sv sews ye wren ce geen
@® Directory .............020- ease @ Selectinumber we. os eve si eens
© Text message (MyPhone)*/Text
message (secondary phone)* .....

193
195
198 193
195>

Telephone

dary phone)* ...........0000 00

197

The device name for your cell phone is displayed in the Telephone menu, for example text message (myPhone) © fig. 181.

Dialing a phone number
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
(eT Talee
Please enter a telephone number.
0123456789* #MBAB O800AUDISERVI

Fig. 182 Number speller
UF
£ Bates, Peter
@ Blake, Mary
& Gre+e1n7,0 Andreey w

11:45 AM To we ea}
eer4-0o3-t18

Fig. 183 Dialing a phone number from the call list
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button.
Call list
Requirement: the call list must contain a phone number.
Turn the control knob to display the call list.
Select and confirm the desired telephone number from the recentcallslist.
Call list symbols > fig. 183:
@ Missed calls @ Dialed numbers @® Accepted calls
Select: a contact from the list > right control but-
ton. -- Call: call the selected contact.
-- Connect secondary telephone*/Switch primary and second. phone": see > page 190.

-- Edit phone no. beforecall: edit a phone number before dialing it. Select and confirm OK to edit. press the left control button to return without editing.
-- Send text message: write a text message to the selected contact.
-- Deletecall list: select and confirm if you would like to Delete this entry or Deleteall entries.
-- Store as favorite: store the selected contact as a favorite.
-- Showcontact details: see > page 199. -- Connection manager: see > page 254. -- Bluetooth settings*: See > page 256. -- Online settings*: See > page 256. -- Wi-Fi settings*: See > page 208. -- Telephone settings: see > page 200.
Favorites
Requirement: a phone number or contact must
be stored as a favorite > page 195.
Select and confirm a favorite in the favorites list.
Directory
Requirement: you must have at least one contact
stored in your cell phone.
Select and confirm a phone number from the directory > page 198.
Enter number
-- Entering a phone number as a sequence of numbers: enter the number using the number speller > fig. 182.
-- Entering the phone number as a sequence of letters: select and confirm |ABC| above the number speller. Enter a sequence of letters using the letter speller, for example AUDISERVICE.
-- Dialing a phone number: select and confirm &, or push the control knob downward. Select and confirm OK.
-- Deleting individual characters: select and confirm &l.
-- Deleting all characters entered at once: turn the control knob with the character selection to
land press and hold the control knob, or se-
lect: right control button > Clear inputfield.

8V2012721B)

193

Telephone

Accepting or ending a call
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
-- Accepting a call: select and confirm Answer. -- Declining a call: select and confirm Decline. -- Muting the active call: select and confirm
Mute. -- Ending a phone call/cancel dialing: select and
confirm End call.
Caller information: the name, phone numberor Unknownappearsin the Infotainment system display depending on if the caller has been stored in the directory and if the phone number has been transmitted. A picture mayalso be displayed, depending on whether you have assigned a picture to a contactin your directory and if it was transferred to your MMI. You can find out if your mobile device supports this function from your mobile device network provider, your mobile
device owner's manual, or at www.audiusa.com/
bluetooth.
G) Tips
-- The radio or media playback is muted during a phone call.
-- Missed calls are displayed with a symbol in the status line of the Infotainment system display @) > page 174,fig. 173.
During a phone call
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Requirement: there must be a call in progress.
> End call: you can end a phone call.
> Send tone sequence: you can enter tone sequences (DTMF)directly using the number
speller and send to the other person on the call. > Other call options: press the right control button.
The following options maybe possible during a call depending on the mobile device being used and the type of connection:
-- Answering an additional call: if there is an incoming call while another call is active, you can select Answer to put the existing call on hold

and answer the incoming call. If you select De-
cline, the incoming call will be declined.
-- Accepting an incoming call when there is an active call and a call on hold: select Replace. The activecall is replaced with the incoming call.
-- Muting the incoming call: select and confirm Mute.
-- Additional call: select: Find contact > Call list/ Directory/Favorites > an entry from the list.

Mute: if you select and confirm this function, the other person on the phone cannothear you. You will still be able to hear the other person. To turn
the microphone back on, select and confirm Un-
mute.

Hold call/Resume heldcall: you can place the existing call on hold and resume it again. To resume
the call, select and confirm the call you would
like to resume.

Transfer call to mobile device*: select and con-
firm Transfer call to mobile device to transfer the existing call from the MMI to your cell phone.

Switch to hands-free mode*: Requirement: you must have a phone call in progress on your cell
phone. Select and confirm Switch to hands-free mode to transfer the call from your cell phone
back to the MMI.

Swap call: alternate between two phone calls while one of the calls is on hold. Selecting End call will end the active phone call. A phone call
on hold can be resumed using the right control button > Resume.

Connection manager: see > page 254.

Telephonesettings: see > page 200.

(i) Tips

-- To be notified of an incoming call during a

phone call, the call waiting function in your

mobile device must be switched on when

using the Handsfreeprofile.

-- You can obtain more information from your

mobile device service provider or from your

mobile device user guide.

-- When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth

connection to the mobile device will

194

automatically disconnect. Depending on your mobile device, phone calls in progress may be automatically redirected from the MMI to your mobile device so that you can continue the call on your phone. -- The display of an incoming phone callin the Infotainment system display maystill be visible for a few seconds after a call is answered or ignored depending on the cell phone in use.
Making an emergencycall Appliesto: vehicles with telephone
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button > Dial number > Enter emergency call number (for example, 911) > OK.
AN WARNING -- Because your phone workswith radio sig-
nals, a connection cannot be guaranteed un-
der all circumstances. Do notrely on only your phone when it comesto essential com-
munication (such as a medical emergency).
-- Alwaysfollow the instructions given by the emergency personnel during an emergency call and only end the call when they instruct you to do so.
@ Tips P
Emergency numbersare not the same everywhere. Find out which emergency number is used in your current location.
Favorites
Appliesto: vehicles with telephone
Up to 50 contacts,in addition to the voicemail
number, can be stored in anyorder in the favorites list > Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left con-
trol button.
Storing an existing phone number as a favorite:
-- Select and confirm Call list/Directory. -- Select a contact or phone number from the list. -- Select: right control button > Store as favorite.

Telephone

-- Enter a name for the favorite or select a suggestion.
-- Select and confirm Save.

Renaming stored favorites

-- Select: Favorites > a favorite from the list.

-- Select the right control button > Rename favor-

ite.

Moving stored favorites

-- Select: Favorites > a favorite from the list.
-- Select the right control button > Movefavorite. -- Select and confirm the location of the selected
favorite.

Deleting a stored favorite
-- Select: Favorites > a favorite from the list. -- Select: right control button > Delete favorite >
Delete this entry or Delete all entries.

Messages

Metre (
Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message AccessProfile
(MAP)
Depending on the mobile device being used and the mobile network contract, you may be able to receive and send text messages using the MMI.
Requirement: A cell phone must be connected to the MMI via Bluetooth MAP (Message AccessProfile) > page 188.
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button > text message (myPhone)/text message (secondary phone)*.
Write new text message
Select and confirm Write new text message.
-- Using a template: select and confirm the desired template from the list.
-- Writing your own text": select and confirm Do not use template. Enter text using the MMI touch control pad* or the letter speller.
-- Enter one or morerecipients. -- Select and confirm Send.
Inbox
Displays all received text messages.

8V2012721B)

195

Telephone
Sent
Displays all sent text messages.
Outbox
Displays all text messages to be sent.
Drafts
Displays all text messages that have not yet been sent and stored text messages.
Deleted
Displays all deleted text messages.
@ Tips -- Please note that you mayhaveto activate
the receiving and sending of text messages in your cell phone depending on the SIM card being used (for example, when using a Multi-SIM). You can obtain more information from your mobile device service provider or from your mobile device user guide. -- For more information on supported mobile devices, visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. -- You need a mobile device with Message Access Profile that also supports the sending function to be able to send text messages through the MMI.
Message options
Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message AccessProfile
(MAP)
> Select: |TEL] button > left control button > text message (myPhone)/text message (secondary phone)* > Inbox/Sent/Outbox> right control button.
The following options maybe available depending on the selected menu.
Storing a text message as a template
Ten text message templates are stored in the MMI. You can save up to 10 additional templates of your own.

-- Create a text message.
-- Select and confirm Store as template.
Resume last text message The last edited text message can be resumed.
Reply* A reply can be sent for the selected message in the Inbox.
Forward The selected text message can be forwarded to a different recipient.
Send again* The selected text message can beresent.
Delete this text message* The selected text message can be deleted.
Read out!)
You can have the MMI read an open text message.
Text messaging settings* To display when a new text message is received, enable the Text message notifications. New text messages are indicated with an envelope & in the Infotainment system display status line.
Connection manager See > page 254.
Bluetooth settings*
See > page 256.
Online settings*
See > page 256.
Wi-Fi settings* See > page 208.
Telephone settings See > page 200.

Notavailablein all languages.
196

Telephone

@) Tips Messagesthat are deleted in the MMI are also deleted in the mobile device automatically.
Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message AccessProfile (MAP)
Depending on the type of mobile device being used, you maybe able to receive and send emails through the MMI.
Requirement: a cell phone must be connected to the MMI via Bluetooth MAP (Message Access Pro-
file) > page 188. You can find out if your mobile device supports this function by checking your mobile device owner's manual.
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button > e-mail (myPhone)/e-mail (secondary phone)*.
Write new e-mail
Select and confirm Write new e-mail.
-- Using a template: select and confirm the desired template from the list.
-- Writing your own text": select and confirm Do not use template. Enter text using the MMI touch control pad" or the letter speller.
-- Enter one or morerecipients. -- Select and confirm Send.
Inbox All received e-mails are displayed.
Sent All sent e-mails are displayed.
Outbox All e-mails that will be sent are displayed.
Drafts
All saved e-mails that have not been sent yet are displayed.
@) Note Alwaysfollow the information found in >@® in
General information on page 203.

@ Tips
-- For more information on supported mobile devices, visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
--To ensure that your sent e-mails are received, connect your cell phone to the Wi-Fi hotspot* in the vehicle so that the e-mail app on your cell phone continues to have Internet access. If you arestill not receiving emails even though you have a successful connection, then contact your e-mail service provider or your cell phone service provider.

Message options
Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message AccessProfile
(MAP)

> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button > e-mail (myPhone)/e-mail (secondary phone)* > Inbox/Sent/Outbox> right control button.
The following options maybe available depending on the selected menu.

Store as template
Ten e-mail templates are stored in the MMI. You can save up to 10 additional templates of your
own.
-- Create an e-mail. -- Select and confirm Store as template.

Resume last edited e-mail The last e-mail in progress can be resumed.

Reply*
A reply can be sent for the selected e-mail in the Inbox.

Reply toall*
A reply can be sent for the selected e-mail in the Inbox and it will be sent to all of the entered recipients.

Forward

The selected e-mail can be forwarded to a differ-

ent recipient.

8V2012721B)

197

Telephone
Delete this message*
The selected e-mail can be deleted.
Read out)
You can have the MMI read an open e-mail.
E-mail settings* To display when a new e-mail is received, activate the E-mail notifications. New e-mailsare indicated with an envelope in the Infotainment system display status line.
Connection manager
See > page 254.
Bluetooth settings* See > page 256.
Online settings* See > page 256.
Wi-Fi settings* See > page 208.
Telephone settings
See > page 200.
G) Tips
-- Messages that are deleted in the MMI are also automatically deleted in the connected cell phone.
-- You cannotread any messageswhile driving.
Listening to voicemail
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button. Select and confirm Call list/Directory/Favorites > Voicemail.
Requirement: there must be no voicemail number stored.
-- Entering the voicemail number: enter the desired number. Select and confirm OK.

Requirement: a voicemail number mustbe stored. -- Dialing the voicemail number: select and con-
firm Voicemail.
Gi) Tips
-- This service must be set up and activated in advance bythe cell phone service provider. You can obtain more information from your cell phone service provider.
-- The voicemail number depends on the cell phone service provider.
Directory
oyster Rs LR14998
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
5S > Voicemail
Sean}
Laie ite > Schmidt, Ralf
Fig. 184 Directory
After connecting the cell phone, the contacts in it are automatically imported into the MMI.
Requirement: you must have at least one contact
stored in your cell phone.
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button > Directory.
-- Calling a contact: select and confirm a contact from the directory. The phone numbersfor the selected contact are displayed. To make the call, select and confirm a phone number.
-- Free text search for a contact: see > page 173.
Contacts are displayed in alphabetical order and can be sorted byfirst or last name > page 201, Sort order.
The directory can be opened through the Telephone menu as well as through the Navigation* menu.

Notavailablein all languages.
198

Telephone

@ Tips
-- Additional information on free text searches can be found under > page 173.
-- Check for a possible request to synchronize on your cell phone. Requests to synchronize the directory must be confirmed so that your cell phone contacts can be loaded into the MMI.
-- The contact display in the MMI depends on the mobile device being used. For moreinformation on supported mobile devices,visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Please note that only the directory from the primary phone* is always displayed.
-- The contacts from the mobile device may notbe transferred in alphabetical order. If there are too manyentries, contacts with different first letters may be missing in the MMI.
--The contacts in the local MMI memory are alwaysvisible and can be accessed by other users.
cteaSet lee elie
Appliesto: vehicles with telephone
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button > Directory.
> To limit the search, enter the initials of the con-
tact being searched with each initial separated by a space in the input field. Enter additional letters if necessary. > Select and confirm a contact from the directory. The phone numbersfor the selected contact are displayed. > To make the call, select and confirm a phone number.
G) Tips
-- You can scroll through long lists quickly by turning the control knob quickly. The scrolling speed depends on the number oflist entries.
-- Additional information on free text searches can be found under > page 173.

Showing contact details*
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
ates)
"8 0049841123456
@ 001701239873 Pasa ho ue cualaX Tete eel
Fig. 185 Diagram: showing contactdetails
You maybe able to show contact details depending on the vehicle equipment:
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button.
> Select and confirm Directory > a contact from the directory.
> Select: right control button > Show contact details.
-- Calling: select and confirm the desired telephone number.
-- Navigating: to start navigation, select and confirm the desired address. Select and confirm Start route guidance.
Press the right control button to open additional options for the contact details.
-- Add destination: To start navigation, select and confirm the desired address. Select and confirm Start route guidance.
-- Store as favorite: See > page 195. -- Send text message": You can send a text mes-
sage to the selected contact > page 195. -- Delete contact: The selected contact can be de-
leted.
@) Tips -- Contacts edited in the MMI directory cannot
be automatically updated in the connected cell phone. Audi recommends editing cell phone contactsdirectly in the cell phone. -- Only the contacts in the local MMI memory can be edited or deleted.

8V2012721B)

199

Telephone

Importing and exporting contacts
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Contacts in vCard format (.vcf) can be imported into the directory or exported.
Requirement: an SD card mustbe inserted in one of the SD card readers* > page 234 or a USB storage device must be connected to the Audi music interface* > page 239 or the requirements for Audi connect Infotainment services* must be met > page 203.
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button > Directory.
> Select: right control button > Contact settings.
-- Importing contacts from a storage device: select and confirm Import contacts > SD card 1/SD card 2 or USB device 1/USB device 2 > desired contacts > Start import.
-- Exporting contacts to a storage device: select and confirm Export contacts > SD card 1/SD card 2 or USB device 1/USB device 2 > desired contacts > Start export.
-- Selecting all contacts at once to import/ export: select and confirm Import contacts/Export contacts > SD card 1/SD card 2 or USB device 1/USB device 2 > All > Start import/Start
export.
@ Tips
-- Alwaysread the chapter > page 203, Audi
connect.
-- For additional information on the myAudi
account, visit my.audi.com.
-- The imported contacts are stored in the local memoryof the directory.
--A maximum of 1,000 contacts can be im-
ported. You can check the directory memory capacity at any time > page 201.
-- Never save important data on memorycards
or USB storage devices. Audi is not responsible for damaged or lost files and media. -- Contacts that were downloaded from a mobile device cannot be exported.

-- There should be no other files or folders on the storage medium containing the contacts to be imported.
Additional settings
Telephone settings
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right control button > Telephone settings.
Call options*
Call forwarding: you can switch the forwarding of incoming calls to your voicemail or to another phone number on and off. You can check if the function is activated or deactivated with Check
status.
Call waiting: you are alerted to an incoming call during a phone call when the function is switched
on [M. You can check if the function is activated or
deactivated with Check status.
Send own telephone number: sending your phone number with an outgoing call can be activated and deactivated. With the Network-dependentsetting, the setting listed in the contract with the cell phone service provider is used. The settings only apply to the Telephone menu in the MMI. Please note that the settings on your mobile device will apply after disconnecting the Bluetooth connection. You can check if the function is activated or deactivated with Check sta-
tus.
Ringtone and volumesettings!)
Using the Mute telephone function, you can switch the ringtone playback through the MMI speaker on and off. You can play the ringtones using the Ringtone function. Select and confirm an entry from the list. For the Ringtone volume/ Message volume settings, see > page 258. The Microphoneinput level can be adjusted during a phone call using the control knob.

1) Depends on the connected cell phone.
200

Telephone

@) Tips -- Several mobile devices can be paired with
the MMI, but only two* mobile devices can be actively connected. --To delete all paired Bluetooth devices, the Bluetooth function can be reset to the factory default settings > page 254.
Additional options
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right control button.
Connection manager
See > page 254.
Bluetooth settings* See > page 256.
Online settings* See > page 256.
Wi-Fi settings* See > page 208.
Directory settings
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button > Directory > right control button > Contact settings.

Memorycapacity
Showsthe Memory capacity for the directory.
You can manage up to 17,000 contacts with the directory. You can load up to 4,000 contacts from your cell phone into each directory. You can also import up to 1,000 contacts from a storage device.
Sort order
You can sort the contacts in your directory alphabetically according to Last name or First name.
Import contacts/Export contacts
See > page 200.
Download directory
To update the contacts in the MMI, you can manually download your mobile device contacts. Depending on the mobile device, you may need to disconnect and reconnect the Bluetooth connection to update the contacts.
Hide contacts without phone number
When this function is switched on, grayed-out contacts that have no phone numbersstored for them will be hidden in the directory.

Troubleshooting
Applies to: vehicles with telephone

Problem

Solution

Pairing the cell phone to the MMI failed.

Make sure the requirements for connecting a cell phone have been met > page 188, or make sure you did not accidentally decline the PIN for establish-
ing a connection on your cell phone. If necessary, repeat the pairing process > page 188.

After pairing, not all contacts or Avoid using special characters in names. no contacts have been loaded into Avoid using contact groups on your cell phone. the MMI.

8V2012721B)

201

Telephone

Certain telephone functions are grayed out or not available.
Some telephone functions may be switched off or not available, even though the mobile device is_| supported.

The telephone functions depend on the mobile device service provider and the mobile device you are using. You can obtain moreinformation from your cell phone service provider, in your cell phone user guide or in the database for mobile devices at www.audiusa. com/bluetooth.
On corporate phones, some Bluetooth settings may not be compatible or the cell phone Bluetooth function may be deactivated. You can obtain more information from your system administrator.

202

Audi connect
General information
Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following functions may be available:
-- Audi connect Infotainment -- Audi connect vehicle control services (Audi con-
nect e-tron services)
You can also find more information on Audi connect online at my.audi.com.
Z\ WARNING
--To reduce the risk of an accident, only use Audi connect services when road and traffic conditions permit. Always read and follow the notes in > page 165,Traffic safety information.
-- It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile devices and other similar devices when the vehicle is stationary because, like all loose objects, they could be thrown around the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause serious injuries. Store these types of devices securely while driving.
-- Asthe driver, do not allow usage of the WiFi hotspot to distract you from driving, as this could increase the risk of an accident.
-- Do not use any wireless devices on the front seats within range of the airbags while driving. Also read the warnings in the chapter = page 280, Front airbags.
-- To reduce the risk of an accident, use the Au
di connect Infotainment services with a WiFi hotspot only in the rear seat when the vehicle is in motion, or only when the vehicleis stationary.
@ Note
-- Applies to: embedded SIM card usage: The connection costs of Audi connect Infotainment services are included in the price of Audi connect Infotainment during the subscription period with some exceptions. Please note that there may be additional charges when using some services. For example, this applies to Internet radio/

Audi connect
podcasts or for Internet connections and services that use the Wi-Fi hotspot, such as online media sources. Depending on the country, data plans may need to be purchased for these services > page 209. For
additional information, see my.audi.com.
--Incertain situations, the Wi-Fi hotspot data connection may be established as a replacementfor the SIM card on your Wi-Fi device. This feature depends on the configuration of your Wi-Fi device and operating system. This could result in fees depending on your cell phone service provider, especially if you are using this feature while abroad. A flat rate data plan is strongly recommended. For moreinformation, contact your cell phone service provider or refer to the owner's manual for your Wi-Fi device.
-- You are responsiblefor all precautions taken for data protection, anti-virus protection, and protection against loss of data on mobile devices that are used, for example, to access the Internet through the Wi-Fi hotspot.
(i) Tips
-- The availability of services depends on the subscription.
-- AUDI AGprovides access to services from third party providers. Permanent availability
cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on the third party provider.
-- Use of the most up-to-date mobile network standardis not available in every country. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility or your cell phone service provider for additional information.
-- Audi connect Infotainment services are only available within the cell phone networkcoverage from your cell phone service provider.
-- Availability, scope, providers, screen display, and costs of services may vary depending on
the country, model, model year, end device and rates.

8V2012721B)

203

Audi connect

Audi connect Infotainment
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
With Audi connect Infotainment services, online
information is transmitted directly to the vehicle.
An Internet connection is required to use Audi connect Infotainment. Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following options maybe available:
-- Embedded SIM card
ZA WARNING
Alwaysfollow the information found in > A\ in General information on page 203.
@) Note
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in General information on page 203.
Embedded SIM card
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and an embedded SIM card
The data connection for Audi connect Infotainment services is made through an embedded SIM card (eSIM card) that is installed in the vehicle. You can use the Audi connect Infotainment services immediately.
@) Note Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in General information on page 203.
Using a Wi-Fi hotspot
Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot
You can connectup to eight Wi-Fi devices (such as smartphones) with the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot. If the MMI is connected to the Internet = page 204, the connected Wi-Fi devices can also use the MMI's Internet connection.
Requirement: The ignition must be switched on.

> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right control button > Wi-Fi settings > Wi-Fi. Switch on the Wi-Fi hotspot.
>» Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right control button > Wi-Fi settings > Network key. The access data for the Wi-Fi hotspotis displayed. Switch on the visibility of the Wi-Fi hotspotif necessary.
> Switch the Wi-Fi function on in your mobile device and connectit to the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot using the authentication data that is shown.
> Follow any additional system prompts on your Wi-Fi device if necessary.
Your device is successfully connected with the MMI's Wi-Fi hotspot.
ZA WARNING
Always follow the information found in > A\ in General information on page 203.
@) Note
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in General information on page 203.
Audi connect Infotainment services
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
Requirement: your vehicle must be connected to the Internet > page 204.
Some Audi connect Infotainment services must be configured through your personal myAudi account before using them for the first time.
> Register at my.audi.com. » Add your vehicle to your myAudi account. > Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > right
control button > Log in. > Log in to myAudi in the vehicle using your e-
mail address and password.
@) Tips
-- For some Audi connect Infotainment services, you may also have to enter your myAudi access information when accessing services in the MMI.

204

-- Some Audi connect Infotainment services mustbe activated at my.audi.com.
-- To makelogging in easier in the vehicle, you will receive an 8-digit myAudi PIN as an alternative to your myAudi passwordafter you have created a myAudi account.
-- For detailed information on configuration,
visit my.audi.com.
Accessing Audi connect Infotainment
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
> Select: the [MENU] button > Audi connect.
A list of all of the available Audi connect Infotainment services is shown on the Infotainment system display.
You can also filter the Audi connect Infotainment services by category: > Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > left
control button > for example, Navigation for the Audi connect Infotainment services in the Navigation menu.
ETeat ay
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > desired Audi connect Infotainment service > right control button.
Depending on the equipment and the Audi con-
nect Infotainment service selected, the following
basic functions may be available:
Save as preview
You can also see a preview of the selected Audi connect Infotainmentservices on the Audi connect Infotainment home page.
Show on map
You can showselected contents on the map and use them for route guidance.
Log in
See > page 204.

Audi connect
Read out!)
You can allow the MMI to read out the selected
contents.
Call If a phone number was assigned to an entry, you
can call the number, for exampleto reserve tickets.
Refresh
The contents for the selected Audi connect Infotainment service are refreshed.
Start route guidance
If a location was saved with an entry, you can use it as the navigation destination. Route guidance starts immediately.
Change search area
The set search area can be changedat any time. Additional information on search areas can be found under > page 214.
Closing Audi connect Infotainment services Regardless of the function selected, you can close an Audi connect Infotainment service at any time and return to the home screen.
Services
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following services may be available:
Weather
Information on current weather conditions as well as weather forecasts for the selected search area.
> Select and confirm Weather.
News > Select: Online news > desired newsfeed > a
headline.

8V2012721B)

Notavailablein all languages.

205

Audi connect
If you logged in to myAudi in your vehicle => page 204, personalized newsfeeds can be displayed.
Twitter
Requirement: you must have connected your ve-
hicle with myAudi > page 204. You must have connected your myAudi account with Twitter.
You can only connect one Twitter account with your myAudi account. Notall settings can be adjusted in the MMI. Some can only be adjusted through the Twitter website.
> Select: Twitter > left control button > desired function (for example, Trends).
ZA\ WARNING
Alwaysfollow the information found in > AV in General information on page 203.
@) Note Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in General information on page 203.
Additional options
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > right control button.
Depending on the equipment and the country, the following options maybe available in the overview of Audi connect Infotainment services:
About Audi connect Here you will find legal information regarding Audi connect Infotainment usage.
Log in
See > page 204.
Connection manager See > page 254.

License subscription
The validity and expiration date of your licenses are displayed.
Refresh
The content of the selected Audi connect Infotainment service or the entire Audi connect Infotainment list is updated.
Data privacy
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
Location, vehicle, and personal data are transmit-
ted when using Audi connectservices.
Allowing sending of data -- Select and confirm Activate data connection.
The data module for the use of all Audi connect services will be active.
Restricting sending of data -- Select and confirm Activate privacy. The data
connection is limited or deactivated depending on the equipment. The majority of Audi connect services will not be available.
The following interfaces are not affected by this setting: Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE), Wi-Fi connection, Audi smartphone interface
(ASI), Near Field Communication (NFC), charging
communication (e-tron), Electronic Toll Collect (ETC), if equipped.
@) Note
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in General information on page 203.
G) Tips
If the transmission ofdatais limited, data will still be transmitted to verify subscriptions.

206

Audi connect

Audi connect e-tron services
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive and Audi connect
With Audi connect vehicle control services )), you can utilize various services using the myAudi app
or online at my.audi.com.
ZA WARNING
Alwaysfollow the information found in > A\ in General information on page 203.
G@) Tips -- Accessing specific data or controlling func-
tions remotely depends on the charge level of the vehicle battery. Therefore, these functions only havelimited availability after switching off the ignition. -- An eSIM card establishes the Internet connection for Audi connect vehicle control services. The costs for this are included in the price of Audi connect vehicle control services. The cell phone network, for example, must be available to use these services.
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive and Audi connect
Requirement: your mobile devices must be compatible.
> An authorized Audi dealer must complete a one-time activation of Audi connect e-tron services for your vehicle before you can register online.
> Register at etron.audiusa.com
If you require assistance with your Audi connect
e-tron services, please contact an authorized Au-
di dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Using the myAudi app
-- Install the myAudi app on your mobile device and log in with your access information.

Services
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive and Audi connect

Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following services may be available:

Trip data
Depending on the vehicle equipment, certain driver information system data is transmitted to a server. An overview ofyour trips with the values from the short-term memory/long-term memory can be displayed, for example, the driving duration. The values maydiffer from the values displayed in the vehicle.

Doors and lights
You can check the vehicle status with this service.
-- If the vehicle doors and lids are open or closed -- If the parking lights are on or off
For additional information on opening and closing the doorsor for the vehicle lighting, refer to => page 30 or to > page 48.

Vehicle status report
You can check the vehicle status with this service.
-- High-voltage battery charge level -- Electric range -- Mileage -- Next inspection
For additional information, see > page 93, Power meter overview and = page 95, Rangedisplay.

Car Finder

This service transmits the parking location to a

server when the ignition is switched off. The vehi-

cle location, your location, or the route to your

vehicle can be displayed. The new parking loca-

tion cannot be determined with this service if the

vehicle is moved after shutting the vehicle off

and without switching the ignition on and off

again, for exampleif the vehicle is towed or sto-

len.

8V2012721B)

D Depends on the country and equipment. These services are available for a limited time.

207

Audi connect
Remote charging
Requirement: When changing the charging mode the ignition is switched off.
You can start the charging process remotely with the service.
-- Charging mode: immediate charging or delayed charging (timer)
-- Program the timer -- Deactivate or activate the timer
For additional information, see > page 106,
Charging the battery with the Audi charging sys-
tem.
Temperature control
Requirement: the ignition must be switched off when starting or stopping climate control.
You can control the climate control in your vehicle remotely using these services.
-- Start or stop climate control -- Program the timer -- Deactivate or activate the timer
For additional information, see > page 121, Climate control.
ZX WARNING
-- Do not ignore messages and warning or indicator lights that turn on in the vehicle because of the information in the vehicle status report. This could lead to break downs in on the road, accidents and serious injuries.
-- Only perform the climate control functions if your vehicle was shut off correctly and the ignition is switched off.
-- Only perform charging functions on the high-voltage battery if the vehicle is shut off
correctly, is connected to a suitable socket
and if the ignition is switched off.
Settings
Ce data mar -ianceli4
> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > right control button > Connection manager.

> Select: right control button > Online settings > Data connection settings.
Depending on the country, vehicle equipment, and connection type, the following functions may be available:
Data connection settings
Using the Data connection settings menu, you can set when the system should connect to the Internet. The Internet connection disconnects automatically once the requested Audi connect Infotainment service no longer requires any data.
-- Connection setup: you can select when a data connection should be established.
-- Audi connect (MMI): when this function is
switched on, a data connection is automatically established in order to use Audi connect Infotainment services. -- Wi-Fi devices: when this function is switched
on, you can allow or deny Internet connections.
ZA WARNING
Alwaysfollow the information found in > A\ in General information on page 203.
@) Note Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in General information on page 203.
(i) Tips
For more information on roaming charges, contact your cell phone service provider.
Wi-Fi settings
Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right control button > Wi-Fi settings.
Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following functions may be available:
Wi-Fi
When the function is switched on, the MMI's Wi-
Fi hotspot is active and Wi-Fi devices can be connected to the hotspot.

208

Audi connect

Network key
The Wi-Fi connection between the MMI and your Wi-Fi device is encrypted. You can change the following information if needed.
-- Access point (SSID): Wi-Fi hotspot name. -- Password: a random password was set at the
factory in the MMI. The password can be changed. The encryption method requires a passwordto beat least eight characters long. Choose a secure password. -- Visible to others: you can switch the visibility of the Wi-Fi hotspot on or off.
Z\ WARNING
Alwaysfollow the information found in > AV in General information on page 203.
@) Note
Always follow the information found in >@ in General information on page 203.
@) Tips
In vehicles without Audi connect Infotainment,the use of the Wi-Fi hotspotis only possible for the Wi-Fi audio player*. A data connection to the Internet cannot be established.
Data plans!)
Applies to: vehicles with data plans
Requirement: you must have created a myAudi account at my.audi.com. Your vehicle must be registered in your myAudi account.
You can purchase data plans at my.audi.com.
Z\ WARNING
Alwaysfollow the information found in > A\ in General information on page 203.
@) Note Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in
General information on page 203.

@ Tips
If driving out of the country, applicable data plans must be purchased.
Data Privacy
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
AUDI AGcollects, uses, stores and shares your
personal information, such as contact data, vehi-
cle data, usage data, driving data and precise geolocation, in order to provide you with the products and services you have purchased or request-
ed, and for a number of other purposes, for ex-
ample, to track quality issues, to performance and safety, to meet our internal complianceor legal requirements and to market to customers and potential customers. For a more complete
list of the data we collect, how weuse it and with
whom weshareit, please visit your Audi national/sales region website at www.audi.com.
The collection, use and sharing may vary depending on your model and model year, your subscription status, or the service offering. For example, collection, use and sharing may vary between Audi connect services,if you have designated a key user, or if you are driving a model equipped with persistent data logging. Please review the complete Privacy Statement to understand our data handling practices with respect to a particular service.
You can find additional information about our data privacy practices in your MMI.
>» Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect> right control button > About Audi connect.
Information about our privacy practices in con-
junction with the mobile Audi connect application can be found in the Application's Privacy
Statement.
For additional information about the privacy practices relating to Audi connect, myAudi, or other websites, applications or online services as well as your obligations with respect to using these services, and for additional information >

8V2012721B)

))_ Notavailable in every market.

209

Audi connect

regarding Audi connect terms and conditions,
please visit your Audi national/sales region website at www.audi.com.

Troubleshooting
Appliesto: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment

The information that followslists some troubleshooting options. They depend on the equip-
ment.

Problem

Solution

Audi connect Infotainment serv- Some Audi connect Infotainment services mustbe activated or

ices: individual Audi connect Info- configured through your personal myAudi account before using

tainment services are grayed out or them for the first time. You can find detailed information online

not available.

at my.audi.com.

Wi-Fi hotspot: it is not possible to Check if Wi-Fi is activated in the MMI > page 208.

connect through Wi-Fi.

Delete all existing Wi-Fi connections on your mobile device and

restart it.

210

Navigation

Navigation
Opening navigation
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
The navigation system directs you to yourdestination, around traffic incidents, and on alternative routes,if desired.

-- The route calculated by the navigation system is a recommendation for reaching your destination. Obeytraffic lights, stopping re-
strictions, one-way streets, lane change re-
strictions, etc. -- Adjust the volume of the audio system so
that signals from outside the vehicle, such
as police and fire sirens, can be heardeasily at all times.

RAH-8976]

Home address 2) Gas station
4
Beaks

Fig. 186 Diagram: Enter destination menu

> Press the [NAV/MAP] button.

The Enter destination menu is displayed after opening navigation. The following information can be displayed in the Infotainment system display:

@ Input field for free text search ....

211

@ Home address .................

213

@® Last destinations ............... 212

@ Stored favorites cos: nce sy new ss 213

If you have connected a mobile device to the MMI, your directory contacts will also be listed if
they have navigation data assigned to them.

The Favorites (4) > fig. 186 menu item as well as the directory contacts are only shown in the Enter destination menu if you have entered one or more characters using the input field.

Switching between destination entry and the map:

-- Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the map is displayed. Or: Select: left control button > Switch to map.
ZA WARNING
-- The demands oftraffic require your full attention. Always read the chapter = page 260, Driving safety.
-- Obeyall traffic laws when driving.

CG) Note
If the driving directions conflict with traffic laws, obeythe traffic laws.
G) Tips
-- Snow and obstructions on the GPS antenna or interference caused by trees and large buildings can impair satellite reception and affect the system's ability to determine the vehicle position. Several deactivated or malfunctioning satellites can also interrupt GPS reception and affect the system's ability to determine the vehicle position.
-- Because street names sometimes change,
the names stored in the MMI mayin rare cases differ from the actual street name.

Entering a destination

acta eesti ala
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
With the free text search, you can enter the navigation destination data all at once in any order using the MMI touch control pad* or the letter/ number speller (for example, 20 Main St., Los Angeles). Likewise, you can search for points of interest, contacts, previous destinationsor favorites to navigate to the desired address.

Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed > page 211, fig. 186.
> Push the control knob up. The input fieldis dis-
played @) > page 211, fig. 186.

-- Enter one or more search terms into the input

field.

8V2012721B)

211

Navigation

-- If available, confirm the input suggestion* to complete the entry or a word suggestion*. See = page 172, Letter/numberspeller.
-- Turn the control knob to the right to change the results list.
-- Select and confirm a destination from the results list.
The route displays as an overview in the map. Route guidance is already active.
Narrowing the search area
All countries/states are selected at the factory for the free text search.
-- Select the right control button > Country/state selection in the input field @ > page 211, fig. 186.
-- Select the country or state (@)that should be
searched for in the free text search in order to narrow the number of results and increase the search speed. The selected entry in the country/state selection is stored. Or: Select All countries/states.
(@)Tips
-- The MMI input suggestions depend on the last navigated destinations.
-- Up to 50 entries can be stored in the last destinations list.
-- Additional information on free text searches can be found under > page 173.
Loading previous destinations
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Yourlast destinations are automatically stored and can be loadeddirectly as a destination.
Requirement: a destination was already navigated to.
> Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
Your last destination is listed directly in the Enter destination menu under the home address and identified with the symbol @) > page 211, fig. 186.

-- Select and confirm one ofthe last destinations from the list.
Deleting previous destinations
-- Select one of the last destinations from the list. -- Select: right control button > Delete destina-
tion > Delete this last destination or Delete all last destinations.
The selected destination or all last destinations is/are deleted and no longer displayed in the Enter destination menu.
Entering an address
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
As an alternative to free text search, you can also enter an addressin stages.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
> Select: left control button > Enter address.
-- Entering a destination using a country/state: select and confirm Country/state. Select and confirm a country or state directly from the list. Or: search for a country or state using the input field.
-- Entering a destination using the City/ZIP code: select and confirm City/ZIP code. Enter a city or a ZIP code. Or: select and confirm a city from the list.
-- Select and confirm additional details about the
destination such as Street, House number or Downtown. -- Destination entry using a street intersection*: Requirement: you must enter a street. Select
and confirm Intersection. Select and confirm a street directly from the list. Or: search for a street using the input field. -- Select and confirm Start route guidance.

212

Navigation

Setting a home address/favorite as the elated)
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
You can quickly and easily start route guidance to your home address using the home address function. Favorites allow easier accessto frequently used destinations.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
Setting a home addressas the destination
Requirement: a home address must be stored => page 218.
Your Home addressis shown directly in the Enter destination menu @) > page 211, fig. 186.
-- Select: Home address.
Setting a favorite as the destination
Requirement: a favorite must be stored as a destination > page 218.
-- Enter at least the first three letters of the desired favorite in the free text search input field. The favorites found are shown in the Infotainmentsystem display (4) > page 211, fig. 186.
-- Select and confirm the desired entry.
@ Tips
-- Additional settings for the home address can be found under > page 218.
-- Additional settings for the favorites can be found under > page 218.

Transferring a destination from the directory
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
You can navigate directly to destinations in the directory.

(1) BTU)

Denescuar ie

@-=., HawthornAve, Los Angeles, CA

ry MT Tira =] NZee LCi aa ON

34°03°12.7°°N, 118°14°

"WwW

Fig. 187 Possible directory/contacts
Requirement: an address with navigation data or a navigation destination must already be assigned to a contact > page 218, Directory con-
tacts.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
> Select: left control button > Directory > a con-
tact.
The directory/contacts are shown in alphabetical order and are marked with symbolsto indicate the storage location:
@ Business address @ Private address @®) Business destination @ Private destination
-- Select and confirm an addressor a destination. When you haveselected a destination, the route guidance can be started directly.
-- Check the address input again when selecting an address.
--Then select and confirm Start route guidance.
Additional directory functions in the navigation system can be found under > page 218.
G) Tips
-- Addresses that have been imported from your mobile device into the MMI can also be used as a destination.

8V2012721B)

213

Navigation

-- If a contact is grayed out in the directory, this contact has neither a destination nor an address assigned toit.
eee lesa)
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
> Select: left control button > Points of interest.
-- Changing the search area: select and confirm Search area > a search area from the list.
The following search categories are available:
Nearby: points of interest can be selected from different categories. The points of interest are listed starting from the immediate vicinity of the vehicle up to a radius of approximately 124 miles (200 km).
Along the route: points of interest along the route can only be selected during active route guidance. The pointsof interest are located directly along or in the immediatevicinity of the calculated route. The points of interest can likewise be selected from various categories. For example, you can search for a hotel or parking lot at the destination.
Near destination/Near stopover: points of interest near a destination or a stopover can only be selected during active route guidance. The points of interest can likewise be selected from various categories. For example, you can search for a hotel or parking lot at the destination.
In a new city: select a country/state or search in a newcity. Enter the name ofthe desiredcity. Points of interest can be selected from various categories. This function allows you to search for points of interestin any city regardless of the active route guidance or the vehicle position.
-- Searching for a point of interest name in the selected search area: select Find entry > Enter point of interest. Enter the name of the point of interest.

-- Searching for a point of interest in a specific category: select Select category. Select and
confirm a category such as Restaurants.
G) Tips
-- Distances to points of interest are displayed as a straight-line distance from your current location. The actual distance from your current location to the pointof interest is updated automatically. The list of points ofinterest that were found is not resorted when this happens.
-- There maybe entries in the list that cannot be displayed completely due to their length. Select the corresponding entry from the list. Select: right control button > Show destination details. Detailed information for the selected entry in the list is then displayed.
Online point of interest search (online 1k
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi connect Infotainment
You can searchfor points of interest on the Inter-
net.
Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect Infotainment must be met > page 203.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
> Select: left control button > Online search. The search area last set is displayed in the input field.
-- Changing the search area: select: right control button > Select search area.
-- Searching for online destinations in the selected search area: enter a newcity/stateif necessary. Enter the search term, such as hotel. Press the control knob. Select and confirm an online destination from the list.
-- Searching for online destinations in a specific category: select and confirm Select category. Select and confirm a category such as Restau-
rants.
Find which search areas are available under => page 214, Point of interest search.

214

8V2012721B) RAX-0083

Navigation

You can search for online destinations using the voice recognition system > table on page 184.
@ Tips
Always read the chapter > page 203, Audi
connect.
NeemToL
Elaeol aly
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi connect Infotainment
Importindividual destinations from your myAudi account into the MMI.
Requirement:
The requirements for Audi connect Infotainment must be met > page 203.
You must have a registered myAudi account at my.audi.com. You must have a vehicle assigned to your myAudi account and you musthavestored one or more destinations.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
> Select: left control button > myAudi contacts. > If necessary, enter your myAudi user data or
your myAudi PIN > page 204. The contacts stored in myAudi are displayed.
-- Select and confirm a contact. -- Select and confirm a private or business desti-
nation.
-- Select and confirm Start route guidance.
@) Tips
-- You only need to enter the myAudi user data one time.
-- You can receive your myAudi PIN if you have set up a myAudi account.
-- For additional information, visit www.
audiusa.com.

Entering a destination using geo coordinates
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
> Select: left control button > Geographical coordinates.
-- Select Latitude/Longitude. -- Press the control knob to set the individual val-
ues. -- Turn the control knob to the left/right to
change the selected value. -- Select and confirm Start route guidance.
Adding a stopover
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
You can enter an additional destination when route guidanceis active.
ry Craver
=| prc) destination ----$--@®) x Elias Thomas Snack Bar
preciel --Q©_
Fig. 188 Example: active route guidance with stopover
Requirement: route guidance mustalready be active.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
Entering a destination as a stopover -- Enter a destination in the input line
> page 211. -- Select and confirm a destination from the re-
sults list. -- Select and confirm Add as stopover.
Deleting a stopover -- Push the control knob up. Free text search and
active route guidance are displayed. Or: Turn

215

Navigation

the control knob to the left until the active route guidance is shown.
-- Select and confirm Delete stopover (2) > fig. 188.
-- The stopover is deleted.
Cancel route guidance
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system
Requirement: route guidance mustbe active.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
> Turn the control knob to the left until the active route guidance is shown > page 215,fig. 188.
> Select and confirm Delete destination @) => page 215,fig. 188. The destination is deleted. Or: select the right control button > Cancel route guidance.
Additional options when entering a Cdr ial)
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the right control button.
Depending on the selected function, the following options may be available when entering a destination:
Cancel route guidance: Requirement: route guidance mustbe active. Route guidance is canceled. For additional information, see > page 216.
Country information: you can display the applicable urban and rural speed limits for any coun-
try/state. If this function is activated, the infor-
mation will be automatically shown to you in the route information () > page 220,fig. 193 when the speed limit is exceeded > page 223.
Country/state selection: see > page 212, Narrowing the search area.
Routecriteria: see > page 220, Routecriteria.
Showlocation on map: Requirement: you must have selected a destination from the resultslist. The destination entered is displayed on the map.
Parking at this location*: Requirement: you must have selected a destination from the resultslist.

All parking options near the selected location are displayed in the Infotainment system.
Delete: the selected entry is deleted. You can delete individual entries or all entries (for example, favorites or last destinations).
Audi connectat this location*: Requirement: you must have selected a destination from the results list. Allows you to search for items in the vicinity of the selected location, such as Travel information.
Online traffic data*: the online traffic information > page 226 can be switched on or off.
Add destination to contact: see > page 218.
Store as favorite: see > page 218.
Voice guidance: see > page 220.
Navigation settings: see > page 219.
@ Tips
Information on online traffic data* can also be found online at www.audiusa.com.

216

Navigation

Personal route assistance
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and personal route assistance
Your MMIcan learn the routes that you drivefrequently (such as your daily commute to work and back) and suggest route guidance based on the current vehicle position.

# Home address

5 iRk] Ae

® Market Street
14

52)

Fig. 189 Example: personal route display

Thereis a delay of 6 min on your personal route to Stevens Creek Blvd, San Jose, CA 95117.
SPtara t roeutesguicdarnucse kieiccec
Ignoreall messages
Fig. 190 Information on personal route
> Press the [NAV/MAP| button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
> Select: right control button > Navigation settings > Personal route assistance.
When the function is switched on M, the MMI records the frequently-driven routes regardless of whether a destination was entered and reached or not.
As long as route guidance is not active, your personal routes are listed in the Enter destination menu under the home address and indicated with the symbol F& @) © fig. 189. When personal route assistance is switched on, this symbol is displayed in the Navigation menu and in the Infotainment system display status line at the same time.
The distance to the destination and the calculated arrival time are also displayed for your person-

RAH-8978

al routes. Without starting route guidance, your MMI monitorsthe traffic conditions for your personal routes and showspossible traffic incidents for the possible routes to be driven in the Infotainment system display @) > fig. 189.
A message will be displayed if thereis a large traffic incident (more than 12 minute delay) regardless of which menu is selected > fig. 190. Select and confirm one of the following options:
-- Start route guidance: the MMI starts the route guidance for the personal route displayed and searches for a faster routeif available.
-- Ignore this route and this message: the displayed destination with all applicable personal routes is no Longer factored into the current trip. No more messages are shown for the displayed destination. The displayed destination with all applicable personal routes will be factored into the trip again only after stopping the vehicle and switching the ignition on again.
-- Ignore all messages: all personal routes are no longer factored into the current trip. No more messages are displayed. Messages for personal routes when thereis increased traffic will appear again after the vehicle is stopped and the ignition is switched on again.
As soon as you switch off personal route assis-
tance, the symbol in the status line turns off and
your trips are no longer recorded. Trips that were already stored remain stored.
Deleting personal routes:
-- Select the desired personal route in the Enter
destination menu @ fig. 189. -- Select: right control button > Delete destina-
tion.
Deleting all personal routes:
-- Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > MMI settings > Factory settings.
-- Select: Navigation and online memory > Restore factory settings > page 254.

8V2012721B)

217

Navigation
@ Tips
-- Personal routes are learned based on the vehicle position. The routeis prioritized according to how frequently you drive to a destination.
--A maximum ofthree personal routes are displayed in the Enter destination menu. Based on the currentvehicle position, the traffic situation for the route that is most likely to be driven out of the three routes will always be monitored.
-- Please note that personal routes that have already been stored will remain stored after the ignition is switched off and they must be deleted manually.
Home address
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
Storing a home address
-- Select and confirm Home address (2) => page 211, fig. 186. After opening the home
address for the first time, you will be asked to create a home address. -- Select and confirm Create now. -- Enter a destination or select a destination from
the list.
Editing the home address
-- Select the Home address (2) > page 211, fig. 186.
-- Select: right control button > Edit home address.
-- Select and confirm a new destination as the home address.
The selected destination is stored as the new home address.
Favorites
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
218

-- Storing a destination as a favorite: search for the desired destination using the input field. Or: select and confirm a destination from the list. Select: right control button > Store as favorite.
-- Renaming a favorite: select the left control button > Favorites > a favorite from the list > right control button > Rename favorite.
-- Movefavorite: select a favorite from the list > right control button > Movefavorite. Select and confirm the location of the selected favor-
ite.
-- Deleting a favorite: select a favorite from the list > right control button > Delete favorite > Delete this favorite or Deleteall favorites.
Directory contacts
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Two addresses(private/business) can be assigned as destinations for each contactin the di-
rectory.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
Storing a destination as a contact in the directory
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI > page 188.
-- Select: a destination > right control button > Add destination to contact.
-- Enter the first letters of the desired contact in the free text search input field > page 211, fig. 186 and then select a contact from the list.
-- Select and confirm Add business destination or Add private destination.

Alternative routes
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Fig. 191 Diagram: display of alternative routesin the overview map
Requirement: a destination must be entered and the route guidance mustbe started. > Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until
the Enter destination menu is displayed > page 211, fig. 186. > Select: right control button > Navigation settings > Show alternative routes. Three routes will be displayed in the overview map after you enter a destination > fig. 191. > Select and confirm the desired route that you wouldlike to use for route guidance.
Up to three route suggestions and their properties are displayed on the overview map when the function is switched on 4 © fig. 191. If available, the following information will ap-
pear on the route suggestions:
-- Route type(fast ©,fast alternative (2), economic route @))
-- Distance to the destination and the calculated arrival time
-- Traffic congestion along the route including time delays
The route that was calculated according to the route criteria you selected is shown on the overview map . The special properties of the route are also displayed () > fig. 191 and given as a spoken message. Using the control knob, you can select the possible routing for the alternative routes and show them on map Select and confirm the desired route that you wouldlike to use for route guidance.

Navigation
Additional settings
Navigation settings
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
> Select: right control button > Navigation settings.
Depending on the selected function, the following settings can be selected:
Showalternative routes
Up to three suggested routes are shown on the map when this function is switched on 4% => page 219, Alternative routes.
Low fuel warning
A message is displayed if the fuel gauge goes below the reserve marking when this function is switched on [M. Confirming this message displays a list of gas stations in the area. When a gas station is selected, route guidance from the current vehicle position is calculated.
Trailer mode*
Trailer mode is switched off at the factory.
When the function is switched on , the maximum permitted speed for vehicles with trailersis incorporated into the route guidance and the calculated arrival time is adjusted accordingly. Trailer mode is displayed using symbols % in the side menu on the map.
Personal route assistance*
Personal route assistance is switched off at the factory.
Your trips are recorded and destinations are suggested by the MMI when this function is switched
on page 217.
Notification when nearby*
The notification when nearbyis switched off at the factory.
The MMI notifies you when you are approaching selected points of interest when this function is

8V2012721B)

219

Navigation
switched on [M. You can also have a Notification
tone.
Presentation mode The Presentation mode helps you to effectively plan a trip and follow the planned route without moving the vehicle. You can use Select starting point when you would like to calculate a route starting from a location other than the vehicle position, for example. Start Presentation mode to simulate route guidance.
Route criteria
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
»{0] [6] | >a] «[e

RAH-8472|

> Select: right control button > Voice guidance.
Voice guidance: voice guidance can be Complete
or Shortened. With the Traffic function, voice
guidance promptsare only given when there are traffic incidents on your route. When Off is selected, no voice guidance is given.
Voice guidance during phone call: voice guidance during a phone call can be switched on or off.
Entertainmentfader: see > page 258.
Voice guidance volume: you can adjust the volume during voice guidance using the On/Off knob => page 165 You can also find additional information under > page 258.
Map
Map operation
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system

Fig. 192 Possible route criteria
> Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.
> Select: right control button > Routecriteria.
@HOVlanes): With the Avoid function, HOV lanes will be excluded when calculating routes. When Allow is selected, the MMI will route you through HOV lanes and show them on the map.
Qhighways/ @)Toll roads/ @)Ferries: if the nav-
igation system should not include highways,toll roads or ferries - if possible - when calculating
routes, you can select the Avoid function.
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the [LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 211, fig. 186.

Giro in 11
Wars Fig. 193 Example: 3D position map with the crosshairs switched off
Pfeeeass
Fig. 194 Example: standard map with the crosshairs switched on
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the map is displayed > fig. 193.
Zooming in/out on the map -- Turn the control knob tothe left or to the right.
You can also zoom in and out on the map using >

) High occupancyvehicle
220

the MMI touch control pad* > page 169. Or: turn the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel* > page 17.
Turning the crosshairs on/off
-- Switching the crosshairs on: press the control knob in the map view fig. 193.
-- Switching the crosshairs off: press the [BACK button.
When the crosshairs are switched off > fig. 193:
@ Orientation: the map is either displayed as a 2D north-up map or as a 2D heading-up map.
@ Distance to the destination
® When the trailer mode function is switched on, the corresponding symbol is displayed next to the arrival time. @ Scale: turn the control knob tothe left or
right to decrease or increase the scale. When the Automatic zoom function is switched on , an "A"for "Automatic"is displayed in the magnifying glass. Altitude Vehicle position Route information: various information will be displayed during active route guidance (for example, the upcoming maneuver including calculated distance and street names). The display also provides traffic information or points of interest on the current
route.
Street being driven on: displayed hereas "offroad" when the vehicle is stationary.
When the crosshairs are switched on fig. 194:
@®© Crosshairs: movethe crosshairsin the desired direction using the MMI touch control pad* or the control knob and set a point on the map as the destination or have information about the focal point displayed.
@ Speed display): Displays the maximum permitted speed on expressways and on highways.

Navigation
@ Entertainment sliding menu*: see => page 170.
® Additional information on the crosshairs position: if you move the crosshairs to a location on the map, available information for the current crosshairs position is displayed. Press the control knob to open destination details or to start route guidance. When the crosshairs are turned off, the road being currently driven on is shown. Map contents(pointsof interest, favorites). When there are multiple points of interest in the immediatevicinity, the symbols are shown stacked on the map. Better route #3: if a better route is available for the current route guidance, it will be indicated on the map including the time that would be saved. More information can be found under > page 225.
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the map is displayed > page 220,fig. 193.
> Press the left control button.
The following map functions can be selected:
Switch to destination input
The free text search in the Enter destination menu is displayed > page 211, fig. 186.
Traffic messages
Current traffic information is displayed in the Infotainment system display. You can also find additional information under > page 225.
Route list
The route list can only be displayed when route guidanceis active and contains information regarding the route, the names of the streets and the length of the route sections. When traveling on highways, possible parking lots and rest areas are shown, which you can select as a stopover.

CO®@

8V2012721B)

D_ Only applies to vehicles without camera-based speed limit display.

221

Navigation

POIs along the route Requirement: route guidance mustbe active.
Searching for points of interest along your cur-
rent route For additional information, see
=> page 214.
Additional options on the map
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the map is displayed > page 220,fig. 193.
> Press the right control button.
Depending on the function selected, the following options can also be selected under the Map menu:
Cancel route guidance: see > page 216.
Adjust position: you can manually movethe vehicle position on the map to change the route.
Map settings: see > page 222.
Routecriteria: see > page 220.
Voice guidance: see > page 220.
Navigation settings: see > page 219.
Showalternative routes: see > page 219.
Parking along the route": parking options near the vehicle are displayed.
Save current position*: you can save your current vehicle position as a favorite > page 218 or save it as a contact in the directory > page 218.
Audi connectat this location*: allows you to search for Travel information at the entered lo-
cation (events, weather at the destination, etc.).
Online traffic data*: you can switch the online
traffic data on or off M.
Country information: see > page 216.
Avoid route*: when route guidanceis active, the calculated route will avoid the area you have specified (maximum: 12 mi (20 km)), if possible.

The navigation system calculates an alternative route. The route to be avoided that you have entered applies only to the current route and must be set again, if needed. The areas you have selected to avoid will appear with red and white shading on the map.
Moveroute*: move your finger over the MMI touch control pad* or use the control knob to adjust the route on the overview map.
Map settings
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the map is displayed.
> Select: right control button > Map settings.
Depending on the selected function, the following settings can be selected:
Map colors
Day/Night: the map is displayed with a light/ dark background.
Automatic: the map display adaptsto the lighting conditions (for example, changing from Day to Night when driving through a tunnel).
Map display
Standard: see > page 220,fig. 194.
Satellite map): see > page 223.
Electric range": see > page 227.
Map orientation
Destination map: the map indicates the destination and is oriented to the north.
2D heading-up map/2D north-up map: the current vehicle position is displayed. The map is oriented in the direction of travel or to the north.
3D heading-up map": the current vehicle position is shown on a three-dimensional map and is aligned to the direction of travel. At a scale of 62 mi (100 km)and larger, the map orientation is to the north.

2) AUDIAGprovidesaccessto services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on the third party provider.
222

Overview map: the entire route from the vehicle position to the destination or the next stopover is displayed on the map. The map scale depends on the length of the route and adapts automatically. The map is oriented to the north.
Route information
The display of route information, such as the current street being driven on or points of interest along the current route, can be switched on/off or can be minimized on the display of upcoming maneuvers.
Automatic zoom
On: the map scale is adapted automatically depending on the type of road being traveled (expressway, highway, other roads) so that you always have an optimal overview of the road ahead. The scale will also be automatically adapted when there are upcoming maneuversto provide a better detailed view.
Intersection: when route guidance is active, the map temporarily zooms in to a detailed scale when there are upcoming maneuversso that you can seethe street or turn better.
Off: the map scale you have chosen is maintained.
Map content
Map content such as weather, traffic information
or favorites can be displayed or hidden.
The weather forecast* is displayed on a 3 mile (5 km) scale on the map > page 219,fig. 191.

Navigation
Satellite map
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi connect Infotainment
You can display the navigation mapwith satellite images.

S Figueroa St
W WashingtonBlvd
Los Angeles Fig. 195 Example: satellite map

Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect Infotainment must be met > page 204.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the map is displayed.
> Select: right control button > Map settings > Map display > Satellite map).

The map viewis based on data packets received
from the Internet in the form ofsatellite images,
which are then combined with the roadways from the Standard map view. There are two gigabytes of memory space in the MMI memorythat can be used to temporarily store the map or navigation data that was received. This is roughly the
amountrequired for the map/navigation data for
a 2,485 mile (4,000 km)route. As long as the satellite images loaded for route guidance are stored, you can use them without having an active data connection.

G Tips

--The stored satellite map data!) can be de-

leted under Factory settings > Navigation

and online memory > page 254.

--The satellite map") is updated regularly

whenever the function is opened. The proc-

ess may take several seconds.

--When the satellite map display") is switched

on with the 3D position map, the map

8V2012721B)

)) AUDIAGprovides accessto services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends onthe third party provider.

223

Navigation
display automatically switches to the 2D map type when driving through tunnels. -- Alwaysread the chapter > page 203, Audi
connect. -- For additional information, visit www.
audiusa.com.
Map update

Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
There are multiple options available for updating your map material:
-- Map updates through the online map update* > page 224.
-- Import map updates from the SD card* to your MMI. You can find additional information online at my.audi.com.
-- Map update at an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. This can result in additional costs.

Online map update
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi connect Infotainment
Using the online map update, you can update the map material in your navigation system directly from yourvehicle.

Recommended regions --> Confirmation

You have chosen to download 109 MB ofdata Please be aware of your mobile data
PCM MNCMC RTRekateint

BTC Cel Te)

Fig. 196 Example: display of a new online map update

OTR tee CaratRet

Neetu es nes

]

Netra)

Bp Select more countries

(2)

Fig. 197 Example: selection of a country package

Requirement:

The requirements for Audi connect Infotainment services must be met > page 204.
You must have a myAudi account and have assigned your vehicle toit.
Using your vehicle position, the MMI identifies regions which you are frequently in. Based on this, the MMI suggests update packages for these regions, if they are available.

> Select @ Start download © fig. 196 if the message for a new map update appearsin the Infotainment system display. Or:
> Select [MENU] button > Settings > left control
button > System maintenance > System update > Online update.

A selection with the available update packages appears in the Infotainment system display > fig. 197.

Selecting the online map update
-- Select an update package from the list (MY) @ > fig. 197.
-- Confirm your selection with the BACK button and go back tothe selection.
-- The number and amount of datafor the selected update package are now displayed in the Infotainment system.

Starting the download
-- Select and confirm Start download. -- Confirm the security promptby selecting Start
download again.

The update packages begin to download and the status of the download progress is shown in the
Infotainment system display.

Installation of online map updates
The downloaded map material installs after you stop your vehicle. The new update packages install only after you switch off the ignition. After restarting the MMI, the Infotainment system display indicates if the updates installed successfully.

-- Confirm the successful update with OK.

224

Navigation

The new map material can now be used for navigation.
Gi) Tips
-- The amount ofavailable online map updates in the vehicle is limited. To update moreregions, use the map updatevia SD card at my.audi.com.
-- Alwaysread the chapter > page 203, Audi
connect.
Accessing traffic information
Traffic information (TMC)
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the [NAV/MAP| button repeatedly until the map is displayed.
> Select: left control button > Traffic messages.
An overviewofall the traffic messages is displayed in the Infotainment system. Traffic incidents on your route are shown in the upper section of the list, sorted according to distance.
-- Displaying all traffic messages for a street/ highway: select and confirm the symbol. A list of all the traffic messages for the selected street/highwayis displayed.
-- Opening a detailed view oftraffic information: select and confirm the traffic information from the list.
-- Displaying the selected traffic information on the map: select the right control button > Show on map. The shaded line shows the street and the length ofthe traffic jam.
-- Displaying the next traffic message on the map: press the control knob.
Traffic information display
Colored warning symbols: traffic incidents on your route are shown in the upper section of the list and are sorted according to distance.
Warning symbols with +: avoided traffic incidents.
Grayed out warning symbols: traffic incidents that are not on your route. They are sorted ac-

cording to road type (expressway, highway, other road), country and name.
@)Tips
-- Critical traffic information, such as warnings
about wrong-waydrivers, is automatically displayed. To hide the traffic information, press the [BACK] button or the control knob. -- TMC traffic reports are not available in Canada. For more information, please contact Sirius Canada.
Better route
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
By receiving traffic information through TMC, your MMIcalculates a better route if available and the possible time saved comparedto the current route. You can decide which route you would like to use.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the map is displayed.
Requirement: route guidance mustbe active.
If your MMI has calculated a better route than the current route guidance, the message A better routeis available. appears for several seconds along with the time that maybe saved. A better routeis indicated in the map view by the symbol
> page 220,fig. 194.
Apply better route
-- Press the right control button. -- Select and confirm the better route. Or: Select
and confirm Details to display details about the better route. You can zoom in or out on the map using the MMI touch control pad. Requirement: there must be more than one optimized route calculated. Press the control knob to switch to the next route in the detailed view. Closing the detailed view: press the [BACK button. -- The better route is used for the remaining route guidance and the routeis recalculated.

8V2012721B)

225

Navigation

Online traffic information
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi connect Infotainment
The MMIcan receive real-time online traffic information about congestion, accidents, road construction, and otherincidents.
Reeacaett eye aCe m2)
B} Northbound
Nogales St, Northbound
Fig. 198 Online traffic information display* without better
route
Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect Infotainment must be met > page 203. > Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until
the map is displayed. > Select: left control button > Traffic messages. An overviewofall the traffic messages is displayed in the Infotainment system > fig. 198. Traffic incidents on your route are shown in the upper section ofthe list, sorted according to distance @ © fig. 198. Colored markings indicate the flow oftraffic > page 226.
-- Switching online traffic information on: press the right control button and switch Online traffic data on (M). The [ONLINE] symbol is shown in the Infotainment system display @) > fig. 198.
You can also display the online traffic informa-
tion on the satellite map > page 223.
Traffic information display Color-coded markings along the route indicate
the traffic flow: Green: traffic is flowing freely. Orange: stop-and-go traffic

RAH-8979

Red: congestion.
Shaded markings indicate the length of the area with congestion.
Colored warning symbols: thereis a traffic incident immediately ahead on the route.
Grayed out warning symbols: traffic incidents
that are not on your route.
Red warning symbols: all warning symbolswill be red when route guidance is not active.
The display of colored markings, warning symbols, etc. can be set in the Map content menu => page 223.
Traffic information is switched on at the factory. You can switch off the reception ofonline traffic information at any time > page 226.
(i) Tips
-- Online traffic information is not available in Canada.
-- Alwaysread the chapter > page 203, Audi
connect.
-- Having the Online traffic data function switched on provides the most accurate reportsof traffic situations as well as traffic forecasting. Your vehicle transmits and processesits anonymous, encrypted position information at regular intervals to the traffic data provider. If you do not want to
use this, you can switch off the online traffic information function at any time. -- The onlinetraffic information network is currently not available in all countries, and
the coverage is not nationwide. For addi-
tional information, visit www.audiusa.com.

2) AUDIAGprovides accessto services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on the third party provider.
226

Navigation

e-tron navigation functions
Electric range
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
The electric range shows the maximum distance that can be driven using electric power. Information such asthetypeofroad, speeds, and altitude will be taken into account.
Fig. 199 Example:electric range display
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the map is displayed > page 220,fig. 194.
> Select: right control button > Map settings > Map display > Electric range.
> Press the [BACK] button to return to the map
view.
You can read the electric range of your vehicle based on the border @) © fig. 199. The map scale will automatically adjust to the range.

Finding the nearest charging station
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
You can display charging stations at any time using the point of interest search > page 214.
You can also display the charging stations along the current route.
Requirement: route guidance mustbe active and the map mustbe displayed.
If available, all charging stations in the selected search area are displayed with the following additional information: @ Connector types @ Symbol for charging stations that are always
open
@® Available destination details
The hours of operation for the charging stations are displayed in the destination details.
Displaying destination details: select the right control button > Show destination details.
Apply charging station as the destination: press the control knob. Select and confirm Start route guidance.
You can find additional information about charging your vehicle in > page 102, Charging.

Troubleshooting
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system

Problem
Free text search: the desired destination cannot be found.

Solution
The destination might not be entered in the navigation database. Or: check the spelling of the term that was searched. Check if the desired country/state was selected for the free text search using the Country/state selection > page 212 or the option All countries/states.

8V2012721B)

227

Radio

Radio
Opening the radio
The radio supports the FM, AM and SiriusXM* (satellite radio) bands. Using the HD Radio receiver also allows you to receive radio stations on the FM and AM bandsin digital format.

i.a(5)

a=F3|< iT

STP

)

Neen

Fig. 200 FMstation list (HD Radio technology FM)

UC La)
20 0n 20 eToys

Nesteurle Desieucle
NoSignal NoSignal

Fig. 201 SiriusXM stationlist
> Press the [RADIO] button.
After opening the radio, the last opened station list is displayed.
Selecting a station: select and confirm a station from the station list. FM/AM stations that can be received by digital radio are marked with the HD Radio technology symbol 4) ©) > fig. 200. If reception quality declines, the radio automatically switches to the analog FM/AM station depending on availability. Digital HD Radio stations* may contain multiple additional stations*. The available additional stations* are listed under the radio station. If you lose reception, the additional stations* are muted since they can no longer be received.
Setting the frequency band: press the [RADIO button repeatedly until the desired frequency band is set.
@ Presets

[RAH-8598]

The station is stored as a preset. The symbol
showsthe stored location in the presetslist (for
example, 21).
@ Radio text (shortened display)
If available, program information about the set station is displayed in all of the station lists.
@ Frequency
@ Station name
© Station with HD Radio technologyavailable
)
© Channel number ° fig. 201
If there is a loss of radio signal (SiriusXM*), the
following system information is displayed in the station list:
NoSignal: the tuner is currently not receiving a satellite signal (7) > fig. 201.
The system information turns off when the radio stations are received again.
(i) Tips
-- Contact the SiriusXM* provider if you would like to receive satellite programming.
-- Buildings, tunnels, bridges, open areas, other vehicles or objects on the vehicle roof can
affect reception. -- Satellite radio is not available in Alaska and
Hawaii.
-- iTunes tagging* is not supportedbyall radio stations.
-- When the Apple CarPlay connection is active, Tag this song for iTunes* is not available.

228

Radio

Radio functions
etme)4at 1a)
Applies to: vehicles with free text search
Using the free text search, you can select the order that the search termsare enteredin the input field. Search in all frequency bandsfor a station name or program type, such as News.
DTaP Tea ee aT Taal)
Fig. 202 Inputfield and resultslist for free text search
-- Opening the free text search: when in a station list, keep turning the control knob to the left until the free text search input field is displayed.
-- Using the free text search: see > page 173, Free text search.
You can also search for frequencies.
Stations from the presets (3) are displayed in the results list @) > fig. 202. The symbol Q) indicates which station list you switched to based on the station selection.
EX] nal options
> Select: [RADIO] button > right control button.
The following options are available depending on the frequency band:
-- Sound settings: see > page 257. -- Store as preset: see > page 231, Presets.
-- Tag this song for iTunes*: connect your Apple
device to the Audi music interface* on your MMI. Select and confirm Tag this song for iTunes. The track that is currently playing is stored on your Apple device. Synchronize your Apple device with iTunes. The tagged track will display the next time you open your iTunes media center. If there is no Apple device connected, the tagged tracks are stored temporarily in

the MMI (maximum of 50 tracks). Once you connect your Apple device to the Audi music interface, the tags are stored on the device.
-- Manage SiriusXM alerts: see > page 230,SiriusXM alerts.
-- Store artist as favorite/Store track as favorite: see > page 230, SiriusXM alerts.
-- Manual tuning: the frequency barsare displayed. Select and confirm the desired frequency.
-- Seek: the radio tunes to the previous or next receivable station.
-- Scan: all stations are played for several seconds each.
-- Radio settings: see > page 231.
tle (ol eb
> Select: [RADIO] button > left control button >a frequency band (such as FM) > station.
> Select: right control button > Radio text.
Information that accompanies the program (such as artist, composer, track) is displayed.
Browsing through radio text entries: turn the control knob to the left or right.
Requirement: a radio text entry mustbe displayed and the station must be broadcasting a phone number,a navigation destination or a text message number as Radio Text Plus information.
If a location, a phone number or a text message number is included with a radio text entry, the radio text will be shown with a colored border. You have the following options:
Call*/Start route guidance*/Write text message*: -- Select a radio text entry with Radio Text Plus in-
formation and press the control knob. -- Select and confirm Call*/Start route guid-
ance*/Write text message". Or: press the BACK] button to cancel.
G) Tips
The availability of radio text and Radio Text Plus depends on the radio station.

8V2012721B)

229

Radio

SiriusXM alerts
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM
You can display an overview of yourfavorite ar-
tists or tracks that are currently being played on a SiriusXM channel.
VTaele)e
Fig. 203 SiriusXM alertnotification
> Select: [RADIO] button > left control button > SiriusXM.
After you have stored a SiriusXM alert for your favorite tracks or artists, you can display an overview ofyour favorite tracks or artists currently being received in the SiriusXM alerts menu and play them immediately. You can also receive a SiriusXMalert notification @ for these tracksor artists in the entertainment sliding menu > fig. 203.
Storing a SiriusXM alert
Requirement: your favorite track or artist must be playing on a SiriusXM channel. -- Select: right control button > Store track as fa-
vorite or Store artist as favorite.
Switching SiriusXM alert notifications on and off -- Select: right control button > SiriusXM alert
notifications. When the function is switched on M, a SiriusXM alert notification is displayed for several seconds in the entertainmentsliding menu for the Radio and Navigation menus. @) fig. 203 displayed.

Playing tracks/artists from Sirius XM alerts Requirement: a SiriusXM alert must be stored for a track/artist and it must be currently playing on a SiriusXM channel. -- Select: left control button > SiriusXM alerts >
an entry from the list. The selected track/artist is played.
Playing tracks/artists from the entertainmentsliding menu
Requirement: the SiriusXM alert notifications function must be switched on. You mustbe in the Radio and Navigation menu. A SiriusXM alert notification is displayed in the entertainment slid-
ing menu @) fig. 203.
-- Push the control knob down. -- Select and confirm the desired track/artist. Managing SiriusXM alerts -- Select: right control button > Manage SiriusXM
alerts. -- Switching SiriusXM alerts on/off: when the
function is switched on,you are notified when this track or artist is being played ona
SiriusXM channel. -- Deleting Sirius XM alerts: select an entry from
the list > right control button > Delete from alerts > Delete this entry or Delete all entries.
View: additional station information
Fig. 204 Radio view: additional station information
Requirement: you mustbe tuned to a radio station. The Show "NowPlaying" screen option must be switched on > page 232. Symbolsin the "Now Playing" screen > fig. 204:
@ Radiotextavailability

230

Radio textis available for the selected station. See > page 229.
@ iTunes tagging
The Tag this song for iTunes option is available for the set station. See > page 229, Additional
options.
@ FM HD Radio technology
The station is received through FM HD Radio technology.
@ Screen view
Display Cover art or Station logo. See => page 232, Preferred picture view*.
Displaying the station list: Turn the control knob. Or: press the [BACK] but-
ton.
Radio menu
(aIK [Presets
@o-- Snreeicns (3 Sie
es iM
(5) A
Fig. 205 Example: Radio menu
> Select: [RADIO] button > left control button.
Setting the frequency band: select and confirm the desired frequency band in the radio menu => fig. 205. Or: press the [RADIO] button repeatedly until the desired frequency band is set. Displays the station list.
@ Presets
The presetslist is displayed > page 231, Presets.
@ SiriusXM alerts
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM alerts
After you have stored a SiriusXM alert for your favorite tracks or artists > page 230, an overview of your favorite tracks or artists currently being received on SiriusXM is displayed.

Radio
@® SiriusxXM
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM alerts
The SiriusXM* channel list is displayed.
Additional frequency bands Depending on the vehicle equipment, you mayalso be able to select additional frequency bands @/® = fig. 205in the selection menu.

Presets
You can store your favorite stations from every frequency bandin the presetslist.
> Select: the [RADIO] button > left control button > Presets.
Requirement: the presetslist must be displayed.
-- Storing presets: select and confirm a free preset space. Follow the system instructions.
-- Select and confirm a station from the list if necessary.
Requirement: a station list must be displayed. -- Storing presets: select: an entry from the list >
right control button > Store as preset. Or: press and hold the control knob for several seconds.
-- Displaying the presets list: select: [RADIO] button > Presets.
Requirement: the presetslist must be displayed. -- Listening to presets: select and confirm a pre-
set from thelist. -- Movepreset: select a preset from the list >
right control button > Movepreset. Or: press and hold the control knob for several seconds. Select and confirm the location of the selected preset. -- Deleting presets: select a preset from the list > right control button > Delete preset > Delete this preset or Delete all presets.

Additional settings

Radio settings

> Select: [RADIO] button > right control button >

Radio settings.

8V2012721B)

231

Radio

The following settings can be selected, depending on the band that is selected:
Station names (FM)
Variable: scrolling text transmitted by the FM stations is shown in the Infotainment system display.
Fixed: scrolling text transmitted by the FM stations is not shownin the Infotainment system display. Only the current section of the scrolling text is displayed.
FM/AM HD Radio*
You can switch HD Radio reception on or off.
Channel sorting (SiriusXM*)
You can set the channel sorting for SiriusXM station lists* by:
-- Channel number: the channels are sorted in ascending order according to their channel number.
-- Channel name: the channels arelisted in alphabetical order.
-- First category, then channel number: the channels are sorted by their category and then by their channel numbers.
-- First category, then channel name: the stations are sorted by their category and then by their channel names.
Category filter (SiriusXM*)
The stations shown in the station list can be filtered by your personal preferences and by program type. The program categories that you can select depend on what is offered by your provider. Select the All categories option to deactivate all filter options and display all available stations in the satellite station list.

Show "NowPlaying"screen
When the function is switched on ¥ and the stations or presetslist is open, the display will switch to the Show "Now Playing" screen view after approximately five seconds > page 230. Depending on availability, information about the set station (such as station name, artist and station logo) may be displayed in this view.
Preferred picture view*
You can set your preferred screen view for the Show "Now Playing"screen > page 230.
-- Station logo: the station logo is displayed, depending on availability.
-- Cover art: the album cover is displayed if available.
Gracenote online database*
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet. The Cover art option mustbe selected = page 232, Preferred picture view*.
When the function is switched on (Y,the album
cover or genre cover for the song that is playing is
loaded from the Gracenote online database, de-
pending on availability.
Subscription status (SiriusXM)*
This option is available when your subscription is about to expire or has already expired. The expiration date for your license is displayed.
Call to SiriusXM"*: the contact information for your satellite radio provider is displayed. To call your satellite radio provider using the MMI, press Call to SiriusXM"*.

Troubleshooting

Problem
A station with poor reception is no longer displayed in the station list once you switch to a different station.

Solution
Store the station as a preset in advance. Accessthe presets using the presetslist > page 231.

232

Media

Media
Introduction
There are various media drives and connections available in the MMI. For example, you can play audio/video* files from the Jukebox* or connect your mobile device to the Audi music interface* and operate it through the MMI.
Notes
Media and formatrestrictions: the MMI (including the SD card reader and the USB storage device connection*) was tested with a variety of products and media available in the market. However, there may be cases whereindividual devices or media and audio/video* files may not be recognized, mayplay only withrestrictions or maynotplayat all.
Digital Rights Management: please note that the audio/video*files are subject to copyright protection.
The media drives do notplayfiles that are protected by DRM and thatareidentified with the symbol fi.
Data security: never store important data on SD cards, the Jukebox*, CDs/DVDs or mobile devices. Audi AG is not responsible for damaged or lost files and media.
Loading times: the morefiles/folders/playlists that are on a storage medium, the longer it will take to load the audio/video* files. Audi recommends using storage media that only contain audio/videofiles*. To decrease the time it takes to
load audio/video files*, create subfolders (for ex-
ample, for the artist or album). The loading time will also increase when importing files.
Additional information: when playing, audio files are automatically displayed with any additional information that is stored (such as the ar-
tist, track and album cover). If this information is
not available on the storage medium, the MMI will check the Gracenote metadata database.

However, in some cases,the additional informa-
tion may notbe displayed.
Restricted functionality: reset the Media settings to the factory default settings if functionality is restricted > page 254.
If functionality is restricted, reset the Jukebox* to the factory default settings > page 254.
For information about the properties of supported media and file formats, see > page 246.
CG) Note
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in General information on page 203.
CD/DVD operation
CD/DVDandformatrestrictions: the functionality ofindividual storage media maybe limited due to the variety of blank CDs/DVDs available and the various capacities. Audio CDs or video DVDs with copy protection, CDs/DVDs that do not conform to the standard, and multisession CDs may have limited playback or may notplay at all. Audi recommends finalizing the recording process when creating multisession CDs. Multisession DVDs are not supported.
Using CDs/DVDs,the CD drive or the DVDdrive:
to ensurecorrect, high-quality playback and to prevent damage tothe drive or disc reading errors, always store CDs/DVDs in a protective sleeve and do not expose them to direct sunlight. Do not use:
-- Damaged, dirty or scratched CDs/DVDs -- Single CDs/DVDs with 3 in (8 cm) diameter -- CD/DVDs that are not round -- CDs/DVDs with labels -- Protective rings -- Cleaning CDs
Thermal protection switch: CD/DVD playback may be temporarily unavailable if outside temperatures are extremely hot or cold. A thermal protection switch is installed to protect the CD/DVD and the laser.
Laser devices: laser devices are divided into safety classes 1 to 4 in accordance with DIN IEC 76 >

8V2012721B)

233

Media

(CO) 6/VDE 0837. The optical readers that are installed conform to safety class 1. Lasers in this
class are very weak and well-shielded, so there is
no danger if used correctly.
Media drives
SD card reader
The SD card reader is located in the glove com-
partment.
-- Inserting the SD card: The angled corner of the SD card mustface toward the right front side when being inserted. Slide the SD card into the card reader slot until the SD card clicks into place.
-- Automatic playback: playback will start automatically if the inserted SD card contains supported audio/videofiles* > page 246.
-- Removingthe SD card: press briefly on the SD card.
The SD card reader is accessed and operated through the MMI @) > page 241, fig. 210.
@ Note
Only use one-piece SD cards. If adapter cards
(SD cards with more than one piece) are used, the card could fall out of the adapter when
driving becauseofvibrations. Individual pieces could then become stuck in the drive and impair the functionality.
@ Tips
The SIM card reader then doesnot function.

-- Loading a CD/DVD: the CD/DVD is pulled in automatically. Slide the CD/DVD straight into the
DVD slot @) with the label facing up.
-- Automatic playback: playback will start automatically if the inserted CD/DVD contains supported audio/video* files > page 246.
-- Ejecting a CD/DVD: press the button @).
The CD/DVD is pulled in again automaticallyif it is not removed from the DVD slot within approximately ten seconds after ejecting it.
The DVD drive is accessed and operated through the MMI Q) & page 241, fig. 210.
@) Note
-- Never force a CD/DVDinto the drive. The CD/DVD is pulled in automatically.
-- Do not insert CDs/DVDswith labels into the drive. Labels can come loose from the CD/DVD and damage the drive.
G) Tips -- CDs/DVDs that contain audio files with a
high data rate maynotplay. -- The SIM card reader then does not function.
Applies to: vehicles with a CD drive
------

RAH-8826| RAH-8826|

DVD drive
Applies to: vehicles with a DVD drive
--
Fig. 206 Glove compartment: DVD drive

Fig. 207 Glove compartment: CD drive
-- Loading a CD: the CD is pulled in automatically.
Slide the CD straight into the slot @ with the label facing up.
-- Automatic playback: playback will start automatically if the inserted CD contains supported audio files > page 248, CD drive.
-- Ejecting a CD: press the button @.

234

Media

The CD is pulled in again automaticallyif it is not removed from the slot within ten seconds of ejecting it.
The CD drive is accessed and operated through the MMI & page 241, Playing media.
@) Note
-- Never force a CD into the drive. The CD is pulled in automatically.
-- Do notinsert CDs with labels into the drive. Labels can come loose from the CD and damage the drive.
i) Tips
CD playback cannot be guaranteed with audio files that have a high datarate.
Appliesto: vehicles with Jukebox
> Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control button until the sources overview > page 241 is displayed. Select and confirm Jukebox.
After you havefilled the Jukebox with music and/or videos, for example from your SD card, you can play these files directly from the Jukebox. The Jukebox memory capacity is approximately 10 GB.
Adding files to the Jukebox
-- Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control button until the sources overview > page 241 is displayed. Select one of the following sources
to copy to the Jukebox: SD card*, CD-ROM",
DVD-ROM*, USB storage device*.
Requirement: the media center (for example, tracks, albums) must be open. -- Selecting an entry: select an entry from the
media center. Select: right control button > Copy to jukebox > This entry or Entire list.
Requirement: the playlist must be open. See => page 244. -- Selecting a track: select the track that is cur-
rently playing. Select: right control button >

Copy to jukebox > This track or Entire album or This artist.

Requirement: a video file must be playing. -- Select: right control button > Copy to jukebox.

The copying process begins. The status of the copying process is shown in the MMI.
-- Hiding the importing process: select and confirm Continue copying in background. The importing processis hidden.
-- Canceling the importing process: select and confirm Cancel copying, or remove the source that is being imported. Files already copied re-
main.

Requirement: the copying process must be active in the background.
-- Showing the copying process: select: right control button > Copying in progress.

When importing, the audio files are automatically sorted into the media center categories based on the stored additional information > page 242.
The copied video files are stored in the media
center under the Videos category.

Playing the Jukebox
Requirement: the Jukebox must contain audio/ video files > page 235, Addingfiles to the Jukebox.

The Jukebox is accessed and operated through the MMI @) & page 241, fig. 210.

Displaying Jukebox memory capacity
Select: right control button > Jukebox memory capacity. Information about the Jukebox memory capacity and the number ofstored tracksis displayed.

Deleting tracks from the Jukebox!)
Requirement: the Jukebox must contain audio/ video files.

-- Deleting an entry: select an entry from the

Jukebox media center. Select: right control but-

ton > Delete from jukebox > This entry or En-

tire list.

8V2012721B)

Notin the Playback view.

235

Media

-- The status of the deleting process is shown in the MMI. Jukebox playback stops during the deleting process and starts again automatically once the deletion is complete.
@) Note
Do not import audio/video files when the engine is turned off becausethis will drain the vehicle battery.
@) Tips
-- Tracks from audio CDs cannot be imported to the Jukebox for legal reasons.
-- Files that have already been imported are automatically recognized and cannot be copied to the Jukebox again.
-- It is not possible to play audio/video*files in the CD/DVD* drive while importing them.
-- The Jukebox does not provide an export function due to legal reasons.
-- Files or tracks without additional stored information arelisted as Unknown. Audi recommends adding additional information (such as ID3 tags) to audio files.
-- Reset the Jukebox to the factory default settings when selling your vehicle > page 254.
Bluetooth audio player
Applies to: vehicles with Bluetooth audio player
With the Bluetooth audio player, you can play music wirelessly from your Bluetooth-capable device (such as a cell phone) through the MMI.
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth settings will open on your mobile device during the connection setup. The Bluetooth function and visibility of the MMI > page 256 and mobile device must be switched on. The Bluetooth audio player > page 256 mustbe switched on in the MMI.
-- Connecting a Bluetooth player: press the
[MEDIA] button. Pressthe left control button
until the sources overview is displayed. Select and confirm Bluetooth audio player @) => page 241, fig. 211.

--If necessary, select and confirm Not connected
> Connect Bluetooth audio player. The Bluetooth device search starts. Follow the instructions in the MMI.
-- Select and confirm the desired Bluetooth device from the list. The MMI generates a PIN for the connection.
-- Select and confirm Yes. -- Enter the PIN for connecting on your Bluetooth
device, or if the PIN is already displayed on your Bluetooth device, confirm it on the Bluetooth device. The time allowed for entering the PIN is limited to approximately 30 seconds.
The media is started and operated through the mobile device or the MMI, depending on the device being used.

Gi) Tips
-- Check for any connection requests on your Bluetooth device.
-- Multiple Bluetooth audio players can be
connected to the MMI, but only one mobile
device can be active. -- Bluetooth protocols AVRCP (1.0/1.3/1.4)
and A2DP are supported. -- Note the volume setting on your Bluetooth
device. Audi recommends setting your mobile device to the maximum volume when using it as a Bluetooth audio player. -- The supported media functions (such as shuffle) depend on the Bluetooth device being used. -- For more information on supported devices, visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.

Wi-Fi audio player
Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi audio player

Using the Wi-Fi audio player media source on the

MMI, you can connect and operate your Wi-Fi-ca-

pable media player (such as a smartphone) to

wirelessly play music from your media player li-

brary. The media player is connected through the

vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot. A UPnP Server app or an

integrated UPnP/DLNA server on your media

236

Media

player is required to access your media player Library.
Requirement: the Wi-Fi function on your media player must be switched on. The myAudi app or an UPnP server app is installed on your media player or your media player has an integrated UPnP/DLNA server.
-- Connecting a media player: press the [MEDIA button. Press the left control button until the sources overview > page 241] is displayed. Select and confirm Wi-Fi audio player 7) => page 241, fig. 211.
--If necessary, select and confirm Wi-Fi turned off > Turn on Wi-Fi to activate Wi-Fi in the MMI. Select Wi-Fi settings, if necessary. Select the same settings on the wireless media player that are used for the Wi-Fi hotspot.
-- Starting the Wi-Fi audio player: start the myAudi app or a UPnP server app, or set media permissions on your media player.
Operating the media player: the media player is operated through the MMI.
-- Press the left control button repeatedly until the Folders menu item appears. Select and confirm Folders.
-- Playing music from the media player: select and confirm Media center.
Web radio: see > page 237.
ZA WARNING
-- Asthe driver, do not allow usage of the Wi-
Fi hotspot to distract you from driving, as this could increase the risk of an accident. -- It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile devices and other similar devices when the vehicle is stationary because, like all loose objects, they could be thrown around the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause serious injuries. Store these types of devices securely while driving. -- Do not use any wireless devices on the front seats within range of the airbags while driving. Also read and follow the warnings in => page 280, Front airbags.

C@) Note
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in General information on page 203.
G@) Tips
-- Alwaysread the chapter > page 203, Audi
connect. -- Please note that a Wi-Fi connection does
not automatically makeit possible to use
the Internet. For additional information,
see > page 204. --To avoid interruptions during playback, de-
activate the power saving function on the media player or connect it to a charger. --The loading times for the audio data depend on the media player used and the number of files that it contains. --A maximum of 2,000 entries per directory are displayed in the MMI. -- Songs downloaded for offline use using music streaming services are stored on your mobile device (such as a smartphone) and may be DRM protected. The Wi-Fi audio player will not play DRM protected files. -- Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for additional information on the Wi-Fi audio player.
Online media and Internet radio
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment

Fig. 208 Online media

You can playback and operate various online media services and Internet radio using the MMI.

> Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control

button until the sources overview > fig. 208is

displayed.

8V2012721B)

237

Media

Applies to: online media and Internet radio usage
Requirement: -- The myAudi app mustbe installed and open on
your mobile device. -- You must be logged in to your myAudi account
in the myAudi app and you musthave selected your vehicle. -- The Wi-Fi function on the mobile device and on the MMI must be switched on. -- If necessary, check in the connection manager => page 254 if the mobile device you connected is selected under the MMI connect app (). --The MMI must be connected to the network. -- The symbol for the Online media source (@ is shown in the MMI.
Applies to: online media usage
Additional requirement: -- A supported online media service must be avail-
able in the country where the vehicle is being operated. -- You must have an account with a supported online media service. -- Depending on the online media service, you may need to install and open an app on your mobile device.
Starting Online media
-- Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control button until the sources overview > page 241 is displayed.
-- Select and confirm an online media service.
Starting Internet radio
-- Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control button until the sources overview > page 241 is displayed.
-- Select and confirm Internetradio. The Internet radio browser or the last station that was playing is shown.
-- Selecting the station: if necessary, select and confirm a categoryin the Internet radio Browser > a station.
Online media and Internet radio: additional options
-- Press the right control button.

The following options maybe available, depending on the information shown (such as the station/track that is currently playing):
-- Soundsettings: see > page 257. -- Wi-Fi settings: see > page 208, Wi-Fi settings. -- Connection manager: see > page 254. -- Additional options maybe available, depending
on the active online media service or Internet radio.
ZA WARNING
-- It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile devices and other similar devices when the vehicle is stationary because,like all loose objects, they could be thrown around the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause serious injuries. Store these types of devices securely while driving.
-- Do not use any wireless devices on the front seats within range of the airbags while driving. Also read and follow the warnings in = page 280, Front airbags.
@) Note
-- Alwaysfollow the information found in >® in General information on page 203.
-- There generally are additional costs when using an online media service account, espe cially when it is used internationally.
G) Tips
-- Depending on the Internet connection and
network traffic, the connection may discon-
nected when online media sourcesare playing. -- Online media and Internet radio usage depends on the service availability of the third party provider. -- Audi AG simply makes the access to online media services possible through the MMI and does nottake any responsibility for the contentsof the online media services. -- Alwaysread the chapter > page 203, Audi
connect.
-- Depending on the mobile device being used, there may be interruptions during media playback and when using the myAudi app. >

238

Media

To prevent interruptions when using a mobile device, do not lock the screen on your mobile device and keep the myAudi app in the foreground. -- Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for additional information about online media.
Multimedia connections
USB adapter for Audi music interface
oSoe<0!t2
Fig. 209 Audi Genuine Accessories: USB adapter
You can connect your mobile devices (such as a smartphone or MP3 player) to the Audi music interface and charge them using a special USB adapter.
You can purchase the USB adapter fig. 209 from an authorized Audi dealer or at specialty
stores:
@ USB adapter for devices with a micro USB connection
@ USB adapter for devices with an Apple Lightning connection
@ USB adapter for devices with USB type C connection
@ USB adapter for devices with an Apple Dock
connector
You can connect your mobile devices through the Audi music interface to the MMI using the USB adapter and charge the battery at the same time.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi music interface
-- Audi music interface: see > page 239.
Applies to: vehicles with USB charging portsin the rear
-- USB charging portsin the rear*: see => page 240.

{RAH-9203]

C@) Note
Handle the USB adapter carefully. Do not allow it to be pinched.
Audi music interface
Connect your mobile devices to the Audi music interface in order to operate them through the MMI and charge the battery.
The USB ports and AUX inputs on the Audi music interface are located in the storage compartment under the center armrest and in the front of the center console. The USB portsare labeled with «=, and the AUX inputs with AUX.
USB Input -- Connecting or charging a mobile device using
the USB adapter: connect the matching USB adapter to the Audi music interface USB port
and then connectit to the mobile device, such
as an iPhone. The battery will charge automatically. -- Disconnecting a mobile device from the Audi music interface:: remove the USB adapter from the Audi music interface USB port. -- Disconnecting mobile devices with an Apple Dock connector: remove the Apple Dock connector from the Apple device with the release tabs pressed in @) > page 239,fig. 209.
The media are started and operated through the mobile device or the MMI, depending on the device being used > page 241.
Connecting multiple mobile devices: if a mobile device (such as a smartphone)is connected at the respective USB port on the Audi music interface, then all devices can be used as a playback source.
AUX Input -- Connecting a mobile device to the AUX input:
connect the AUX cable to an AUX input on the Audi music interface and then to the mobile device (such as an MP3 player or smartphone). -- Disconnecting a mobile device from the AUX input: remove the AUX cable from the AUX input on the Audi music interface. -- Operation: select and confirm the External audio player source ©) > page 241, fig. 210.

8V2012721B)

239

Media
Media is started and operated on the mobile device.
ZA\ WARNING
Driving requires your complete and undivided attention. As the driver, you have completeresponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate mobile devices while driving, because this increases the risk of an accident.
@) Note
-- Use a USB extension cable to connectdevices that have an integrated USB connector (such as a USB stick) to prevent damage to your USB device and the Audi music interface.
-- Extremely high or low temperatures that can occur inside vehicles can damage mobile devices and/or impair their performance. Never leave mobile devices in the vehicle in extremely high or low temperatures.
G) Tips
-- Alwaysfollow the information found in => page 62.
-- When you switch the ignition off, the USB portsare still supplied with power until the energy management intervenes.
-- Do notuse an additional adapter or USB extension cable to connect mobile devices to the Audi music interface that already have a cable or that must be connected with a USB adapter (> page 239). Using an additional adapter or US extension cable may impair functionality.
-- You can purchase the AUX connector cable from an authorized Audi dealer or at specialty stores.
-- Audi recommends setting the volume of a mobile device connected to the AUX input to approximately 70% of the maximum volume.

-- Functionality is not guaranteed for mobile devices that do not conform to the USB 2.0 specification.
-- USB hubs are not supported. -- Some versions of the iPod such as the iPod
shuffle cannot be connected to the USB adapter for devices with Apple Dock connector. Connect these devices using a AUX connector cable.
-- Changed content on a mobile device that
is connected to the Audi music interface maynot be displayed in the media center. In this case, reset the Media settings back to Factory settings > page 254. -- Video playback through the Audi music interface is only supported if the connected device is recognized as a USB storage device (for example a USB stick). Apple devices and MTP devices (such as smartphones)are not recognized as USB storage devices. -- iPod or iPhone malfunctions also affect the operation of the MMI. Reset your iPod or iPhone if this happens.
-- For important information on operating
your iPod or iPhone, refer to the user guide for the device. Audi recommends updating the iPod or iPhone softwareto the latest
version.
-- For more information about the Audi music interface and supported devices, check the Audi database for mobile devices at www. audiusa.com/mp3 or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
USB charging portsin the rear
Applies to: vehicles with USB charging portsin the rear
You can charge the battery on your mobile device through a USB charging port.
Two USB charging ports* are located at the back of the center console.
-- USB adapter: refer to > page 239, USB adapter for Audi musicinterface.

1) Applies only to MTP devices. Does not apply to Apple devices and USB massstorage devices.
240

-- Charging a mobile device using the USB adapter: connect your mobile device to a USB charging port using a suitable USB adapter.
-- Disconnecting a mobile device from the charging port: remove the USB adapter from the USB charging port.
-- Disconnecting mobile devices with an Apple Dock connector: remove the Apple Dock connector from the Apple device with the release tabs pressed in.
Z\ WARNING
Driving requires your complete and undivided attention. As the driver, you have complete responsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate your mobile devices while driving, because this increases the risk of an accident.
@) Note
Extremely high or low temperatures that can occur inside vehicles can damage mobile devices and/or impair their performance. Never leave mobile devices in the vehicle in extremely high or low temperatures.
@ Tips
-- Alwaysfollow the information found in => page 62.
--When you switch the ignition off, the USB portsare still supplied with power until the
energy management intervenes.
-- Do notuse any additional USB extension cables or adapters to connect mobile devices to the USB charging port that have already been connected by a USB adapter. Using an additional adapter or US extension cable may impair functionality.
-- USB hubs are not supported. -- Refer to the manufacturer's operating man-
ual for important information regarding the operation of your mobile device. -- Correct function of all mobile devices cannot be guaranteed. -- The vehicle battery drains when mobile devices are turned on butthe engine is off.

Playing media

Media

sro
NTT Tanto almc=S orh_e Axternal audio player
Fig. 210 Diagram: possible sources in the Media menu
Etre Oncts Seen EN
Otte)

Fig. 211 Diagram: possible sources in the Media menu

You can start and operate various media through the MMI control panel.

Requirement: a media source must contain audio/video* files > page 234.
> Press the [MEDIA] button. Pressthe left control
button until the sources overviewis displayed. > Select and confirm the desired source, or press
the [MEDIA] button repeatedly until the desired source is selected.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following sources may be displayed in the Media menu:

@ Jukebox* ..... 2...

235

@ DVD/CD drive*................. 234, 234

@ SDeardreader ................

234

@ Audi music interface* ........... 239

such as an iPhone, USB stick

©® External audio player ...........

239

such as an MP3 player connected to the AUX input

236

@ Wi-Fiaudio player* ............ Online media* and Internet radio* .

236 237>

8V2012721B)

241

Media

-- Playing audio/videofiles: select a source in the Media menu > category (such as artists > album track).
-- Moving onelevel up in the folder structure: press the [BACK] button, or select and confirm Folder up.
-- Selecting the previous/next track/chapter*)): Press the On/Off knob for the MMI control panel briefly to the left KK or to the right Po.
-- Fast-forwarding and rewinding audio/video* files: press and hold the On/Off knob on the MMI control panel to the left Kd or right PHI for a longer time.
-- Pausing or resuming playback: press the On/Off knob on the MMI control panel briefly.
@) Tips
-- You can scroll through long lists quickly by turning the control knob quickly. The scrolling speed depends on the number oflist entries.
-- For safety reasons, the video image is only displayed when the vehicle is stationary. Only the sound from the video plays while driving.

(1)
(4)

7 Artists
`tl thoteT aa
[ale

Fig. 212 Example: USB stick categories

OaTrack Folders
Se aaeytse
Videos
Fig. 213 Example: USBstick categories
Various categories for selecting audio/video* files are available in the media center.
> Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control button until the sources overviewis displayed. Select and confirm the desired source.
Active source
The active source is highlighted. The active source symbol (@) may change depending on the connected device, the online media service*, or Internet radio*. The device name maybe displayed (for example: myPhone). As an example, a USB stick is shown > fig. 212 connected to the Audi music interface*.
Depending on the active source, you can select audio/video files* from the following categories and add them tothe playlist:
@ Favorites
The Favorites category appearsif at least one entry is stored in the favorites list. > page 244.
@ Artists
All available artists are displayed. Select and confirm an artist, an album and then track.
@ Albums
All available albums are displayed. Select and confirm an album and then track.
© Genres
All available genresare displayed. Select and confirm a genre (such as Pop), an artist, an album and then a song.

)) Depending on the DVD, this may not be possible during
playback.
242

© Tracks
All available tracks are displayed. Select and confirm a track.
@ Folders
The folder structure or track/chapter list is displayed. Select a folder, if necessary. Select and confirm a track.
Playlists
All available playlists from the source and the smartplaylists are displayed. Select and confirm a playlist and then a track.
Smartplaylists:
-- Last played tracks: the last tracks played in the selected source are displayed.
-- Most played: the mostplayed tracksin the selected source are displayed.
-- 5 stars to 1 star: tracks from the selected source are displayed according to their rating.
-- Unrated: all files from the selected source without rating information (for example, in the ID3 tag) are displayed.
© Videos*
All available video files are displayed. Select and confirm a video file.
@) Tips
-- Only the categories supported by the medium are available. For example, CD/DVDROM tracks cannotbe selected with categories such as Artists, Albums or Genres. With an iPod/iPhone (source: Audi music interface* > page 239), the Podcasts, Audio books and Composers categories are also available.
-- For safety reasons, the video image is only displayed when the vehicle is stationary. Only the sound from the video plays while driving.
--When synchronizing a portable device with "Cloud"services, playlists may display incorrectly in the MMI. Use the media center in the device.

aR)
Applies to: vehicles with free text search

Oxree Rock Band

Rock Band

©-

Rock Band

Media

Fig. 214 Input field and resultslist for free text search
You can search in the active source by tracks and video files*, for example
You can open the free text search depending on the selected source.
Requirement: the playlist > page 244 or media center > page 242 mustbe displayed.
Opening free text search
> Keep turning the control knob tothe left until the free text search input field @ appears,or push the control knob up.
Using the free text search: see > page 173, Free text search.
Entries that contain the entered search term are listed in the results list G). You can search for ar-
tists @, albums (8) or tracks @) as well as genres
and videos.
@) Tips
-- Only files in the active source will be searched.
-- If you open free text search in the Folders category (7) > page 242,fig. 213 or the Composers, Podcasts and Audio bookscategories, it will only search through the files in that folder.

8V2012721B)

243

Media
Ets
Hymn
as
) The big B 2 Rock E
Sola kB

and confirm the location of the selected favorite. -- Deleting a favorite: select a favorite from the list > right control button > Delete favorite > Delete this favorite or Deleteall favorites.
Additional settings

Fig. 215 Example: playlist
The track,artist, album and album cover,if applicable, will appear in the playlist > fig. 215.
Options menu
See > page 244, Additional settings.
iz Wol atest)
Up to 50 entries for every media source can be stored in any order in the favorites list.
Requirement: the playlist or media center must be open. -- Select the desired entry from the playlist or
media center. -- Select: right control button > Store as favorite,
or press and hold the control knob for several seconds.
When you storea track as a favorite, the associated album will appear in the favorites list as an
entry.
Requirement: at least one entry must be stored in the favorites list.
Displaying the favoriteslist: press the [MEDIA button. Press the left control button until the sources overview > page 24] is displayed. Select the source that contains the categories => page 242 (for example, SD card). Select the Favorites category.
Requirement: the favorites list must be displayed. -- Listening to a favorite: select and confirm a fa-
vorite from the list. -- Movefavorite: select a favorite from the list >
right control button > Movefavorite. Select

Context-specific functions and settings are available depending on the selected source.
> Press the right control button.
Sound settings
See > page 257.
Input level
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the AUX connection cable or to a USB adapter = page 239, Multimedia connections.
The volume of the mobile device is adapted to the MMI. Audi recommends adjusting the volume on the mobile device to 70% of the maximum volume output.
Bluetooth settings
See > page 256.
Wi-Fi settings*
See > page 208, Wi-Fi settings.
Connection manager
See > page 254.
Show "NowPlaying"screen
With the function switched on ¥ and playlist open, various information about the current track (such as artist, album and album cover*) as well as the playing time and the remaining playing time are displayed.
Jukebox memory capacity*
Information on the Jukebox memory capacity and the number ofstored tracks in the Jukeboxis displayed.

244

Rewind/Fast forward
Turn the control knob tothe left or right, or move
your finger on the MMI touch control pad* from the left to the right.
Shuffle)
With the function switched on,all files in the
playlist are played and shown in random order.
Repeattrack!)
When the function is switched on ¥,the current track repeats.
Back to 'Playback'
The options menu is closed. The track currently playing appearsin the playlist.
Play similar music*
The track currently playing is quickly analyzed for
features such as artist, genres, mood, and beat,
and a smartplaylist with similar tracks will be shown.
Play more...
A smartplaylist is shown based on the track currently playing. You can select between a playlist
with moretracks bythis artist, from this album
or of this genre.
Copy to jukebox*
See > page 235, Addingfiles to the Jukebox.
Set as ringtone*
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI. The track currently playing must be in the Jukebox* > page 235.
The selected track will be used as the ringtone for incoming calls.
Gracenote online database*
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet.

Media
Depending on availability, various information will load about the track currently playing when this function is switched onTM.
Favorites
See > page 244.
Additional options
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and a video file* or a DVD* mustbe playing.
Parental control*
Playback of video DVDs can be restricted using parental control.
Enter the password for parental control. Passwordsetat the factory: 1234. You have the following options:
-- Protection level: select and confirm the protection level (for example, Level 5). Eight different protection levels can be set for parental control. If you set the parental control level at Level 5, all DVDs from levels 1-5 can be played. Video DVDs with a higher level will not play. Select Unrestricted to remove all of the restrictions.
-- Change password: edit the current password.
Switch to full screen
The video image is displayed. Turn the control knob to display the playlist, or press the [BACK button.
Replay video!)
Whenthis function is switched on @, the current
video will replay.
Show DVD menu
The DVD main menu opens in the Infotainment system display.

8V2012721B)

) The function automatically switches off when the sourceis changed.
2) This function is notavailable for all cell phones.

245

Media

-- Selecting a menu item: select and confirm a menu item, or moveyour finger on the MMI touch control pad* and press the control knob.
Audio track)
You can manually set the audio track (language and audio format). The language and audio format options depend on the video DVD.

Subtitles»)
You can manuallyselect subtitles for playback. The languages available depend on the DVD.

Aspect
Audi recommends the Automatic setting for the picture format. You can set the picture format depending on the activefile or source (for example video file*, DVD*).

Aspect ra-
tio
Automatic
Zoom
Cinemascope

Description
|The MMI detects the picture formatof the source and displays the image in the optimum ratio. Black bars may appear on the sides of the display, depending on the source format and the Infotainment system display that is installed.
The image is enlarged tofill the entire Infotainment system display. Switch the function off if the image is distorted.
Use this setting for films in cinema format 21:9. Black bars are shown in the upper and lower edges of the Infotainment system display.

Aspectratio Original
4:3
16:9

Description
The image is displayed in the ratio of the source format. Select this option if the image is distorted or a section of the image is cut off when Autois selected.
The image is set to the 4:3 picture format. Black bars are shown on the sides of the Infotainment system display.
The image is set to the 16:9 picture format. Black bars are shown in the upper and lower edgesof the Infotainment system display.

@) Tips
-- Notall video DVDs have parental control. -- The protection levels for the Parental con-
trol are based on the US standards from the Motion Picture Association of America (MPAA). Note that the age levels for video DVDsin European countries maydiffer. -- Password entry for Parental control will be locked for approximately one minute if you enter the incorrect password three timesin a row. The passwordcan only be reset by an authorized Audi dealer.

Supported media and file formats

OTe TN]

The following audio/video file properties are supported by the DVD drive*, the Jukebox", the SD

card reader and the USB storage device* connection:

)) Depending on the DVD, this may not be possible during
playback.
246

Media

Supported media
File system
Metadata
Format
File extension
Playlists Characteristics Number
of files

Audio files

Video files*

SD/SDHC/SDXC/MMC memorycards: with a capacity of up to 128 GB DVD drive: audio CDs (up to 80 min) with CD text(artist, album, song)*, CD-ROMs with
a capacity of up to 700 MB; DVD+R/RW;DVD video; DVD audio with audio tracks that
are compatible with a DVD video player; Audi music interface*: mobile devices (such as an iPod > page 239, MTP player, USB storage device in "USB Device Subclass 1 and 6" that conforms to USB 2.0: USB sticks, USB MP3 players (Plug-and-Play-capable), external USB flash drives and hard drives

Memorycards: exFAT, FAT, FAT32, NTFS
USB storage devices: FAT, FAT32, NTFS USB storage device partitions (primary/logical*): 2 per USB connection
CD/DVDfile systems: ISO9660, Joliet, UDF

Album cover: GIF, JPG, PNG with max. 800x800 px. The album cover from the medium or from Gracenote* is displayed, depending on availability.

MPEG
1/2 Layer3

Windows
Media |Audio9
and 10

MPEG
2/4

FLAC

MPEG 1/2

|MPEG4 AVC Windows Media

(H.264)

Video 9

.mp3

.wma

.m4a

flac

.m4b

.aac

-Mpg; -mpeg

-mp4 .m4v «Mov
-avi

.wmv .asf

-M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX

up to maximum 320 kbit/s and 48 kHz 48 kHz sampling frequencies |sampling
frequen-

up to maximum 2,000 kbit/s and 720x576 px. at maximum 25 fps

vy
DVD drive*: maximum 1,000 files per medium
Jukebox*: approximately 10 GB memory capacity; maximum 3,000 files can be imported
USB storage device and memory cards: maximum 10,000 files per medium; maximum 1,000 files per playlist/directory

@) Tips
-- The media drives do not support the Windows Media Audio 9 Voice format.
-- For compressing MP3 files, Audi recommends a bit rate of at least 160 kbit/s. The display showing the remaining play time maydiffer for audio files with variablebit
rate.
-- Special characters (such as those in ID3 tag information) maydisplay differently or may

not always display, depending on the system language. -- The manufacturer of the storage device can provide information about its "USB Device Subclass". -- Some MTP player functions are not support-
ed, such as rating music tracks and video
playback.

8V2012721B)

247

Applies to: vehicles with a CD drive

The following audio file properties are supported by the CD drive:

Audio files

Supported media

Audio CDs (up to 80 min) with CD text(artist, album, track)*, CD-ROMs with a capacity of up to 700 MB

File system

CD file system: ISO9660, Joliet, UDF

Metadata

Album cover: GIF, JPG, PNG with max. 800x800 px. The album cover from the medi-
um may be displayed, depending on availability.

Format

MPEG 1/2
Layer 3

Windows Media Au- MPEG 2/4
dio 9 and 10

FLAC

File extension |.mp3

-wma

-m4a

flac

-m4b

aac

Playlists

-M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX

Characteristics up to maximum 320 kbit/s and 48 kHz sampling frequencies /48 kHz sampling frequency

Number of files

Maximum 1,000 files per medium

@ Tips
-- For compressing MP3 files, Audi recommends a bit rate of at least 160 kbit/s. The display showing the remaining play time maydiffer for audio files with variable bit
rate.

-- Special characters (such as those in ID3 tag information) may display differently or may
not always display, depending on the system language.

Troubleshooting

Problem Audi music interface/Bluetooth audio player*: mobile deviceis not supported.
Audi music interface: the volume is too high/too low when starting playback through the AUX input.
Audi music interface: the mobile device is not recognized as a source.

Solution
Read the instructions in the chapter > page 239, Multimedia connections/> page 236, Bluetooth audio player. You can learn about supported mobile devices in the Audi database for mobile devices at www.audiusa.com/bluetooth. Adjust the volume of the mobile device to approximately 70% of the maximum output > page 244, Input level.
For manycell phones or mobile devices, playback is not possible when the battery Level is too low (less than 5% ofits capacity). The mobile device will only be recognized as a source in the MMI after connecting if the battery charge is sufficient.

248

Media

Problem

Solution

Audi music interface: malfunc-
tions during audio playback through an iPod/iPhone.

The Bluetooth audio player function is switched on. Switch this
function off > page 256 when you are not using the Bluetooth audio player.

Audi music interface: Changed content ona mobile device ®that is connected to the Audi music interface is not displayed in the media center.

Reset the Media settings to the factory default settings => page 254.

AUX input: there is static when
connecting and disconnecting the AUX connection cable.

When connecting and disconnecting, the External audio player source is already selected. Before connecting or disconnecting the mobile device, either mute the device (see > page 257) or switch to a different audio source (for example > page 228, Opening the radio).

Bluetooth audio player*/Wi-Fi
audio player*: audio playback interference.

Only one interface should be actively used at a time to ensure problem-free playback.

Wi-Fi audio player*: audio playback interference.

Audio playback interference can occur on some cell phones if the Internet connection in the vehicle was not established through the SIM card reader on the MMI control panel and the mobile da-
ta option on the cell phone is switched on. Deactivate the mobile data option on your cell phone.

Jukebox*: tracks on the imported When importing playlists, all of the files themselves must be im-

playlist are grayed out.

ported.

Jukebox*: imported tracks cannot If you cannotfind imported tracks in the media center, they may

be played or found.

not be supported. Only copy supported files > page 246 to the

Jukebox.

Wi-Fi audio player*: multiple de- Close the myAudi app on the connected devices (such as smart-

vices are connected to the Wi-Fi phones)that are not being used as the Wi-Fi audio player*. Like-

hotspot. A media player (such as a wise, close the UPnP server apps or the media permissions on the

smartphone) appears as the

integrated UPnP/DLNA server. Connect the desired device as a Wi-

source and cannot be changed. Fi audio player* > page 236.

Online media*: connection failed To establish a connection to the MMI, the MMI connection switch between the MMI and the myAudi must be switched on in the myAudi app status screen.

app.

Bluetooth audio player*: interfer- Playback interference can occur when using the Bluetooth audio

ence with track display and audio player if a music player app from a third party provider is open.

playback.

Audi recommends using the integrated media player on your Blue-

tooth device (such as a smartphone).

8V2012721B)

249

Media

Wi-Fi hotspot*: your Wi-Fi device is disconnected from the Wi-Fi hotspot.
Audi music interface: audio playback through the connected mobile device is not possible.

|Make sure the network optimization functions are switched off in the Wi-Fi settings or in the network settings for your Wi-Fi device. For additional information refer to the user guide for your Wi-Fi device.
Make sure the USB mode MTPis selected in the settings on your mobile device.

@) Applies only to MTP devices. Does notapply to Apple devices and USB massstorage devices.

250

8V2012721B)

Audi smartphone interface
Setup
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
You can connect your smartphone to the MMIusing the Audi smartphone interface. Certain content on your smartphone is adapted to the Infotainment system display while driving and can be operated through the MMIcontrol panel.
Requirement
The vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on.
An iPhone generation 5 or newer with Lightning connector and iOS 7.1.2 operating system or higher is required. Or:
A smartphone with the Android Auto app and Android 5.0 Lollipop operating system or higher is required.
> Connect your smartphone to the Audi music interface > page 239 using the applicable USB adapter > page 239, fig. 209.
> Select and confirm Activate Apple CarPlay or Activate Android Auto now.
> Follow the system instructions. > Pay attention to any additional system prompts
on your smartphone, if applicable.
If you chose not to use Apple CarPlay or Android Auto when connecting your smartphone for the first time, you can start the Audi smartphone interface later on using the Connection manager. > Select: [MENU] button > Audi smartphonein-
terface > Change to connection manager. > Connect your smartphone to the Audi music in-
terface using the appropriate USB adapter => page 239, fig. 209. > Select and confirm Audi smartphone interface in the Connection manager > page 254. You can select your smartphone in the list of devices that are already paired > page 256. > Follow the system instructions.
ZA WARNING
Driving requires your complete and undivided attention. As the driver, you have completere-

Audi smartphone interface
sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate
mobile devices while driving, because this increases the risk of an accident.
@) Note
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in General information on page 203.
G) Tips
-- The functions that can be used depend on the following factors, among others: --The brand of your smartphone --The version of the operating system in your smartphone -- The softwareversion of the app used -- The USB adapter cable and correct connection -- Your cell phone service provider -- The customized settings on your smartphone
-- One of the factors above or a combination of any of them could cause your smartphone to be incompatible with the Audi smartphone interface. Compatibility cannot be guaranteed for all types of smartphones.
For more information and assistance, refer
to the user guide and the manufacturer of your smartphone. -- If the connected smartphone has voice con-
trol, you can operate your smartphone using
the external voice recognition system => page 186. -- The menu language shown in the MMI is based on the settings in your smartphone. -- The time displayed in the MMI is based on the settings in your smartphone. -- Some MMI functions are not available when Apple CarPlay or Android Autois active. -- You cannot connect any mobile devices via Bluetooth when an Apple CarPlay connection is active. -- When the Apple CarPlay connection is active, Tag this song for iTunes* is not available > page 229.
251

Audi smartphone interface

Operating
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
Opening a menu
Apple CarPlay: you can go back to the Apple Car-
Play main menu regardless of the selected menu
item by pressing and holding the [BACK] button.

Android Auto: to go back to the Android Auto
menu bar, push the control knob down.
Opening a menu item Select and confirm a menu item using the MMI
control panel.

Troubleshooting
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface

Problem Audi smartphone interface cannot be opened.
Connecting the smartphone to the MMI failed.
The smartphone is not automatically detected.

Solution
Check the battery charge level on your smartphone. Check the USB cable and use a different one if necessary. Check if Android Auto or Apple CarPlayis available in the country wherethe vehicle is being operated.
Android Auto: check if the Android Auto app is installed on your smartphone.
Makesure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface => page 239.
Apple CarPlay: check if Apple CarPlay is activated on your smartphone.
Android Auto: check in the Android Auto app if Android Auto permits new vehicles.
Makesure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface => page 239. Check if the requirements needed to connect a smartphone have been met.

252

System settings Setting the date and time
You can set the clock time manually or using the GPS*,
> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > MMI settings > Date & time.
> Or: select: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings > Date & time.
Automatic setting
When this function is switched on ¥, the time
and date are automatically set.
Time
Requirement: the Automatic setting must be switched off.
Press the control knob. You can set the Time manually by turning and pressing the control knob.
Date
Requirement: the Automatic setting must be switched off.
Press the control knob. You can set the Date manually by turning and pressing the control knob.
Time zone
When selecting the appropriate time zone, a sampling of countries in this zone will be listed.
Automatic time zone*
When this function is switched on @, the time
will automatically adjust to the corresponding
time zone.
Automatic daylight saving time*
When this function is switched on M, the time
will automatically switch to daylight saving time.

System settings
Time format
If you select 24h, the clock will display, for example, 13:00. If you select AM/PM, the clock will display, for example, 1:00 PM.
Date format
If you select DD.MM.YYYY,the date display will show,for example, 31.08.2017. If you select
MM/DD/YYVY,the date display will show,for ex-
ample, 08/31/2017. If you select YYYY-MM-DD, the date display will show, for example, 2017-08-31.
MMI settings
> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > MMI settings.
Language
You can change the display language as well as the language for the voice guidance* and voice recognition system"*.
The number of languages available depends on the market.
Measurement units
The following measurement units can be set depending on availability: Speed, Distance, Tem-
perature, Fuel consumption, Volume, Pressure.
Mobile device reminder signal
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box
Requirement: your cell phone must be Qi-capable ) or connected to the Audi music interface @ with a USB adapter cable > page 191, fig. 179.
When the device reminder signal is switched on, you will be notified that your mobile deviceis still in the Audi phone box* when you leave the vehicle. You can select between Spoken cue, Signal tone and Off.
Mobile device reminder signal volume: you can adjust the reminder signal volume by turning the control knob.

8V2012721B)

D_ The Qi standard makes it possible to charge your mobile device wirelessly.

253

System settings

Switch off pop-up: when the function is switched on [¥,the messages in the Infotainment system display regarding the charging status of your cell phone in the Audi phone box* are hidden. The reminder not to forget your cell phone when leaving the vehicle is also switchedoff.
Tool tips
When this function is switched on M, your MMI showsyou tips for input. The frequency of how
often it displays decreases with time.
Speech dialog system
Appliesto: vehicles with voice recognition system
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following functions maybe available:
Command display: when this function is switched on M, the MMI will show you the possible commands for voice input in the respective menu.
Short dialog: when this function is switched on
, a shorter form of the promptsis used.
Command during voice output*: this function is switched on at the factory. When this function is switched on [M, you can say new commands during announcements. You do not need towait for the signal tone (beep) during an announcement.
When the function is switched off (J, you need to
wait for the signal tone (beep) to say a new command.
Volume: you can adjust the volume of the promptsby turning the control knob.
Individual speech training (only when the vehicle is stationary): you can adapt the voice recognition system to your voice or pronunciation in order to improve the system's ability to recognize your speech. Individual speech training is comprised of 20 speech entries that consist of commands and sequences of numbers. You can delete the programmed voice training with the Reset individual speech training function.
Display brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the Infotainment system display by turning the control knob.

Factory settings
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following functions can be resetto factory settings:
-- Soundsettings -- Radio -- Media settings
-- Jukebox* -- Directory
-- Telephone -- Bluetooth and Wi-Fi* -- Navigation settings* -- Navigation and online memory* -- Speech dialog system* -- Message settings* -- Apps* -- Tool tips -- Audi connect* -- Audi smartphone interface*
You can select the desired functions individually or all at once with the option Selectall entries. Select and confirm Restore factory settings.
@) Tips
-- Makesure that not only the settings were deleted but also the stored data, if necessary.
-- Please note that the voice recognition system* is not available in Cabriolets.
Connection manager
Introduction
The connection managerprovides an overview of your connected devices and their network status.
> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > MMI settings > Connection manager.
> Select and confirm a menu item.
If a mobile device was already connected and you select and confirm the corresponding menu item, the device name and connection status are displayed under the menu item.
You can individually Connect ()or Disconnect (L) a paired device.

254

System settings

Requirement:
-- The vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on.
-- The Bluetooth settings will open on your mobile device during the connection setup.
-- The Bluetooth function and visibility of the MMI => page 256 and mobile device must be switched on.
-- The mobile device to be connected must not be connected to any other Bluetooth device.
aatutleva darelit
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
-- Connect new device: search for and connect a cell phone.
-- List of devices already paired: select your cell phone from the list of all the devices that are already paired.
Yelle ave aCe
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
-- Connect new device: search for and connect a cell phone.
-- List of devices already paired: select your cell phone from the list of all the devices that are already paired.
PEL Meolaa-la aol)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
-- The data connection is made using the embedded SIM card )) > page 204. You do not need to adjust any additional settings.
@) Note Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in General information on page 203.
myAudi app
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
Requirement: the myAudi app mustbe installed and open on your mobile device.

-- Connect new device: search for and connect a mobile device (such as a smartphone).
-- List of devices already paired: select your mobile device from the list of all the devices that are already paired.
Audio player
Applies to: vehicles with Bluetooth or Wi-Fi audio player
Bluetooth player* Requirement: the Bluetooth function and visibility must be switched on in the MMI > page 256 and on the Bluetooth audio player.
-- Connect new device: press the control knob. Select Bluetooth audio player. Search for and connect a mobile device.
-- List of devices already paired: select a Bluetooth device from the list of all the devices that are already paired.
Wi-Fi audio player*
Requirement: the Wi-Fi hotspot* on the MMI = page 208 and on your Wi-Fi audio player must be switched on.
-- Connect new device: press the control knob. Search for and connect a Wi-Fi capable device.
-- Disconnect Wi-Fi audio player: deactivate the Wi-Fi on your Wi-Fi capable device. The device will be automatically removed from the list.
@) Note
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in General information on page 203.
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Display contacts from a cell phone (or an additional cell phone).
Requirement: no cell phones can be connected to the MMI using the Handsfreeprofile.
-- Connect new device: search for and connect a new cell phone.

8V2012721B)

2) SIM card installed in the vehicle at the factory.

255

System settings
-- List of devices already paired: select your cell phone from the list of all the cell phones that are already paired.
Audi smartphone interface
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
-- Connect your cell phone to the Audi music interface > page 239 using a USB adapter
> page 239,fig. 209.
-- Select your cell phone from the list of cell phones that have already been connected.
Pele aCe] Mey Latour
Depending on the selected function, you can use the right control button to access the available additional options in the connection manager.
Delete Bluetooth device*
The selected cell phone/mobile device is disconnected from the MMI and is removed from the list of all devices that are already paired.
Show Bluetoothprofiles*
You can Connector Disconnect the Handsfree,
Messages', Directory/contacts and Bluetooth audio player profiles separately.
Bluetooth settings*
-- Bluetooth: select and confirm a setting for the Bluetooth connection visibility. Select Visible for the MMI to be visible to other devices. Select Invisible for the MMI to not be visible to other devices. However,it is still possible to establish a Bluetooth connection with paired devices when the visibility is switched off. Select Off to turn visibility off. Then a Bluetooth connection is not possible.
-- Bluetooth audio player: when this function is switched on , the Bluetooth audio player is available as a source in the Media menu.
-- Bluetooth name: the MMI Bluetooth name (for example "AUDI MMI") is displayed and can be changed.
Online settings*
-- Data usage counter: the amount of data packets that are sent and received through the MMI

is displayed. You can reset the data usage information to zero using the Reset data counter option. -- Network status: the mobile network provider for data service as well as the network status are displayed.
Wi-Fi settings*
See > page 208, Wi-Fi settings.
Storing as a default telephone
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI > page 188.
When the mobile device is in range and the Bluetooth function on the mobile device and in the MMLis switched on, this mobile device will be given priority over the other Bluetooth devices and will be connected directly to the MMI. The connected mobile device is displayed first in the device list.
Network settings*
-- Login: you can chose an Automatic login to your cell phone service provider's network, or you can choose a Manual login from the list of available networks.
-- Network selection: available networks in the present location can be selected under network selection. This function is only available for the Manual login setting.
Apple CarPlay sound settings/Android Auto sound settings
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
See > page 257.
AboutApple CarPlay/About Android Auto
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
Here you will find legal information regarding the use of Apple CarPlay or Android Auto and information about device-specific data exchange.
Delete Apple CarPlay device/Delete Android Auto device
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
Requirement: your cell phone must not be connected to the Audi music interface with a USB adapter.

256

System settings

Select: Audi smartphone > a device from the list > right control button.
To remove your mobile device from the list, select and confirm Delete Apple CarPlay device or Delete Android Auto device.
System update
> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > System maintenance.
-- System update: insert the storage device with the update data into the appropriate drive => page 234. Select and confirm the drive > Start update. The length of the process depends on the size of the update.
-- Resetdriver installation: the selected media driver package is reset to the settings at the time ofdelivery.
-- Version information: information on the MMI software version and the navigation database* software version is displayed. The Softwareinformation function also provides information on the software contained in the MMI and the licensing agreement.
Sound settings
The sounddistribution and volume of the MMI can be adjustedindividually. The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.

the time. This allows you to adjust the sound settings for each audio source separately.
Balance/fader (Sound focus)
-- Adjusting the sound distribution to the left or right: press the control knob. Turn the control knob to the left or right to the desired position.
-- Adjusting the sound distribution to the front or rear: press the control knob again. Turn the control knob tothe left or right to the desired
Position.
-- Adjusting the sound distribution using the MMI touch*: move your finger on the MMI touch control panel* in the desired direction.
Sound effects
Select and confirm a Focus setting: -- All: all speakers in the vehicle are active (sym-
metrical sound distribution). -- Front: only the speakersin the front of the ve-
hicle are active. -- Rear*: only the speakers in the rear of the vehi-
cle are active.
Surround level
Turn the control knob to adjust the surround sound level.
Subwoofer
Turn the control knob to adjust the subwoofer.
Speed dependent volume control*
Turn the control knob to adjust the playback volume to the noise inside the vehicle.

Fig. 216 Adjusting the balance/fader
> Select: [MENU] button > Sound > left control button > Entertainment.
Treble/Bass You can adjust the Treble and Basssettings by turning the control knob. The changed settings only apply for the audio sourcethatis active at

Volume settings
Adjusting the volume
The volume of an audio source or a system message (for example, from the voice recognition system*) can be adjusteddirectly while the sound is playing using the On/Off knob.
-- Increasing or decreasing the volume: turn the On/Off knob (@) > page 165,fig. 160 to the right or left.

8V2012721B)

257

System settings

-- Muting or pausing: press the On/Off knob briefly. Or: turn the On/Off knob tothe left until the symbol @) > page 174 appears. An active audio/video source is stopped.
--Unmuting or resuming: press the On/Off knob briefly. Or: turn the On/Off knob to the right.
ZA WARNING
To reducethe risk of an accident, adjust the volume of the audio system so that audible signals from outside the vehicle, such as police and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all times.
G) Tips
Volume that is too high or too low is automatically adjusted to a set level when the MMI is switched on.
Adjusting the system volume
> Select: [MENU] button > Sound > left control button.
Telephone
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Mute telephone: messages and ringtonesare set
to mute.
Ringtone: see > page 200, Ringtone and volume settings.
Ringtone volume: you can adjust the volume of the selected ringtone by turning the control knob.
Message volume: you can adjust the volume of the notification for an incoming text message by turning the control knob.
Microphoneinputlevel: you can adjust the call volume during a phone call by turning the control knob.
Navigation
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Voice guidance: see > page 220.
Voice guidance during phone call: see => page 220.

Voice guidance volume: you can adjust the voice guidance volume by turning the control knob. Or: you can adjust the voice guidance volume during active route guidance by turning the On/Off knob.
Entertainment fader: the volume of audio playback can be temporarily lowered when the parking system or voice guidance is active.
Voice recognition system
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system
Command display: see > page 254.
Short dialog: see > page 254.
Speech dialog system volume: see > page 254.
Individual speech training: see > page 254.
Parking aid*
You can adjust the volume ofthe signal tone by turning the control knob.
-- Adjusting the Front volume: select and con-
firm High, Medium or Low.
-- Adjusting the Rear volume: select and confirm High, Medium or Low.
MMI touch*
Turn the control knob to adjust the volume of the spoken prompts from the MMI touch*.
Restarting the MMI
ew

Fig. 217 Button combination to restart the system
> Briefly press the control knob and both buttons at the same time to immediately open the menu upward > fig. 217.

RAH-8611

258

Software license information
Information on MMI softwareand licensing
agreements
-- Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > System maintenance > Version infor-
mation. -- Or: online at www.audiusa.com/softwareinfo.
Information on instrument cluster software and licensing agreements
Press the reset button twice within five seconds
after switching the ignition on Y.

System settings

8V2012721B)

) Notavailablein all vehicles.

259

Driving safety
Driving safety
Basics
Safe driving habits
Please remember- safetyfirst!
The individual safety features of your vehicle can work together as a system to help protect you and your passengersin a wide range ofaccidents. These features cannot work as a system if they are not always correctly adjusted and correctly used.
This chapter contains important information, tips, instructions and warnings that you need to read and observe for your own safety, the safety of your passengers and others. We have summarized here what you need to know about safety belts, airbags, child restraints as well as child safety. Your safety is for us priority number1. Always observethe information and warnings in this section - for your own safety as well as that of your passengers.
The information in this section applies to all model versions of your vehicle. Some ofthe features described in this sections may be standard equipment on some models, or maybe optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized Audi dealer.
ZXWARNING
-- Always makesure that you followthe instructions and heed the WARNINGS in this Manual. It is in your interest and in the interest of your passengers.
-- Always keep the complete Owner's Literature in your Audi when you lend or sell your vehicle so that this important information will always be available to the driver and
passengers. -- Always keep the Owner's literature handy so
that you can find it easily if you have questions.

Important things to do before driving
Safety is everybody's job! Vehicle and occupant safety always depends on the informed and careful driver.
For your safety and the safety of your passengers, before driving always:
> Make surethat all lights and signals are operating correctly.
> Makesure that the tire pressure is correct. > Makesure that all windowsare clean and afford
good visibility to the outside. > Secureall luggage and other items carefully
=> page 63, > page 63. > Make sure that nothing can interfere with the
pedals.
> Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors
correctly for your height. > Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-
straints according to their height. > Make sureto use the right child restraint cor-
rectly to protect children > page 301, Child safety. > Sit properly in your seat and makesure that your passengers do the same > page 58, Front seats. > Fasten your safety belt and wear it properly. Also instruct your passengersto fasten their safety belts properly > page 268.
What impairs driving safety?
Safe driving is directly related to the condition of
the vehicle, the driver as well as the driver's abili-
ty to concentrate on the road without being distracted.
The driver is responsible for the safety of the vehicle and all of its occupants. If your ability to drive is impaired, safety risks for everybody in the vehicle increase and you also become a hazard to everyone else on the road > /\. Therefore:
> Do not let yourself be distracted by passengers or by using a cellular telephone.
> NEVER drive when your driving ability is impaired (by medications, alcohol, drugs, etc.).
> Observeall traffic laws, rules of the road and speed limits and plain common sense.

260

Driving safety

> ALWAYSadjust your speed to road, traffic and weather conditions.
> Take frequent breaks on long trips. Do not drive for more than two hoursat a stretch.
> Do NOTdrive when you are tired, under pressure or when you are stressed.
Z\ WARNING
Impaired driving safety increases the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used.
Correct passenger seating positions
Proper seating position for the driver The properdriver seating position is important for safe, relaxed driving.
Fig. 218 Correct seating position
For your ownsafety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend that you adjust the driver's seat to the following position: > Adjust the driver's seat so that you can easily
push the pedalsall the wayto the floor while keeping your knee(s) slightly bent > A\. > Adjust the angle of the seatback so that it is in an upright position so that your back comes in full contact with it when you drive. > Adjust the steering wheel so that thereis a distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the steering wheel and your breast bone fig. 218. If not possible, see your authorized Audi dealership about adaptive equipment.

B4G-0375

> Adjust the steering wheel so that the steering wheel and airbag cover points at your chest and not at your face.
> Grasp the top of the steering wheel with your elbow(s) slightly bent.
> For adjustable head restraints: Adjust the head
restraint so the upper edge is as even as possi-
ble with the top of your head. If that is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to this position as possible. Move the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of the head as possible. » Fasten and wear safetybelts correctly => page 271. > Always keep both feetin the footwell so that you are in control of the vehicle at all times.
For detailed information on how to adjust the driver's seat, see > page 58.
ZA WARNING
Drivers who are unbelted, out of position or
too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it unfolds. To help reduce the risk of serious personal injury: -- Always adjust the driver's seat and the
steering wheel so that there are at least 10 inches (25 cm) between your breastbone and the steering wheel. -- Alwaysadjustthe driver's seat and the steering wheel so that there are at least 4 inches (10 cm) between the knees and the lower part of the instrument panel. -- Alwayshold the steering wheel on the outside of the steering wheel rim with your hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to help reduce the risk of personal injuryif the driver's airbag inflates. -- Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position or with your hands at other positions inside the steering wheel rim or on the steering wheel hub. Holding the steering wheel the wrong way can cause
serious injuries to the hands, arms and head
if the driver's airbag inflates.

8V2012721B)

261

Driving safety
-- Pointing the steering wheel toward your face decreases the ability of the supplemental driver's airbag to protect you in a collision.
-- Alwayssit in an upright position and never lean against or place any part of your body too close to the area wherethe airbags are located.
-- Before driving, always adjust the front seats properly and makesure that all passengers are properly restrained.
-- For adjustable head restraints: before driving, always also adjust the head restraints properly.
-- Never adjust the seats while the vehicleis moving. Your seat may move unexpectedly and you could lose control of the vehicle.
-- Never drive with the backrest reclined or tilted far back! The farther the backrests are tilted back, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the safety belt and improper seating position.
-- Children must alwaysride in child seats => page 301. Special precautions apply when installing a child seat on the front passenger seat > page 276.
Proper seating position for the front passenger
The proper front passenger seating position is important for safe, relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend that you adjust the seat for the front passenger to the following position:
> Adjust the angle of the seatback so that it is in an upright position and your back comes in full contact with it whenever the vehicle is moving.
> For adjustable head restraints: adjust the head restraint so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head. If that is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint so thatit is as close to this position as possible => page 60. Move the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of the head as possible.

> Keep bothfeet flat on the floor in front of the
front passenger seat.
> Fasten and wear safety belts correctly => page 271.
For detailed information on how to adjust the front passenger's seat, see > page 58.
ZA\ WARNING
Front seat passengers who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured or killed by the airbag as it unfolds. To help reduce the risk of serious personal injury:
-- Passengers mustalways sit in an upright position and never lean against or place any part of their body too close to the area wherethe airbags are located.
-- Passengers who are unbelted, out ofposition or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it unfolds with great force in the blink of an eye.
-- Always makesure that there are at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the front passenger`s breastbone and the instrument panel.
-- Always makesure that thereare at least 4 inches (10 cm) between the front passenger`s knees and the lower part of the instrument panel.
-- Each passenger mustalwayssit on a seat of their own and properly fasten and wear the safety belt belonging to that seat.
-- Before driving, always adjust the front pas-
senger seat properly.
-- For adjustable head restraints: before driving, always also adjust the head restraints
properly.
-- Alwayskeep your feet on the floor in front of
the seat. Never rest them on the seat,in-
strument panel, out of the window,etc. The airbag system and safety belt will not be able to protect you properly and can even increase the risk of injury in a crash. -- Never drive with the backrest reclined or tilted far back! The farther the backrests are tilted back, the greater the risk of injury due

262

Driving safety

8V2012721B) B4G-0454

to incorrect positioning ofthe safety belt and improper seating position. -- Children must alwaysride in child seats = page 301. Special precautions apply when installing a child seat on the front passenger seat > page 276.
Proper seating positions for passengers in rear seats
Rear seat passengers must sit upright with both feet on the floor consistent with their physical size and be properly restrained wheneverthe vehicle is in use.
To reduce the risk of injury caused by an incorrect seating position in the event of a sudden braking maneuver or an accident, your passengers on the rear bench seat must always observethe following:
> For adjustable head restraints: adjust the head restraint so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head. If that is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to this position as possible => page 60.
> Keep both feet flat in the footwell in front of the rear seat.
> Fasten and wear safety belts properly > page 271.
> Make sure that children are always properly restrained in a child restraint that is appropriate for their size and age > page 301.
Z\ WARNING
Passengers who are improperly seated on the rear seat can be seriously injured in a crash. -- Each passenger mustalwayssit on a seat of
their own and properly fasten and wear the safety belt belonging to that seat. -- Safety belts only offer maximum protection when the safetybelts are properly positioned on the body and securely latched. By notsitting upright, a rear seat passenger increasesthe risk of personal injury from improperly positioned safety belts!

-- For adjustable head restraints: always adjust the head restraint properly so that it can give maximum protection.
ace) LeeLeeee)
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraints are an important partofyour vehicle's occupant restraint system and can help to reducethe risk ofinjuries in accident situations.

Fig. 219 Head restraint: viewed from the front

The head restraints must be correctly adjusted to achieve the best protection.
> Adjust the head restraint so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head. If that is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to this position as possible > fig. 219.
> Applies to: forward/back adjustable head restraints: Move the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of the head as possible.
> If there is a passenger on the rear center seating position, slide the center head restraint upward at least to the next notch.

Adjusting head restraints > page 60.

ZAWARNING

All seats are equipped with head restraints.

Driving without head restraints or with head

restraints that are not properly adjusted in-

creases the risk of serious or fatal neck injury

dramatically. To help reduce the risk of injury:

-- Alwaysdrive with the head restraints in

place and properly adjusted.

-- Every person in the vehicle must have a

properly adjusted head restraint.

263

Driving safety

-- Always makesure each person in the vehicle properly adjusts their head restraint. Adjust the head restraint so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head. If that is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to this position as possible.
-- Applies to: forward/back adjustable head restraints: Move the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of the head as possible.
-- Never attempt to adjust head restraint while driving. If you have driven off and must adjust the driver headrest for any reason, first stop the vehicle safely before attempting to adjust the head restraint.
-- Children must alwaysbe properly restrained in a child restraint that is appropriate for their age and size > page 301.
Examples of improper seating positions
The occupant restraint system can only reduce the risk of injury if vehicle occupants are properly seated.
Improper seating positions can cause serious in-
jury or death. Safety belts can only work when they are properly positioned on the body. Improper seating positions reduce the effectiveness of safety belts and will even increase the risk of injury and death by moving the safety belt to critical areas of the body. Improper seating positions also increase the risk of serious injury and death when an airbag deploys and strikes an occupant who is not in the proper seating position. A driver is responsible for the safety of all vehicle occupants and especially for children. Therefore:
> Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect seating position when the vehicle is being used
>A.
The following bulletins list only some sample positions that will increase the risk of serious injury and death. Our hope is that these examples will make you more awareof seating positions that are dangerous.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is moving:
-- never stand up in the vehicle

-- never stand on the seats -- never kneel on the seats -- never ride with the seatback reclined -- never lie down on the seats -- never lean up against the instrument panel -- never sit on the edge of the seat -- never sit sideways -- never lean out the window -- never put your feet out the window -- never put your feet on the instrument panel -- never rest your feet on the seat cushion or back
of the seat -- never ride in the footwell -- never ride in the cargo area
ZA\ WARNING
Improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used. -- Always makesurethat all vehicle occupants
stay in a proper seating position and are properly restrained whenever the vehicle is being used.
Driver's and front passenger's footwell
ec eNeatly
Applies to: vehicles with knee airbags
ZA WARNING
Always make sure that the knee airbag can inflate without interference. Objects between yourself and the airbag can increase the risk of injury in an accident by interfering with the way the airbag deploysor by being pushed into you as the airbag deploys. -- No persons (children) or animals should ride
in the footwell in front of the passenger seat. If the airbag deploys, this can result in serious or fatal injuries. -- No objects of any kind should be carried in the footwell area in front of the driver's or passenger's seat. Bulky objects (shopping bags, for example) can hamper or prevent proper deployment of the airbag. Small objects can be thrown through the vehicleif

264

the airbag deploys and injure you or your passengers.
Pedal area
The pedals must always be free to move and must neverbe interfered with by a floor mat or any other object.
Makesurethat all pedals movefreely without interference and that nothing prevents them from returning to their original positions.
Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area free and can be secured with floor mat fasteners.
If a brake circuit fails, increased brake pedal travel is required to bring the vehicle to a full stop.
ZA WARNING
Pedals that cannot movefreely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious injury. -- Never place any objects in the driver's foot-
well. An object could get into the pedal area and interfere with pedal function. In case of sudden braking or an accident, you would notbe able to brake or accelerate! -- Always makesure that nothing can fall or moveinto the driver's footwell.

Driving safety
Floor mats used in your vehicle must be attached to these fasteners. Properly securing the floor matswill prevent them from sliding into positions that could interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Z\ WARNING
Pedals that cannot movefreely can result in a loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. -- Always makesure that floor mats are prop-
erly secured. -- Never place or install floor mats or other
floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured in place to prevent them from slipping and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. -- Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. -- Alwaysproperly reinstall and secure floor matsthat have been taken out for cleaning. -- Always makesure that objects cannotfall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss ofvehicle control.

1a Coley Mela Me lehTeed el
Always use floor mats that can be securely attached to the floor mat fasteners and do not interfere with the free movement of the pedals.
> Make sure that the floor mats are properly secured and cannot moveand interfere with the
pedals > A\.
Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannotslip out of position. You can obtain suitable floor mats from your authorized Audi Dealer.
Floor mat fasteners are installed in your Audi.

8V2012721B)

265

Driving safety
Active rollover protection system
Applies to: vehicles with power top
The rollover protection system protects vehicle occupantsin the event of a rollover.
Fig. 220 Rear seats: rollbar deployment range

B8V-0334

B8V-0333

AN WARNING
Do not usethe area behind the rear seat head restraints > fig. 220 as a seat or storage area. This is the area wherethe rollbars deploy.If the rollover protection system is triggered, objects placed there can be propelled through the vehicle and makeit moredifficult for the rollbars to deploy. This increases the risk for serious or life-threatening injuries.
When is rollover protection deployed?
Applies to: vehicles with power top
Rollover protection deploysin a collision orrollover.
Depending on the collision, sensors throughout the vehicle and the control module trigger the rollover system to deploy.
For safety reasons,rollover protection also deploys during front, side and rear collisions above a certain level of severity.
Retracting rollover protection
Applies to: vehicles with power top

B8V-0335

Fig. 221 Rear seats: deployed rollbar
The active rollover protection system consistsof:
-- tworollbars -- the safety belts with belt tensioners -- the windshield frame --the rollover sensors
The active rollover protection system provides additional safety in the event of a rollover. Within milliseconds, sensors deploy tworollbars located behind the head restraints in the rear seats
fig. 221.
The rollbars, reinforced windshield frame and belt tensioners help protect front and rear pas-
sengersin the event of a rollover.
The rollover protection system functions when the power top is both open and closed.

Fig. 223 Deployed rollbar with power top framefacing up-

ward.

B8V-0336

266

If the rollover protection has triggered but the vehicle was not involved in an accident, you can retract the rollover protection yourself in an emergency. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
With the power top open
> Pull the loop upwardin the direction of the arrow and holdit in place > fig. 222.
> Slide the rollbar down. > Release the loop just before the rollbar reaches
its end position (1-2 in. / 3-5 cm). > Press the rollbar down until it stops. > Make sure the rollbar is secure before releasing
it.
> Close the cover @) > fig. 223.
> Repeat the procedure on the other rollbar.
With the power top closed
> Switch the ignition on. > Press the power top switch to adjust the power
top frame until it is vertical > fig. 223. > Pull the loop upwardin the direction of the ar-
row and hold it in place > fig. 222. > Slide the rollbar down. > Release the loop just before the rollbar reaches
its end position (1-2 in. / 3-5 cm). > Press the rollbar down until it stops. > Make surethe rollbar is secure before releasing
it:
> Close the cover @) > fig. 223.
> Repeat the procedure on the other rollbar. > You can now close the power top again.
Z\ WARNING
-- Make sure your head or other parts of your bodyare not located in the area above the rollbar when pressing the rollbar down. If the rollbar is not secured correctly, it could deploy again as soon as you release it and cause injuries.
-- Have the rollover protection system checked by and authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility if it malfunctions. Otherwise the system may not deploy correctly in a collision.

Driving safety
-- Modifying the rollover protection system or individual componentsis not permitted.
-- Work on the rollover protection system should only be performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Otherwise the system maynot function correctly in a collision or it could deploy unexpectedly.
-- Have the system inspected at service intervals. This ensures the system will always be ready for use. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check the rollover protection system every two yearsat the latest.

8V2012721B)

267

Safety belts
Safety belts
General notes
Always wear safetybelts!
Wearing safety belts correctly saveslives!
This chapter explains whysafety belts are necessary, how they work and howto adjust and wear them correctly.
> Read all the information that follows and heed all of the instructions and WARNINGS.
ZA\ WARNING
Not wearing safety belts or wearing them improperly increases the risk of serious personal injury and death. -- Safety belts are the single most effective
means available to reduce the risk of serious injury and death in automobileaccidents. For your protection and that of your passengers, alwayscorrectly wear safety belts when the vehicle is moving. -- Pregnant women, injured, or physically impaired persons must also usesafety belts. Like all vehicle occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. The best way to protect a fetus is to protect the mother - throughout
the entire pregnancy.
Number of seats
Applies to: vehicles without power top: Your Audi has a total of five seating positions: two in the front and three in the rear. Each seating position has a safetybelt.
Applies to: vehicles with power top: Your Audi has a total of four seating positions: two in the front and twoin the rear. Each seating position has a safetybelt.
ZA WARNING
Not wearing safety belts or wearing them improperly increasesthe risk of serious personal injury and death.

-- Never strap more than one person, including small children, into any belt. It is especially dangerous to place a safety belt over a child sitting on your lap.
-- Never let more peopleride in the vehicle than there are safety belts available.
-- Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is properly restrained with a separate safety belt or child restraint.
Safety belt warning light
Yourvehicle has a warning system for the driver and front seat passenger to remind you about the importanceof buckling-up.

B42-0526

Fig. 224 Safety belt warning light in the instrument cluster - enlarged

Before driving off, always:
> Fasten your safety belt and makesure you are wearing it properly.
> Make sure that your passengersalso buckle up and properly wear their safety belts.
> Protect children with a child restraint system appropriate for the size and age.

The warning light in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is on as a reminder to
fasten the safety belts. In addition, you will hear a warning tone for a certain period of time.

Fasten your safety belt and make sure that your passengersalso properly put on their safety belts.

ZA\ WARNING

-- Safety belts are the single mosteffective

means available to reduce the risk of serious

injury and death in automobileaccidents.

268

Safety belts

For your protection and that of your passengers, alwayscorrectly wear safety belts when the vehicle is moving. -- Failure to pay attention to the warning light that come on, could lead to personal injury.
Whyuse safety belts?
Frontal collisions and the law of physics
Frontal crashes create very strong forces for people riding in vehicles.
c

B4H-0465

before the crash, until something stops them here, the wall > fig. 226.
The same principles apply to people sitting ina vehicle that is involved in a frontal collision. Even at city speeds of 20 to 30 mph (30 to 50 km/h), the forces acting on the body can reach one ton (2,000 lbs, or 1,000 kg) or more. At greater speeds, these forces are even higher.
People who do notuse safety belts are also not attached to their vehicle. In a frontal collision they will also keep moving forward at the speed their vehicle was travelling just before the crash. Of course, the laws of physics don't just apply to frontal collisions, they determine what happens in all kinds of accidents and collisions.

What happens to occupants not wearing Cr laallieya
In crashes unbelted occupants cannot stop themselves from flying forward and being injured or killed. Always wear yoursafety belts!

B4H-0466

Fig. 226 The vehicle crashesinto the wall
The physical principles are simple. Both the vehicle and the passengers possess energy which varies with vehicle speed and body weight. Engineerscall this energy "kinetic energy."
The higher the speed of the vehicle and the greater the vehicle's weight, the more energy that has to be "absorbed"in the crash.
Vehicle speed is the mostsignificant factor. If the speed doubles from 15 to 30 mph (25 to 50 km/h), the energy increases 4 times!
Becausethe passengersofthis vehicle are not using safety belts > fig. 225, they will keep moving at the same speed the vehicle was moving just

Fig. 227 A driver not wearing a safety belt is violently thrown forward
forward and strike the driver
Unbelted occupants are not able toresist the tremendous forces of impact by holding tight or >

269

8V2012721B)

Safety belts

bracing themselves. Without the benefit of safe-
ty restraint systems, the unrestrained occupant
will slam violently into the steering wheel, in-
strument panel, windshield, or whatever elseis
in the way > fig. 227. This impact with the vehicle interior has all the energy they had just before the crash.
Never rely on airbags alone for protection. Even when they deploy, airbags provide only additional protection. Airbags are not supposed to deployin all kinds of accidents. Although your Audi is equipped with airbags, all vehicle occupants, including the driver, must wear safety belts correctly in order to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in a crash.
Remember too,that airbags will deploy only once and that your safety belts are always there to offer protection in those accidents in which airbags are not supposed to deploy or when theyhavealready deployed. Unbelted occupants can also be thrown out of the vehicle where even more severe or fatal injuries can occur.
It is also importantfor the rear passengers to wear safety belts correctly. Unbelted passengers in the rear seats endanger not only themselves but also the driver and other passengers > fig. 228. In a frontal collision they will be thrown forward violently, where they can hit and injure the driver and/or front seat passenger.

Sila ol heM gela-las
Peoplethinkit's possible to use the hands to brace the body in a minor collision. It's simply not true!

a8 ~%8

Safety belts used properly can makea big difference. Safety belts help to keep passengersin their seats, gradually reduce energylevels applied to the body in an accident, and help prevent the uncontrolled movement that can causeserious injuries. In addition, safety belts reduce the danger of being thrown out ofthe vehicle.
Safety belts attach passengers to the car and give them the benefit of being slowed down more gently or "softly" through the "give" in the safety belts, crush zones and other safety features engineered into today's vehicles. By "absorbing" the kinetic energy over a longer period of time, the safety belts make the forces on the body more "tolerable" and less likely to cause injury.
Although these examplesare based ona frontal collision, safety belts can also substantially reduce the risk of injury in other kinds of crashes. So, whether you're on a long trip or just going to the corner store, always buckle up and make sure others do, too. Accident statistics show that vehicle occupants properly wearing safety belts have a lower risk of being injured and a much better chance of surviving an accident. Properly using safety belts also greatly increases the ability of the supplemental airbags to do their job in a collision. For this reason, wearing a safety belt is legally required in most countries including much of the United States and Canada.
Although your Audi is equipped with airbags, you still have to wear the safety belts provided. Front airbags, for example, are activated only in some frontal collisions. The front airbags are notactivatedin all frontal collisions, in side and rear col-
lisions,in roll overs or in cases wherethereis not
enough deceleration through impactto the front of the vehicle. The same goes for the other airbag systems in your Audi. So, always wear your safety belt and make sure everybodyin your vehicleis properly restrained!

Fig. 229 Driver is correctly restrained in a sudden braking maneuver
270

8V2012721B)
| B4H-0462

Importantsafety instructions about safety yl ha)
Safety belts must always be correctly positioned across the strongest bonesofyour body.
> Always wear safetybelts as illustrated and described in this chapter.
> Make sure that your safety belts are always ready for use and are not damaged.
ZA WARNING
Not wearing safety belts or wearing them improperly increasesthe risk of serious personal injury and death. Safety belts can work only when used correctly. -- Always fasten your safety belts correctly be-
fore driving off and makesureall passengers are correctly restrained. -- For maximum protection, safety belts must always be positioned properly on the body. -- Never strap more than one person, including
small children, into any belt.
-- Never place a safety belt over a child sitting on your lap.
-- Alwayskeep feet in the footwell in front of the seat while the vehicle is being driven.
-- Never let any person ride with their feet on the instrument panel or sticking out the window or on the seat.
-- Never removea safety belt while the vehicle is moving. Doing so will increase your risk of being injured or killed.
-- Never wear belts twisted. -- Never wear belts over rigid or breakable ob-
jects in or on your clothing, such as eye glasses, pens, keys, etc., as these may cause injury. -- Never allow safety belts to become damaged by being caughtin door or seat hardware. -- Do not wear the shoulder part of the belt under your arm or otherwise out of position. -- Several layers of heavy clothing may interfere with correct positioning of belts and reduce the overall effectiveness of the system.

Safety belts
-- Always keep belt buckles free of anything that may prevent the buckle from latching securely.
-- Never use comfortclips or devices that cre-
ate slack in the shoulder belt. However, special clips may be required for the proper use
of some child restraint systems. --Torn or frayed safety belts can tear, and
damaged belt hardware can break in an accident. Inspect belts regularly. If webbing, bindings, buckles, or retractors are damaged, have belts replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop. -- Safety belts that have been worn and loaded in an accident mustbe replaced with the correct replacementsafety belt by an authorized Audi dealer. Replacement may be necessary even if damage cannotbe clearly seen. Anchorages that were loaded mustalso be inspected. -- Never remove, modify, disassemble, or try to repair the safety belts yourself. -- Alwayskeep the belts clean. Dirty belts may not work properly and can impair the function of the inertia reel > table Interior cleaning on page 365.
Safety belts
Fastening safety belts Safety first - everybody buckle up!
Fig. 230 Belt buckle and tongue onthe driver's seat
To provide maximum protection, safety belts must always be positioned correctly on the wearer's body. >» Adjust the front seat and head restraint proper-
ly = page 58, Front seats.
271

Safety belts

> Make sure the seatback of the rear seat bench is in an upright position and securely latched in place before using the belt > /\.
> Pull the safety belt evenly across the chest and
pelvis > fig. 230, > A\.
> Insert the tongue into the correct buckle of your seat until you hear it latch securely.
> Pull on the belt to make sure that it is securely latched in the buckle.
Automatic safety belt retractors
Every safety belt is equipped with an automatic belt retractor on the shoulder belt. This feature
locks the belt when the belt is pulled out fast,
during hard braking and in an accident. The belt mayalso lock when you drive up or down a steep hill or through a sharp curve. During normal driving the belt lets you movefreely.
Safety belt pretensioners
Safety belts with pretensioners help to tighten the safety belt and remove slack when the pretensioners are activated > page 275. The function of the pretensioner is monitored by a warning light > page 26.
Convertible locking retractor
Every safety belt except the one on the driver seat is equipped with a convertible locking retractor that must be used when the safety belt is used to attach a child seat. Be sure to read the important information about this feature => page 312.
ZA WARNING
Improperly positioned safety belts can cause serious injury in an accident > page 272, Safety belt position. -- Safety belts offer optimum protection only
when the seatback is upright and belts are properly positioned on the body. -- Always make sure that the rear seat backrest to which the center rear safety belt* is attached is securely latched whenever the rear center safety belt is being used. If the backrest is not securely latched, the passenger will move forward with the backrest during

sudden braking, in a sudden maneuver and especially in a crash. -- Never attach the safety belt to the buckle for another seat. Attaching the belt to the wrong bucklewill reduce safety belt effec-
tiveness and can cause serious personal injury.
-- A passenger who is not properly restrained can be seriously injured by the safety belt itself when it moves from the stronger parts of the bodyintocritical areas like the abdomen.
-- Alwayslock the convertible locking retractor when you are securing a child seat in the vehicle > page 314.
Safety belt position Correct belt position is the key to getting maximum protection from safety belts.
Fig. 231 Safety belt position
Standard features on your vehicle help you adjust the position of the safety belt to match your body size. -- belt height adjustmentfor the front seats*, -- height-adjustable front seats.
ZA WARNING
Improperly positioned safety belts can cause serious personal injury in an accident. -- The shoulder belt shouldlie as close to the
center of the collar bone as possible and should fit well on the body. Hold the belt above the latch tongue and pull it evenly across the chestso that it sits as low as possible on the pelvis and there is no pressure on the abdomen. The belt should always fit [>

B4H-0751

272

snugly > fig. 231. Pull on the belt to tighten if necessary. -- The lap belt portion of the safety belt must be positioned as low as possible across pelvis and never over the abdomen. Make sure the belt lies flat and snug > fig. 231. Pull on the belt to tighten if necessary. --A loose-fitting safety belt can cause serious injuries by shifting its position on your body
from the strong bones to more vulnerable, soft tissue and cause serious injury.
-- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS and other important information > page 271.
Pregnant women mustalso becorrectly restrained
The best way to protectthe fetus is to make sure that expectant mothers always wearsafety belts correctly - throughout the pregnancy.

Safety belts
ZX WARNING
Improperly positioned safety belts can cause serious personal injury in an accident. -- Expectant mothers must always wear the
lap portion of the safety belt as low as possible across the pelvis and below the rounding of the abdomen. -- Always read and heed all WARNINGS and other important information > A\ in Fastening safety belts on page 272.
Unfastening safety belts
Unbuckle the safety belt with the red release button only after the vehicle has stopped.

} B4H-0270

Fig. 232 Safety belt position during pregnancy
To provide maximum protection, safety belts must always be positioned correctly on the wearer's body page 272.
> Adjust the front seat and adjustable head restraint* correctly > page 58, Front seats.
> Pull the safety belt evenly across the chest so that it sits as low as possible on the pelvis and there is no pressure on the abdomen
> fig. 232, > A.
> Insert the tongue into the correct buckle of your seat until you hear it latch securely.
> Pull on the belt to make sure that it is securely latched in the buckle.

Fig. 233 Releasing the tongue from the buckle
» Push the red release button on the buckle > fig. 233. The belt tongue will spring out of
the buckle > A\.
> Let the belt wind up on the retractor as you guide the belt tongue to its stowed position.
Z\WARNING
Never unfasten safety belt while the vehicleis moving. Doing so will increase your risk of being injured or killed.

8V2012721B)

273

Safety belts

Adjusting the safety belt latch tongue
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable latch tongue

ZA WARNING
Always read and heed all WARNINGS and oth-

=3SSS&as.

er important information > page 271.
(i) Tips

With the front seats, the height adjustment of the seat can also be used to adjust the position of the safety belts.

Fig. 234 Safety belt: latch tongueclip (example)
> Slide the clip so that you can easily reach the belt latch when putting the safety belt on.
Adjusting safety belt height
Appliesto: vehicles with safety belt height adjustment
With the aid of the safety belt height adjustment, the three point safety belt strap routing can be fitted to the shoulder area, according to bodysize.
Fig. 235 Safety belt height adjustmentfor the front seats - loop-around fittings
The shoulder belt should lie as close to the center of the collar bone as possible and should fit well on the body > A\ in Safety belt position on page 272. > Push the loop-around fittings up > fig. 235 @),
or > squeeze together the (@) button, and push the
loop-around fittings down (2). > Pull the belt to make sure that the upper at-
tachment is properly engaged.

B4G-0004)

Improperly worn safety belts
Incorrectly positioned safety belts can cause severe injuries.
Wearing safety belts improperly can cause serious injury or death. Safety belts can only work when theyare correctly positioned on the body. Improper seating positions reduce the effectiveness of safety belts and will even increase the risk of injury and death by moving the safety belt to critical areas of the body. Improper seating positions also increase the risk of serious injury and death when an airbag deploys and strikes an occupant who is not in the correct seating position. A driver is responsible for the safety of all vehicle occupants and especially for children. Therefore:
> Never permit anyone to assume an incorrectsitting position in the vehicle while traveling ofA.
ZA WARNING
Improperly wornsafety belts increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used. -- Always makesurethat all vehicle occupants
are correctly restrained and stay in a correct seating position whenever the vehicleis being used. -- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS and other important information > page 271.

274

Safety belts

Belt tensioners
Howsafety belt pretensioners work
Reversible safety belt tensioners
The following functions are available when safety belts with reversible safety belt tensioners are fastened:
--Incertain driving situations, the safety belts may tighten with a reversible tensioning function > page 136.
-- The safety belts mayalso tighten with this reversible tensioning function in minor collisions.
Pyrotechnic safety belt pretensioners
Seat belts with pyrotechnic safety belt pretensioners are tensioned automatically in severe collisions, depending on the circumstances. This helps to reduce the forward motion of the occu-
pants.
ZA WARNING
-- It is possible for the pretensioners to deploy incorrectly.
-- The pyrotechnic system can only provide protection for one collision. If the pyrotechnic pretensioners deploy, the pretensioning system mustbe replaced.
@ Tips
--A fine dust is released when the pyrotechnic safety belt pretensioners deploy.This is normal and is not caused bya fire in the vehieles
-- The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. A qualified dealership is familiar with these regulations and will be pleased to pass on the information to you.

damage the safety belt system and preventit from working correctly in a collision.
There are some important things you have to know to makesurethat the effectiveness of the system will not be impaired and that discarded componentsdo notcause injury or pollute the environment.
ZA WARNING
Improper care, servicing and repair procedures can increase the risk of personal injury and death by preventing a safety belt pretensioner from activating when neededor activating it unexpectedly: -- The belt pretensioner system can be activat-
ed only once. If belt pretensioners have been activated, the system mustbe replaced. -- Never repair, adjust, or change any parts of the safety belt system. -- Safety belt systems including safety belt pretensioners cannotbe repaired. Special procedures are required for removal, installation and disposal of this system. -- For any work on the safety belt system, we strongly recommend that you see your authorized Audi dealer or qualified technician who has an Audi approved repair manual, training and special equipment necessary.

Service and disposal of safety belt pretenSCT
The safety belt pretensionersare parts of the safety belts on your Audi. Installing, removing, servicing or repairing of belt pretensioners can

8V2012721B)

275

Airbag system

Airbag system
Important information
Importance of wearing safety belts and sitting properly
Airbags are only supplemental restraints. For airbags to do theirjob, occupants must always properly weartheir safety belts and be in a proper seating position.
For your safety and the safety of your passengers, before driving off, always:
> Adjust the driver's seat and steering wheel properly > page 261,
> Adjust the front passenger's seat properly
=> page 262,
> Wear safety belts properly > page 271, > Always properly use the proper child restraint
to protect children > page 301.
Ina collision, airbags mustinflate within the
blink of an eye and with considerable force. The supplemental airbags can cause injuries if the driver or the front seat passenger is not seated properly. Therefore in order to help the airbag to do its job, it is important, both as a driver and as a passenger to sit properlyat all times.
By keeping room between your body and the steering wheel and the front of the passenger compartment,the airbag can inflate fully and completely and provide supplemental protection in certain frontal collisions > page 261, Correct passenger seating positions. For details on the operation of the seat adjustment controls => page 58.
It's especially important that children are properly restrained > page 301.
There is a lot that the driver and the passengers can and must do to help the individual safety features installed in your Audi work together as a
system.
Proper seating position is important so that the
front airbag on the driver side can do its job. If you have a physical impairment or condition that prevents you from sitting properly on the driver seat with the safety belt properly fastened and

reaching the pedals, or if you have concerns with regard to the function or operation of the Advanced Airbag System, please contact your authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop, or call Audi Customer Relations at 1-800-822-2834 for possible modifications to your vehicle.
When the airbag system deploys, a gas generator will fill the airbags, break open the padded covers, and inflate between the steering wheel and the driver and between the instrument panel and the front passenger. The airbags will deflate immediately after deployment so that the front occupants can see through the windshield again without interruption.
All of this takes place in the blink of an eye, so fast that many people don't even realize that the airbags have deployed. The airbags also inflate with a great deal of force and nothing should be in their way when they deploy. Front airbags in combination with properly worn safety belts slow downand limit the occupant's forward movement. Together they help to prevent the driver and front seat passenger from hitting parts of the inside of the vehicle while reducing the forces acting on the occupant during the crash. In this way they help to reducethe risk ofinjury to the head and upper bodyin the crash. Airbags do not protect the arms or the lower parts of the body.
Both front airbags will notinflate in all frontal collisions. The triggering of the airbag system depends on the vehicle deceleration rate caused by the collision and registered by the electronic control unit. If this rate is below the reference value programmed into the control unit, the airbags will not be triggered, even though the car may be badly damaged as a result of the collision. Vehicle damage, repair costs or even the lack of vehicle damage is not necessarily an indication of whether an airbag should inflate or not.
Since the circumstances will vary considerably
between one collision and another,it is not possi-
ble to define a range of vehicle speeds that will cover every possible kind and angle of impact that will always trigger the airbags. Important factors include, for example, the nature (hard or soft) of the object which the car hits, the angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc. The front airbags will >

276

Airbag system

also not inflate in side or rear collisions, or in roll-
overs.
Always remember: Airbags will deploy only once, and only in certain kinds ofcollisions. Your safety belts are always thereto offer protection in those situations in which airbags are not supposed to deploy, or when they have already deployed; for example, when your vehicle strikes or is struck by another vehicle after the first collision.
This is just one of the reasons whyan airbag is a supplementary restraint and is not a substitute for a safety belt. The airbag system works most effectively when used with the safety belts. Therefore, always properly wear your safety belts => page 268.
ZA WARNING
Sitting too close to the steering wheel or instrumentpanel will decrease the effectiveness of the airbags and will increase the risk of personal injury in a collision. -- Never sit closer than 10 inches (25 cm) to
the steering wheel or instrument panel. -- If you cannotsit more than 10 inches
(25 cm) from the steering wheel, investi-
gate whether adaptive equipment may be available to help you reach the pedals and increase your seating distance from the steering wheel. -- All vehicle occupants and especially children mustbe restrained properly whenever riding in a vehicle. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child could be injured by striking the interior or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or impact. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child is also at greater risk of injury or death through contact with an inflating airbag. -- If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sidewaysor out of position in any way,
your risk of injury is much higher.
-- You will also receive serious injuries and could even be killed if you are up against the airbag or too close to it when it inflates even with an Advanced Airbag.

--To reducethe risk of injury when an airbag inflates, always wear safety belts properly => page 271, Safety belts.
-- Always makecertain that children age 12 or younger alwaysride in the rear seat. If children are not properly restrained, they may be severely injured or killed when an airbag inflates.
-- Never let children ride unrestrained or improperly restrained in the vehicle. Adjust the
front seats properly.
-- Never ride with the backrest reclined. -- Alwayssit as far as possible from the steer-
ing wheel or the instrument panel => page 261. -- Alwayssit upright with your back against the backrest of your seat. -- Never place your feet on the instrument panel or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat to help prevent serious injuries to the legs and hips if the airbag inflates. -- Never recline the front passenger's seat to transport objects. Items can also moveinto the area ofthe side airbag or the front airbag during braking or in a sudden maneuver. Objects near the airbags can become projectiles and cause injury when an airbag inflates.
ZA WARNING
Airbags that have deployed in a crash must be replaced. -- Use only original equipment airbags ap-
proved by Audi and installed by a trained technician who has the necessary tools and diagnostic equipment to properly replace any airbag in your vehicle and assure system effectiveness ina crash. -- Never permit salvaged or recycled airbags to be installed in your vehicle.
Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know
> Be sure to read the important information and heed the WARNINGS for important details

8V2012721B)

277

Airbag system

about children and Advanced Airbags => page 301.
Even though your vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Airbag System, makecertain that all children, especially those 12 years and younger,always ride in the back seat properly restrained for their age and size. The airbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a child in a forward-facing child seat. It can be a very dangerous place for an infant or a child in a rearward-facing seat.
The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has been certified to comply with the requirements of United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time your vehicle was manufactured. According to requirements, the front Advanced Airbag System on the passenger side has been certified for "suppression"for infants of about 12 month old and younger and for "low risk deployment"for children aged 3 to 6 yearsold (as defined in the standard).
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light in the instrument panel tells you when the front Advanced Airbag on the passenger side has been turned off by the electronic control unit.
Each time you switch on the ignition, the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light will come on for a few seconds and:
-- will stay on if the front passenger seat is not occupied,
--will stay on if the electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system for the front passenger seat equals the combined capacitance of an infant up to about one year of age and one of the rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraints listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified. For a listing of the child restraints that were used to certify your vehicle's compliance with the U.S. Safety Standard => page 303.

-- will stay on if there is a smallchild or child restraint on the front passenger seat,
--will go off if the front passenger seatis occupied by an adult as registered by the capacitive
passenger detection system > page 288, Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System.
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light comes on when electrical capacitance registered on the front passenger seat is equal to or less than the combined capacitance of a typical 1 year-old infant and one of the rearward-facing or forwardfacing child restraints listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified.
If the total electrical capacitance registered on the front passenger seat is more than that of a typical 1 year-old child but less than the weight of a small adult, the front airbag on the passenger side can deploy (the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on).
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not come on, the front airbag on the passenger side has not been turned off by the electronic control unit and can deployif the control unit senses an impact that meets the conditions stored in its memory.
For example, the airbag may deployif:
--asmallchild that is heavier than a typical 1 year-old child is on the front passenger seat (regardless of whether the childis in one of the child seatslisted > page 303), or
--a child who has outgrown child restraints is on the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger airbag is turned off, the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light comes on in the instrument cluster and stays on.
If the front passenger airbag deploys, the Federal Standard requires the airbag to meet the "low risk" deployment criteria to reduce the risk of injury through interaction with the airbag. "Low risk" deployment occurs in those crashes that take place at lower decelerations as defined in the electronic control unit > page 288, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFlight.

278

Always remember, a child seat or infant carrier installed on the front seat may be struck and knocked out of position by the rapidlyinflating passenger's airbag in a frontal collision. The airbag could greatly reduce the effectiveness of the child restraint and even seriously injure the child during inflation.
For this reason, and because the back seat is the
safest place for children - when properly restrained according to their age and size - we strongly recommend that children alwayssit in the back seat > page 301, Child safety.
ZA WARNING
A child in a rearward-facing child seat installed on the front passenger seatwill be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. -- The inflating airbag will hit the child seat or
infant carrier with great force and will smash the child seat and child against the
backrest, center armrest, door or roof.
-- Alwaysinstall rear-facing child seats on the
rear seat.
-- If you mustinstall a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rearfacing child seat in a rear seating position and havethe airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer.
-- Forward-facing child seats installed on the front passenger's seat may interfere with the deployment ofthe airbag and cause serious personal injury to the child.
Z\ WARNING
If, in exceptional circumstances, you mustin-
stall a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat: -- Always makesure the forward-facing seat
has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on front seat with a passenger front and side airbag.

Airbag system
-- Never put the forward-facing child restraint
up againstor very near the instrument pan-
el -- Always movethe front passenger seat to the
highest position in the up and down adjustment range and moveit back to the rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible, before installing the forwardfacing child restraint. -- Always makesure that the safety belt upper anchorage is behind the child restraint and not next to or in front of the child restraint so that the safety belt will be properly positioned. -- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on.
Z\ WARNING
To reduce the risk ofserious injury, make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light will be displayed whenever a child restraint is installed on the front passenger seat and the ignition is switched on. -- If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does
not stay on, perform the checks described => page 288, Monitoring the AdvancedAirbag System. -- Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not stay on. -- Have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer immediately. -- Alwayscarefully follow instructions from child restraint manufacturers when installing child restraints.
Z\ WARNING
If, in exceptional circumstances, you mustinstall a forward or rearward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat: -- Improper installation ofchild restraints can
reducetheir effectiveness or even prevent them from providing any protection.

8V2012721B)

279

Airbag system
-- An improperly installed child restraint can interfere with the airbag as it deploys and seriously injure or even kill the child - even with an Advanced Airbag System.
-- Alwayscarefully follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child seat or carrier.
-- Always makesure that there is nothing on the front passenger seat that will cause the capacitive passenger detection system in the seat to signal to the Airbag System that the seat is occupied by a person when it is not, or to signal thatit is occupied by someone who is heavier than the person actually sitting on the seat. The presence of additional objects could cause the passenger front airbag to be turned on when it should beoff, or could cause the airbag to work ina waythatis different from the way it would have worked without the object on the seat.
Front airbags
py Td et helmMiceliat ligey-[eL) The airbag system can provide supplemental protection to properly restrained front seat occu-
pants.
Fig. 236 Location of driver airbag: in steering wheel

B8U-0376

oO Pox2odO

Fig. 237 Location of front passenger's airbag: in the instrument panel

Your vehicle is equipped with an "Advanced Air-
bag System" in compliance with United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time your vehicle was manufactured.

The airbag for the driver is in the steering wheel hub > fig. 236 and the airbag for the front pas-
senger is in the instrument panel > fig. 237. The general location of the airbags is marked "AIRBAG".

There is a lot you need to know aboutthe airbags in your vehicle. We urge you to read the detailed information about airbags, safety belts and child
safety in this and the other chapters that make up the owner's literature. Please be sure to heed
the WARNINGS- they are extremely important for your safety and the safety of your passengers,
especially infants and small children.

Z\ WARNING

Never rely on airbags alone for protection.

-- Even when they deploy, airbags provide only

supplemental protection.

-- Airbag work mosteffectively when used

with properly worn safety belts.

-- Therefore, always wear your safety belts and

make sure that everybody in your vehicleis

properly restrained.

-- Alwayshold the steering wheel with both

hands on the outside of the steering wheel

rim at the 9:00 o'clock and 3:00 o'clock po-

sitions to help reduce the risk of personal in-

jury if the driver's airbag inflates.

280

-- Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position or with your hands anywhereinside the steering wheel or on the steering wheel hub. Holding the steering wheel the wrong wayincreases the risk of
severe injury to the arms, hands, and head if
the driver airbag deploys.
Z\ WARNING
Objects between you and the airbag will increase the risk of injury in a crash byinterfering with the way the airbag unfolds and/or by being pushedinto you as the airbag inflates. -- Always makesure nothing is in the frontair-
bag deployment zone that could be struck by the airbag when it inflates. -- Objects in the zone of a deploying airbag can become projectiles when the airbag deploys and causeserious personal injury. -- Never hold things in your hands or on your lap when the vehicleis in use.
-- Never place accessories or other objects
(such as cup holders, telephone brackets,
note pads, navigation systems,or things that are large, heavy, or bulky) on the doors; never attach them to the doorsor the windshield; never place them over or near or attach them to the area marked ,,AIRBAG" on the steering wheel, instrument panel or the
seat backrests; never place them between
these areas and you or any other person in the vehicle. -- Never attach objects to the windshield above the passenger front airbag, such as accessory GPS navigation units or music
players. Such objects could cause serious injury in a collision, especially when the airbags inflate.
-- Never recline the front passenger seat to transport objects. Items can also moveinto
the deployment area of the side airbags or the front airbag during breaking or in a sudden maneuver. Objects near the airbags can fly dangerously through the passenger compartment and cause injury, particularly when the seatis reclined and the airbags inflate.

Airbag system
ZA WARNING
A person on the front passenger seat, espe-
cially infants and small children, will receive
serious injuries and can even be killed by being too close to the airbag when it inflates. -- Although the Advanced Airbag System in
your vehicle is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag if an infant or a small child is on the front passenger seat, nobody can absolutely guarantee that deployment under these special conditions is impossible in all conceivable situations that may happen during the useful life of your vehicle. -- The Advanced Airbag System can deploy in accordancewiththe ,,low risk" option for 3and 6-year-old children under the U.S. Federal Standard if a child with electrical capacitance greater than the combined capacitance of a typical one-year old infant restrained in one of the forward facing or rearward-facing child seats with which your vehicle was certified is on the front passenger seat and the other conditions for airbag deployment are met. -- Accident statistics have shownthatchildren are generally safer in the rear seat area than in the front seating position.
-- For their ownsafety,all children, especially 12 years and younger, should alwaysride in the back properly restrained for their age and size.

Advanced front airbag system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front Advanced Airbag System in compliance with United States
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208, as well as Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(CMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time your vehicle was manufactured.

The front Advanced Airbag System supplements

the safety belts to provide additional protection

for the driver's and front passenger's heads and

upper bodies in frontal crashes. The airbags in-

flate only in frontal impacts when the vehicle de-

celeration is high enough.

8V2012721B)

281

Airbag system

The front Advanced Airbag System for the front seat occupantsis not a substitute for your safety belts. Rather,it is part of the overall occupant restraint system in your vehicle. Always remember that the airbag system can only help to protect you, if you are sitting upright, wearing your safety belt and wearing it properly. This is why you and your passengers must always be properly restrained, not just because the law requires you to be.
The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has been certified to meet the "low risk" requirementsfor 3 and 6 year-old children on the passenger side and very small adults on the driver side. The low risk deployment criteria are intended to help reduce the risk of injury through interaction with the front airbag that can occur,for example, by being too close to the steering wheel and instrument panel when the airbag inflates.
In addition, the system has been certified to
comply with the "suppression" requirements of the Safety Standard, to turn off the front airbag for infants 12 months old and younger who are restrained on the front passenger seat in child restraints that are listed in the Standard => page 303, Child restraints and Advancedfront airbag system.
"Suppression" requires the front airbag on the passenger side to be turned off if:
--a child up to about one year of age is restrained on the front passenger seat in one ofthe rearfacing or forward-facing infant restraintslisted in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified. For a listing of the child restraints that were used to certify your vehicle's compliance with the US Safety Standard => page 303,
--a person is detected on the front passenger seat that has an electrical capacitance that is morethan the total electrical capacitance of a child that is about 1 year old restrained in one of the rear-facing or forward-facing infant restraints (listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified), the front

airbag on the passenger side may or may not deploy.

The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light comes on when the electronic control unit detects a total electrical capacitance on the front passenger seat that requires the front airbag to be turnedoff. If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not
come on, the front airbag on the passenger side
has not been turned off by the control unit and can deploy if the control unit senses an impact that meets the conditions stored in its memory.

If the total electrical capacitance registered on the front passenger seat is more than that of a typical 1 year-old, but less than the weight of a small adult, the front airbag on the passenger side may deploy (the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on).

For example, the airbag may deployif:

--asmall child that is heavier than a typical 1 year-old child is on the front passenger seat (regardless of whether the child is in one of the child seatslisted > page 303),
--a child who has outgrown child restraints is on the front passenger seat.

If the front passenger airbag is turned off, the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lightin the center of the instrument panel will come on and stay on.

If the front passenger airbag deploys, the Federal Standard requires the airbag to meet the "low risk" deployment criteria to help reduce the risk
of injury through interaction with the airbag.
"Low risk" deployment occurs in those crashes that take place at lower decelerations as defined in the electronic control unit > page 288.

Always remember: Even though your vehicle is equipped with Advanced Airbags, the safest place for children is properly restrained on the back seat. Please be sure to read the important information in the sections that follow and be sure to heed all of the WARNINGS.

ZA WARNING

To reduce the risk of injury when an airbag in-

flates, always wear safety belts properly.

282

-- If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, your risk of injury is much higher.
-- You will also receive serious injuries and could even be killed if you are up against the airbag or too close to it when it inflates even with an Advanced Airbag > page 276.
Z\ WARNING
A child in a rearward-facing child seat installed on the front passenger seatwill be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. -- Although the Advanced Airbag System in
your vehicle is designed to turn off the front airbag when a rearward-facing child restraint has been installed on the front passenger seat, nobody can absolutely guarantee that deployment is impossible in all conceivable situations that may happen during the useful life of your vehicle. -- The inflating airbag will hit the child seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door, or roof. -- Alwaysinstall rearward-facing child restraints on the rear seat. -- If you mustinstall a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rearfacing child seat in a rear seating position and havethe airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer.
ZA WARNING
If, in exceptional circumstances, you mustinstall a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat: -- Always makesure the forward-facing seat
has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on front seat with a passenger front and side airbag.

Airbag system
-- Never put the forward-facing child restraint
up againstor very near the instrument pan-
el -- Always movethe front passenger seat to the
highest position in the up and down adjustment range and moveit back to the rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible, before installing the forwardfacing child restraint. -- Always makesure that the safety belt upper anchorage is behind the child restraint and not next to or in front of the child restraint so that the safety belt will be properly positioned. -- Always makesure that thereis nothing on the front passenger seat that will cause the capacitive passenger detection system in the seat to signal to the Airbag System that the seat is occupied by a person when it is not, or to signal that it is occupied by someone who is heavier than the person actually sitting on the seat. The presence of additional objects could cause the passenger front airbag to be turned on when it should
be off, or could cause the airbag to work ina
waythat is different from the wayit would have worked without the object on the seat. -- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on.
Eee We le myee ey
The front passenger seat in your vehicle has a lot of very important parts of the Advanced Airbag System in it. These parts include the capacitive passenger detection system, wiring, brackets, and more. The control unit monitors the system on the front passenger seat when the ignition is switched on and turns the airbag indicator light on when a malfunction in the one of the system componentsis detected > page 288. Because the
front passenger seat contains important parts of the Advanced Airbag System, you must take care
to prevent it from being damaged. Damage to

8V2012721B)

283

Airbag system
the seat may prevent the Advanced Airbag System for the front passenger seat from doing its job ina crash.
The front Advanced Airbag System consists of the following:
-- Crash sensorsin the front of the vehicle that measurevehicle acceleration/deceleration to provide information to the Advanced Airbag System about the severity of the crash.
-- An electronic control unit, with integrated crash sensorsfor front and side impacts. The
control unit "decides" whether tofire the front airbags based on the information received from the crash sensors. The control unit also "decides" whether the safety belt pretensioners should be activated. -- An Advanced Airbag with gas generator for the driver inside the steering wheel hub. -- An Advanced Airbag with gas generator inside the instrument panel for the front passenger.
-- A capacitive passenger detection system underneath the front passenger seat cover. This system measures the electrical capacitance of the person in the seat. The information registered is sent continuously to the electronic control unit to regulate deployment ofthe front Advanced Airbag on the passenger side.
-- An airbag monitoring system and indicator light in the instrument cluster > page 288.
--Asensor in each front seat registers the distance between the respective seat and the steering wheel or instrument panel. The information registered is sent continuously to the electronic control unit to regulate deployment of the front Advanced Airbags.
-- The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light comes on and stays on in the center of the instrument panel > page 325 and tells you when the front Advanced Airbag on the passenger side has been turned off.
--Asensor in the safety belt latch for the driver and for the front seat passenger that senses whether that safety belt is latched or not and transmits this information to the electronic control unit.

ZA WARNING
Damage to the front passenger seat can pre-
vent the front airbag from working properly.
-- Improper repair or disassembly of the front passenger and driver seat will prevent the Advanced Airbag System from functioning properly.
-- Repairs to the front passenger seat must be performed by qualified and properly trained workshop personnel.
-- Never remove the front passenger or driver seat from the vehicle.
-- Never removethe upholstery from the front
Passenger Seat.
-- Never disassemble or remove parts from the seat or disconnect wires from it.
-- Never carry sharp objects in your pockets or put them on the seat. The capacitive passenger detection mat in the front passenger seat will not function properlyif it is punctured.
-- Never carry things on your lap or carry objects on the front passenger seat. Such objects can influence the capacitance registered by the capacitive passenger detection
system, so that incorrect information is provided to the airbag control unit.
-- Never store items under the front passenger seat. Parts of the Advanced Airbag System under the passenger seat could be damaged, preventing them and the airbag system from working properly.
-- Never place seat covers or replacement upholstery that have not been specifically approved by Audi on the frontseats.
-- Seat covers can prevent the Advanced Airbag System from recognizing child restraints or occupants on the front passenger seat and prevent the side airbag in the seat backrest from deploying properly.
-- If a seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise addedto the front passenger seat, never install any child restraint system on this seat.
-- Never use cushions,pillows, blankets, or
similar items on the front passenger seat. The additional layers prevent the capacitive

284

8V2012721B)

passenger detection system from accurately
measuring the capacitance of the child safe-
ty seat and/or the person on the seat and thus keep the Advanced Airbag System from working properly.
-- Never place or use any electrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats) on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12-volt socketor the cigarette lighter socket. Such devices can influence the capacitance registered by the capacitive passenger detection system, so that incorrect information is provided to the airbag control unit.
-- If you mustuse a child restraint on the front passenger seat and the child restraint manufacturer's instructions require the use of a
towel, foam cushion or something else to
properly position the child restraint, make
certain that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on whenever the child restraint is installed on the front pas-
senger seat.
-- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install child restraint in a rear seating position and havethe airbag system inspected by
your Audi dealer.
ZA WARNING
If the front passenger seat gets wet, dryit immediately. -- If liquid soaks into the front passenger seat,
this can keep the airbag system from working properly and may,for instance, deactivate the passenger frontal airbag. If this happens, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light will come on and stay on together with the airbag indicator light Ea in the instrument cluster. -- If liquid is pooled on the seat, but has not soaked in, this may also keep the airbag system from working properly and cause the passenger frontal airbag to be enabled (turned on), even though thereis a properly installed child restraint system on the seat. Wet towels or other wet things on the seat

Airbag system
cushion can have the same effect. If the front passenger frontal airbag is turned on,
the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lightwill turn off.
How the Advanced Airbag System components work together
The front Advanced Airbag System and the side airbags supplement the protection offered by the front three-point safety belts and the adjustable head restraints* to help reduce the risk of injury in a wide range of accident and crash situations. Be sure to read the important information about safety and heed the WARNINGS in this chapter.
Deployment of the Advanced Airbag System and the activation of the safety belt pretensioners depend on the deceleration measured by the crash sensors and registered by the electronic control unit. Crash severity depends on speed and deceleration as well as the mass and stiffness of the vehicle or object involved in the crash.
On the passenger side, regardless of safety belt use, the front passenger frontal airbag will be turned off if the electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system on the front passenger seat is less than the amount programmed in the electronic control unit. The front passenger frontal airbag will also be turned off if the capacitance measured by the system for the front passenger seat equals that of an infant of about one year of age in one ofthe child seats that was used to certify the Advanced Airbag System under Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light comes on and stays on totell you when the front Advanced Airbag System on the passenger side has been turned off > page 288.
ZA WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury when an airbag inflates, always wear safety belts properly. -- If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-
ting sidewaysor out of position in any way, your risk of injury is much higher. -- You will also receive serious injuries and could even be killed if you are up against the |>
285

Airbag system

airbag or too close to it when it inflateseven with an Advanced Airbag > page 276.
Tmtmee Rom anal Lol im iced t a airbags
Fig. 238 Inflated front airbags
Safety belts are important to help keep front seat occupantsin the proper seated position so that airbags can unfold properly and provide supplemental protection in a frontal collision. The front airbags are designed to provide additional protection for the chest and face of the driver and the front seat passenger when: -- safety belts are worn properly, -- the seats have been positioned so that the oc-
cupant is properly seated as far as possible from the airbag, -- and for adjustable head restraints: the head restraints have been properly adjusted. Because airbags inflate in the blink of an eye with great force, things you have on your lap or have placed on the seat could become dangerous projectiles, and be pushedinto you if the airbag inflates. When an airbag deploys,fine dust is released. This is normal and is not caused bya fire in the vehicle. This dust is made up mostly of a powder used to lubricate the airbags as they deploy.It could irritate skin. It is important to remember that while the supplemental airbag system is designed to reduce the likelihood of serious injuries, other injuries, for example swelling, bruising and minor abrasions, can also happen when airbags inflate. Airbags do not protect the arms or the lower parts

B4H-0271

of the body. Front airbags supplement the threepoint safety belts only in some frontal collisions in which the vehicle deceleration is high enough to deploy the airbags.
Front airbags will not deploy:
-- if the ignition is switched off when a crash occurs,
-- in side collisions,
-- in rear-end collisions,
--in rollovers,
-- when the crash deceleration measured by the airbag system is less than the minimum threshold needed for airbag deployment as registered by the electronic control unit.
The front passenger airbag also will not deploy:
--when the front passenger seat is not occupied, -- when the electrical capacitance measured by
the capacitive passenger detection system for the front passenger seat indicates that the passenger side frontal airbag must be switched off by the electronic control unit (the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light > page 288 and how they work comes on and stays on).
ZA WARNING
Sitting in the wrong position can increase the risk of serious injury in crashes. --To reducethe risk of injury when the airbags
inflate, the driver and passengers must alwayssit in an upright position, must not lean against or place any part of their body too close to the area wherethe airbags are located. -- Occupants who are unbelted, out ofposition or too close to the airbag can beseriously injured by an airbag as it unfolds with great force in the blink of an eye > page 277.
ZA WARNING
A child in a rearward-facing child seat installed on the front passenger seatwill be seriously injured and can be killed if the frontairbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System.

286

8V2012721B)

-- The inflating airbag will hit the child seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child seat and child against the
backrest, center armrest, door or roof.
-- Alwaysinstall rear-facing child seats on the
rear seat.
-- If you mustinstall a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rearfacing child seat in a rear seating position and havethe airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer.
ZA\ WARNING
Objects between you and the airbag will increase the risk of injury in a crash byinterfering with the way the airbag unfolds or by being pushed into you as the airbag inflates. -- Never hold things in your hands or on your
lap when the vehicleis in use. -- Never transport items on or in the area of
the front passenger seat. Objects could moveinto the area of the front airbags during braking or other sudden maneuvers and become dangerous projectiles that can cause serious personal injury if the airbags inflate. -- Never place or attach accessories or other objects (such as cup holders, telephone brackets, large, heavy or bulky objects) on
the doors, over or near the area marked
"AIRBAG"on the steering wheel, instrument
panel, seat backrests or between those
areas and yourself. These objects could cause injury in a crash, especially when the airbags inflate.
-- Never recline the front passenger's seat to transport objects. Items can also moveinto the area of the side airbag or the front airbag during braking or in a sudden maneuver. Objects near the airbags can become projectiles and causeinjury, particularly when the seat is reclined.
-- Never place or transport objects on the front passenger seat. Objects on the front passenger seat could cause the capacitive sensor in

Airbag system
the seat to signal to airbag system that the seat is occupied by a person when it in factis not, or that the person on the seatis heavier than he or she actually is. The change in electric capacitance because of such objects can cause the passenger front airbag to be turned on when it should be off, or can cause the airbag to work in a waythat is different from the way it would have worked without objects on the seat. -- Always makesure that there is nothing on the front passenger seat that will cause the capacitive passenger detection system in the seat to signal to the Airbag System that the seat is occupied by a person when it is not, or to signal that it is occupied by someone who is heavier than the person actually sitting on the seat. The presence of an object could cause the passenger front airbag
to be turned on when it should beoff, or
could cause the airbag to work in a way that is different from the way it would have worked without the object on the seat.
ZA WARNING
The fine dust created when airbags deploy can cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing conditions. --To reduce the risk of breathing problems,
those with asthma or other respiratory conditions should getfresh air right away by getting out of the vehicle or opening windowsor doors. -- If you are ina collision in which airbags deploy, wash your hands and face with mild soap and water before eating. -- Be careful not to get the dust into your eyes, or into any cuts or scratches. --If the residue should get into your eyes, flush them with water.
287

B8V-0215

Airbag system

Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System
Airbag monitoring indicator light
Two separate indicators monitor the function of the AdvancedAirbag System: the 2] light and
the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light.
The Advanced Airbag System as well as the side airbags and side curtain airbags with ejection mitigation features (including the electronic control unit, sensors and system wiring) are all monitored continuously to make sure that they are functioning properly whenever the ignition is on. Every time you turn on the ignition, the airbag system indicator light Ba witt come on fora few seconds (function check).
The system must be inspected when the indicator light Ba:
-- does not come on when the ignition is switched on,
-- does not go out a few seconds after you have switched on the ignition, or
-- comes on while driving.
If an airbag system malfunction is detected, the indicator light will come on to serve as a constant reminder to have the system inspected immediately.
If a malfunction occurs that turns the front airbag on the passenger side off, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light will come on and stay on whenever the ignition is on.
Z\WARNING
An airbag system that is not functioning properly cannot provide supplemental protection in a frontal crash. - If the airbag indicator light > page 26
comes when the vehicle is being used, have the system inspected immediately by your
authorized Audi dealer. It is possible that the airbag will inflate when it is not supposed to,or will not inflate when it should.

PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light
Fig. 239 Center console: passenger airbag off warning light
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light is located in the center of the instrument panel > fig. 239. The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light will come on and stay on totell you when the front Advanced Airbag on the passenger side has been turned off by the electronic control unit. If the bulb for the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light burns out, the airbag indicator light BQ will come on to signal a malfunction in the Advanced Airbag System. Although the burned-out bulb will not change the waythe front passenger's frontal airbag works,it will no longer be possible to use the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light to make sure that the airbag on/off status is correct for the occupant on the front passenger seat. Have the airbag system inspected immediately by your authorized Audi dealer.
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light will blink
for about 5 seconds when: -- the ignition is switched on and -- the capacitive passenger detection system,
which switchesthe front seat passenger's fron-
tal Advanced Airbag on and off, detects a
change in the status of the front passenger
seat.
As soon as the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light stops blinking, always make sure that the airbag status (on or off) as shown by the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light is proper for the age, size and electrical capacitance of the person occupying the front passenger seat. Always makesure that the safety belt for the front passenger seat is properly fastened.

288

Airbag system

The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light will show
the status of the front seat passenger's frontal Advanced Airbag a few seconds after the ignition is switched on and theairbag indicator light goes off. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light:
-- will stay on if the front passenger seat is not
occupied;
--will stay on if the electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system for the front passenger seat equals the combined capacitance of an infant up to about one year of age and one of the rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraints listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehi-
cle was certified; For a listing of the child re-
straints that were used tocertify your vehicle's compliance with the U.S. Safety Standard => page 303. -- will go out if the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult as registered by the capacitive passenger detection system. -- The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light must come on and stay on if the ignition is on and... --a car bed has been installed on the front pas-
senger seat, or
--arearward-facing child restraint has been installed on the front passenger seat, or
--a forward-facing child restraint has been installed on the front passenger seat,
--and if the electrical capacitance registered on the front passenger seat is equal to or less than the combined capacitance ofa typical 1 yearold infant and one of the rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraints listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front airbag will not deploy, and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light will stay on. Never installa rearward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, the safest place for a child in any kind of child restraint is at one of the seating positions on the rear seat > page 277, Child re-

straints on the front seat - some important things to know and > page 301, Child safety.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGlight comes on...
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light comes on when one ofthe conditions listed aboveis met, be sure to check the light regularly to makecertain that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light stays on continuously whenever the ignition is on. If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not appear on and does notstay on all the time, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and
-- reactivate the system by turning the ignition off for more than 4 seconds and then turning it on
again;
-- remove and reinstall the child restraint. Make sure that the child restraint is properly installed and that the safety belt for the front passenger seat has been correctly routed through the child restraint as described in the child restraint manufacturer's instructions;
-- makesure that the convertible locking retractor on the safety belt for the front passenger seat has been activated and that the safety belt has been pulled tight.
-- makesure that no electrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats)is placed or used on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12-volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket;
-- makesure that no seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise added to the front passenger seat;
-- makesure that nothing can interfere with the safety belt buckles and that they are not obstructed;
-- makesure that there are no wet objects (such as a wet towel) and no water or other liquids on the front passenger seat cushion.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGlightstill does
not come on...
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light still does not come on and does not stay on continuously (when the ignition is switched on),

8V2012721B)

289

Airbag system
-- take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions. Have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer immediately.
-- movethe child to a rear seat position and make sure that the child is properly restrained ina child restraint that is appropriate for its size and age.
The PASSENGER AIR BAGlight should NOT come on...
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light should NOT come on when the ignition is on and an adultis
sitting in a proper seating position on the front
passenger seat. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on or flashes for about
5 seconds while driving, under these circumstan-
ces, makesurethat:
-- the adult on the front passenger seat is properly seated on the center of the seat cushion with his or her back up against the backrest and the backrestis not reclined,
-- the adult is not taking weight off the seat by holding on to the passenger assist handle abovethe front passenger door or supporting their weight on the armrest,
-- the safety belt is being properly worn and that there is not a lot of slack in the safety belt web-
bing, -- there are no aftermarket seat covers or cush-
ions or other things (such as blankets) on the front passenger seat that might cause the ca-
pacitive passenger detection system to miscal-
culate electrical capacitance.
MinleXelat etiam iamead (lame) monitoring the Advanced Airbag System
ZA\ WARNING
-- If the status of the Advanced Airbag System has changed while the vehicle is moving, the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light blinks for about 5 seconds to catch the driver's attention. If this happens, always stop as soon as it is safe to do so and check the steps described above.

-- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not go off when an adult who is not very small is sitting on the front passenger seat after taking the steps described above,
makesure the adult is properly seated and restrained at one of the rear seating positions. Have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer before trans-
porting anyone on the front passenger seat.
ZA WARNING
An airbag system that is not functioning properly cannot provide supplemental protection in a frontal crash. -- If the airbag indicator light > page 26
comes when the vehicle is being used, have the system inspected immediately by your authorized Audi dealer. It is possible that the airbag will inflate when it is not supposed to, or will not inflate when it should.
ZA WARNING
If the front airbag inflates, a child without a child restraint, or in a rearward-facing child safety seat, or in a forward-facing child restraint that has not been properly installed will be seriously injured and can be killed. -- Even though your vehicle is equipped with
an Advanced Airbag System, makecertain that all children, especially 12 years and younger, alwaysride on the back seat properly restrained for their age and size. -- Alwaysinstall forward or rear-facing child seats on the rear seat -- even with an Advanced Airbag System. -- If you mustinstall a rearward-facing child seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not appear and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer.
-- If, in exceptional circumstances, you must install a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, always move the seat into its rearmost position in the seat's

290

8V2012721B)

fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible. The backrest mustbe adjusted to an upright position. Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on.
ZA\ WARNING
-- If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not go out when an adultis sitting on the
front passenger seat after taking the steps described above, make sure the adult is properly seated and restrained at one of the rear seating positions.
-- Have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer before transporting anyone on the front passenger seat.
@) Tips
If the capacitive passenger detection system determines that the front passenger seat is empty,the frontal airbag on the passenger side will be turned off, and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lightwill stay on.
Repair, care and disposal of the airbags
Parts of the airbag system are installed at many different places on your Audi. Installing, removing, servicing or repairing a part in an area of the vehicle can damage a part ofan airbag system and prevent that system from working properly ina collision.
There are some important things you have to know to makesurethat the effectiveness of the system will not be impaired and that discarded components do not causeinjury or pollute the
environment.
ZA WARNING
Improper care, servicing and repair procedures can increase the risk of personal injury and death by preventing an airbag from deploying when needed or deploying an airbag unexpectedly:

Airbag system
-- Never cover, obstruct, or change the steering wheel horn pad or airbag cover or the instrument panel or modify them in any way.
-- Never attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
-- For cleaning the horn pad or instrument panel, use only a soft, dry cloth or one moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could damage the airbag cover or change the stiffness or strength of the material so that the airbag cannot deploy and protect
properly.
-- Never repair, adjust, or change any parts of the airbag system.
-- All work on the steering wheel, instrument panel, front seats or electrical system (including the installation of audio equipment, cellular telephones and CB radios,etc.) must be performed by a qualified technician who has the training and special equipment necessary.
-- For any work on the airbag system, we strongly recommend that you see your authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop.
-- Never modify the front bumper or parts of the vehicle body.
-- Always makesurethat the side airbag can inflate without interference:
-- Never install seat covers or replacement upholstery over the front seatbacks that have not been specifically approved by Audi.
-- Never use additional seat cushions that cover the areas wherethe side airbags inflate.
-- Damage tothe original seat covers or to the seam in the area of the side airbag module must always be repaired immediately by an authorized Audi dealer.
-- The airbag system can deploy only once. After an airbag has been deployed, it must be replaced with new replacement parts designed and approved especially for your Audi model version. Replacement of complete airbag systems or airbag components must be performed by qualified workshops only. Makesure that anyairbag service action is
291

Airbag system
entered in your Audi Warranty & Maintenance booklet under AIRBAG REPLACEMENT RECORD. -- Applies to plug-in hybrid* vehicles: In the event of a collision where the airbags deploy, the electrical connection to the high voltage battery is automatically disconnected. This prevents a shortcircuit.

Knee airbags
Pregl) CooL Aisle)
Applies to: vehicles with knee airbags
The knee airbag system can provide supplemental protection to properly restrained front seat
occupants.

Other things that can affect Advanced Airbag performance
Changing the vehicle's suspension system can change the way that the Advanced Airbag System performs in a crash. For example, using tire-rim combinations not approved by Audi, lowering the vehicle, changing the stiffness of the suspension, including the springs, suspension struts, shock absorbersetc. can change the forces that are measured by the airbag sensors and sent to the electronic control unit. Some suspension changes can, for example, increase the force levels measured by the sensors and makethe airbag system deploy in crashes in which it would not deployif the changes had not been made. Other kinds of changes may reduce the force levels measured by the sensors and prevent the airbag from deploying when it should.
ZA\WARNING
Changing the vehicle's suspension including use of unapproved tire-rim combinations can change Advanced Airbag performanceand increase the risk of serious personal injury ina crash.
-- Never install suspension components that do not have the same performance characteristics as the componentsoriginally installed on your vehicle.
-- Never use tire-rim combinations that have not been approved by Audi.

Fig. 240 Driver's knee airbag
The driver knee airbag is in the instrument panel underneath the steering wheel > fig. 240, the airbag for the passenger is at about the same height in the instrument panel underneath the glove compartment.
The knee airbag offers additional protection to the driver's and passenger's knees and upper and lower thigh areas and supplements the protection provided bythe safetybelts.
If the front airbags deploy, the knee airbags also deployin frontal collisions when the deployment threshold stored in the control unit is met => page 286, More important things to know about front airbags.
In addition to their normal safety function, safety belts help keep the driver or front passenger in position ina frontal collision so that the airbags can provide supplemental protection.
The airbag system is not a substitute for your safety belt. Rather,it is part of the overall occupant restraint system in your vehicle. Always remember that the airbag system can only help to
protect you if you are wearing your safety belt
and wearing it properly. This is why you should always wear your safety belt, not just because the law requires you to do so > page 268, General
notes.

292

Airbag system

B8V-0356

Remember too,airbags will deploy only once and only in certain kinds of accidents - your safety belts are alwaysthere to offer protection in those accidents in which airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they have already deployed, for example when your vehicle strikes or is struck by another after the first collision.
This is just one of the reasons whyan airbag is not a substitute for the safety belt. The airbag system works mosteffectively when used with the safety belts. Therefore, always wear your safety belts correctly.
It is important to remember that while the supplemental knee airbag system is designed to reduce the likelihood of serious injuries, other inju-
ries, for example, swelling, bruising and minor abrasions and friction burns can also occur when
an airbag inflates.
The knee airbag system basically consistsof:
-- The electronic control module -- Twoinflatable airbags (airbag and gas genera-
tor), one for the driver and one for the front passenger -- The airbag indicator light in the instrument panel
The kneeairbag system will not deploy:
-- when the ignition is switched off
-- in frontal collisions when the deceleration measured by the control unit is too low
-- in side collisions -- in rear-end collisions --in rollovers -- in the event of a system malfunction (warning/
indicator light is on) > page 26.
Z\ WARNING
-- Safety belts and the airbag system can only provide protection when occupantsarein the proper seating position > page 286.
-- If the airbag indicator light > page 26
comes when the vehicle is being used, have
the system inspected immediately by your authorized Audi dealer. It is possible that the airbag will inflate when it is not sup-
posed to,or will not inflate when it should.

WaalS1e Mold
Applies to: vehicles with knee airbags
The risk of injury to the leg area can be reduced by fully inflated knee airbags.
Fig. 241 Inflated airbags protecting in a frontal collision
The knee airbag system has been designed so that the airbags for the driver and front passenger deployin certain but not all frontal collisions. If the front airbags deploy, the knee airbags also deployin frontal collisions when the deployment threshold stored in the control unit is met. When the system deploys, the airbags fill with a compressed propellant gas, and inflate between the lower part of the instrument panel and the driver and the lower part of the instrument panel and the front passenger > page 286,fig. 238. Although theyare not a soft pillow, they can "cushion" the impact and in this way they can help to reducethe risk of injury to the lower extremities. All of this takes place in the blink of an eye, so fast that many people don't even realize that the airbags have deployed. The airbags also inflate with a great deal of force and it is important for occupant safety that nothing should be in their way when theydeploy. Fully inflated airbags in combination with properly worn safety belts slow downand limit the occupant's forward movement and help to reduce the risk ofinjury.

8V2012721B)

293

Airbag system

tial Selacet Lilamiatadolar Mol mate dal -1-) airbag system
Applies to: vehicles with knee airbags
Airbags are only supplemental restraints. Always wearsafety belts correctly and ride in a proper seating position.
There is a lot that you and your passengers must know and do to help the safety belts and airbags to provide supplemental protection.
ZAWARNING
An inflating knee airbag can cause serious injury. Wearing safety belts incorrectly and improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used. -- The knee airbag system cannot protect you
properly if you are seated too close to any of the airbag locations. When adjusting their seat positions, it is important that both the driver and the front passenger keep their upper bodies and kneesat the following minimum safe distances:
-- at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the chest and the steering wheel/instrument panel.
--at least 4 inches (10 cm) between the knees and the lower part of the instrument panel.
-- The risk of personal injury increases if you lean forwardor to the side, or if the seat is improperly positioned and you are not wearing your safety belt. The risk increases even more should the airbag deploy.
-- Always makesure that the knee airbag can inflate without interference. Objects between you and the airbag can increase the risk of injury in an accidentby interfering with the way the airbag deploys or by being pushed into you as the airbag deploys.
-- Never let anybody, especially children or animals ride in the footwell in front of the passenger seat. If the airbag deploys, this can result in serious or fatal injuries.
-- Never carry objects of any kind in the footwell area in front of the driver's or passenger's seat. Bulky objects (shopping

bags, for example) can interfere with or prevent proper deployment of the airbag. Small objects can be thrown through the vehicle if the airbag deploys and injure you or your passengers. -- Makesure there are no cracks, deep scratches or other damage in the area of the instrument panel where the kneeairbags arelocated.
-- If children are incorrectly seated, their risk
of injury increases in a collision > page 301, Child safety.
Side airbags
plea gl eee eT ere hy
The airbag system can provide supplemental protection to properly restrained occupants.
nusN} 2a2a

Fig. 242 Side airbag location in the driver's seat

The side airbags are located in the sides of the
front seat backrests > fig. 242 and the rear backrest* facing the doors.

The side airbags installed for the front seating positions have been designed and certified to
help reduce the risk of injury that can be caused by airbags when theyinflate, particularly when the occupant sitting next to it is not seated properly. The side airbag for the front passenger seat can be used with properlyinstalled child restraints. Please be sure to read the importantinformation and warnings whenever using a child restraint in a vehicle: Safety belts > page 268, Airbag system = page 276,Child safety => page 301.

The side airbag system basically consistsof:

294

Airbag system

-- the electronic control module and external side impact sensors
-- the twoairbags located in the sides of the front backrests and the twoairbags* located in the rear backrest
-- the airbag warning light in the instrument clus-
ter.
The airbag system is monitored electronically to makecertain thatit is functioning properly at all times. Each time you switch on the ignition, the airbag system indicator light will come on for a few seconds (self diagnostics).
The side airbag system supplements the safety belts and can help to reduce the risk of injury to the driver's, front and rear* passenger's upper torso on the side of the vehicle that is struck in a side collision. The airbag deploys only in side impacts and only when the vehicle acceleration registered by the control unit is high enough. If this rate is below the reference value programmed in-
to the control unit, the side airbags will not be
triggered, even though the car may be badly damagedas a result of the collision. It is not possible to define an airbag triggering range that will cover every possible angle of impact, since the circumstances will vary considerably between one collision and another. Important factorsinclude, for example, the nature (hard or soft) of the impacting object, the angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc. > page 296, Important safety instructions on the side airbag system.
Aside from their normal safety function, safety belts work to help keep the driver or front passenger in position in the event of a side collision so that the side airbags can provide protection.
The airbag system is not a substitute for your safety belt. Rather,it is part of the overall occupant restraint system in your vehicle. Always remember that the side airbag system can only help to protect you if you are wearing your safety belt and wearing it properly. This is another reason why you should always wear your safety belts, not just because the law requires you to do so > page 268, General notes.
It is important to remember that while the supplemental side airbag system is designed to re-

duce the likelihood of serious injuries, other inju-
ries, for example, swelling, bruising, friction
burns and minor abrasions can also be associated with deployed side airbags. Remember too, side airbags will deploy only once and only in certain kinds of accidents - your safety belts are always
there to offer protection.
Vehicle damage, repair costs or even the lack of vehicle damage are not necessarily an indication of over-sensitive or failed airbag activation. In some collisions, both front and side airbags may inflate. Remember too, that airbags will deploy only once and only in certain kinds ofcollisions your safety belts are always there to offer protection in those accidents in which airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they have already deployed.
The side airbag system will not deploy:
-- when the ignition is switched off -- in side collisions when the acceleration meas-
ured by the sensor is too low -- in front-end collisions -- in rear-end collisions -- in rollovers.
In some types of accidents the front airbags, side curtain airbags and side airbags maybe triggered together.
Z\ WARNING
-- Safety belts and the airbag system will only provide protection when occupantsare in the proper seating position > page 296.
-- If the airbag indicator light > page 26
comes when the vehicle is being used, have the system inspected immediately by your
authorized Audi dealer. It is possible that the airbag will inflate when it is not supposed to, or will not inflate when it should.

8V2012721B)

295

Airbag system

How supplemental side airbags work Side airbags deploy instantly and can help reducetherisk of upper torsoinjuries for occupants who are properly restrained.
DrSSQa$ =a o
Applies to: vehicles without power top
Fig. 243 Side impact protection: inflated side airbags (example)
Applies to: vehicles with power top Fig. 244 Side impact protection: inflated side airbags
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas and breaks through a seam in the seat surface area marked "AIRBAG". It expands between the side trim panel and the passenger. In order to help provide this additional protection, the side airbag mustinflate within a fraction of a second at very high speed and with great force. The supplemental side airbag could injure you if your seating position is not proper or uprightor if items are located in the area where the supplemental side airbag expands. This applies especially to children > page 301, Child safety. Supplemental side airbags inflate between the occupant and the door panel on the side of the vehicle that is struck in certain side collision > fig. 243, > fig. 244. Although theyare not a soft pillow, they can "cushion" the impact and in this way they can

B8V-0329

help to reducethe risk of injury to the upper part of the body.
A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and does not mean thereis a fire in the vehicle.
Important safety instructions on the side airbag system
Airbags are only supplementalrestraints. Always properly wear safety belts and ride in a proper seating position.
There is a lot that you and your passengers must know and act accordingly to help the safety belts and airbags do their job to provide supplemental protection.
ZA WARNING
An inflating side airbag can cause serious or fatal injury. Improperly wearing safety belts
and improper seating positions increase the
risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used. -- In order to reducethe risk of injury when the
supplemental side airbag inflates:
-- Alwayssit in an upright position and never lean against the area where the supplemental side airbag is located.
-- Never let a child or anyone else rest their head againstthe side trim panel in the area where the supplemental side airbag inflates.
-- Always makesurethat safety belts are
worn correctly,
-- Do not let anyone sitting in the front seat put their hand or any other parts of their body out of the window.
-- Always makesurethat the side airbag can inflate without interference.
-- Never install seat covers or replacement upholstery over the front seatbacks that have not been specifically approved by Audi.
-- Never use additional seat cushions that cover the areas wherethe side airbags deploy.

296

8V2012721B)

-- Damage to the original seat covers or to the seam in the area ofthe side airbag module must always be repaired immediately by an authorized Audi dealer.
-- Objects between you and the airbag can increasethe risk of injury in an accidentby interfering with the waythe airbag unfolds or
by being pushed into you as the airbag inflates.
-- Never place or attach accessories or other objects (such as cup holders, telephone
brackets, or even large, bulky objects) on
the doors, over or near the area marked
"AIRBAG"on the seat backrests.
-- Such objects and accessories can become dangerous projectiles and cause injury when the supplemental side airbag deploys.
-- Never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position.
-- Alwaysuse the built-in coat hooksonly for lightweight clothing. Never leave any heavy
or sharp-edged objects in the pockets that mayinterfere with side airbag deployment
and can cause personal injury in an accident.
-- Alwaysprevent the side airbags from being damaged by heavy objects knocking against or hitting the sides of the seatbacks.
-- The airbag system can only be triggered once. If the airbag has been triggered, the system mustbe replaced by an authorized Audi dealership.
-- Damage (cracks, deep scratches etc.) to the original seat covers or to the seam in the area of the side airbag module must always be repaired immediately by an authorized Audi dealer.
-- If children are seated improperly, their risk
of injury increases in the case of an accident = page 301, Child safety.
-- Never attempt to modify any components of the airbag system in any way.
-- Ina side collision, side airbags will not func-
tion properly if sensors cannotcorrectly
measureincreasing air pressure inside the

Airbag system
doors when air escapes through larger, unclosed openings in the door panel. -- Never drive with interior door trim panels
removed. -- Never drive when parts have been removed
from the inside door panel and the openings they leave have not been properly closed. -- Never drive when loudspeakersin the doors have been removed unless the speaker holes have been properly closed. -- Always makecertain that openings are covered or filled if additional speakers or other equipmentis installed in the inside door panels. -- Always have work on the doors done by an authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop.
Side curtain airbags
Pyro a) aCe oLet(s(-Mae ae LLL ky
Applies to: vehicles with side curtain airbags
The side curtain airbag system can provide supplemental protection to properly restrained occupants.
rSr) 2=ia
Fig. 245 Side curtain airbags, driver's side: side curtain airbaglocation (example)
The side curtain airbags are located on both sides of the interior above the front and rear side windows > fig. 245. They are identified by the word "AIRBAG"on the windshield frame and the center roof pillar. The side curtain airbags contain features that provide ejection mitigation to help prevent vehicle occupantsor parts of their bodies from being completely or partially ejected from the vehicle >
297

Airbag system
interior in certain side impacts and vehicle rollovers.
The side curtain airbag system supplements the safety belts and can help to reduce the risk ofinjury for occupants' heads and upper torso on the side of the vehicle thatis struck in a side collision. The side curtain airbag inflates in side impacts and only when the vehicle acceleration registered by the control unit is high enough. If this rate is below the reference value programmed into the control unit, the side curtain airbag will not be triggered, even though the car may be badly damaged as a result of the collision. It is not possible to define an airbag triggering range that will cover every possible angle of impact, since the circumstances will vary considerably between one collision and another. Important factors include, for example, the nature (hard or soft) of the impacting object, the angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc. > page 299, How side curtain airbags work.
Aside from their normal safety function, safety belts work to help keep the driver or front passenger in position in the event of a collision so that the side curtain airbags can provide protection.
The airbag system is not a substitute for your safety belt. Rather,it is part of the overall occupant restraint system in your vehicle. Alwaysremember that the airbag system can only help to protect you if you are wearing your safety belt and wearing it properly. This is another reason whyyou should always wear your safety belts, not just because the law requires you to do so => page 268, General notes.
It is important to remember that while the side curtain airbag system is designed to help reduce the likelihood of serious injuries, other injuries,
for example, swelling, bruising, friction burns
and minor abrasions can also be associated with these airbags upon deployment. Remember too, these airbags will deploy only once and onlyin certain kinds of accidents - your safety belts are always thereto offer protection.

The side curtain airbag system basically consists of:
-- The electronic control module and external side impact sensors
-- The side curtain airbags above the front and rear side windowswith ejection mitigation fea-
tures
-- The airbag indicator light in the instrument panel
The airbag system is monitored electronically to makecertain it is functioning properlyatall times. Each time you switch on the ignition, the airbag system indicator light will come on for a few seconds (self diagnostics).
The side curtain airbag is not activated:
-- if the ignition is switched off, -- in side collisions when the acceleration meas-
ured by the sensor is too low, --in rear-end collisions.
ZA WARNING
-- Safety belts and the airbag system will only provide protection when occupantsare in the proper seating position > page 58, Front seats.
-- If the airbag indicator light > page 26
comes when the vehicle is being used, have the system inspected immediately by your
authorized Audi dealer. It is possible that the airbag will inflate when it is not sup-
posed to, or will not inflate when it should.

298

Airbag system

Howside curtain airbags work
Applies to: vehicles with side curtain airbags
Side curtain airbags can work togetherwith side airbags to help reduce therisk of head and upper torso injuries for occupants who are properly restrained.
©x. g=&i)|

Ss »\

Sw.

Fig. 246 Illustration ofprinciple: Inflated side curtain air-

bags ontheleft side (example)

The side curtain airbags inflate between the occupant and the windowson the side of the vehicle that is struck in a side collision > fig. 246.
When the system is triggered, the side curtain airbag is filled with propellant gas and breaks through a seam abovethe front and rear side windowsidentified by the AIRBAGlabel. In order to help provide this additional protection, the side curtain airbag mustinflate within the blink of an eye at very high speed and with great force. The side curtain airbag could injure you if your seating position is not proper or upright or if items are located in the area where the supplemental side curtain airbag inflates. This applies especially to children > page 301.
Although theyare nota soft pillow,side curtain airbags can "cushion" the impact and in this way they can help to reducethe risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body.
A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is quite normal and does not mean there is a fire in the vehicle.

Important safety instructions on the side (teste Si)
Applies to: vehicles with side curtain airbags
Airbags are only supplementalrestraints. Always properly wear safety belts and ride in a proper seating position.
There is a lot that you and your passengers must know and do to help the safety belts and airbags do their job to provide supplemental protection.
ZA WARNING
Improperly wearing safety belts and improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used. -- Never let occupants place any parts of their
bodies in the area from which the side curtain airbag inflate. -- Always makesure that the side curtain airbags can inflate without interference. -- Use the built-in coat hooks onlyfor lightweight clothing. Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets that may interfere with airbag deployment and can cause personal injuryin a collision.
-- Never use hangers to hang clothes on the hooks.
-- Only use factory-installed sun shades or,if shadesinstalled after the vehicle leaves the factory, use only genuine Audi sun shades.
-- Never swing the sun visors over to the side windowsif things such as pens, garage door openers, hands-free speakers,etc. are attached to the sun visors. They could come loose and cause serious injuryif the side curtain airbag inflates.
--A deploying airbag inflates in a fraction of a second and with great force.
-- Never attach objects to the cover or in the deployment zone of a side curtain airbag.
-- The airbag deployment zones must be kept clear at all times. Make sure there are no objects, pets, or other persons in the space between anyvehicle occupant and any airbag at any time.
-- Do not attach any accessories to the doors.

8V2012721B)

299

Airbag system
Z\ WARNING
-- The airbag system can deploy only once. If the airbag has been triggered, the system mustbe replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop.
-- Always have work involving the side curtain airbag system, removal and installation of the airbag components,or other repairs performed bya qualified dealership. Otherwise the airbag system may not work correctly.
-- Never attempt to modify any components of the airbag system in any way.
300

Child safety

Child safety
Important information
Introduction
The rear seat is generally the safest place ina collision.
The physical principles of what happens when your vehicle is in a crash applyalso to children = page 269, What happens to occupants not wearing safety belts?. But unlike adults and teenagers, their muscles and bonesare notfully developed. In many respects children are at greater risk of serious injury in crashes than adults.
Becausechildren's bodies are not fully developed, they require restraint systems especially designed for their size, weight, and body structure. Many countries and all states of the United States and provinces of Canada havelawsrequiring the use of approved child restraint systems for infants and small children.
Ina frontal crash at a speed of 20-35 mph (30-56 km/h) the forces acting on a 13-pound (6 kg) infant will be more than 20 times the weightof the child. This means the weight of the child would suddenly be more than 260 pounds (120 kg). Under these conditions, only an appropriate child restraint properly used can reduce the risk of serious injury. Child restraints, like adult safety belts, must be used properly to be effective. Used improperly, they can increase the risk of serious injury in an accident.
All children, especially those 12 years and younger must alwaysride in the back seat properlyrestrained for their age and size. If you mustinstall a child restraint on the front passenger seat in
exceptional circumstances, be sure to read and
heed the important information and warnings = page 277. Infants and other children who are properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint that is for their size and age can benefit from the protection that supplemental side airbags provide in some kinds of crashes.
For more information please see information provided by the:

-- National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), currently at : http://www.safercar.gov (for the USA)
-- Transport Canada Information Centre, currently at: http://www.tc.gc.ca (for Canada)
Consult the child safety seat manufacturer's instructions in order to be sure the seat is right for your child's size > page 305, Important safety instructions for using child safety seats. Please be sure to read and heed all of the important information and WARNINGS about child safety, Advanced Airbags, and the installation of child restraints in this chapter.
There is a lot you need to know about the Advanced Airbags in your vehicle and how they work when infants and children in child restraints are on the front passenger seat. Becauseof the large amountof important information, we cannotrepeat it all here. We urge you to read the detailed information in this owner's manual about airbags and the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle and the very important information about transporting children on the front passenger seat. Please be sure to heed the WARNINGS - they are extremely important for your safety and the safety of your passengers, especially infants and small children.
ZA WARNING
-- Accident statistics have shownthat children are generally safer in the rear seat area than in the front seating position. Always restrain any child age 12 and under in the rear.
-- All vehicle occupants and especially children mustbe restrained properly whenever riding in a vehicle. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child could be injured by striking the interior or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or impact. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child is also at greater risk of injury or death through contact with an inflating airbag.
--A suitable child restraint properly installed and usedat one ofthe rear seating positions provides the highest degree of protection for infants and small children in mostaccident situations.

8V2012721B)

301

Child safety
ZA\ WARNING
Children on the front seat of any car even with Advanced Airbags can be seriously injured or even killed when an airbag inflates. A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat installed on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates. -- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety
seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, or
door. -- Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats
on the rear seat. -- If you mustinstall a rearward facing child
safety seat on the front passenger seat in exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rearfacing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected immediately by your Audi dealer.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Forward-facing child seats installed on the front passenger seat mayinterfere with the deployment of the airbag and cause serious personal injury to the child.
-- If exceptional circumstances require the use of a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat, the child's safety and well-being require the following special precautions to be taken: -- Always makesure that the forward-facing seat has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on a front passenger seat with a front and side airbag. -- Alwayscarefully follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child seat or infant carrier. -- Never install a child restraint without a properly attached top tether strap if the child restraint manufacturer's instructions require the top tether strap to be used.
302

-- Never put the forward-facing child restraint up against or very near the instru-
ment panel.
-- Applies to: vehicles with safety belt height adjustment: Alwaysset the safety belt upper anchorage to the adjustment position that permits proper installation in accordancewith the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
-- Always movethe front passenger seat to
the highest position in the up and down adjustment range and moveit back to the rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible, before installing the forward-facing child restraint.
-- Always makesure that the safety belt upper anchorage is behind the child restraint and not next to or in front of the child restraint so that the safety belt will be properly positioned.
-- Always makesure that nothing prevents the front passenger's seat from being moved to the rearmostposition in its fore and aft adjustment range.
-- Never place objects on the seat (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device,
power inverter or seat heater for child seats). These mayinfluencethe electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system and can also fly around in an accident and cause serious personal injury.
-- Never place or use anyelectrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic
gamesdevice, power inverter or seat heat-
er for child seats) on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket. -- Ifa seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise added to the front passenger seat, never install any child restraint system on this seat.
-- Make sure that there are no wet objects (such as a wet towel) and no water or other liquids on the front passenger seat cushion.

-- Always makesure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on.
-- If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the forward-facing child seat ina rear seating position and havethe airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer.
-- Alwaysbuckle the child seat firmly in place even if a child is not sitting in it. A loose child seat can fly around during a sudden stop or ina collision.
-- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restraint in a vehicle > page 268, Safety belts, > page 276, Airbag system and = page 301, Important information.
@ Tips
Alwaysreplace child restraints that were installed in a vehicle during a crash. Damage to a child restraint that is not visible could cause it to fail in another collision situation.
Advancedfront airbag system and children
Your vehicle is equipped with a front "Advanced Airbag System"in compliance with United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time your vehicle was manufactured.
The Advanced Airbag system in your vehicle has been certified to meet the "low-risk" requirementsfor 3- and 6-year old children on the passenger side and small adults on the driver side. The low risk deployment criteria are intended to reduce the risk of injury through interaction with the airbag that can occur, for example, by being too close to the steering wheel and instrument panel when the airbag inflates. In addition, the system has been certified to comply with the "suppression" requirements of the Safety Standard, to turn off the front airbag for infants up to 12 months who arerestrained on the front pas-

Child safety
senger seat in child restraints that are listed in the Standard.
Even though your vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Airbag system, all children, especially those 12 years and younger, should alwaysride in the back seat properly restrained for their age and size. The airbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a child in a forward-facing child safety seat. It can be a very dangerous placefor an infant or a larger child in a rearward-facing seat.
The vehicle's Advanced Airbag System has a capacitive passenger detection system in the front passenger seat cushion that can detect the presence of a baby or a child in a child restraint system on this seat.
The capacitive passenger detection system registers the changes that result in an electrical field when child, a child restraint, and a baby blanket are on the front passenger seat. The change in the measured capacitance due to the presence of a child, a child restraint, and a baby blanket on the front passenger seat is related to the child restraint system resting on the seat. The measured capacitance of a child restraint system varies depending on the type of system and specific make and model.
The electrical capacitance of the various types, makes, and models of child restraints specified by the U.S. National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)in the relevant safety standard are stored in the Advanced Airbag System control unit together with the capacitances typical of infants and a 1-year old child. When a child restraint is used on the front passenger seat with a typical 1 year-old infant, the Advanced Airbag System compares the capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system with the data stored in the electronic control unit.

Ce eMeece Phe lieteRaeeli alias Te) system

Regardless of the child restraint that you use,

makesure that it has been certified to meet

8V2012721B)

303

Child safety

Safety Standards and has been certified by its
manufacturer for use with an airbag. Always be sure that the child restraint is properly installed at one of the rear seating positions. If in excep-
tional circumstances you mustuseit on the front passenger seat, carefully read all of the informa-
tion on child safety and Advanced Airbags and heedall of the applicable WARNINGS. Make cer-
tain that the child and child restraint are correctly recognized by the capacitive passenger detec-
tion system in the front passenger seat, that the front passenger airbag is turned off, and that the airbag status is alwayscorrectly signaled by the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light.

Many types and models ofchild restraints have
been available over the years, new modelsare in-
troduced regularly incorporating new and improved designs and older models are taken out of production. Child restraints are not standardized. Child restraints of the same type typically have different weights and sizes and different "foot-
prints", the size and shape of the bottom of the
child restraint that sits on the seat, when they
are installed on a vehicle seat. These differences makeit virtually impossible to certify compliance with the requirements for advanced airbags with each and every child restraint that has ever been sold in the past or will be sold over the course of the useful life of your vehicle.

For this reason, the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration has published a list of specific type, makes and modelsofchild restraints that must be used to certify compliance of the Advanced Airbag System in your vehi-
cle with the suppression requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. Thesechild
restraints are:

Subpart A - Car bed child restraints

Model
Angel Guard Angel
Ride AA2403FOF

Manufactured on or after
September 25, 2007

Subpart B - Rear-facing child restraints

Model

Manufactured on or after

Century SmartFit 4543 December 1, 1999

Cosco Arriva 22-013PAW and base 22-999WHO

September 25, 2007

Evenflo Discovery Adjust Right 212

December 1, 1999

Evenflo First Choice 204

December 1, 1999

Graco Infant 8457

December 1, 1999

Graco Snugride

September 25, 2007

Peg Perego Primo Viag- September 25, 2007 gio SIP IMUNOOUS

SubpartC - Forward-facing and convertible child restraints

Model
Britax Roundabout E9LO2xx
Cosco Touriva 02519 Cosco Summit Deluxe
High Back Booster 22-262 Cosco High Back Booster 22-209 Evenflo Tribute V 379Xxxxx Evenflo Medallion 254 Evenflo Generations 352xxxx Graco ComfortSport Graco Toddler Safety Seat Step 2 Graco Platinum Cargo

Manufactured on or after September 25, 2007
December 1, 1999
September 25, 2007
September 25, 2007
September 25, 2007
December 1, 1999 September 25, 2007
September 25, 2007 September 25, 2007
September 25, 2007

Z\ WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury, make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light comes on and stays on whenever a child restraintis installed on the front passenger seat and the ignition is switched on.

304

8V2012721B)

-- Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does notstay on.
-- Have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer immediately.
@ Tips
The child seatslisted in categories A to C have been statically tested by Audi only for the Advanced Airbag function.
Importantsafety instructions for using child safety seats
Correct use ofchild safety seats substantially reduces the risk ofinjury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for the safety of everybody in the vehicle, especially children:
> Alwaysuse the right child safety seat for each child and alwaysuse it properly > page 307.
> Always carefully follow the child safety seat manufacturer's instructions on how to route the safety belt properly through the child safe-
ty seat.
> When using the vehicle safety belt to install a child safety seat, you mustfirst activate the convertible locking retractor on the safety belt to preventthe child safety seat from moving > page 312.
> Push the child safety seat down with your full weight to get the safety belt really tight so that the seat cannot move forward or sideways more than one inch (2.5 cm).
> Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat => page 307.
Always remember: Even though your vehicleis equipped with an Advanced Airbag system, all children, especially those 12 years and younger, should alwaysride in the back seat properly restrained for their age and size.
Z\ WARNING
Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong child safety seat or improperlyinstalling a

Child safety
child restraint increases the risk of serious personal injury and death. -- All vehicle occupants and especially children
mustbe restrained properly whenever riding in a vehicle. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child could be injured by striking the interior or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or impact. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child is also at greater risk of injury or death through contact with an inflating airbag. -- Commercially available child safety seats are required to comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 213 (in Canada CMVSS 213).
-- When buying a child restraint, select one that fits your child and the vehicle.
-- Only usechild restraint systems that fully contact the flat portion of the seat cush-
ion. The child restraint must nottip or lean to either side. Audi does not recom-
mend using child safety seats that rest on legs or tube-like frames. They do not provide adequate contact with the seat. -- Alwaysheedalllegal requirements pertaining to the installation and use ofchild safety seats and carefully follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the seat you are using.
-- Never allow children under 57 inches (1.45 meters) to wear a normal safetybelt. They must alwaysberestrained by a proper child restraint system. Otherwise, they could sustain injuries to the abdomen and neck areas during sudden braking maneuvers or accidents.
-- Never let more than one child occupya child safety seat.
-- Never let babies or older children ride ina
vehicle while sitting on the lap of another passenger.
-- Holding a child in your arms is never a substitute for a child restraint system.
-- The strongestperson could not hold the child with the forces that exist in an accident. The child will strike the interior of the vehicle and can also be struck by the passenger.
305

Child safety
--The child and the passenger can also injure each other in an accident.
Never install rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the front passenger seat. A child will be seriously injured and can be killed when the passenger airbag inflates even with an Advanced Airbag System. The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof. Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the rear seat. Makesure there is enough spacein front of the child in the child seat. If necessary, adjust the angle and position of the seat in front of the child seat. Forward-facing child safety seats installed on the front passenger's seat can interfere with the airbag when it inflates and cause serious injury to the child. Alwaysinstall forward-facing child safety seats on the rear
seat.
If exceptional circumstances require the use of a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat, the child's safety and well-being require that the following special precautions be taken:
-- Make sure the forward-facing seat has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on a front seat with a passenger front and side airbag.
-- Alwayscarefully follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child safety seat or carrier.
-- Always movethe front passenger seat to the highest position in the up and down adjustment range and moveit back to the rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible, before installing the forward-facing child restraint.
-- Always makesure that the safety belt upper anchorage is behind the child restraint and not nextto or in front of the child restraint so that the safety belt will be properly positioned.
306

-- Always makesure that nothing prevents the front passenger's seat from being moved to the rearmostposition in its fore and aft adjustment range.
-- Always makesure that the backrestis in
the upright position.
-- Never place or use anyelectrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic
gamesdevice, power inverter or seat heat-
er for child seats) on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket. -- If a seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise added to the front passenger seat, never install any child restraint system on this seat. -- Make sure that there are no wet objects (such as a wet towel) and no water or other liquids on the front passenger seat cushion. -- Never place objects on the seat (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic gamesdevice, power inverter or seat heater for child seats). These may influence the electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system and can also fly around in an accident and cause serious
personal injury.
-- Alwaysbuckle the child safety seat firmly in place even if a child is not sitting in it. A loose child safety seat can fly around during a sudden stop or ina collision.
-- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used > page 268, Safety belts, => page 276, Airbag system and > page 301, Child safety.
ZA WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury, make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light comes on and stays on whenever a child restraint is installed on the front passenger seat and the ignition is switched on. -- Take the child restraint off the front passen-
ger seat and install it properly at one of the
rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not stay on.

-- Have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer immediately.
STUM eet iaeel heel ae Lee

Child safety
-- Never let anyone sit at the center rear seat-
ing position* if the center rear safety belt has been routed around a rear head restraint.
Child safety seats
Seat)
Babies andinfants up to about one year old and 20 lbs. or 9 kg need special rearward-facing child restraints that support the back, neck and head ina crash.

B4G-0466
B4L-1424

Fig. 247 Schematic overview: keep unused safety belts
away from childrenin child safety seats. @ - outer rear safety belt, - center rear safety belt*
If a child safety seat is used on the rear bench,
especially with LATCH universal lower anchorag-
es, the unused safety belts must be secured so that the child in the child restraint cannot reach them> A.
-- Guide the safety belt webbings @ and (®)* be-
hind the head restraint of the seat where the child restraint is installed > fig. 247. When doing so, do not engage the convertible locking retractor! You should not hear a "clicking" sound when winding up the safety belt. -- Let the belt retractor wind up the safety belt webbing.
ZA\ WARNING
A child in a child safety seat installed with the LATCH lower anchorages or with the standard safety belt or a child in a booster seat on the rear seat could play with unused rear seat safety belts and become entangled. This could cause the child serious personal injury and even death. -- Always secure unusedrear seat safety belts
out of reach ofchildren in child seats such as by properly routing them around the head restraint of the seat wherethe child restraint is installed. -- Never activate the convertible locking retractor when routing the safety belts around the head restraints.

Fig. 248 Schematic overview: rearward-facinginfantseat, properlyinstalled on the rear seat
> When using the vehicle safety belt to install a child safety seat, you mustfirst activate the convertible locking retractor on the safety belt to prevent the child safety seat from moving = page 312 or install the seat using the LATCH attachments.
>» Push the child safety seat down with your full weight to get the safety belt really tight so that the seat cannot moveforward or sideways more than one inch (2.5 cm).
> Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat => page 307.
Infants up to about one year (20 lbs. or 9 kg) are best protected in special infant carriers and child safety seats designed for their age group. Many experts believe that infants and small children should ride only in special restraints in which the child faces the back of the vehicle. These infant seats support the baby's back, neck and head ina crash fig. 248.
The airbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous place for achildto >

307

8V2012721B)

Child safety
ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a child in a forward-facing child seat. It is a very dangerous place for an infant or a larger child in a rearward-facing seat.
ZA WARNING
Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong child safety seat or improperlyinstalling a child restraint increases the risk of serious personal injury and death in a crash. -- Never install rear-facing child safety seats or
infant carriers on the front passenger seat even with an Advanced Airbag System. A child will be seriously injured and can be killed when the inflating airbag hits the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and smashes the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof > page 277, Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know. -- Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the rear seat. -- Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the forward-facing direction. Such restraints are designed for the special needs ofinfants and very small children and cannot protect them properlyif the seat is forward-facing. -- If you mustinstall a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer. -- Never place or use any electrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic
games device, power inverter or seat heater
for child seats) on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12-volt socketor the cigarette lighter socket. -- If a seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise added to the front passenger seat, never install any child restraint system on this seat.
308

-- Make sure that there are no wet objects (such as a wet towel) and no water or other liquids on the front passenger seat cushion.
-- Never place objects on the seat (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats). These may influence the electrical capacitance measured bythe capacitive passenger detection system and can alsofly around in an accident and cause serious personal injury.
-- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used > page 268, Safety belts, => page 276, Airbag system and > page 301, Important information.
Convertible child safety seats Properly used convertible child safety seats can help protect toddlers and children over age one who weigh between 20 and 40 lbs. (9 and 18 kg) inacrash.
Fig. 249 Schematic overview: installation of the attachments applicable to a LATCH seat
Fig. 250 Schematic overview:installation of the seat using the vehicle's safety belt system
>» When using the vehicle safety belt to install a child safety seat, you mustfirst activate the >

B4L-1426

B4L-1425

8V2012721B)

convertible locking retractor on the safety belt to preventthe child safety seat from moving = page 312 or install the seat using the LATCH attachments. > Push the child safety seat down with your full weight to get the safety belt really tight so that the seat cannot move forward or sideways more than one inch (2.5 cm) > page 312. > If the child safety seat is equipped with a tether strap, attach it to the tether anchors => page 317. > Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat => page 307.
A toddler or child is usually too large for an infant restraint if it is more than one year old and weighs more than 20 lbs. (9 kg).
Toddlers and children who are older than one year up to about 4 years old and weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) up to 40 lbs. (18 kg) must always be properly restrained in a child safety seat certified for their size and weight > fig. 249 and > fig. 250.
The airbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a child in a forward-facing child safety seat. Itisa very dangerous place for an infantor a larger child in a rearward-facing seat.
ZX WARNING
Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong child safety seat or improperlyinstalling a child restraint increases the risk of serious personal injury and death in a collision or other emergencysituation.
-- Children on the front seat of any car, even
with Advanced Airbags, can be seriouslyinjured or even killed when an airbag inflates. A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat installed on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates --- even with an Advanced Airbag System. -- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child

Child safety
against the backrest, center arm rest, door or roof. -- Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats on the rear seat. -- Ifyou mustinstall a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer. --The rear side of the child safety seat should be positioned as close as possible to the backrest on the vehicle seat. -- For adjustable head restraints: adjust or removethe rear seat head restraint if it is difficult to install the child seat with the head restraint in place > page 60. Install the head restraint again immediately once the child seat is removed. Driving without head restraints or with head restraints that are not properly adjusted increases the risk of serious or fatal neck injury dramatically. -- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrainedin a vehicle is being used > page 268, Safety belts, = page 276, Airbag system and > page 301, Important information.
Z\ WARNING
If exceptional circumstances require the use of a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat, the child's safety and wellbeing require that the following special precautions be taken: -- Make sure the forward-facing seat has been
designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on a front seat with a passenger front and side airbag. -- Alwaysfollow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child safety seat or infant carrier. -- Always movethe front passenger seat to the highest position in the up and down adjustment range and moveit back to the rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag
309

Child safety
as possible, before installing the forwardfacing child restraint. -- Always makesure that the safety belt upper anchorage is behind the child restraint and not next to or in front of the child restraint so that the safety belt will be properly positioned. -- Always makesure that nothing prevents the front passenger's seat from being moved to the rearmostposition in its fore and aft adjustment range. -- Always makesure the backrest is in an upright position. -- Never place or use anyelectrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats) on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12-volt socketor the cigarette lighter socket. -- If a seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise added to the front passenger seat, never install any child restraint system on this seat. -- Makesure that there are no wet objects (such as a wet towel) and no water or other liquids on the front passenger seat cushion. -- Never place objects on the seat (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats). These mayinfluencethe electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system and can alsofly around in an accident and cause serious personal injury. -- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on and stayson all the time whenever the ignition is switched on. -- If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the forward-facing child seat at a seating position on the rear seat and have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer. -- Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not stay on whenever the ignition is switched on.
310

Booster seats and safety belts
Properly used booster seats can help protect children weighing between about 40 lbs. and 80 lbs. (18 kg and 36 kg) who areless than 4 ft. 9 in. (57 inches/1.45 meters) tall.
Fig. 251 Rear seat:child properly restrained in a booster
seat
The vehicle's safety belts alone will not fit most children until they are at least 4 ft. 9 in. (57 inches/1.45 meters) tall and weigh about 80 lbs. (36 kg). Booster seats raise these children up so that the safety belt will pass properly over the stronger parts of their bodies and the safety belt can help protect them in a crash. > Do not use the convertible locking retractor
when using the vehicle's safety belt to restrain a child on a booster seat. > The shoulder belt must lie as close to the center of the child's collar bone as possible and must lie flat and snug on the upper body.It must never lie across the throat or neck. The lap belt must lie across the pelvis and never across the stomach or abdomen. Make sure the belt lies flat and snug. Pull on the belt to tighten if necessary. > Applies to: vehicles with safety belt height adjustment: If you must transport an older child in a booster seat on the front passenger seat, you can use the safety belt height adjustment to help adjust the shoulder portion properly. > Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat => page 307.
Children up to at least 8 years old (over 40 Lbs or 18 kg) are best protected in child safety seats designed for their age and weight. Experts say that the skeletal structure, particularly the pelvis, of >

B4H-0275

Child safety

these children is not fully developed, and they must not usethe vehicle safety belts without a suitable child restraint.
It is usually best to put these children in appropriate booster seats. Be sure the booster seat meetsall applicable safety standards.
Booster seats raise the seating position of the child and reposition both the lap and shoulder parts of the safety belt so that they pass across the child's body in the right places. The routing of the belt over the child's bodyis very important for the child's protection, whether or not a booster seat is used. Children age 12 and under must alwaysride in the rear seat.
Children who are at least 4 ft. 9 in. (57 inches/ 1.45 meters) tall can generally use the vehicle's three point lap and shoulder belts. Never use the lap belt portion of the vehicle's safety belt alone to restrain any child, regardless of how big the child is. Always remember that children do not have the pronouncedpelvic structure required for the proper function of lap belt portion of the vehicle's three point lap and shoulder belts. The child's safety absolutely requires that a lap belt portion of the safety belt be fastened snugly and as low as possible around the pelvis. Never let the lap belt portion of the safety belt pass over the child's stomach or abdomen.
In a crash, airbags must inflate within a blink of an eye and with considerable force. In order to do its job, the airbag needs room toinflate so that it will be there to protect the occupant as the occupant moves forwardinto the airbag.
A vehicle occupant who is out of position and too close to the airbag gets in the wayof an inflating airbag. When an occupant is too close, he or she will be struck violently and will receive serious or possibly even fatal injury.
In order for the airbag to offer protection, it is important that all vehicle occupants, especially any children, who mustbe in the front seat because of exceptional circumstances, be properly restrained and as far away from the airbag as possible. By keeping room between the child's body and the front of the passenger compartment, the airbag can inflate completely and pro-

vide supplemental protection in certain frontal collisions.
ZA WARNING
Not using a booster seat, using the booster seat improperly, incorrectly installing a booster seat or using the vehicle safety belt improperly increasesthe risk of serious personal injury and deathin a collision or other emergency situation. To help reduce the risk of serious personal injury and/or death: --The shoulder belt mustlie as close to the
center of the child's collar bone as possible and mustlie flat and snug on the upper body. It must never lie across the throat or
neck. The lap belt mustlie across the pelvis and never across the stomach or abdomen. Makesure that the belt lies flat and snug. Pull on the belt to tighten if necessary. -- Failure to properly route safety belts over a child's body will cause severeinjuries in an accident or other emergencysituation => page 268.
--The rear side of the child safety seat should be positioned as close as possible to the backrest on the vehicle seat.
-- For adjustable head restraints: adjust or removethe rear seat head restraint if it is difficult to install the child seat with the head restraint in place > page 60. Install the head restraint again immediately once the child seat is removed. Driving without head restraints or with head restraints that are not properly adjusted increases the risk of serious or fatal neck injury dramatically.
-- Never let a child put the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back, because it could
cause severeinjuries in a crash.
-- Children on the front seat of anycar, even with Advanced Airbags, can be seriouslyinjured or even killed when an airbag inflates.
-- Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat, for examplethe frontseat.
-- Never let a child ride in the cargo area of your vehicle.
-- Always remember that a child leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way during an accident can be struck by

8V2012721B)

311

Child safety
a deploying airbag. This will result in serious personal injury or death. -- If you mustinstall a booster seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light must come on and stay on, whenever the ignition is switched on. -- If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not come on and stay on, perform the checks described > page 288, Monitoring the AdvancedAirbag System. -- Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not stay on whenever the ignition is switched on. -- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used > page 268, Safety belts, => page 276, Airbag system and > page 301,
Important information.
Securing child safety seats
Tate Ral CReee RRLlad erat
Safety belts for the rear seats and the front passengercan be locked with the convertible locking retractor to properly secure child safety seats.
The safety belts emergency locking retractors for the rear seats safety belts and for the front passenger's seat safety belt have a convertible locking retractor for child restraints. The safety belt mustbe locked so that belt webbing cannot unreel. The retractor can be activated to lock the safety belt and prevent the safety belt webbing from loosening up during normal driving. A child safety seat can only be properly installed when the safety belt is locked so that the child and child safety seat will stay in place.
Always remember: Even though your vehicleis equipped with an Advanced Airbag system, all children, especially those 12 years and younger, should alwaysride in the back seat properly restrained for their age and size.

ZA WARNING
Improperly installed child safety seats increase the risk of serious personal injury and death in a collision.
-- Always makesure that the safety belt retractor is locked when installing a child safety seat. An unlocked safety belt retractor cannot hold the child safety seat in place during normal driving or in a crash.
-- Alwaysbuckle the child safety seat firmly in place even if a child is not sitting in it. A loose child safety seat can fly around during a sudden stop or in collision.
-- Always makesure that the rear seat backrest to which the center rear safety belt* is attached is securely latched whenever the rear center safety belt is being used to secure a child restraint.
-- If the backrest is not securely latched, the child and the child restraint will be thrown forward together with the backrest and will strike parts of the vehicle interior. The child can be seriously injured or killed.
-- Never install rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the front passenger seat. A child will be seriously injured and can be killed when the passenger airbag inflates.
-- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, door
or roof.
-- Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the rear seat.
--Forward-facing child safety seats or infant carriers installed on the front passenger's seat mayinterfere with the deploymentof the airbag and cause serious injury to the child.
--Itis safer to install a forward-facing child safety seat on the rear seat.
-- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used > page 301. Special precautions apply when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat > page 277, Child

312

restraints on the front seat - some impor-
tant things to know.
ZA WARNING
Always take special precautions if you must install a forward or rearward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat in exceptional situations: -- Whenever a forward or rearward-facing
child restraint is installed on the front passenger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light must come on and stay on whenever the ignition is switched on. -- If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not come on and stay on, perform the checks described > page 288, Monitoring the AdvancedAirbag System. -- Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not stay on whenever the ignition is switched on. -- Improper installation of child restraints can reduce their effectiveness or even prevent them from providing any protection. -- An improperly installed child restraint can interfere with the airbag as it deploys and seriously injure or even kill the child. -- Alwayscarefully follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child safety seator carrier. -- After checking to makesure that the child restraint is properly installed, make certain that the child restraint is correctly recognized by the capacitive passenger detection system in the front passenger seat and that the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lightsignals the correct front passenger frontal airbag
status.
ZA WARNING
Forward-facing child restraints: -- Always makesure the forward-facing seat
has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on front seat with a passenger front and side airbag.

Child safety
-- Never put the forward-facing child restraint
up, against or very near the instrument pan-
el -- Always movethe front passenger seat to the
highest position in the up and down adjustment range and moveit back to the rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible, before installing the forwardfacing child restraint. -- Always makesure that the safety belt upper anchorage is behind the child restraint and not next to or in front of the child restraint so that the safety belt will be properly positioned. -- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on.
Z\ WARNING
Rearward-facing child restraints: --Achild in a rearward-facing child safety seat
installed on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can bekilled if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. -- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof.
-- Alwaysbe especially careful if you must install a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat in exceptional cir-
cumstances.
-- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on.
-- If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does
not come on and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat ina rear seating position and havethe airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer.

8V2012721B)

313

Child safety

Activating the convertible locking retractor
Use the convertible locking retractor to secure a child restraint.
Always heed the child safety seat manufacturer's instructions when installing a child restraint in your vehicle. To activate the convertible locking retractor:
> Place the child restraint on a seat, preferably on the rear seat.
> Slowly pull the belt all the way out. > Route it around or through the child restraint
belt path > /\.
> Push the child safety seat down with your full weight to get the safety belt really tight.
> Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for that seating position.
> Guide the safety belt back into the retractor until the belt lies flat and snug on the child safety
seat.
> You should hear a "clicking" noise as the belt winds back into the inertia reel. Test the convertible locking retractor by pulling on the belt. You should no longer be ableto pull the belt out of the retractor. The convertible locking retractor is now activated.
> Make sure that the red release button is facing away from the child restraint so that it can be unbuckled quickly.
> Pull on the belt to make sure the safety belt is properly tight and fastened so that the seat cannot move forward or sideways more than
one inch (2.5 cm).
ZA\ WARNING
Using the wrong child restraint or an improperly installed child restraint can cause serious personal injury or death in a crash. -- Always makesurethat the safety belt retrac-
tor is locked when installing a child safety seat. An unlocked safety belt retractor cannot hold the child safety seat in place during normal driving or in a crash. -- Always buckle the child safety seat firmly in place even if a child is not sitting in it. A loose child safety seat can fly around during a sudden stop or ina crash.

-- Always makesure the seat backrest to which the child restraint is installed is in an upright position and securely latched into
place and cannotfold forward. Otherwise,
the seatback with the child safety seat attached to it could fly forward in the event of an accident or other emergencysituation.
-- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is
being used > page 301. Special precautions apply when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat > page 277, Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know.

Deactivating the convertible locking
delade) g
The convertible locking retractorfor child restraints will be deactivated automatically when the belt is wound all the way backinto the re-
tractor.

> Press the red button on the safety belt buckle. The belt tongue will pop out of the buckle.
> Guide the safety belt all the way back intoits stowed position.

Alwayslet the safety belt retract completely into its stowed position. The safety belt can now be
used as an ordinary safety belt without the convertible locking retractor for child restraints.

If the convertible locking retractor should be activated inadvertently, the safety belt must be un-
fastened and guided completely back intoits stowed position to deactivate this feature. If the
convertible locking retractor is not deactivated, the safety belt will gradually become tighter and
uncomfortable to wear.

ZA\WARNING

Improperly installed child safety seats in-

crease the risk of serious personal injury and

death in collision.

-- Never unfasten the safety belt to deactivate

the convertible locking retractor for child re-

straints while the vehicle is moving. You

314

Child safety

would notbe restrained and could be seriously injured in an accident. -- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used > page 301. Special precautions apply when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat > page 277, Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know.
LATCH system (Lower anchorages and tethers for children)
CCR rae ayea eleee Liem rey ECM ACELem oa CRT1-18]
To provide a simpler and more practicable way to attach the child restraint on the vehicle seat, Federal regulations require special lower anchorages in vehicles and devices on new child restraints to attach to the vehicle anchorages.
In the United States, the combination of the tether anchorages and the lower anchorages is now generally called the LATCH system for "Lower Anchorages and Tethers for Children". In Canada, the terms "top tether" with "Lower universal anchorages"(or "Lower universal anchorage bars") are used to describe the system.
In other countries the term "ISOFIX"is used to describe the lower anchorages.
Forward-facing child restraints manufactured after September 1, 1999, are required by U.S. federal regulations to comply with new child head movement performance requirements. These new performance requirements make a tether necessary on most new child seats.
Installing a child restraint that requires a top tether without one can seriously impair the performanceof the child restraint and its ability to protect the child in a collision. Installing a child restraint that requires a top tether without the top tether may be a violation of state law.
Child restraint manufacturers offer LATCH lower anchorages on their child seats with hook-on or

push-on connectors attached to adjustable
straps.
In addition to the LATCH lower anchorages, these child restraint systems usually require the use of
tether straps to help keep the child restraint firmly in place. Some child restraints may require both the LATCH lower anchorages as well as the vehicle safety belt for proper installation. This concurrentuse is allowed as long as it does notinterfere with either attachment system or the adjoining seating positions' vehicle safety belts, if so applicable.
ZA\ WARNING
Improper installation of child restraints will increase the risk of injury and death in a crash. -- Alwaysfollow the instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the child restraint you intend to install in your vehicle. -- Never install a child restraint without a properly attached top tether strap if the child restraint manufacturer's instructions require the top tether strap to be used. -- Improper use of child restraint LATCH lower anchorage points can lead toinjury in a collision. The LATCH lower anchorage points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. -- Never mount twochild restraint systems on one LATCH lower anchorage point. -- Never secure or attach any luggage or other item to the LATCH lower anchorages.
oY}a fe)a)
Fig. 252 Schematic overview: LATCH anchorage pointlocations (example)

8V2012721B)
B8V-0406

315

Child safety
The illustration showsthe seating locations in your vehicle which are equipped with the lower anchorages system.
Description The lower anchorage positions are marked for quick locating.

All child restraints manufactured after September 1, 2002, must have lower anchorage attachments for the LATCH system.
Please remember that the lower anchorage points are only intendedfor installation and attachment of child restraints specifically certified for use with LATCH lower anchorages. Child restraints that are not equipped with the lower anchorage attachmentscan still be installed in compliance with the child restraint manufacturer's instructions on using vehicle safety belts.

[>
Fig. 254 Rear seats: lower anchorage bracketlocations
Lower anchorages
The circular markings on the rear seat help you to identify the location of lower anchoragesfor the two outboard seating positions > fig. 253. The LATCH lower universal anchorage attachment points are between the rear seatback and rear seat cushion.
Removethe covers > fig. 253 to access the lower anchorage attachment points.
The lower anchorage attachment pointsarevisible > fig. 254.
Lower anchoragessecurethe child restraint in the seat without using the vehicle's safety belts. Anchoragesprovide a secure and easy-to-use attachment and minimize the possibility of improper child restraint installation.

Improper use of LATCH lower anchorages can cause serious personal injury in an accident. -- Alwayscarefully follow the child restraints
manufacturer's instructions for proper installation of the child restraint and proper use of the lower anchorages or safety belts in your vehicle. -- Never secure or attach any luggage or other items to the LATCH lower anchorages. -- Always read and heed the important information aboutchild restraints in this chapter and WARNINGS & page 301, Child safety.
Installing a child restraint with LATCH lower anchorages
Applies to: vehicles with Top Tether
Wheneveryouinstall a child restraint always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Fig. 255 Lower anchorages: proper mounting

B4L-1434

316

Child safety

B8V-0407

Mounting
> Make sure the seatback of the rear seat bench is in the upright position and securely latched in place.
» Attach both hook-on connectorswith the spring catch release on the child safety seat onto the LATCH lower anchorage so that the connectors lock into place > fig. 255.
> Pull on the connector attachments to make sure they are properly attached to the LATCH lower anchorage.
> Pull straps tight following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Releasing
> Loosen the tension on the straps following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
> Depress the spring catches to release the anchorage hooks from the lower anchorages.
Remember: Use tether straps to help keep the child restraint firmlyin place.

and the installation of child restraint systems > page 301, Child safety. Tether anchors and tether straps
Applies to: Sedan
Fig. 256 Tether anchors: recessflaps behind the rear seatbacks

B8V-0562

A WARNING
Improper use of the LATCH system can increase the risk of serious personal injury and deathin an accident. -- These anchors were developed onlyfor child
safety seats using the "LATCH" system. -- Never attach other child safety seats, belts
or other objects to these anchors. -- Always makesure that you hear a click when
latching the seat in place. If you do not hear a click the seat is not secure and couldfly forward and hit the interior of the vehicle, or be ejected from the vehicle.
ZA\ WARNING
Improper installation ofchild restraints will increase the risk of injury in an accident. -- Alwaysfollowthe child restraint system
manufacturer's instructions for proper installation of the child restraint system and proper useof tether straps as well as the lower anchorages or safety belts in your vehicle. -- Always read and heed the importantinformation and WARNINGSabout child safety

Applies to: Cabriolet/Sportback Fig. 257 Tether anchors: recess flaps behind the rear seatbacks
Applies to: Sedan: The tether anchorsfor the rear seating positions are located in recesses in the rear windowshelf © fig. 256
Applies to: Cabriolet/Sportback: The tether anchorsfor the rear seating positions are located on the backside of the rear seatbacks > fig. 257.
A tether is a straight or V-shaped strap that attaches the top part of a child restraint to special anchorage pointsin the vehicle.
The purpose of the tether is to reduce the forward movementofthe child restraint in a crash, in order to help reduce the risk of head injury that could be caused bystriking the vehicle interior.
Forwardfacing child restraints manufactured after September 1, 1999, are required by U.S. federal regulations to comply with new child head movement performance requirements. These

8V2012721B)

317

B4L-1435

B8V-0565

Child safety
new performance requirements make a tether necessary on most new child safety seats.
ZXWARNING
Improper installation of child restraints will increase the risk of injury and deathin a crash. -- Always follow the instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the child restraint you intend to install in your Audi. -- Improper useofchild restraint anchors(including tether anchors) can lead to injury in a collision. The anchors are designed to withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. -- Never mount twochild restraint systems on one LATCH lower anchor point. -- Never attach twochild restraint systems to one tether strap or tether anchorage. -- Never attach a tether strap to a tie-down hook in the luggage compartment. -- Never usechild restraint tether anchorages to secure safety belts or other kinds of occupant restraints. -- Never secure or attach any luggage or other items to the LATCH lower anchoragesor to the tether anchors. -- If you mustinstall a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer.

Installing the upper tether strap on the anchorage
Applies to: Sedan Fig. 258 Tether strap: proper routing and mounting
Applies to: Cabriolet/Sportback Fig. 259 Tether strap: proper routing and mounting. @ center, @) outside
Installing the tether strap
Applies to: Sedan
> Release or deploy the tether strap on the child restraint according to the child restraint manu-
facturer's instructions. > Guide the upper tether strap under the rear
head restraint (raise the head restraint if necessary) > fig. 258. For child restraints with Vtether straps, always make sure that the head restraint guide rods do notinterfere with any part of the top tether strap.

318

Child safety

> Tilt the recess flap up to expose the anchor bracket.
> Attach the tether strap anchorage hook into the opening of the tether anchorage.
> Pull on the tether strap hook so that the spring catch of the hook engages.
> Tighten the tether strap firmly following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Installing the tether strap
Applies to: Cabriolet/Sportback
> Release or deploy the tether strap on the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
> Applies to: Sportback: Unlock the backrest and fold it slightly forward > page 66, Increasing the cargo area and locate the tether anchor behind the rear seat backrest.
> Applies to: Cabriolet: Unlock the backrest and fold it slightly forward > page 66, Passthrough and locate the tether anchor behind the rear seat backrest.
> Guide the upper tether strap under the rear head restraint (raise the head restraint if necessary) > fig. 259. For child restraints with Vtether straps, always make sure that the head restraint guide rods do not interfere with any part of the top tether strap.
> Attach the tether strap anchorage hook into the opening of the tether anchorage.
> Pull on the tether strap hook so that the spring catch of the hook is engaged.
> Straighten the backrest back up into its upright position and press it firmly into the locking mechanism.
> Tighten the tether strap firmly following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Releasing the tether strap
> Loosen the tension on the straps following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
> Depress the spring catch on the hook and release it from the anchorage.
Remember: Use tether straps to help keep the
child restraint firmly in place.

ZA WARNING
Improper use of the LATCH system can increase the risk of serious personal injury and death in an accident. -- These anchors were developed onlyfor child
safety seats using the "LATCH" system.
-- Never attach other child safety seats, belts or other objects to these anchors.
-- Always makesure that you hear a click when latching the seat in place. If you do not hear a click the seat is not secure and could fly forward and hit the interior of the vehicle, or be ejected from the vehicle.
ZA\WARNING
Improper installation ofchild restraints will increase the risk of injury in an accident. -- Alwaysfollow the child restraint system
manufacturer's instructions for proper installation of the child restraint system and proper use of tether straps as well as the lower anchoragesor safety belts in your vehicle. -- Alwaysread and heed the important information and WARNINGS aboutchild safety and the installation of child restraint systems > page 301, Child safety.

Using tether straps on rearward-facing child restraints

Currently, few rear-facing child restraint systems
come with a tether. Please read and heed the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions carefully to determine how to properlyin-
stall the tether.

Z\ WARNING

A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat

installed on the front passenger seat will be

seriously injured and can be killedif the front

airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag

System.

-- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety

seat or infant carrier with great force and

will smash the child safety seat and child

8V2012721B)

319

Child safety
against the backrest, center armrest, or door. -- If you mustinstall a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer.
Additional information
Sources of information aboutchild adelelated ae)
There are a number of sources of additional infor-
mation about child restraint selection, installation and use:
NHTSAadvises that the best child safety seat is the one that fits your child and fits in your vehicle, and that you will use correctly and consistently.
Try before you buy!
U.S. National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration Tel.: 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) http://www.nhtsa.gov http://www.safercar.gov
National SAFE KIDS Campaign Tel.: (202) 662-0600 http://www.safekids.org
Safety BeltSafe U.S.A. Tel.: (800) 745-SAFE (English) Tel.: (800) 747-SANO (Spanish) http://www.carseat.org
Transport Canada Information Centre Tel.: 1-800-333-0371 or call 1-613-998-8616 if you are in the Ottawa area http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htm
Audi Customer Experience Center Tel.: (800) 822-2834
320

Checking and Filling
Fuel
ahem elt)
The correct gasoline gradeis stated on the inside of the fuel filler door.
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter and mustonly be driven with unleaded gasoline.
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. For additional information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
The individual gasoline grades are differentiated by octane ratings. This value is given with (R +M)/2 equating to AKI or in RON.
The headings below match the sticker in the fuel filler door.
UNLEADED FUEL ONLYMIN. (R+M)/2 87
Regular / MIN. RON 91 Regular
Use regular gasoline with minimum 87 AKI / 91 RON > ©.
Audi recommends using premium gasoline with minimum 91 AKI / 95 RON to achieve the rated horsepower and torque.
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY PREMIUM MIN. (R +M)/2 91 / SUPER MIN. RON 95
Using premium gasoline with minimum 91 AKI / 95 RON is recommended.
If premium gasoline is notavailable, you can also use regular gasoline 87 AKI / 91 RON. However this does reduce the engine power slightly.
C) Note
-- Filling the tank just one time with leaded fuel or other metallic additives will cause permanent deterioration to the catalytic
converter function.
-- When gasoline with an octane rating that is too low is used, high speeds or heavy engine load can lead to engine damage.

Checking and Filling

@ Tips
The vehicle maybe filled with fuel that has a higher octane rating than whatis required by the engine.

Gasoline mixture

Gasoline with alcohol or MTBE (Methyl-TertButyl-Ether)
You can use unleaded gasoline mixed with alcohol or MTBE (generally labeled as oxygenated compounds)as long as the fuel meets the following conditions:

Gasoline with methanol content (methylalcohol or methanol)
-- Anti-Knock Indexis at least 87 AKI --No more than 3% methanol -- More than 2% solvent

Gasoline with ethanol content (ethyl alcohol or ethanol)
-- Anti-Knock Indexis at least 87 AKI --No more than 15% ethanol

Gasoline with MTBE content
-- Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI --No more than 15% MTBE

Gasoline adapted to the season

Manygasoline fuels are adapted to the seasons.
When the season changes, we recommend refu-
eling at high-traffic gas stations. It is morelikely that the gasoline will be suitable for the season there.

() Note

-- Gasoline with methanol content that does

not meetthe specified conditions may cause

corrosion damage and damage toplastic or

rubber componentsin the fuel system.

-- Do not use gasoline that does not meet the

specifications.

-- If you are unable tofind outif a specific gas-

oline mixture meets the specifications, ask

the gas station operator or their fuel suppli-

er.

8V2012721B)

321

Checking and Filling
-- Do not use any gasoline mixture whose composition cannotbe identified.
-- Audi does not assume anyresponsibility for damage to the fuel system or for performance problems caused by using gasoline mixtures different from those specified. This type of damage also doesnotfall under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty or under the emissions control system warranty.
-- If you notice a higher fuel consumption or poor handling or performance problems due to such gasoline mixtures, we recommend fueling with unblended gasoline.
Gasoline additives
An important issue for many automobile manufacturers is combustion residue in the engine that results from the use of certain fuels.
Although typesof gasoline differ depending on the manufacturer, there are similarities. Certain substances in the gasoline may cause deposits in the engine. Additives in the gasoline that should keep the engine and fuel system clean do notall function equally.
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. For additional information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
If you use incorrect fuels over a long period of time, the maximum engine performance may be impaired by combustion residue.
@) Note
Damage or malfunctions caused by the use of incorrect types of gasoline are not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

B8V-0111

Refueling
Fueling procedure

Applies to: vehicles without plug-in hybrid drive Fig. 260 right rear side of the vehicle: opening the fuel
filler door

B8V-0110

Fig. 261 Fuel filler door with attached fuel cap
Plug-in hybrid drive*: refer to the information under > page 101, Refueling.
The fuel filler door is unlocked or locked by the central locking system.
» Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive: Note the information on > page 101, Opening the fuelfiller door.
> Applies to: vehicles without plug-in hybrid drive: To open, press on the left side of the fuel filler door > fig. 260.
> Unscrew the tank cap counterclockwise. > Place the cap from above on the open fuel filler
door > fig. 261. > Insert the fuel pump nozzle all the way into the
fuel filler neck. > Begin fueling. Once the fuel pump nozzle turns
off the first time, the fuel tank is full. Do not continue fueling, or else the expansion space in the tank will be filled with fuel. > After the fuel pump has switched off, wait five seconds before removing the nozzle to allow >

322

the rest of the fuel to finish dripping into the fuel tank. > Turn the fuel cap clockwise until it clicks into place. > Close the fuel filler door and then press on the left side until it latches.
The correct fuel type for your vehicle can be found on label located on the inside of the fuel filler door. For additional information on fuel, see => page 321.
For the tank capacity in your vehicle, refer to the Technical Data > page 395.
To reduce the risk of fuel leaking out or vapors escaping, make surethat the fuel tank is closed correctly. Otherwise the ES indicator light will
turn on.
If the central locking system malfunctions, there is a fuel filler door emergency release => page 324.
ZA WARNING
Improper fueling procedures and improper handling of fuel can lead to explosions,fires,
severe burns, and other injuries. -- Do not smoke. Keep away from open flames.
-- The ignition must be switched off when refueling.
-- Mobile devices, radio devices, and other radio equipment should always be switched
off when refueling. Electromagnetic rays could cause sparks and start fire. -- If you do not insert the fuel pump nozzleall
the wayintothe filler tube, then fuel can
leak out. Spilled fuel can ignite and start a fire. -- Never get into the vehicle when refueling. If there is an exceptional situation where you
must enter the vehicle, close the door and
touch a metal surface before touching the fuel pump nozzle again. This will reduce the risk of electrostatic discharge that can cause flying sparks. Sparks can start a fire when refueling.

Checking and Filling

ZA WARNING
Transporting fuel containers inside the vehicle is not recommended. Fuel could leak out of the container and ignite, especially during an
accident. This can cause explosions,fires, and
injuries. --If you must transportfuel in a fuel contain-
er, note the following:
-- Alwaysplace the fuel container on the ground beforefilling. Never fill the fuel container with fuel whileit is inside or on the vehicle. Electrostatic discharge can occur while refueling and the fuel vapors could ignite.
-- When using fuel containers made of metal, the fuel pump nozzle must alwaysremain in contact with the container to reduce the risk of static charge.
-- Insert the fuel pump nozzle as far as possible into the filler opening while refueling.
-- Follow the applicable legal regulations in the country whereyou are driving when using, storing and transporting fuel containers.
-- Makesure that the fuel container meets the industry standards, for example ANSI or ASTM F852-86.
C) Note
-- Removefuel that has overflowed onto any vehicle components immediately to reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle.
-- Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty. The irregular supply of fuel that results from that can cause engine misfires. Uncombusted fuel may enter the exhaust system and increase the risk of damage to the catalytic converter.

@) For the sake of the environment

Do notoverfill the fuel tank, or fuel could leak

out when the vehicle is warming up.

8V2012721B)

)) Depending on the engine and country

323

Checking and Filling
The fuel filler door on your vehicle does not lock if you lock the vehicle from the inside using the central locking switch.
Fuel can age and maylead to problems when starting. Audi recommends replacing the fuel in your vehicle within six months. Fuel filler door emergency release If the central locking system malfunctions, the fuel filler door can be unlocked manually.
Applies to: version 1 Fig. 262 Right rear luggage compartment: emergencyrelease (example)

B8V-0112

carefully in the direction of the arrow > fig. 262
>©.
> Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to open it > page 322,fig. 260.
Plug-in hybrid drive*: read and follow the instruc-
tions under > page 101.
Emergencyrelease behind the rear seat backrest
Applies to: version 2
The emergencyrelease is located behind the right rear seat.
The pull cable for the emergencyrelease is located on the cover.
> To access the emergencyrelease, fold the right backrest forward > page 66.
> Removethe cover [W) from thetrim panel.
> To release the fuel filler door, pull the cover in
the direction of the arrow carefully at a 45° angle toward the center of the vehicle > fig. 263 >)The tab on the cover mustpoint forward in the direction you are pulling when pulling on the cover. > Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to open it > page 322,fig. 260.

Applies to:version 2 Fig. 263 Rear ofthe vehicle: right rear seat folded forward
Emergencyreleasein the luggage compartment
Applies to: version 1
The emergency opening mechanism is located behind the right side trim panel in the luggage compartment. >» Removethe cover in the side panel. > To unlock the fuel filler door, loosen the loop
from the retainer and then pull on the loop
324

Only pull on the loop/cover until you feel resistance. You will not hear it release. If you continue to pull, you could damage the emergency release mechanism.
Emissions control system
General information
The temperature of the exhaust system is high, both when driving and after stopping the engine. -- Never touch the exhausttail pipes once they
have become hot.This could result in burns. -- Do not park your vehicle over flammable
materials such as grass or leaves because

Checking and Filling

the high temperature of the emissions system could start a fire. -- Do not apply underbodyprotectant in the
exhaust system area, because this increases the risk offire.
Catalytic converter Follow the safety precautions > page 324, General information. The vehicle mayonly be driven with unleaded gasoline, or the catalytic converter will be destroyed. Never drive until the tank is completely empty. The irregular supply of fuel that results from that can cause engine misfires. Uncombusted fuel
could enter the exhaust system, which could
cause overheating and damage tothe catalytic
converter.
On Board Diagnostic System (OBD) The On Board Diagnostic System monitors the engine and transmission componentsthat influence emissions.
Fig. 264 Footwellonleft side of the vehicle: connection port for the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)
On Board Diagnostic System Engine data can be read out at the On Board Diagnostic System connection port using a special testing device > fig. 264. Indicator light If the S indicator light blinks or turns on, there is a malfunction that is causing poor emissions

quality and that could damage the catalytic converter. Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction corrected.
The indicator light can also turn on if the fuel fill-
er cap is not closed correctly > page 322).
ZAWARNING Incorrect use of the connection port for the On Board Diagnostic System can cause malfunctions, which can then result in accidents and serious injuries. -- Only allow an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to read out the engine data.
Engine compartment
General information
Special careis required ifyou are working in the
engine compartment
For work in the engine compartment, such as checking and filling fluids, thereis a risk of injury, scalding, accidents, and burns.For this reason, follow all the warnings and general safety precautions providedin the following information. The engine compartmentis a dangerous area. > /\.
ZX WARNING
-- Turn the engine off. -- Switch the ignition off. -- Set the parking brake. -- Select the "P" (Park) selector lever position. -- Allow the engine to cool. -- Keep children away from the engine com-
partment.
-- Never spill fluids on a hot engine. These fluids (such as the anti-freezing agent contained in the coolant) can ignite.
-- Avoid short circuits in the electrical system. -- Never reach into the radiator fan. The fan is
temperature-controlled and can turn on

8V2012721B)

D Depending on the engine and country

325

Checking and Filling
suddenly, even when the ignition is switched off. -- Never open the hood when thereis steam or coolant escaping from the engine compart-
ment, because thereis a risk that you could
be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is escaping. -- Never open the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the engine is warm. The cooling system is under pressure. -- To protect your face, hands, and arms from hot steam or coolant, cover the cap with a thick cloth when opening. -- Do not remove the engine cover under any circumstances. This increases the risk of burns. -- Due to the risk of electric shock, never touch the ignition cable or other componentsin the electronic high-voltage ignition system when the engine is running or is starting. -- If a gear is engaged while the vehicleis stationary and the engine is running, do not press the accelerator pedal inadvertently. Pressing the accelerator pedal will cause the vehicle to move, and this could result in an accident. -- If inspections or repairs must be performed while the engine is running, moving components (such as the ribbed belt, generator, and radiator fan) pose an additional risk.
-- Set the parking brake first and select the "P" (Park) selector lever position.
-- Always makesure that no parts of the body,jewelry, ties, loose clothing, and long hair can be caught in moving engine components. Before any work, alwaysremove any jewelry and/or ties, tie back long
hair, and makesureall clothing fits close
to the body to reduce the risk of anything becoming caught in engine components. -- Pay attention to the following warnings listed when work on the fuel system or on the electrical equipmentis required.
-- Do not smoke. -- Never work near open flames. -- Always have a working fire extinguisher
nearby.

-- All work on the batteryor electrical system in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemical burns, accidents, or burns. Because of this, all work must be performed only by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Limit your exposure to exhaust and chemicals to as short a time as possible.
Z\ WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning: -- Engine exhaust, some ofits constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. -- Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harms. Wash hands after handling.
@) Note
When filling fluids, be sure not to add any fluids to the wrong reservoirs. Otherwise severe malfunctions and engine damage will occur.
() For thesake of the environment
You should regularly check the ground under your vehicle in order to detect leaks quickly. If there are visible spots from oil or other fluids, bring your vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to be checked.

326

Opening and closing the hood The hoodis released from inside the vehicle.
Fig. 265 Section from the driver's side footwell: release lever
=2=&oO
Fig. 266 Rocker switch under the hood
Read and follow all WARNINGS before checking anything in the engine compartment = page 325, General information. Makesure the wiper arms are not raised up from the windshield. Otherwise the paint could be damaged. Opening the hood Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive: Switch the ignition off before releasing the hood

Checking and Filling
so that the gasoline engine does not start automatically.
> With the door open, pull the lever <> below the instrument panel in the direction of the arrow > fig. 265.
> Raise the hoodslightly > A\.
> Press the rocker switch under the hood upward => fig. 266. This releases the catch.
> Open the hood.
Closing the hood
> Push the hood downuntil you override the force of the strut.
>» Let the hoodfall lightly into the latch. Do not
press it in. > JX.
ZAWARNING
-- Never open the hood when there is steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment, because thereis a risk that you could be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is escaping.
-- For safety reasons, the hood must always be latched securely while driving. Because of this, always check the hood after closing it to makesureit is latched correctly. The hood is latched if the front corners cannotbelifted.
-- If you notice that the hoodis not latched while you are driving, stop immediately and close it, because driving when the hoodis not latched increases the risk of an accident.
-- If the hood is not latched completely, it could fly up while you are driving and obstruct your vision.

8V2012721B)

D) The &> symbol on theleverwas still being designed at the time this manual wasprinted.

327

Fig. 267 Typical location of the reservoir, engine oil dipstick, and engine oil filler opening

Follow the safety precautions > page 325.
@ Coolant expansion tank (=f) > page 333 Engine oil dipstick > page 329
Engine oil filler opening (%27) > page 329
4) Sticker* for engine oil specifications => page 328
) Brake fluid reservoir (OC) > page 334 (©) Applies to: vehicles with jump start point (+):
Jump start point (+) under the cover => page 336, > page 383 @) Applies to: vehicles with vehicle battery in the engine compartment: Vehicle battery (+) under the battery cover > page 336, => page 383 8) Body ground point (-) > page 336, => page 383
© Washer fluid reservoir (>) > page 337
Fuse housing > page 379

The engine oil dipstick, the engine oil filling opening, and washer fluid reservoir may be located in different places within the engine compartment, depending on the engine version.
@) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive:
Note the information for the coolant expansion tank in > page 101 and for the vehicle battery (+) in > page 100.
Engine oil

If you need to add engine oil, use an oil thatis listed on the sticker. The sticker is located at the
front of the engine compartment > page 328,
fig. 267.

If the recommended engine oil is not available, in

an emergency you may add a maximum of 1

328

Checking and Filling

quart (1 liter) of ACEA C3 or API SN engine oil one time until the next oil change.
For more information on the correct engine oil for your vehicle, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have the oil changed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Service Facility.
Audi recommends
Sbastrol/ZIDIGEPrarzssional
Audi recommends using the LongLife high-performanceengine oil from Audi Genuine Parts.
Engine oil pressure
Biturn off engine! Oil pressure too low
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the engine oil level > page 329.
--If the engine oil level is too low, add engine oil => page 330. Only continue driving once the indicator light turns off.
-- If the engine oil level is correct and the indica-
tor light still turns on, turn the engine off and
do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Engine oil level
Applies to: vehicles with oil level warning
2 Checkoil level
-- You may continue driving for the time being. Check the engine oil level as soon as possible => page 329, Checking the engine oillevel.
-- If the engine oil level is correct and the indicator light still turns on, drive at low engine speed to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Engine oil sensor
3 Oil level sensor: oil change necessary. Please contact Service
Fuel has entered the engine oil. This will cause the engine oil level to rise slowly and the engine oil quality to decrease. Do not extract engine oil
to reduce the level, because this will increase the

risk of engine damage. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have engine oil extracted.
& Oil level system: malfunction! Please contact Service
The sensor that checks the engine oil level has malfunctioned. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
& Oil pressure sensor: malfunction! Please contact Service
The sensor that checks the engine oil pressure has malfunctioned. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Engine warm-up request*
F Please drive to warm up engine
Fuel has entered the engine oil, either due to low outside temperatures or frequent short drives. Drive until the engine is warm so that the fuel in the engine oil will evaporate. Avoid high engine speeds, full accelerating, and heavy engine loads when doing this.
@ Tips
The oil pressure warning = is not an oil level indicator. Always check the oil level regularly.
Checking the engine oil level
The engine oil dipstick varies depending on the engine type.

Fig. 268 Oil dipstick: checking the engineoil level (exam-

ple)

8V2012721B) B8V-0588

329

Checking and Filling
Observethe safety precautions > A\ in General information on page 325.
>» Park the vehicle on level surface. > Shut the engine off when it is warm. > Wait approximately two minutes. > Open the hood > page 327. > Removethe oil dipstick > page 328, fig. 267,
wipe it off with a clean cloth and insertit all the wayin again. > Removethe oil dipstick again and then read the oil level > table on page 330. > Add engine oil if necessary > page 330.
Areas on the oil dipstick > fig. 268.
@)] If the engine oil level is just before the marking (@,then engine oil must be added. Seeo®.
@|Donot add engineoil.
@) Note
-- The engine oil level must not be below the
marking ®, because this increases the risk
of engine damage. -- After adding engine oil, the oil level must
not be above the marking @) > fig. 268, because this increases the risk of catalytic converter and/or engine damage. If the oil level is above the marking @,, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have any engine oil extracted. Avoid high engine speeds,full acceleration, and heavy engine loads.
@) Tips
-- The engine oil consumption may be up to 0.5 quart/600 miles (0.5 liter/1,000 km), depending on driving style and operating conditions. Consumption may be higher during the first 3,000 miles (5,000 km). The engine oil level must be checked regularly. It is best to check each time you refuel your vehicle and before long drives.
-- Because ofthe lubrication and cooling of
the engine, combustion engines consume
oil. The oil consumption varies depending on the engine and may change during the service life of the engine. Engines generally

consume moreoil at the beginning during the break-in period. Then oil consumption stabilizes after the break-in period.
-- Under normal conditions, oil consumption depends on the quality and viscosity of the oil, the engine RPM, the climate conditions,
and the road conditions. The dilution of oil from condensation or fuel residue as well as the age ofthe oil also play a role. Because engine wear increases with mileage, oil consumption will increase again over time until it may be necessary to replace worn compo-
nents.
-- Because all these variables play a role, it is not possible to define an oil consumption
standard. Therefore, the oil level must be
checked regularly. -- If you believe that your engine has in-
creased its oil consumption, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility to determine the cause. Please note that an exact oil consumption measurement must be done with the necessary care and accuracy and may take time. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility is trained in accurately measuring the oil consumption. -- You can find information on engine oil and engine oil capacities for the USA at www.
audiusa.com/help/maintenance, or for Can-
ada at www.audi.ca/ca/web/en/ customer-area/care-and-maintenance/
audi-service-schedules.html,or call
800-822-2834.
Adding engine oil
Fig. 269 Engine compartment: engine oil filler opening cover

B8K-2120

330

Checking and Filling

Observethe safety precautions > A\ in General information on page 325.
> Turn the engine off. > Open the hood > page 327. > Unscrew the cap %~ for the engine oil filler
opening > fig. 269. > Carefully add 0.5 quart (0.5 liter) of the correct
oil > page 328. > Check the oil level again after two minutes
=> page 329, Checking the engine oillevel. » Add moreoil if necessary. > Close the engine oil filler cap and push the dip-
stick all the wayin. > Close the hood > page 327.
Z\ WARNING
--When adding oil, do notlet oil drip onto hot engine components. This increases the risk ofa fire.
-- You mustseal the cap on the oil filler opening correctly so that oil does not leak out onto the hot engine and exhaust system when the engine is running, becausethis is a fire hazard.
-- Alwaysclean skin thoroughlyif it comes into contact with engine oil.
-- Engine oil is poisonous and mustbe kept out of reach of children.
-- Store the engine oil securely in the original container.
() Note
-- The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage or malfunctions if the recommended intended use of the vehicle and maintenance measures listed in the Audi Owner's Manual and the Warranty & Maintenance Booklet were not followed.
-- Only use high-grade engine oil that explicitly meets the Audi oil quality standard for your vehicle. Using another oil may cause severe vehicle damage.
-- Do not mix any additional lubricants into the engine oil. Damage caused by such additives is not covered by the warranty.

@) For the sake of the environment
-- Oil should never enter the sewer system or come into contact with the ground.
-- Follow the legal regulations in the country whereyou are located when disposing of emptyoil containers.
Changing engine oil
We recommend having the oil changed at an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Follow the safety precautions > page 325, General information.
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals specified in the Warranty & Maintenance Booklet. This is very important because the lubrication function of the oil gradually declines during regular vehicle operation.
The engine oil should be changed morefrequently under certain circumstances. Havethe oil changed more frequently if you often drive short distances, your vehicle is predominantly in stopand-go traffic situations, is in very dusty environments, or is operated for long periods of time in temperatures below zero.
Cleansing additives in the oil make fresh oil appear darker after the engine has run briefly. This is normal and no reason to change the engine oil more frequently than recommended.
Becausecorrectly disposing of engine oil is difficult and special tools and technical knowledge are needed for an oil change, having your engine oil changed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility is recommended.
If you change the engine oil yourself, please note the following important information:
ZA\ WARNING
If you change the engine oil on the vehicle yourself, the following precautions must be followed: -- Wear protective eyewear. -- Due to the risk of scalding, allow the engine
to cool downsufficiently.

8V2012721B)

331

Checking and Filling

-- Maintain enough distance when you areremoving the oil drain plug. While doing this, keep your forearm parallel to the ground to reduce the risk of hot oil dripping down your
arm.
-- Drain the oil into a container designed for this purposethatis large enough to hold the full amountof oil in your engine.
-- Engine oil is poisonous. Always store out of reach of children.
-- Prolonged contact of used engine oil with the skin may cause skin damage. Always wash oil off immediately with soap and wa-
ter to protect your skin.
@) Note
Do not mix any additives with the engine oil. Additives may cause engine damage thatis not covered by your New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
@ For the sake of the environment
-- Before changing the engine oil, make sure you can disposeof the used engine oil correctly.
-- Engine oil must always be disposed of correctly. Do not dump it in the yard, in the for-
est, or in open water, river channels, or sew-
ers. -- Have your used engine oil recycled by bring-
ing it to a used oil collection site or contact a gas station.
Cooling system
The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture of purified water and coolant additive at the factory. This coolant must not be not changed.
The coolant level is monitored through the B indicator light > page 25. However, occasionally checking the coolant level manually is recommended.
Coolant additive
The coolant additive is made of anti-freezing and corrosion protection agents. Only use the follow-

ing coolant additives. These additives may be mixed with each other.

Coolant additive G12++ G13

Specification TL774G TL774)

The amount of coolant additive that needs to be mixed with water depends on the climate where
the vehicle will be operated. If the coolant additive percentage is too low, the coolant can freeze and damage the engine.

Warm regions
Cold
regions

Coolant additive
min. 40% max. 45%
min. 50%
max. 55%

Freeze protection
min. -13 °F (-25 °C)
max. -40 °F
(-40 °C)

(!) Note

-- Before the start of winter, have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility check if the coolant additive in your vehicle matches the percentage appropriate for the climate. This is especially important when driving in colder climates. -- If the appropriate coolant additive is not available in an emergency, do not add any other additive. You could damage the engine. If this happens, only use water and re-
store the correct mixture ratio with the specified coolant additive as soon as possi-
ble.
-- Onlyrefill with new coolant.
-- Radiator sealant must not be mixed with the coolant.

G) Tips

Applies to: RS models: In certain weather
conditions, moisture such as rain or snow may
evaporateon the radiator after stopping the vehicle. This may cause steam to escape from the front of the vehicle.

332

Checking and Filling

Adding coolant
MIN
Fig. 270 Engine compartment- coolant expansion tank
(diagram): @ cover; @) markings
Observethe safety precautions > page 325, General information. Checking the engine coolantlevel >» Park the vehicle on a level surface. > Switch the ignition off. > Read the coolant level on the coolant expansion
tank > page 328, fig. 267. The coolant level must be between the markings (@) > fig. 270 when the engine is cold. When the engine is warm it can be slightly above the upper mark-
ing. Adding coolant
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive: Your vehicle has two coolant expansion tanks that are separate from each other. The smaller of the two expansion tanks must not be opened = page 101. Read and follow the important safe-
ty precautions > A\ in Coolant on page 101.
Requirement: there must be a residual amount of
coolant in the expansion tank >@).
If you must add coolant, use a mixture of water
and coolant additive. Mixing the coolant additive with distilled water is recommended. > Allow the engine to cool. > Place a large, thick towel on the coolant expan-
sion tank cover. > Remove the cover @) © fig. 270 carefully to the
left > AX.
» Add the correct mixture ratio of coolant
> page 332 up to the upper marking @) > fig. 270.

%=
[RAz-0539]

> Make sure that the fluid level remains stable. Add morecoolant if necessary.
> Close the cap securely.
Coolant loss usually indicates that there is a leak. Immediately drive your vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and have the cooling system inspected. If the cooling system is not leaking, coolant loss can result from the coolant boiling due overheating and then being forced out of the cooling system.
ZA WARNING
-- The engine compartment in any vehicle can be a dangerous area. Stop the engine and allow it to cool before working in the engine compartment. Alwaysfollow the information found in > page 325, General information.
-- Never open the hood if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. This increases the risk of burns. The cooling system is under pressure. When you no longer see or hear steam or coolant escaping, you may open the engine compartment with caution.
-- When working in the engine compartment, remember that the radiator fan can switch
on even if the ignition is switched off, which increasesthe risk of injury.
-- Coolant additive and coolant can be danger-
ous to your health. For this reason, store the
coolantin the original container and away from children. Thereis a risk of poisoning.
©) Note
Do not add coolant if the expansion tank is empty. Air could enter the cooling system and damage the engine. If this is the case, do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assis-
tance.

8V2012721B)

333

Checking and Filling
Brake fluid
Fig. 271 Engine compartment:cap on brakefluid reservoir
Observethe safety precautions > page 325, General information.
Checking the brakefluid level
Read the brakefluid level on the brakefluid reservoir > page 328, fig. 267. The brake fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX markings oA. The brakefluid level is monitored automatically.
Changing the brakefluid Brake fluid should be changed at regular intervals. Have the brake fluid changed by an author-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. The authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility will inform you of the replacement intervals.
ZA\ WARNING
-- If the brake fluid level is below the MIN marking, it can impair the braking effect and driving safety, which increase the risk of an accident. Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
-- If the brakefluid is old, bubbles may form in
the brake system during heavy braking. This could impair braking performanceand driving safety, which increases the risk of an accident. -- The brakefluid in your vehicle must meet the standard VW 501 14 and is available at an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Au-
di Service Facility. If this brake fluid is not available, another high-grade brakefluid of

BFV-0229]

equivalent quality may be used, and it must meet the U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Standard (FMVSS) 116 DOT4, Class 6.
@) Note
-- If the brake fluid level is above the MAX marking, brake fluid may leak out over the edge of the reservoir and result in damage to the vehicle.
-- Do not allow any brake fluid to come into contact with the vehicle paint, becauseit will corrode the paint.
Electrical system
If the = or I indicator light turns on, there is a malfunction in the generator, the battery, or the vehicle electrical system.
= Electrical system: malfunction! Batteryis not charging
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately. Turn off all unnecessary electrical equipment because it will drain the battery. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility if the battery charge level is too low.
= Electrical system: malfunction! Restart not possible. Please contact Service
It will not be possible to restart the engine once you turn it off. Vehicle functions/driving stability maybe limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately.
= Electrical system: malfunction! Please contact Service
Switch off all electrical equipment that is not needed. Vehicle functions/driving stability may be limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately.
= Electrical system: low battery charge. Battery will be charged while driving
The starting ability may be impaired.
If this message turns off after a little while, the vehicle battery has charged enough while driving. >

334

Checking and Filling

If this message does not turn off, drive immedi-
ately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Battery
Battery general information
Because of the complex power supply,all work on batteries such as disconnecting, replacing, etc., should only be performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility > A\.
Multiple batteries with different technologies maybe installed in your vehicle:
-- Vehicle battery (for example, for starting the engine, basic power supply) > page 335, Lead battery or > page 336, Other battery types
-- Auxiliary battery (for example, for recuperation or optional equipment) > page 336, Otherbat-
tery types
-- Applies to: Plug-in hybrid drive: High-voltage battery (for example, for electric driving) => page 90, Introduction.
Not running the vehicle for long periods of time
The battery will gradually drain if the vehicle does not run for long periods of time. To ensure that the vehicle can still be started, the electrical equipment will be reduced or switched off => page 163. Some convenience functions, such as interior lighting or power seat adjustment, may not be available under certain circumstances. These convenience functions will be available again once you switch the ignition on and start the engine.
Even when electrical equipment is switched off, the equipmentcan still drain the batteryif the vehicle is not driven for long periods of time. Deep draining results in a chemical reaction that destroys the inside of the battery. The battery must be charged every month to prevent this = page 336. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.

Winter operation
Cold weather places higher demands on the battery. This results in reduced starting ability. Have the battery checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility before cold weather begins.
Z\ WARNING
-- All work on the battery or electrical system in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemical burns, accidents, or burns. Because of this, all work must be performed only by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Never connect the charging cable or jump start cable directly to your vehicle battery. Only use the connections in the engine compartment > page 336.
ZA\WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning: -- Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer and reproductive problems. Wash hands after handling.
() Note
If the vehicle will be parked for long periods of time, protect the battery against the cold so that it will not be destroyed by "freezing" = page 336, Charging the battery.

Lead battery
Explanation of warnings: Always wear eyeprotection.

Battery acid is highly corrosive. Always

wear protective gloves and eye protection.

Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are forbidden.

p A highly explosive mixture of gases can

form when charging batteries.

8V2012721B)

335

Checking and Filling
Always keep children away from battery @) acid and the battery. @/| Alwaysfollow the instructions in the operfQ ating manual.
@ For the sake of the environment
2 ¥ Do notdispose of lead batteries in household trash. They contain harmful substances, such as sulfuric acid and lead, and also recyclable raw materials. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.
Other battery types
Explanation of warnings: Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are
& forbidden. Alwayskeep children away from battery
es) acid and the battery.
@/| Alwaysfollow theinstructionsin the oper-
fQ ating manual.
ZX WARNING
All work on the batteries must only be performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. -- Gases that escape from these different bat-
tery types can be poisonous or flammable. -- The contents of these battery types can be
corrosive. If any battery contents come into contact with the skin, flush the affected area for at least 15 minutes with clean water. Then wash the affected area with soap. Havethe affected area examined by a medical professional.
@ Note
Components must not be connected to the battery terminals and wires on these battery types because this increases the risk of damage, for example due to overvoltage.
@ For the sake of the environment
» JX. Do notdisposeof these types of batteries in household trash. They contain harmful

substances and recyclable raw materials. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information. Charging the battery
Fig. 272
-Appliesto: vehicles with vehicle battery in the engine compartmentEngine compartment: connections for charger or jump start cable
Fig. 273 Applies to: vehicles with jump start point @)Engine compartment: connections for charger or jump start cable
Note the safety precautions > page 325, General information, > /\ in Battery general informa-
tion on page 335 and > /\.
Plug-in hybrid drive: > page 100. Requirement: only use chargers with a maximum charging current of 14.8 volts. The battery cables remain connected. Depending on the engine,the battery is located in the engine compartment or in the luggage compartment. For vehicles with the battery in
the luggage compartment, a jump start point
thatis also used for battery charging is located in the engine compartment. The battery is always >

B8V-0529

336

8V2012721B)
B8K-2123

Checking and Filling

charged in the engine compartment. The ground point ©) is always located on the vehicle body.
> Switch off the ignition and all electrical equip-
ment.
> Open the hood > page 327. » Applies to: vehicles with vehicle battery in the
engine compartment: Open the cover on the positive terminal > fig. 272. > Applies to: vehicles with jump start point (+):
Open the cover on the positive terminal > fig. 273. > Clamp the terminal clamps on the charger correctly onto the ground point © and the positive
terminal G).
> Insert the power cable for the charging device into the socket and switch the device on.
> At the end of the charging process, switch the charger off and pull the power cable out of the socket.
> Removethe charging device terminal clamps. > Applies to: vehicles with vehicle battery in the
engine compartment: Close the cover on the positive terminal. > Applies to: vehicles with jump start point (+): Close the cover on the positive terminal. » Close the hood > page 327.
ZA WARNING
-- Applies to: vehicles with jump start connections in the engine compartment: Never connect the charging cable directly to your vehicle battery. Only use the connections in the engine compartment > page 336.
-- A highly explosive mixture of gases can form when charging batteries. Only charge the battery in well-ventilated areas.
-- A drained battery can freeze at temperatures around 32 °F (0 °C). Do not charge or
use a frozen or thawed battery. If ice forms,
the battery housing can crack and battery electrolyte can leak out, which increases the risk of an explosion and chemical burns. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.

-- Do not connect or disconnect the charging cable while charging because this increases the risk of an explosion.
(i) Tips
Read all of the manufacturer's instructions for the charger before charging the battery.
Windshield washer system
Fig. 274 Engine compartment: windshield washer fluid cover (example)
Observethe safety precautions > page 325, General information. The windshield washer fluid reservoir & contains the cleaning solution for the windshield and the headlight washer system* > page 328,fig. 267. The reservoir capacity can be found in => page 395. To reduce the risk of lime scale deposits on the spray nozzles, use clean water with low amounts of calcium. Always add window cleaner to the water. When the outside temperatures are cold, an anti-freezing agent should be added to the water so thatit does not freeze.
() Note
--The concentration of anti-freezing agent mustbe adjusted to the vehicle operating conditions and the climate. A concentration that is too high can lead to vehicle damage.
-- Never add radiator anti-freeze or other additives to the washer fluid.
-- Do not use a glass cleaner that contains paint solvents, because this could damage the paint.

337

Checking and Filling
Service interval display
The service interval display detects when yourvehicle is due for service.
The service interval display works in two stages:
-- Inspection or oil change reminder: after driving a certain distance, a message appearsin the instrument cluster display each time the ignition is switched on or off. The remaining distance or time is displayed briefly.
-- Inspection or oil change due: if your vehicle has reached an inspection or oil change interval or both intervals at the same time, the message Inspection due! or Oil change due! or Oil change and inspection due! appearsbriefly after switching the ignition on/off.
Checking service intervals
You can check the remaining distance or time until the next oil change or next inspection in the Infotainment system. Select in the Infotainment system: the [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Service & checks > Service intervals.
Resetting the indicator
An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility will reset the service interval display after performing service.
If you have changed the oil yourself, you mustreset the oil change interval.
To reset the display, select in the Infotainment system: the [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Service & checks > Service intervals > Resetoil change interval.
@ Note
-- Only reset the oil change indicator if the oil was changed.
-- Following the service intervals is critical to maintaining the function, servicelife, and value of your vehicle, especially the engine. Even if the mileage on the vehicleis low, do not exceed the time for the nextservice.
338

Wheels
Wheels and Tires
General information
> Check your tires regularly for
damage, such as punctures, cuts, cracks, and bulges. Remove
foreign objects from the tire tread. >If driving over curbs or similar obstacles, drive slowly and approach the curb at an angle. > Havefaulty tires or rims replaced immediately. >Protect your tires from oil,
grease, and fuel.
>Mark tires before removing them so that the same running direction can be maintained if they are reinstalled. >Lay tires flat when storing and
store them ina cool, dry location
with as little exposureto light as possible.
A WARNING
--Never drive faster than the maximum permitted speed for your tires. This could cause the tires to heat up too much. This increases the risk of an accident because it can cause the tire to burst.

Wheels
--Always adapt your driving to the road and traffic conditions. Drive carefully and reduce your speed on icyor slip-
pery roads. Even winter tires
can lose traction on black ice.
@ Note
--Please note that summer and winter tires are designed for the conditions that are typical in those seasons. Audi recommends using winter tires during the winter months. Low temperatures significantly decrease the elasticity of summ-
er tires, which affects traction
and braking ability. If summer tires are used in very cold tem-
peratures, cracks can form on the tread bars, resulting in
permanent tire damage that can cause loud driving noise and unbalanced tires. --Burnished, polished or chromed rims must not be used in winter driving conditions. The surface of the rims does not have sufficient corrosion protection for this and could be permanently damaged by road salt or similar substances.

8V2012721B)

339

Wheels
Tire designations
re) 2ix©oO
Fig. 275 Tire designations on the sidewall
@ Tires for passenger vehicles (if applicable)
"P" indicates a tire for a passenger vehicle. "T" indicates a tire designated for temporaryuse.
@ Nominal width
Nominal width ofthe tire between the sidewalls in millime-
ters. In general: the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
@) Aspect ratio
Height/width ratio expressed asa percentage.

@ Tire construction

Size of the rim diameter in inches.

© Load index and speed rating
The load index indicates the tire's
load-carrying capacity.
The speed rating indicates the maximum permitted speed. Also see > A in General information on
page 339.

"EXTRA LOAD", "xl" or "RF" indicates that the tire is reinforced or is an Extra Load tire.

Speed rating
P
Q
R
Ss
T
U
H
Vv
Zz w Y

/Maximum permitted speed
up to 93 mph (150 km/h) up to 99 mph (160 km/h) up to 106 mph (170 km/h) up to 110 mph (180 km/h) up to 118 mph (190 km/h) up to 124 mph (200 km/h)
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)?
above 149 mph (240 km/h)? up to 168 mph (270 km/h)? up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

@) For tires above 149 mph (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the code "ZR".

340

@ US DOT number (TIN) and
manufacture date
The manufacture dateis listed on the tire sidewall (it may only appear on the inner side of the tire):
DOT... 2218...
means, for example, that the tire
was produced in the 22nd week of the year 2018.
Audi Original Tires
Audi Original equipment tires with the designation "AO" have
been specially matched to your
Audi. When used correctly, these
tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility will be able to provide you with moreinformation.
@) Mud and snow capability
"M/S" or "M+S" indicates the tire
is suitable for driving on mud and
snow. /4\ indicates a winter tire.
Composition of the tire cord and materials
The number ofplies indicates the number of rubberized fabric layers in the tire. In general: the
morelayers, the more weight a
tire can carry. Tire manufacturers

Wheels
mustalso specify the materials used in the tire. These include
steel, nylon, polyester and other materials.
@) Maximum permitted load
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that the tire can carry.
@ Uniform tire quality grade
standards for treadwear,
traction and temperature resistance
Treadwear, traction and tempera-
ture ranges > page 356.
@ Runningdirection
The arrowsindicate the running direction of unidirectional tires. You must always follow the specified running direction => page 376.
Maximum permitted
inflation pressure
This number indicates the maximum pressure to which a tire can be inflated under normal operating conditions.

8V2012721B)

341

Wheels
Glossary of tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
means the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of auto-
matic transmission, power steer-
ing, power brakes, power win-
dows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).
Aspect ratio
means the ratio of the height to the width of the tire in percent. Numbersof 55 or lower indicate a low sidewall for improved steering response and better overall handling on dry pavement.
Bead
means the partof the tire that is made ofsteel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped tofit the rim.
Bead separation
means a breakdown of the bond between componentsin the bead.

Cord
means the strands forming the plies in the tire.
Cold tire inflation pressure
means the tire pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for a tire of a designated size that has not been driven for more than a couple of miles (kilometers) at low speeds in the three hour period before the tire pressure is measured or adjusted.
Curb weight
means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil, and coolant, air condi-
tioning and additional weight of optional equipment.
Extra load tire
means a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire. Extra load tires may be identified as "XL", "xl", "EXTRA LOAD", or "RF" on the sidewall.

342

Gross Axle Weight Rating
("GAWR'")
means the load-carrying capacity
of a single axle system, measured
at the tire-ground interfaces.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
("GVWR")
means the maximum total loaded
weight of the vehicle.
Groove
means the space between twoadjacent tread ribs.
Load rating (code)
means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. You may notfind this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
Maximum load rating
means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.
Maximum loadedvehicle
weight
means the sum of:
(a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight, and (d) Production options weight

Wheels
Maximum (permissible)
inflation pressure
means the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated. Also called "maximum inflation pressure."
Normal occupant weight means 150 lbs. (68 kilograms)
times the number of occupants seated in the vehicle up to the total seating capacity of your vehicle.
Occupant distribution
means distribution of occupants in a vehicle.
Outer diameter
means the overall diameter of an inflated newtire.
Overall width
means the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs.
Ply
means a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.

8V2012721B)

343

Wheels
Production options weight
means the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs. (2.3 kg) in excess of those standard items which theyreplace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight,including heavy duty brakes, ride
levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
Radial ply tire
means a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Recommended inflation pressure
see > page 342, Cold tire infla-
tion pressure.
Reinforced tire
means a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire. Reinforced tires may be identified as "XL", "xl", "EXTRA LOAD", or "RF" on the sidewall.

Rim
means a metal supportfor a tire
ora tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.
Rim diameter
means nominal diameter of the
bead seat. If you change your wheel size, you will have to pur-
chase new tires to match the new rim diameter.
Rim size designation
means rim diameter and width.
Rim width
means nominal distance between
rim flanges.
Sidewall
means that portion of a tire between the tread and bead.
Speed rating (letter code)
means the speed at which a tireis designed to be driven for extended periods of time. The ratings
range from 93 mph (150 km/h) to 186 mph (298 km/h) > table
on page 340. You may notfind this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
The speed rating letter code, where applicable, is molded on the tire sidewall and indicates the >

344

maximum permissible road speeds. See also > A in General
information on page 339.
Tire pressure monitoring system*
means a system that detects when one or moreofa vehicle's tires are underinflated and illuminates a low tire pressure warning telltale.
Tread
means that portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Tread separation
means pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass.
Treadwear indicators (TWI)
means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread. See = page 348, Treadwearindicator for more information on measuring tire wear.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
is a tire information system developed by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)that is designed to help buyers makerelative com-

Wheels
parisons among tires. The UTQG is not a safety rating and not a guarantee that a tire will last for a prescribed number of miles (kilometers) or perform in a certain way. It simply gives tire buyers additional information to combine with other considerations, such as price, brand loyalty and dealer recommendations. Under UTQG, tires are graded bythe tire manufacturers in three areas:
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. The UTQG information on the tires, molded into the sidewalls.
U.S. DOTTire Identification
Number (TIN)
This is the tire's "serial number".
It begins with the letters "DOT"
and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbersor letters indicate the plant where it was manufactured, and the last four numbers represent the week and year of manufacture. For example,
DOT... 2218...
means that the tire was produced in the 22nd week of 2018. The other numbers are marketing codes that may or may not be used >

8V2012721B)

345

Wheels

by the tire manufacturer. This information is used to contact consumersif a tire defect requires a recall.
Vehicle capacity weight
means the rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lbs. (68 kilograms) times the vehicle's desig-
nated seating capacity.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
means that load on an individual tire that is determined bydistributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.
Vehicle normal load on the tire
means that load on an individual tire that is determined bydistributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with > ta-
ble on page 351) and dividing by
two.
Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating
capacities
Refer to the tire inflation pressure label > page 350,fig. 278 for the

number of seating positions. Refer to the table > table on page 351 for the number of people that correspond to the vehicle normal load.

Newtires or wheels

Audi recommends having all work on tires or wheels performed by
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. These facilities have the proper
knowledge and are equipped with the required tools and replacement parts.

>Newtires do not yet have the

optimum gripping properties.

Drive carefully and at moderate

speeds for the first 350 miles

(500 km) with newtires. > Only use tires with the same de-

sign, size (rolling circumfer-

ence), and as close to the same

tread pattern as possible on all

four wheels.

> Applies to: RS models: Only use

tires with the same design and

the same tread pattern on all

four wheels.

>Do not replace tires individually.

At least replace both tires on the

same axle at the same time.

346

> Audi recommends that you use Audi Original Tires. If you would
like to use different tires, please
note that the tires may perform differently even if they are the
same size > A.
>If you would like to equip your
vehicle with a tire and rim combination that is different from what was installed at the facto-
ry, consult with an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility before making a
purchase > A.
Because the sparetire® is different from the regular tires installed on the vehicle (such as winter
tires or wide tires), only use the
spare tire* temporarily in case of emergency and drive carefully while it is in use. It should be replaced with a regular tire as soon as possible.
Applies to: vehicles with all wheel drive: All four wheels must be equipped with tires that are the same brand and have the same construction and tread pattern so that the drive system is not damaged by different wheel speeds.
For this reason, in case of emer-
gency, only use a sparetire* that

Wheels
is the same circumference as the
regular tires.
A\ WARNING
--Onlyuse tire/rim combinations and suitable wheel bolts that have been approved by Audi. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle and an accident could result.
--For technical reasons,it is not
possible to use tires from oth-
er vehicles. In some cases, you cannot even use tires from the same vehicle model.
--Makesurethat the tires you select have enough clearance to the vehicle. Replacement tires should not be chosen simply based on the nominal size, because tires with a different construction can differ greatly even if they are the same size. If there is not
enough clearance, the tires or
the vehicle can be damaged and this can reduce driving safety and increase the risk of an accident. --Only use tires that are more than six years old when absolutely necessary and drive carefully when doing so.

8V2012721B)

347

Wheels

--Do not use run-flat tires on your vehicle. Using them when not permitted can lead to vehicle damage or accidents.
--If you install wheel covers on
the vehicle, make sure theyal-
low enough air circulation to cool the brake system. If they do not, this could increase the risk of an accident.
Tire wear and damage
Fig. 276 Tire profile: treadwear indica-
tor
Tire wear
Check the tires regularly for wear. --Inflation pressure that is too low
or high can increase tire wear considerably. --Driving quickly through curves, rapid acceleration, and heavy braking increase tire wear.

B4H-0415

--Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check the wheel alignment if there is unusual wear.
--Have the wheels rebalanced if an imbalance is causing noticeable vibration in the steering wheel.
If you do not, the tires and other
vehicle components could wear more quickly.
Treadwear indicator
Original equipment tires contain treadwear indicators in the tread
pattern, which are bars that are 1/16 in (1.6 mm) high and are
spaced evenly around the tire perpendicular to the running direction > fig. 276. The letters "TWI" or triangles on the tire sidewall indicate the location of the treadwear indicators.
The tires have reached the minimum tread depth ) when they have worn down tothe treadwear indicators. Replace the tires with new ones > A.

) Obey anyapplicable regulations in the country where the vehicle is being operated.
348

Tire rotation
Applies to: RS models: Tires may only be rotated if the tires on the front and rear axles are the same
size > A.
Rotating the tires regularly is rec-
ommended to ensurethe tires wear evenly. To rotate the tires, install the tires from the rear axle on the front axle and vice versa. This will allow the tires to have approximately the same length of service life.
For unidirectional tires, make sure
the tires are installed according to the running direction indicated on the tire sidewall > page 376.
Hidden damage
Damage to tires and rims can often occur in locations that are hidden. Unusual vibrations in the vehicle or pulling to one side may indicate that thereis tire damage. Reduce your speed immediately. Check the tires for damage. If no damage is visible from the outside, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the vehicle inspected.

Wheels
Z\ WARNING
--Tread that has worn too low or uneven tread depths on the tires can reduce driving safety.
This can increase the risk of an accident because it has a neg-
ative effect on handling, driv-
ing through curves, and braking, and because it increases the risk of hydroplaning when driving through deep puddles.
--Applies to: RS models: Depending on the equipment, the widths of the standard
summer tires may be different
on the front and rear axles. The wider tires are mounted on the front axle. The tires mustnot be rotated.

8V2012721B)

349

Wheels
SU C=e yee)
aoooo2oOOS

Fig. oa Driver's side B-pillar: tire pressure label

DEA`SRSREPICAEORREUERS

sSSOLDION TDIERSEPPNREEUSSSUARFEROID
Ma KPA, Ml PSI

Fig. 278 Tire pressure label

The correct tire pressurefor tires mounted at the factory and for the sparetire* is indicated on label. The label is located on the Bpillar > fig. 277, > fig. 278. The location may vary depending on the model.
Use the tire pressure specified for a normal vehicle load when the vehicle is partially loaded > table on page 351. If driving the vehicle when fully loaded, you must increase the tire pressure to the maximum specified pressure > A.

B8K-1151

Checking and correcting tire pressure
>Check the tire pressure at least once per month and also check it before every long drive.
> Always check the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Do not reduce the pressureif it increases when the tires are warm. > Check the label > fig. 278 for the correct tire pressure based on vehicle load.
>Correct the tire pressure if nec-
esSary.
>Store the newtire pressure in
the Infotainment system > page 358 or > page 361. > Check the pressure in the emergency tire*/spare tire*. Always
maintain the maximum temperature that is specified for the
tire.
Z\ WARNING
Always adaptthe tire pressure to your driving style and the vehicle load. --Overloading can lead to loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of an accident. Read and follow the important safety precautions in > page 352, Tires and vehicle load limits. |»

350

--The tire must flex moreif the
tire pressure is too low or if the vehicle speed or load are
too high. This heats the tire up too much. This increases the risk of an accident because it can cause the tire to burst and result in loss of vehicle control.
--Incorrect tire pressure increas-
es tire wear and has a negative effect on driving and braking

Wheels
behavior, which increases the risk of an accident.
() Note Replace lost valve caps to reduce the risk of damage to the
tire valves.
©) For the sakeof the envi-
ronment Tire pressurethat is too low increases fuel consumption.

Uc] 1c

Please note that the information contained in the following table was correct at the time ofprint-
ing, and the information is sub-
ject to change. If there are any differences, you should always follow the Es pressuresticker

Makesure that the tire designation on your tire matches the designation on the tire pressure label and the tire pressure table.
The following table lists recommended tire pressures in cold tires according to the load and

= page 350,fig. 277.

the size of the tires installed.

Model/
Engine
A3 sedan: 2.0L 4-cylinder
S3 sedan:
2.0L
4-cylinder

Tire designation
225/40 R18 92Y 225/45 R17 91H 225/40 R18 92H 235/35 R19 91Y 225/40 R18 92Y
225/40 R18 92H
--[335/35R1991Y

Tire pressure

Normal load

Maximum load

(up to 2/3* people)"

Front
PSI kPA 35 240 33. 230 36 250 33 230 38 260
38 260
39 270

Rear

Front

PSI kPA PSI kPA

32 220 36 250

30 210 41 280

33 230 41 280

30 210 38 260

35 | 240 42 290

35 240 41 280
36 250 | 44 300

Rear
PSI kPA 36 250 41 280 41 280 41 280 42 290
41 280
44 300 |p

8V2012721B)

351

Wheels

Model/
Engine

Tire designation

RS3sedan: 2.5L 5-cylinder

|235/35R1991Y 255/30 R19 91Y

A3 Cabriolet: 2.0L
4-cylinder
A3 Sportback e-tron:
4a-ceylinder

|225/40 R18 92Y 225/45 R17 91H
225/40 R18 92H
235/35 R19 91Y 205/55 R16 91V 225/40 R18 92Y
225/45R1791H
225/40 R18 92H

Tire pressure

Normal load (up to 2/3* people)?

Maximum load

Front
PSI kPA 39/ 270/ 44») 300%) 39/ 270/ 445) 3005) 35 240 33. 230
38 260
42 290 35 240 33. 230
38 260
36 250

Rear

PSI. kPA

35/ 240/

395) 2705)

32 220 30 210
35 240
39 270 35 240 33 230
38 260
36 250

Front
PSI kPA 44/ 300/ 46>) 3205) 44/ 300/ 465) 320») 38 260 39 270
41 280
45 310 36 250 36 250
38 260
41 280

Rear

PSI kPA

39/ 270/

445) 3005)

38 260 39 270
41 280
45 310 39 270 39 270
38 260
41 280

@) Vehicles with four seating positions: two peoplein the front, Vehicles with five seating positions: two peoplein the front, one person in the rear
5) The value before the forward slash applies to vehicles with a maximum speed up to 155 mph (250 km/h); the value after the slash is for up to 174 mph (280 km/h).

Z\, WARNING
Please note the important safety precautions regarding tire pressure > page 350 and load limits > page 352.
Tires and vehicle load limits
There are limits to the amount of load or weight that any vehicle and any tire can carry. A vehicle that is overloaded will not handle well and is moredifficult to stop. Overloading can not only lead to
loss of vehicle control, but can al-
so damage important parts of the

vehicle and can lead to sudden tire failure, including a blowout and sudden deflation that can cause the vehicle to crash.
Your safety and that of your passengers also depends on making sure that load limits are not exceeded. Vehicle load includes everybody and everything in and on the vehicle. These load limits are technically referred to as the vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ("GVWR").
The "GVWR"includes the weight
of the basic vehicle, all factory >

352

installed accessories, a full tank
of fuel, oil, coolant and other flu-
ids plus maximum Load. The maximum Load includes the number of passengers that the vehicleis
intended to carry ("seating capacity") with an assumed weight of 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each passenger at a designated seating position and the total weight of
any luggage in the vehicle. If you
tow a trailer, the weight of the
trailer hitch and the tongue weight of the loaded trailer must be included as part of the vehicle load.
The Gross Axle WeightRating
("GAWR") is the maximum load
that can be applied at each of the vehicle's two axles.
The fact that there is an upper limit to your vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating means that the total weight of whatever is being
carried in the vehicle (including the weight ofa trailer hitch and the tongue weight of the loaded
trailer) is limited. The more passengersin the vehicle or passengers who are heavier than the standard weights assumed mean that less weight can be carried as luggage.

Wheels
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and the Gross Axle Weight Rating are listed on the safety compliance sticker label located on the driver's side B-pillar.
/\, WARNING
Overloading a vehicle can cause
loss of vehicle control, a crash or other accident, serious per-
sonal injury, and even death. --Carrying more weight than
your vehicle was designed to carry will prevent the vehicle from handling properly and increase the risk of the loss of vehicle control. --The brakes on a vehicle that has been overloaded may not be able to stop the vehicle within a safe distance. --Tires ona vehicle that has been overloaded can fail sud-
denly, including a blowout and
sudden deflation, causing loss
of control and a crash. --Always make sure that the to-
tal load being transported including the weight ofa trailer hitch and the tongue weight of a loaded trailer does not makethe vehicle

8V2012721B)

353

Wheels
heavier than the vehicle's
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Determining correct load ais
Use the example below to calculate the total weight of the passengers and luggage or other things that you plan to transport so that you can make sure that your vehicle will not be overloaded.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement "THE
COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCU-
PANTS AND CARGO SHOULD
NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OR XXX
LBS" on your vehicle's placard (tire inflation pressure label) => page 350,fig. 277. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from "XXX" kilograms or "XXX" pounds shown on the sticker = page 350,fig. 277. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For ex-
ample, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengersin
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. >Check the tire sidewall (=> page 340,fig. 275) to determine the designated load rating for a specific tire.
Wheel bolts and rims
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts mustbe clean and loosen/tighten easily.

354

Wheels

Rims
Rims with a bolted rim ring* or with bolted wheel covers* consist of multiple pieces. These components were bolted together using special bolts and a special procedure. You mustnotrepair or disassemble them > A\.
ZA\ WARNING
Wheel bolts that are tightened or repaired incorrectly can become loose and result in loss of vehicle control, which increases the risk of an accident. For the correct tightening specification, see > page 372, After changing a wheel. -- Always keep the wheel bolts and the threads
in the wheel hub clean and free of grease. -- Only use wheel bolts that fit the rim. -- Always have damagedrims repaired by an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Never repair or disassemble
rims yourself, because this increases the risk
of an accident.
Winter tires significantly improve the vehicle's handling when driving in winter conditions. Because of their construction (width, compound, tread pattern), summer tires provide less traction on ice and snow.
> Use winter tires on all four wheels. > Only use winter tires that are approved for your
vehicle. > Please note that the maximum permitted
speed may be lower with winter tires > A\ in General information on page 339. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility can inform you about the maximum permitted speed for your tires. > Check the tire pressure after installing wheels => page 350.
The effectiveness of winter tires is reduced greatly when the tread is worn down to a depth of 0.157 inch (4 mm). The characteristics of winter tires also decrease greatly as the tire ages, regardless of the remaining tread.

@) For the sake of the environment
Reinstall summer tires at the appropriate time, because they provide better handling when roads are free of snow and ice. Summer tires cause less road noise, tire wear, and fuel consumption.
@) Tips
You can also use all season tires instead of winter tires. Please note that in some countries where winter tires are required, only win-
ter tires with the 44 symbol may be permit-
ted.
Snowchains improve both driving and braking in winter road conditions.
> Only install snow chains on the front wheels. > Check and correct the seating of the snow
chains after driving a few feet, if necessary. Follow the instructions from the manufacturer. > Note the maximum speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). Observe the local regulations.
Use of snow chains is only permitted with certain rim/tire combinations due to technical reasons. Check with an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to see if you may use snow chains.
Use fine-mesh snow chains. They must not add
more than 0.53 inch (13.5 mm) in height, includ-
ing the chain lock.
You must remove the snow chains on roads without snow. Otherwise, you could impair driving ability and damage the tires.
ZA WARNING
Using incorrect snow chains or installing snow chains incorrectly can result in loss of vehicle control, which increasesthe risk of an accident.
() Note
Snow chains can damage the rims and wheel covers*if the chains come into direct contact >

8V2012721B)

355

Wheels

with them. Remove the wheel covers*first. Use coated snow chains.
G) Tips
When using snow chains,it may be advisable to limit the ESC > page 160.
Low-profile tires
Applies to: vehicles with low-profile tires
Compared to other tire/rim combinations, lowprofile tires offer a wider tread surface and a larger rim diameter with shorter tire sidewalls. This results in an agile driving style. However,it may reduce the level of comfort and increase road noise when driving on roads in poor condition.
Low-profile tires can become damaged more quickly than standard tires when driving over large bumps, potholes, manhole covers, and curbs. Therefore, it is particularly important to maintain the correct tire pressure > page 350.
To reduce the risk of damage tothe tires and rims, drive very carefully on poor roads.
Check your wheels regularly every 2,000 mi (3,000 km) for damage. For example, check for bulges/cracks on the tires or deformations/cracks on the rims.
After a heavy impact or damage, havethe tires and rims inspected or replaced immediately by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Low-profile tires can wear out faster than standard tires.
Uc Me Ce LUsvmeleLellire]
-- Tread wear
-- Traction AAABC
-- Temperature A BC
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire side wall between tread shoulder and maximum section width > page 340,fig. 275.
For example: Tread wear 200, Traction AA, Temperature A.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Tread wear
The tread weargrade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on specified gov-
ernment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
maydepartsignificantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance SA.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the mate-
rial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure > A.

The grade C corresponds to a level of perform-
ance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performanceon the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

ZA\ WARNING

The traction grade assigned tothis tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

356

Wheels

tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
ZA WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possibletire failure.
Z\ WARNING
Temperature grades apply to tires that are properly inflated and notover or underinflated.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator
(1) General notes
Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a Lowtire pressuretelltale when one or moreofyour tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequentvehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system maynot be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator appears
Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator
The tire pressure indicator in the instrument cluster informsyou if the tire pressure is too low or if there is a system malfunction.
Using the ABS sensors,the tire pressure monitoring system compares the tire tread circumference and vibration characteristics of the individual tires. If the pressure changesin one or more tires, this is indicated in the instrumentcluster display with an @ indicator light and a message. If only one tire is affected, the location of that tire will be indicated.
The tire pressures must be stored in the menu display again each time the pressures change (switching between partial and full load pressure) or after changing or replacing a tire on your vehicle > page 358. The tire pressure monitoring >

8V2012721B)

357

Wheels

system only monitorsthe tire pressure you have stored. Refer to the tire pressure label for the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle => page 350, fig. 278.
Tire tread circumference and vibration characteristics can change and cause a tire pressure warning if:
-- The tire pressure in one or moretires is too low --The tire has structural damage -- The tire was replaced or the tire pressure was
changed and it was not stored > page 358 -- One side of the vehicle is more heavily loaded
than the other -- The wheels on one axle are more heavily loaded
than the others (for example, when towing a trailer or when driving up and down hills) -- Snow chains areinstalled -- The sparetire* is installed -- Only one tire was replaced on each axle
Indicator lights
@ - Loss of pressure in at least one tire > A\. Check the tires and replaceor repair if necessary. Check/correct the pressures of all four tires. Then store the tire pressures in the menu > page 358.
is (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)Tire pressure: malfunction! See owner's manual. If i appears after switching the ignition on or while driving and the @ indicator light in the instrument cluster blinks for approximately one minute and then stays on, there is system malfunction. Check/correct the pressures on all four tires and store the pressures > page 358. If the indicator light does turn off or turns on again after a short period of time, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
ZX WARNING
-- If the tire pressure indicator appearsin the instrumentcluster display, reduce your speed immediately and avoid any hard steering or braking maneuvers. Stop as soon as possible and check the tires and their pressures.

-- The driver is responsible for maintaining the correct tire pressures. You must check the tire pressures regularly.
-- Under certain conditions (such as a sporty driving style, winter conditions or unpaved roads), the pressure monitor indicator may be delayed.
-- Do not use run-flat tires on your vehicle. Using them when notpermitted can lead to vehicle damage or accidents.
G) Tips
--The tire pressure monitoring system can also stop working when there is an ESC/ABS malfunction.
-- Using snow chains mayresult in a system malfunction.
-- The tire pressure monitoring system in your Audi was calibrated with "Audi Original Tires" > page 346. Using thesetires is recommended.
-- The tire pressure monitoring system can only monitor the tire pressure of the driving tires. Check the tire pressure of the spare wheel in the luggage compartment so that if necessaryit is ready for use.
Storing tire pressures
Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator
A changeintire pressure or a changein tires must be stored in the system.
Before storing the tire pressures, make sure the tire pressures in all four tires meet the specified values and are adapted to the load > page 348.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Service & checks > Tire pressure monitoring > Store tire pressure > Yes, store now.
(i) Tips
Do notstore the tire pressures if snow chains are installed.

358

Tire pressure monitoring system
(1) General notes
Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for thosetires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a lowtire pressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system maynotbe able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including the

Wheels
installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors the pressurein the four tires whendriving.
The system uses sensors that measure the temperature and pressurein the tires. The datais sent from these sensors to the control module by radio frequency.
The tire pressure monitoring system shows the current pressures and temperatures of the tires in the Infotainment system while driving = page 360. It also comparesthe current tire pressures with the stored tire pressures and gives a warning if the tire pressureis different from what is stored > page 360.
The system does not detectif the stored tire pressures match the recommended tire pressures. You muststore the tire pressures again in each of the following situations > page 361:
-- Each time the tire pressures change, for example when the load in the vehicle changes
-- After replacing a tire -- If wheels with new wheel sensorsare used
Z\WARNING
--The tire pressure monitoring system assists the driver in monitoring tire pressures. The driver is responsible for having the tires inflated to the correct pressure.
-- Do not change the tire pressure when the temperature of the tire is extremely high. This could result in serious damage to the
tire and even cause the tire to burst, increas-
ing the risk of an accident. -- A tire with low pressure flexes more. This
heats the tire up too much. This could cause |>

8V2012721B)

359

Wheels

the tread to separate and even causethe tire to burst, increasing the risk of an accident. -- The tire pressure monitoring system does not warn about damage or defectsin the tire construction that could cause the tire to burst, for example. Inspect your tires regularly.
@) Tips
-- If tires are replaced, the sensors and valves do not need to be removed or replaced. Only
replace the valve stem and, if necessary, the
valve and the wheel electronics. If you have
questions, see an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility. -- An incorrect display or a malfunction in the
tire pressure monitoring system can occur after using the tire mobility kit. Have the sensors replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. -- For an explanation on conformity with the FCC regulations in the United States and the Industry Canada regulations, see => page 392.
Displaying tire pressures and temperatures
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
Requirement: you must bedriving the vehicle.
> Select in the Infotainment system: the [MENU button > Vehicle > left control button > Service & checks > Tire pressure monitoring > Display
tire pressure.
The current tire pressures are shown in green, yellow or red numbersin the Infotainment sys-
tem:
-- Green: the current tire pressure and the specified tire pressure are approximately the same.
-- Yellow:the currenttire pressure is lower than the specified tire pressure.
-- Red: the current tire pressure is much lower than the specified tire pressure.
The specified tire pressure is the last tire pressure that was stored > page 361.

Note that the tire pressure also depends on the temperature of the tire. The tire pressure increases as the engine becomes warmer while driving.
Z\ WARNING
Read and follow the important information and notes > page 359.
G) Tips
The tire pressure or temperatureis not displayed while the vehicle is stationary and in adaptation mode. Dashes --.-- are shown in place of the pressure and temperature.
(1) Tire pressure loss
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
If the @ indicator light turns on, the pressurein at least one tire is too low or new sensors were not adapted:
@ Indicator light turns on after turning the ignition on
The tire pressure is too low compared to the specified pressure.
> Check and storethe tire pressure(s) the next time it is possible > page 361.
@ Indicator light turns on while driving
Wheels with new sensors were not adapted or the tire pressure has reached critical level compared to the specified pressure.
> Avoid unnecessary steering and braking maneuvers.
> Adapt your driving style to the situation. > Stop as soon as possible and check the tire(s). > If it is possible to continue driving, see an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately and have your tire(s) repaired or replaced.
ZA\ WARNING
Read and follow the important information and notes > page 359.

360

Wheels

Storing newtire pressures
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
The tire pressure specifications must be stored correctly for the tire pressure monitoring system to function reliably.
It is always necessaryto store the tire pressures when the tire pressures are modified, for example due to a change in load or when new sensors are installed.
> Before storing the tire pressures, make sure the tire pressures ofall four tires meet the specified values and are adapted to the load => page 350, fig. 278. Only correct and store the pressurein tires whose temperatureis approximately the same as the ambient temperature. If the temperature of the tire is higher
than the ambient air temperature, the tire pressure must be increased approximately
3.0 PSI (0.2 bar) abovethe value on the sticker. » Switch the ignition on. > Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] but-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Service & checks > Tire pressure monitoring > Store tire pressure > Yes, store now. After storing the tire pressures,the tire pressure monitoring system measuresthe current pressures while driving and stores them as the new specified pressures. > If the changed tire pressures are not displayed in the Infotainment system, drive the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes so that the sensor signal from the wheelsis received again.
During this adaptation phase, --.-- is displayed for the pressure and temperature and the tire pressure monitoring system is only partially available. It only provides a warning if one or moretire pressures is below the minimum permitted specified pressure.
If the @ indicator light turns on and the message Tire pressure: wheel change detected. Please check all tires and store pressuresin MMI also appears, the system has detected that the position of the sensors has changed because
of a tire rotation, or that new sensors wereinstal-
led. Store the new tire pressures.

ZX WARNING
Read and follow the important information and notes > page 359.
Malfunctions
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
If the tire pressure monitoring system is not available, the ia indicator light appears in the instrument cluster display along with the message Tire pressure: malfunction! See owner's manual.
If the ia indicator light appears after switching the ignition on or while driving and the @ indicator light also blinks for approximately one minute and then stays on, there is a system malfunction. The following are examples of situations that could cause a malfunction:
-- If the message appearsat the end of the adaptation phase, the system maynot detect one or several of the wheel sensors necessaryfor pressure monitoring. This may result from one or more wheels without wheel sensorsor with incompatible wheel sensorsbeing installed.
--Awheel sensor or another component has failed.
-- Using snow chains can affect the function of the system because of the shielding effect of the chains.
-- The tire pressure monitoring system is not available due to a malfunction.
-- Transmitters with the same frequency, such as headphonesor remote-controlled devices, may cause a temporary system malfunction due to the strong electromagnetic field.
The ia indicator light and the message turn off once the tire pressure monitoring system is available again. If you cannot correct the malfunction and the ia indicator light stays on, drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.

8V2012721B)

361

Care and cleaning
Care and cleaning
General information
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive: For additional cleaning and care information, see => page 122.
Regular, proper care helps to maintain your vehicle's value. It can also be a requirement when submitting warranty claims for corrosion damage and paint defects on the body.
The necessary care products can be obtained from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Read and follow the instructions for use on the packaging.
Z\ WARNING
-- Using cleaning and care products incorrectly can be dangerous to your health.
-- Alwaysstore cleaning and care products out of reach of children to reducethe risk of poisoning.
@ For the sake of the environment
-- Purchase environmentally-friendly cleaning productsif possible.
-- Do not dispose of cleaning and care products with household trash.
Car washes
The longer that deposits such as insects, bird droppings, tree sap or road salt remain on the vehicle, the more the surface can be damaged. High temperatures such as those caused by sunlight increase the damaging effect.
Before washing, rinse off heavy deposits with plenty of water.
Stubborn deposits such as bird droppings or tree sap are best removed with plenty of water anda microfiber cloth.
Also, wash the underside of your vehicle once road salt stops being used for the season.

Pressure washers
When washing your vehicle with a pressure washer, always follow the operating instructions provided with the pressure washer.This is especially important in regard to the pressure and spraying distance. Do not aim the spraydirectly at seals on side windows,doors, the hood, the luggage compartment lid, or the panoramic glass roof* or at tires, rubber hoses, insulating material, the power top*, sensors*, or camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least 16 in (40 cm).
Do not remove snowand ice with a pressure washer.
Never use cone nozzles or high pressure nozzles.
The water temperature must not be above 140 °F (60 °C).
Automatic car wash
Spray off the vehicle before washing.
Makesure that the windows, the panoramic glass roof*, and the power top" are closed and the windshield wipersare off. Follow instructions from the car wash operator, especially if there are accessories attached to your vehicle.
If possible, use car washes that do not have brushes.
Washing by hand
Clean the vehicle starting from the top and working downward using a soft sponge or cleaning brush. Use solvent-free cleaning products.
Washing vehicles with matte finish paint by hand
To reduce the risk of damaging the paint when washing, first remove dust and large particles from your vehicle. Insects, grease spots, and fingerprints are best removed with a special cleaner for matte finish paint.
Apply the product using a microfiber cloth. To reduce the risk of damaging the paint surface, do
not use too much pressure.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water. Then clean using a neutral shampoo and a soft microfiber cloth.

362

Care and cleaning

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly again and letit air dry. Remove any water residue using a chamois.
Z\ WARNING
--To reducethe risk of accidents, only wash
the vehicle when the ignition is off and follow the instructions from the car wash oper-
ator.
--To reducethe risk of cuts, protect yourself from sharp metal components when washing the underbodyor the inside of the wheel housings.
-- After washing the vehicle, the braking effect may be delayed due to moisture on the brake rotorsor ice in the winter. This increases the risk of an accident. The brakes mustbe dried with a few careful brake applications.
C) Note
-- If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash, you mustfold the exterior mirrors in
to reducethe risk of damage to the mirrors. Power folding exterior mirrors* must only be folded in and out using the power folding function. --To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

--To reduce the risk of damage, do not wash
decorative decals* with a pressure washer. --To reducethe risk of damage, do not wash
the power top* with a pressure washer.
--To reduce the risk of damage to the surface,
do not use insect removing sponges, kitchen sponges,or similar items. -- When washing mattefinish painted vehicle
components:
-- To reduce the risk of damage to the surface, do not use polishing agents or hard
wax.
-- Never use protective wax. It can destroy the mattefinish effect.
-- Do not place any stickers or magnetic signs on vehicle componentspainted with matte finish paint. The paint could be damaged when the stickers or magnets are removed.
(@) For thesake of the environment
Only wash the vehiclein facilities specially designed for that purpose. This will reduce the risk of dirty water contaminated withoil from
entering the sewer system.

Cleaning and care information

When cleaning and caring for individual vehicle components,refer to the following tables. The information contained there is simply recommen-
dations. For questions or for components that

are notlisted, consult an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility. Also follow the information found in > A.

Exterior cleaning

Component

Situation

Windshield wiper | Deposits blades

Headlights/ Tail lights

Deposits

Sensors/ camera lenses

Deposits

Snow/ice

Solution Soft cloth with glass cleaner > page 55

Soft sponge with a mild soap solution?

Sensors: soft cloth with solvent-free cleaning solution Cameralenses: soft cloth with alcohol-free cleaning solution

Hand brush/solvent-free de-icing spray

8V2012721B)

363

Care and cleaning

Component

Situation

Solution

Wheels

Road salt

Water

Brake dust

Acid-free special cleaning solution

Exhausttail pipes Road salt

Water, cleaning solution suitable for stainless steel,if necessary

Power top

Deposits

Clean water, power top cleaning product,if necessary.
Clean with the grain of the fabric using a soft brush and allow toair dry.

Winddeflector Deposits

Water, mild soap solution, if necessary®

Decorative parts/ Deposits trim

Mild soap solution ®), a cleaning solution suitable for stainless steel, if necessary

Paint

Paint damage

Refer to the paint number on the vehicle data label, repair with touch up paint > page 394

Spilled fuel

Rinse with water immediately

Surface rust

Rust remover, then treat with hard wax; for questions, consult an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility.

Corrosion

Have it removed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.

Water no longer beads on the surface of clean paint

Treat with hard wax (at least twice per year)

No shine even though Treat with suitable polish; then apply paint protectant if paint has been pro- the polish that was used does not contain any protectant
tected/paint looks poor

Deposits such as insects, bird droppings, tree sap, and road
salt

Dampen with water immediately and remove with a microfiber cloth

Grease-based con-

Remove immediately with a mild soap solution ®anda

taminants such as

soft cloth

cosmetics or sunblock

Carbon compo-
nents

Deposits

Clean the same wayas painted components > page 362

Audi e-tron

Deposits

charging system

Soft, dry towel

Decorative decals Deposits

Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®

a) Mild soap solution: maximum twotablespoonsof neutral soap in 1 quart(1 liter) of water

364

Care and cleaning

Interior cleaning

Component

Situation

Solution

Windows Decorative parts/ trim Plastic parts Displays/instrument cluster Controls Safety belts Textiles artificial leather, Alcantara
Natural leather
Carbon compo-
nents

Deposits Deposits

Glass cleaner, then wipe dry Mild soap solution®

Deposits Heavier deposits
Deposits

Damp cloth
Mild soap solution @), detergent-free plastic cleaning solu-
tion, if necessary
Soft cloth with LCD cleaner

Deposits

Soft brush, then a soft cloth with a mild soap solution®

Deposits

Mild soap solution ), allow to dry before letting them re-
tract

Deposits adhering to Vacuum cleaner
|the surface

Water-based deposits Absorbent cloth and mild soap solution® such as coffee, tea,
blood, etc.

Oil-based deposits Apply a mild soap solution ®), blot away the dissolved oil or
such as oil, make-up, dye, treat afterward with water, if necessary

etc.

Specific types of de-
posits such as ink,
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish, etc.

Special stain remover, blot with absorbent material, treat afterward with mild soap solution, if necessary ®

Fresh stains

Cotton cloth with a mild soap solution®

Water-based deposits Fresh stains: absorbent cloth such as coffee, tea, Dried stains: stain remover suitable for leather blood, etc.

Oil-based deposits
such as oil, make-up, etc.

Fresh stains: absorbent cloth and stain remover suitable for leather dried stains: Oil cleaning spray

Specific types of deposits such as ink,
nail polish, latex paint, shoe polish,
etc.

Spot remover suitable for leather

Care

Regularly apply conditioning cream that protects from

light and penetrates into the material. Use special colored

conditioning cream, if necessary.

Deposits

Clean the same wayas plastic components

a) Mild soap solution: maximum twotablespoons ofneutral soap in 1 quart(1 liter) of water

8V2012721B)

365

Care and cleaning
ZA\ WARNING
The windshield must not be treated with water-repelling windshield coating agents. Unfavorable conditions such as wetness, darkness, or low sun can result in increased glare. Wiper blade chatter is also possible.
@) Note
-- Headlightsand tail lights -- Never clean headlightsor tail lights with a dry cloth or sponge. -- Do not use any cleaning products that contain alcohol, because they could cause cracks to form.
-- Wheels -- Never use any paint polish or other abrasive materials. -- Damage to the protective layer on the rims, such as stone chips or scratches, mustbe repaired immediately.
-- Cameralenses
-- Never use warm or hot water to remove snowor ice from the cameralens. This could cause the lens to crack.
-- Never use abrasive cleaning materials or alcohol to clean the cameralens. This could cause scratches and cracks.
-- Power top
-- Removebird droppings immediately.
-- Never use gasoline, spot remover, ben-
zene, paint thinner or other solvents to remove. -- Door windows
-- Remove snowand ice on windowsand exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper. To reducethe risk of scratches, move the scraper only in one direction and not back and forth.
-- Never remove snowor ice from door windowsand mirrors using warm or hot water because this could causecracks to form.
--To reduce the risk of damage to the rear windowdefogger, do not apply anystickers on the heating wires on the inside of the window.
-- Decorative parts and trim
366

-- Never use chrome careor cleaning prod-
ucts.
-- Paint
-- To reduce the risk of scratches, the vehicle
mustbe free of dirt and dust beforepolishing or waxing. -- To prevent paint damage, do notpolish or wax the vehicle in direct sunlight. --To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not polish awayrustspots.
-- Remove cosmetics and sunscreen immediately because they could damage the paint.
-- Decorative decals
--To reduce the risk of damage, do not use
any rough powder or abrasive cleaning products. --To reduce the risk of damage, do notpolish decorative decals that have a matte or printed finish. -- Due to the risk of damage, do not use an ice scraper to remove snow and ice on windowswith decorative decals on them. -- Displays and instrumentcluster
-- The displays/instrument cluster and the trim surrounding them must not be cleaned with dry cleaning methods because they could be scratched.
-- Make sure that the instrumentcluster is switched off and has cooled off before cleaning it.
-- Make sure no fluids enter the spaces between the instrument cluster and the trim, because that could cause damage.
-- Controls
-- Makesure that no fluids enter the controls, because this could cause damage.
-- Safety belts
-- Do not removethe safety belts to clean them.
-- Never clean safety belts or their components with chemicals or with corrosive fluids or solvents and never allow sharp objects to come into contact with the safety belts. This could cause damage to the belt webbing.

--If there is damage to the webbing, the connections, the retractors, or the buckles, have them replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Textiles, artificial leather, and Alcantara
-- Never treat artificial leather or Alcantara
with leather care products, solvents, floor
polish, shoe polish, spot remover, or similar products. -- Have a cleaning specialist remove stubborn stains to reduce the risk of damage. -- Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. when cleaning. -- Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry the seat. -- Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause damage to the surface. -- Open hook and loop fasteners, for example on clothing, can damage seatcovers. Make sure hook and loop fasteners are closed. -- Natural leather
-- Never treat leather with solvents, floor polish, shoe polish, spot remover or simi-
lar products. -- Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause damage to the surface. -- Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. when cleaning. -- Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry the seat. --To help prevent the leather from fading, do notleave the vehicle in direct sunlight for long periods of time. If leaving the vehicle parked for long periods of time, you should cover the leather to protect it from direct sunlight.
G) Tips
-- Insects are easier to remove from paint that has been freshly waxed.
-- Regular waxing can prevent rust spots from
forming.

Care and cleaning
-- Decorative decals can age due to environmental conditions, which can result in damage such as brittleness. The color may fade if exposed to excessive sunlight.
Taking your vehicle out of service
If you wouldlike to take your vehicle out of serv-
ice for a longer time, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. They
will advise you of important measures, such as corrosion protection, service, and storage procedures. Also follow the information about the vehicle battery > page 335.

8V2012721B)

367

Emergency assistance

rergen

ISTANC

Trunk escape latch
Applies to: vehicles with trunk escape latch (Sedan and Cabriolet)
In case of an emergency, the rearlid can be openedfrom theinside using the trunk escape latch.

52aDR222

Equipment

a 19'a s die

B8V-0608

Z B8V-0609

Fig. 279 Luggage compartment:Trunk escape latch
> Push the latch in the direction of the arrow until the lock releases.
The trunk escape latch inside the rear lid is made of fluorescent material to glow in the dark.
Z\WARNING
The trunk escape latch is to be used only in an emergency.

Fig. 280 Luggage compartment(example): vehicle toolkit, tire mobility kit and vehicle jack* placement

General information
> Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic in the event of a breakdown. In the event of a flat tire, park the vehicle on level surface. If you are ona steep hill, be especially careful.
> Set the parking brake. > Place the selector lever in the "P" position. > Switch the emergencyflashers on. > Have the passengersexit the vehicle. They
should moveto a safe place, for example behind a guard rail.
_Z\ WARNING
Pay attention to the steps above. Theyare for your protection and the for the safety of other drivers.

Fig. 281 Luggage compartment(examples): cargo floor folded up (versions 1 and 2)
Plug-in hybrid drive*: the housing location varies => page 100.
Vehicle tool kit, cargo floor cover and side panel
Applies to: vehicles with version 1
The vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit* and the compressorare located in the luggage compartment, separated in the side panels @*/@2), or under the cargo floor cover (

368

8V2012721B)
B8K-1475

> To open the side panel, turn the lock and remove the cover @)* / Q) > fig. 280.
> Lift the cargo floor using the plastic handle @) until the cargo floor engages behind the tabs @ in both side panels > fig. 281 (upper image).
> Fold the cargo floor back before closing the luggage compartment lid.
Vehicle tool kit and cargo floor cover
Applies to: vehicles with version 2
The vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit* and compressor® are stored in the luggage compartment under the cargo floor cover @) > fig. 280.
> Engage the plastic hook () in the luggage compartment seal > fig. 281.
> Fold the cargo floor back before closing the luggage compartment lid.
ZA WARNING
Applies to: vehicles with jack
Improper use of the vehicle jack can cause serious personal injuries. -- Never use the screw driver hex head to tight-
en wheel bolts, since the bolts cannot attain
the necessary tightening torque if you use the hex head, potentially causing an accident. -- The factory-supplied jack is intended only for your vehicle model. Under no circumstances shouldit be used tolift heavy vehicles or other loads; you risk injuring yourself. -- Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised, which could cause an accident.
-- Support the vehicle securely with appropriate stands if work is to be performed under-
neath the vehicle; otherwise, there is a po-
tential risk for injury. -- Never use the jack supplied with your Audi
on another vehicle, particularly on a heavier one. The jack is only suitable for use on the vehicle it came with.
@) Tips
The vehicle jack* does not require any maintenance.

Emergency assistance
Tire mobility kit
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
> Read and follow the important safety precautions in > page 368.
>» Set the parking brake. > Move the selector lever into the "P" position. > Check if a repair with the tire mobility kit is pos-
sible > page 369.
OE Baimeue) yaa
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
Fig. 282 Tire: tire damage that cannotberepaired
The tire repair is only meant for temporary use. Change the damaged tire as soon as possible SA. If the tire is pierced by an object such as a nail, do not remove the object from the tire. The tire repair set is able to be used at temperatures as low as - 4 °F (- 20 °C).
The tire mobility kit must not be used:
-- if the tire has cuts or punctures that are larger
than 0.16 in (4 mm) @ © fig. 282 -- if the rim is damaged @)
-- if you drove with very low tire pressure or with-
out air in the tire @)
In this case, see an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
ZA WARNING
-- Please note that the tire mobility kit cannot be used in all situations, and that it may only be used temporarily.

369

Emergency assistance
-- The tire sealant must not come in contact
with skin, eyes, or clothing.
-- If tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes or your skin, thoroughly rinse the affected area immediately with clean water.
-- Do not inhale the fumes. -- If you swallow anyofthe tire sealant, thor-
oughly rinse your mouth immediately and drink a lot of water. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. -- Change your clothing immediatelyif it comesinto contact with tire sealant. -- If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. -- Keep the tire sealant away from children. -- In vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system*, using tire sealant can result in an incorrect display or a system malfunction. Drive carefully to the nearest authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
G) Tips
-- If sealant leaks, allow it to dry in place. You can then peel it off like a sticker.
-- Note the expiration date on the sealant bottle. Replace the tire sealant at an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Radio reception can be interrupted when operating the compressor*.
-- Follow the legal regulations that are applicable in the country where you are operating the vehicle.

Repairing tires
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
Fig. 284 Diagram: tire mobility kit connection
Requirement: the tire mobility kit must be laid out and ready for use > page 368, Vehicle tool kit/tire mobility kit/compressor. Plug-in hybrid drive*: the placementof the vehicle tool kit varies > page 100. Setting up the tire mobility kit > Open the cover (2) on the compressor!)
> fig. 283.
> Removethe connector @) and pressure hose (5) with pressure gauge from the housing.
> Install the compressor pressure hose (5) onto
the flange © oftire sealant bottle @.
> Insert the sealant bottle with the flange at the bottom into the opening @) on the compressor cover.
> Removethe valve cap from the faultytire.
> Install the filler hose @) on the valve ()
> fig. 284.
> Connect the plug @) > fig. 283 to a socket in the vehicle.

D_ The compressor may look different. However, the wayit is operatedis generally the same.
370

Emergency assistance

> Switch the ignition on.
Inflating a tire
> Move the switch > fig. 284 on the compressor into position I.
> Inflate the tire to between 29 psi (200 kPA) and 36 psi (250 kPA) and read the pressure on the gauge.
> If that tire pressure is not reached, drive your vehicle approximately 33 ft (10 m) forward or backward so that the sealant can be redistributed inside the tire.
ZA WARNING
-- Read and follow the manufacturer's safety precautions on the compressor and in the instructions on the bottle ofsealant.
-- Ifa tire pressure of 29 psi (200 kPA) cannot reached after inflating for 6 minutes, then the tire is too severely damaged. Do not continue driving.
-- If the tire cannot be repaired with the tire
sealant, see an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
@ Tips Do not operate the compressor for more than six minutes continuously, or it can overheat. Once the compressor has cooled, you can continue to use it.
Completing
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
> Affix the sticker that says "max. 50 mph (max. 80 km/h)" that is provided with the tire mobility kit within the driver's field of vision.
> Stop the vehicle after driving for about 10 minutes and check the tire pressure.
> If the tire pressure is lower than 19 psi (130 kPA), then the tire is too severely damaged. Do not continue driving.
ZA WARNING
Pay attention to the following after repairing the tire: -- Do notdrive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).

-- Avoid hard acceleration or braking and driving fast around curves.
-- The vehicle may become moredifficult to control.
-- If the tire is too severely damaged, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.

@) For the sake of the environment
You can give the used tire sealant bottle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for disposal.

@) Tips
Remember to obtain a new bottle of sealant from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility after repairing a tire.

Replacing wheels

Before changing a wheel
Observethe following precautions for your own and your passenger's safety when changing a wheel.

> After you experience tire failure, pull the car well away from moving traffic and try to reach
level ground before you stop > A\. > All passengers should leave the car and move
to a safe location (for instance, behind the
guardrail) > A\.
> Engage the parking braketo prevent your vehicle from rolling unintentionally > A\.
> Move selector lever to position P > /\.
> If you are towing a trailer, unhitch the trailer from your vehicle.
> Take the jack* > page 368 and the sparetire* => page 377 out of the luggage compartment.

ZX WARNING

You or your passengers could be injured while

changing a wheel if you do not follow these

safety precautions:

-- If you have a flat tire, move a safe distance

off the road. Turn off the engine, turn the

emergency flashers on and use other warn-

ing devices to alert other motorists.

8V2012721B)

371

Emergency assistance

-- Makesure that passengers wait in a safe place away from the vehicle and well away from the road and traffic.
-- To help prevent the vehicle from moving suddenly and possibly slipping off the jack", alwaysfully set the parking brake and block the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed. When
one front wheel is lifted off the ground,
placing the Automatic Transmission in P (Park) will not prevent the vehicle from moving. -- Before you change a wheel, be sure the ground is level and firm. If necessary, use a sturdy board under the jack*. -- Alwaysstore the vehicle tool kit, the jack* and the replacedtire in the luggage compartment > page 63.
G) Tips
Obeyall laws.
Changing a wheel
When you changea wheel, follow the sequence described below step-by-step and in exactly that order.
1. Remove the decorative wheel cover*. For moredetails see also > page 372, Decorative wheelcovers or > page 373, Wheels with wheelbolt caps.
2. Loosen the wheel bolts > page 373. 3. Locate the proper mounting point for the
jack* and align the jack* below that point => page 374. 4. Raise the car with the jack* > page 374. Removethe wheel with the flat tire and then install the spare > page 375. 6. Tighten all wheel bolts lightly. Lower the vehicle with the jack*. 8. Use the wheel bolt wrench and firmly tighten all wheel bolts > page 373. 9. Replace the decorative wheel cover*.

ZA WARNING
Always read and follow all WARNINGS and information > A\ in Raising the vehicle on page 374 and > page 376.
After changing a wheel
A wheel changeis not complete without the doing the following.
> Alwaysstore the vehicle tool kit, the jack* and the replaced tire in the luggage compartment => page 63.
> Check the tire pressure on the spare wheel immediately after mounting it.
> As soon as possible, have the tightening torqueson all wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench. The correct tightening torque is 90 ft lb (120 Nm).
> Have the flat tire replaced as soon as possible.
(i) Tips
-- If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn while changing a tire, they should be replaced before you check the tightening torque.
-- Drive at reduced speed until you have the tightening torques checked.
-- After changing a wheel, the tire pressure in all four tires must be checked/corrected and the tire pressure monitoring indicator must be stored in the MMI & page 358.
eye - LMRU -11LE
Applies to: vehicles with decorative wheel covers
The decorative wheel covers must be removed first to access the wheel bolts.

[841-1521

372

Fig. 285 Changing a wheel: Removing the wheel cover

B4L-1337
| B8K-1481

Removing > Insert the hook (provided with the vehicle tool
kit) in the hole in the wheel hub cover. > Pull off the decorative wheel cover > fig. 285.
Wheels with wheel bolt caps
iUeZ Applies to: vehicles with wheel bolts with caps
The caps must be removedfirst from the wheel bolts before the bolts can be unscrewed.
&
Fig. 286 Changing a wheel: removing the wheelbolt caps
Removing > Push the plastic clip (provided with the vehicle
tool kit) over the wheel bolt cap until the inner retainers on the clip align with the edge of the cover. > Removethe cap with the plastic clip (vehicle tool kit) > fig. 286. Refitting > Place the caps over the wheel bolts and push them back on. The caps are to protect and keep the wheel bolts clean.

Emergency assistance
Loosening and tightening the wheel bolts The wheelbolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle.
Fig. 287 Changing a wheel: loosening the wheel bolts
Loosening > Slide the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as
far as it will go. > Take tight hold of the end of the wrench handle
and turn the wheel bolts counter-clockwise about one single turn in the direction of arrow > fig. 287. Tightening > Slide the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go. > Take tight hold of the end of the wrench handle and turn each wheel bolt clockwise until it is seated.
ZA WARNING
-- Do not use force or hurry when changing a wheel - you can cause the vehicleto slip off the jack* and cause serious personal injuries.
-- Do not loosen the wheel bolts more than one turn before you raise the vehicle with the jack*. - You risk an injury.
(i) Tips
-- Never use the hexagonal socket in the handle of the screwdriver to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts.
-- If a wheel bolt is very tight, you mayfind it easier to loosen by carefully pushing down on the end of the wheel bolt wrench with one foot only. As you do so, hold on to the

8V2012721B)

373

Emergency assistance

car to keep your balance and take care not to slip.
Rete meat mlacs
Applies to: vehicles with jack
The vehicle must belifted with the jackfirst before the wheel can be removed.
>o©DasoO)
Fig. 289 Sill: positioning the vehicle jack
> Engage the parking braketo prevent your vehicle from rolling unintentionally.
> Movethe selector lever to position P. >» Find the marking (imprint) on the sill that is
nearest the wheel thatwill be changed > fig. 288. Behind the marking, there is a Lifting point on the sill for the vehicle jack. > Vehicles with a sill: Note the position ofthe sill when positioning the vehicle jack > fig. 289. » Place the vehicle jack (vehicle tool kit) on a firm surface. Use a flat, stable support if necessary. On a slippery surface such as tile, you should use a non-slip pad (such as a rubber mat) > /A\. > Turn the vehicle jack located under the lifting point on the sill to raise the jack until its arm @ > fig. 289 is located under the designated plas-
tic mount > A\, > ©.
> Align the jack so thatits arm @) © fig. 289 engagesin the designated lifting point in the door

sill and the movable base lies flat on the ground. The base mustbe vertical under the lifting point @). > Wind the jack up further until the flat tire
comesoff the ground > A\.
Position the vehicle jack only under the designated lifting points on the sill > fig. 288. Thereis exactly one location for each wheel. The jack must not be positioned at any other location >A>©.
An unstable surface under the jack can cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. Always provide a firm base for the jack on the ground. If necessary place a sturdy board or similar support under the jack. On hard, slippery surfaces (such as tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping > A\.
ZA WARNING
-- You or your passengers could be injured while changing a wheel if you do not follow these safety precautions:
-- Position the vehicle jack only at the designated lifting points and align the jack. Otherwise, the vehicle jack could slip and cause an injuryif it does not have sufficient hold on the vehicle.
-- A soft or unstable surface under the jack maycausethe vehicle toslip off the jack. Alwaysprovide a firm base for the jack on the ground. If necessary, use a sturdy board under the jack.
-- On hard, slippery surface (such as tiles) use a rubber mator similar to prevent the jack from slipping.
-- Onlyraise your vehicle with the vehicle jack provided by the factory. If you use a vehicle jack for another vehicle, your vehicle can slide and cause injury.
-- Changes in load can affect the height of the vehicle.
-- Never start the engine when the vehicleis raised, which could cause an accident.
-- Support the vehicle securely with appropriate stands if work is to be performed underneath the vehicle; otherwise, thereis a potential risk for injury.

374

Emergency assistance

-- To help prevent injury to yourself and your passengers: -- Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. -- Passengers must not remain in the vehicle when it is jacked up. -- Make sure that passengerswait in a safe place away from the vehicle and well away from the road and traffic. -- Makesurejack position is correct, adjust as necessary and then continue toraise the jack.
@) Note
Do notLift the vehicle by the sill. Position the vehicle jack only at the designated lifting points on the sill. Otherwise, your vehicle will be damaged.
Taking the wheel off/installing the spare
Follow these instructions step-by-step for changing the wheel.
@+& "0oO

After you have loosened all wheel bolts and raised the vehicle off the ground, remove and replace the wheel as follows:
Removing the wheel
> Use the hexagonal socketin the screwdriver handle to completely remove the topmost wheel bolt and setit aside on a clean surface > fig. 290.
> Screw the threaded end ofthe alignmentpin from the tool kit hand-tight into the empty bolt hole > fig. 291.
> Then removethe other wheel bolts as described above.
> Take off the wheel leaving the alignment pin in
the bolt hole >@.
Putting on the compact spare wheel
> Lift the spare wheel and carefully slide it over the alignment pin to guide it in place >@.
> Use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to screw in and tighten all wheel bolts slightly.
> Removethe alignment pin and insert and tighten the remaining wheel bolt slightly like the
rest.
> Turn the jack handle counter-clockwise to lower the vehicle until the jack* is fully released.
> Use the wheel bolt wrench to tighten all wheel bolts firmly > page 373. Tighten them crosswise, from one bolt to the (approximately) opposite one, to keep the wheel centered.

Fig. 290 Changing a wheel: using the screwdriver handle (with the blade removed) to turn the bolts
+nRS "ooOO
Fig. 291 Changing a wheel: alignmentpin inside the top hole

@) Note
When removing or installing the wheel, the rim could hit the brake rotor and damage the rotor. Work carefully and have a second person help you.
@) Tips
Never use the hexagonal socketin the handle of the screwdriver to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts. -- Pull the reversible blade from the screwdriv-
er before you use the hexagonal socketin the handle to turn the wheel bolts.

8V2012721B)

375

Emergency assistance
-- When mounting tires with unidirectional tread design makesure the tread pattern is pointed the right way > page 376.
-- The wheel bolts should be clean and easy to turn. Check for dirt and corrosion on the mating surfaces of both the wheel and the hub. Removeall dirt from these surfaces before remounting the wheel.
Tires with unidirectional tread design
Tires with unidirectional tread design must be mountedwith their tread pattern pointed in the right direction.
Using a sparetire with a tread pattern intendedfor use in a specific direction
When using a sparetire with a tread pattern intended for usein a specific direction, please note the following:
-- The direction of rotation is marked by an arrow on the side ofthe tire.
-- If the sparetire has to be installed in the incorrect direction, use the sparetire only temporarily since the tire will not be able to achieveits optimum performance characteristics with regard to aquaplaning, noise and wear.
-- We recommend that you pay particular attention to this fact during wet weather and that you adjust your speed to match road conditions.
-- Replace the flat tire with a new one and haveit installed on your vehicle as soon as possible to restore the handling advantagesof a unidirectional tire.

sible by your authorized Audi dealer or a qualified service station. -- With steel and alloy wheel rims, the wheel bolts are correctly tightened at a torque of 90 ft lbs (120 Nm). -- If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn while changing a tire, they should be replaced before you check the tightening torque. -- Replace the flat tire with a new one and have it installed on your vehicle as soon as possible. Remountthe wheel cover.
Until then, drive with extra care and at reduced
speeds.
ZA WARNING
-- If you are going to equip your vehicle with tires or rims which differ from those which were factory installed, then be sure to read the information > page 346.
-- Always makesure the damaged wheel or even a flat tire and the jack* and tool kit are properly secured in the luggage compartment and are notloose in the passenger
compartment.
--Inan accident or sudden maneuver they could fly forward, injuring anyone in the vehicle.
-- Always store damaged wheel, jack* and tools securely in the luggage compartment.
Otherwise, in an accident or sudden maneu-
ver they could fly forward, causing injury to passengersin the vehicle.

Notes on wheel changing
Please read the information > page 346 if you are going to use sparetire which is different
from the tires on your vehicle.
After you change tire:
-- Check the tire pressure on the spare immediately after installation.
-- Have the wheel bolt tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as pos-

376

Spare tire
General information
Applies to: vehicles with space-saving spare tire (compact sparetire)
2ES6S2%}N
Fig. 292 Luggage compartment: cargofloor folded up
(versions 1 and 2)
Fig. 293 Spare tire (example)
The spare tire > fig. 293 is intended for shortterm useonly. Have the damaged tire checked and replaced if necessary by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon as possible. There are some restrictions on the use of the compactsparetire. The compactsparetire has been designed specifically for your type of vehicle. Do not replace it with the spare tire from another type of vehicle.

BFV-0231

Emergency assistance
Removing the sparetire
Applies to: vehicles with version 1
> Lift up the cargo floor with the plastic handle until the cargo floor is clamped behind the tabs on both side panels @ © fig. 292.
>» Applies to: vehicles with subwoofer in the spare wheel well: Remove the subwoofer*. Check which subwoofer is installed based on the connector: > page 378.
> Turn the handwheel counter-clockwise and remove it.
> Removethe sparetire.
Removing the sparetire
Applies to: vehicles with version 2
> Lift the cargo floor up using the plastic handle. > Hang the plastic hook on the luggage compart-
ment weather strip @) 9 fig. 292.
> Turn the handwheel counter-clockwise and remove it.
> Removethe sparetire.
Snowchains
For technical reasons, the use of snow chains on the compactsparetire is not permitted.
If you haveto drive with snow chains and a front tire fails, mount the sparetire in place of a rear tire. Install the snow chains on the rear tire that you removed, and install that in place of the front tire that failed.
Z\ WARNING
-- After installing a sparetire, the tire pressure mustbe checked as soon as possible. The tire pressure is available on > page 350, fig. 278
-- Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) with a compactsparetire. Driving faster than that increasesthe risk of an accident.
--To reducethe risk of an accident, avoid hard acceleration or braking and driving fast around curves with the compactsparetire.
--To reducethe risk of an accident, never drive with more than one compactsparetire.
-- Normal summer or winter tires must not be mounted on the compact spare wheel rim.

8V2012721B)

377

Emergency assistance
Removing the subwoofer
Applies to: vehicles with subwoofer in the spare wheel well
The subwoofer must be removed before the spare wheel* can be removed.
n|y S>&.|

> Insert the connector that was removed. > Applies to: vehicles with subwoofer (version 2):
Slide the lock @ back in the direction of the subwoofer. » Secure the subwoofer with the bolt. > Fold the cargo floor cover back into place.
@ Tips
The subwoofer can also be mounted when the sparetire is not in the spare wheel well.

Fig. 295 Sparetire well: subwoofer (version 2)
Removing the subwoofer (version 1)
> Lift up the cargo floor > page 377,fig. 292. > Press the connector tabs @) > fig. 294 togeth-
er. > Removethe connector (2) and set the discon-
nected cable aside.
> Removethebolt @).
> Carefully remove the subwoofer.
Removing the subwoofer (version 2)
> Lift up the cargo floor > page 377, fig. 292. > Pull the lock (@) 9 fig. 295 toward the cable. > Press the locking tab (2) down. > Removethe connector (3) and set the removed
cable aside.
> Removethebolt @).
> Carefully remove the subwoofer.
Installing the subwoofer
> Carefully place the subwoofer in the rim well. The word "FRONT" on the subwoofer must face forward.
378

Fuses and bulbs Fuses
Cees ure mate
Fig. 297 Left side of the engine compartment: fuse cover
A fuse that has blown will have metal strips that have burned through. The fuses are located behind a cover in the steering column area > fig. 296 or under a cover on the left side of the engine compartment > fig. 297. > Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment
off. > Check the following table to see which fuse be-
longs to the equipment > page 380. > Removethe cover. > Removethe plastic clip from the fuse panel
cover in the engine compartment > fig. 297. » Removethe fuse using the plastic clamp. > Replace the burned fuse with a fuse that has
the same current rating. > Reinsert the cover.

Fuses and bulbs

Fuse color identification

Color
Black Purple Light brown Brown Red Blue Yellow White or transparent Green Orange

Current rating in amps 1 3 5
7. 10 TS 20 [25 30 40

ZA\ WARNING

Do not repair fuses and never replace a blown fuse with one that has a higher amp rating. This can cause damage to the electrical sys-
tem and fire.

(C!) Note
If a new fuse burns out again shortly after you
haveinstalled it, have the electrical system
checked as soon as possible by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty.

@) Tips
-- The following table doesnotlist fuse locations that are not used.
-- Some of the equipment listed in the following tables applies only to certain model versions or certain optional equipment.

8V2012721B)

379

Fuses and bulbs

Fuse assignment - interior

=8§

`F2

RS |

ore eran | aw. Aeaeee eee

a WEEParSEARS
LF3205330634) E35) £36£37) Prarar
8 Dl faag

Fig. 298 Vehicle interior: fuse assignment
Nallequlenene Ed |Seatadjastment
hvdrauli F3 |P~-- t`op hydraulic -- ;
F4 IcHnofrmoopttaoaiinnemnetnst t conttrot panel, Isnfnortoariainmen t
FS Gateway
56 Selector lever (automatic transmission),
steering lock
Air conditioning/heating controls, auxiliary F7 |heating, rear window defogger,tire pres-
sure monitor
Electromechanical parking brake switch, F8 |lIaiglghatrmNEsSysWwsiIttcEhe,Rm,tadrnaiiang/'ln9iogshttiPcEcNoGn!neActRoEtriE-,EtHhrSeofotf
module, emergencycall system, headlight range control F9 Steering column switch module F10 Infotainment system display Fil Left vehicle electrical system control module F12 Infotainment components
F13 Driver's side safety belt tensioner, airbag F14 Heating and A/C system blower control

No.| Equipment

F15 E|i. leenccteraocniccesssteceornitnrgolcomloudmunlleock, conven-

F16/|TV tuner, telephone antenna

F17 Instrument cluster F18 Rearview camera

F19 | Vehicle tracking, parallel parking assist

F20 Engine components

F21 Steering column, steering wheel heating

£23 sPwaintocrhammio-cdugllaess roof/power top control

module, power top latch

F24

Rightvehicle electrical system control
module

F25 Driver's side front/rear power windows

F26 Seat heating

F27 Interior lights

F28 Power top control module
F29 | Interior lights

F30 Diagnostic connector
£32 Front camera, parking system, ACC sensor, lane change assist
F33 | Airbag

£34 Hl5ioglhdt sawssi.itscth,buttetmopne,rainttuerreiorsesnosuonrd,,nebcakck-up
heating and sockets, power top operation
button
Air quality sensor, automatic dimming
F35 rearview mirror, diagnostic connector, center console power supply
F36 Right headlight (LED, Matrix LED)
F37 Left headlight (LED, Matrix LED)

F38 High-voltage -battery

F39 Passenger's side front/rear power windows

F40 Sockets

F41 | Passenger's side safety belt tensioner
F42 Central locking area

F43 Sound-amplifier

F44 All wheel drive F45 | Driver's side seat adjustment

F47 | Rear window wiper

F48 Outer sound actuator

380

Fuses and bulbs

No.| Equipment F49 Clutch sensor, engine start, high-voltage
battery, power electronics
F52 Level control system control module F53 Rear window defogger
The power seats* are protected via circuit breakers that automatically switch on after a few sec-
onds after the overload has been reduced.
Fuse assignment - engine compartment
©=
8

Fig. 299 Engine compartment: fuse assignment

No. Equipment

Fl Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)

F2_ Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)

F3 Engine control module

F4 Engine components, engine cooling

FS Engine components, CNG cut-off valve

Fé Brake light switch

Engine components, water pumps, tank
system

F8 Heat oxygen sensor

FQ Engine components, exhaust door, glow time control module

F10 Fuel control module, fuel pump

No. Equipment
F11 |Auxiliary heater heating element 2, en-
gine components
F12 Auxiliary heater heating element 3, vac-
uum pump F13 |T------ issionEEflue id ee F15 [Horn
Powerandcontrolelectronics, engine
F16 |components,ignition coil, options mod-

ule
F17 gEil|. encetcroonnitcroSltamboidliuzlaetion Control (ESC), en-

518 Terminal 30 (voltage reference), battery monitoring
F19 Windshield wipers
F20 Anti-theft alarm system

F21 Automatic transmission

F22

Terminal 50 diagnosis, engine control module

F23 Engine start

F24

Auxiliary heater heating element 1, brake booster

F31 Vacuum pump, water pump,high pressure pump, fuel injectors

F33 Brake pressure reservoir, recuperation F34 Brake booster

F35 Climate control system

F36 Left front headlamp
F37 Parking heater
F38 Right front headlamp

Bulbs
Replacing light bulbs
For your safety, we recommendthat you have your authorized Audi dealer replace any bulbs for you.
It is becoming increasingly more and moredifficult to replace vehicle light bulbs since in many cases, other parts of the car mustfirst be removed beforeyou are able to get to the bulb. This applies especially to the light bulbs in the >

8V2012721B)

381

Fuses and bulbs
front of your car which you can only reach through the engine compartment.
Sheet metal and bulb holders can have sharp edges that can cause serious cuts, parts must be correctly taken apart and then properly put back together to help prevent breakage of parts and long term damage from water that can enter housings that have not been properlyresealed.
For your safety, we recommend that you have your authorized Audi dealer replace any bulbs for you, since your dealer has the proper tools, the correct bulbs and the expertise.
Gas discharge lamps(Xenon lights)
Due to the high electrical voltage, have the bulbs replaced by a qualified technician. Headlights with Xenon light are identified by the high voltage sticker.
LED headlights*
LED headlights require no maintenance. Please contact your authorized Audi dealer if a bulb needs to be replaced.
ZX WARNING
Changing Xenon lamps without the necessary equipment can causeserious personal injury. -- Bulbs are pressurized and can explode when
being changed. Potential risk of injury! -- On vehicles equipped with gas discharge
bulbs (Xenon light) life-threatening injuries can result from improper handling of the high-voltage portions of such lamps! -- Only your authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop should change the bulbsin gas discharge lamps. There are parts with sharp edges on the openings and on the bulb holders that can causeserious cuts. If
you are uncertain about what to do, have the
work performed by an authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop. Serious personal injury may result from improperly performed work.
@) Tips
-- If you still prefer to replace the light bulbs yourself, be aware that the engine compart-
382

ment is a hazardous area to work in > A\ in General information on page 325.
--It is best to ask your authorized Audi dealer whenever you wantto change a bulb.

8V2012721B)

Emergencysituations General
This chapter is intended for trained emergency crews and working personnel whohave the necessary tools and equipmentto perform these operations.
Starting by pushing or towing
@) Note
Vehicles with an automatic transmission cannot be started by pushing or towing.
Jump starting
If needed, the engine can be jumpstarted by another vehicle battery.
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive: The connection points for the jump start cable are different > page 100.
If the engine does not start because the vehicle battery is drained, you can jump start your vehicle using another vehicle. Jump start cables are needed to do this.
Both vehicle batteries must have 12 V nominal voltage. The voltage capacity (Ah) of the vehicle battery that is giving power mustnot be less than the capacity of the drained vehicle battery.
Jump start cable Only use a jump start cable with a large enough diameter. Note the manufacturer's specifications.
Only use a jump start cable with insulated terminal clamps.
Positive cable - usually red.
Negative cable - usually black.
ZA WARNING
-- A drained battery can freeze at temperatures around 32 °F (0 °C). If the vehicle bat-

Emergencysituations
tery is frozen, it must be thawed before connecting the jump start cables. If it is not, the risk of an explosion and chemical burns increases. After jump starting the vehicle, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the vehicle battery checked. -- Read the warnings when working in the engine compartment > page 325. -- Handling the jump start cables incorrectly maycause the vehicle battery to explode and lead to serious injuries. -- Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive: You must not give a jump start with your vehicle. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system in your vehicle > page 100. -- Applies to: vehicles with battery in the engine compartment: To reducethe risk of
chemical burns, do not bend over the vehicle
battery.
@) Note Jump start cables can cause considerable damage to the vehicle electrical system if they are connected incorrectly.
G) Tips
-- There must be no contact between the vehi-
cles, or else voltage could flow when con-
necting the positive terminal and drain the vehicle battery of the vehicle providing the jump start. -- The drained vehicle battery must be connected correctly to the electrical system. -- Switch off electrical equipmentthat is not needed.
383

Emergencysituations

A3 models: starting the engine
Both jump start cables must be connectedin the correct order.
a85I| a=
Fig. 300 Engine compartment: connecting the jump start
cable (diagram)
Plug-in hybrid drive*: the connection points for the jump start cables vary > page 100.
The vehicle battery is located on the left front side of the engine compartment. Open the cover to access the positive terminal of the vehicle battery. The procedure for connecting jump start cables that is described next is designed to help jump start your vehicle.
Follow the information about the vehicle battery => page 335.
Preparations 1. Read the following carefully > page 383,
Preparation.
2. Set the parking brake and place the selector lever in the "P" position.
3. Turn the ignition and electrical equipment off in both vehicles.
Connecting/disconnecting the jump start cable 4. Fold the battery cover upward. 5. Clamp the end of the red jump start cable to
the positive terminal @ © fig. 300 on your vehicle >(@) in Preparation on page 383. 6. Clamp the other end of the red jump start ca-
ble to the positive terminal @) on the vehicle
battery providing the current. 7. Clamp the black end of the jump start cable
preferably to the ground point, or to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery @) on the vehicle providing the current.

8. Clamp the other end of the black jump start cable only to the ground point (@) on your ve-
hicle >@.
9. Route the jump start cables so they cannot get caught in the moving parts in the engine compartment.
Starting the engine
10. First start the engine in the vehicle giving the charge and let it run at idle.
11. Now start the engine in the vehicle with the drained vehicle battery and wait two to three minutes until it "runs smoothly".
12. If the engine does notstart, stop the starting procedure after 10 seconds and then repeat it after approximately 30 seconds.
13. In the vehicle that is being jump started, switch the heater fan and rear window defroster on to reduce any voltage peaks that may occur when disconnecting the jumper cables. The headlights must be switched off.
14. While the engines are running, remove the cables in reverse order from the way they wereinstalled, as described in > page 384. Makesure the cables do not get caught in moving engine components.
15. Fold the cover back on the battery correctly. 16. Switch the heater fan and rear window de-
froster off.
ZAWARNING
-- Do not touch the non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps. The cable mustalso not come into contact with vehicle components that conduct electricity when it is connected to the positive terminal. This can cause a short circuit.
-- The plugs on the battery cells must not be opened.
-- Keep ignition sources (such as open flames, burning cigarettes, etc.) away from the vehicle batteries to reduce the risk of an explosion.
-- Route the jump start cables so they cannot get caught in the moving parts in the other vehicle's engine compartment.

384

Emergencysituations

@) Note Do not use the negative terminal on the vehi-
S could occur ine the vehicleele ectrie cal e systecmy.
-- Please note that the connecting process described below for the jump start cablesis intended for when your vehicle is being jump started. If you are jump starting another ve-
hicle, do not connect the negative cable to
the negative terminal (-) on the drained vehicle battery, but rather connect it to a large metal componentthat is bolted securely to the engine block, or to the engine block itsienlgf.juImfptshteavretheidcilesbnatottevreyntiendttheovtehhiecoluetb-eside, there is a risk of explosion due to hydrogen gas.
@- Tips Makesure that the connected positive terminal clamps havesufficient contact with metal.
Both jump start cables must be connectedin the correct order.
QN23&E&J]
Fig. 301 Engine compartment: connectorsfor a charger and jump start cables
qe2g8|
Fig. 302 Connecting the jump start cable (diagram)

Jump start points are located on the left side of tbhaetteenrgyineficg.om3p0a1r.tOmepnetnitnhesctaeapdoonf tthhee pvoeshiitcilvee terminal. The procedure for connecting jump
start cables that is described nextis designed to
help jump start your vehicle.

Follow the information about the vehicle battery => page 335.

Preparations

1. Read the following carefully > page 383,
Preparation.
2. Set th:e parking bra_ke and place the selector 3. Tleuvrenr tihnethigeni"tPi"opnoasintdioenl.ectrical equipment off

in both vehicles. Connecting/disconnecting the jump start cable

4. Open the cover on the positive terminal. 5 Clamp the end of the red jump start cable to
the positive terminal @ > page 384,fig. 300
page 383. on your vehicle =>@) in Preparation on
6. Clamp the other end of the red jump start ca-
ble to the positive terminal (2) on the vehicle
battery providing the current.
7. Clamp the black end of the jump start cable
preferably to the ground point,or to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery @) on the vehicle providing the current.
8. Clamp the other end of the black jump start cable onlyto the ground point() on your ve-
hicle. 9. Route the jump start cables so they cannot
get caught in the moving parts in the engine

compartment.

Starting the engine

10. First start the engine in the vehicle giving the

charge and let it run at idle.

11. Now start the engine in the vehicle with the

drained vehicle battery and wait two to three

minutes until it "runs smoothly".

12. If the engine does notstart, stop the starting

procedure after 10 seconds and then repeat

it after approximately 30 seconds.

8V2012721B)

385

Emergencysituations

13. In the vehicle that is being jump started, switch the heater fan and rear window defroster on to reduce any voltage peaks that may occur when disconnecting the jumper cables. The headlights must be switched off.
14. While the engines are running, remove the cablesin reverse order from the way they wereinstalled, as described in > page 384. Makesure the cables do not get caught in moving engine components.
15. Close the cap on the positive terminal. 16. Switch the heater fan and rear window de-
froster off.
ZA WARNING
-- Never connect the jump start cable directly to your vehicle battery. Only use the connections in the engine compartment.
-- Do not touch the non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps. The cable must also not come into contact with vehicle components that conduct electricity when it is connected to the positive vehicle battery terminal. This can cause a shortcircuit.
-- The plugs on the battery cells must not be opened.
-- Keep ignition sources (such as open flames, burning cigarettes, etc.) away from the vehicle batteries to reduce the risk of an explosion.
-- Route the jump start cables so they cannot get caught in the moving parts in the other vehicle's engine compartment.
@) Note
Please note that the connecting processpreviously described for the jump start cables is intended for when your vehicle is being jump started. If you are jump starting another vehicle, connect the negative cable (-) to a large metal component thatis bolted securely to the engine block, or to the engine block itself. If the vehicle battery in the vehicle being jump started is not vented to the outside, there is a risk of explosion due to hydrogen
gas.

G) Tips Makesure that the connected jump start cables have sufficient contact with metal.
Towing with a tow truck
General hints Your Audi requires special handling for towing.
The following information is to be used by commercial tow truck operators who know howto operate their equipmentsafely. -- Never tow your Audi. Towing will cause dam-
age to the engine and transmission. -- Never wrap the safety chains or winch cables
aroundthe brakelines. -- To prevent unnecessary damage,your Audi
mustbe transported with a flatbed truck. -- To load the vehicle on to the flatbed, use the
towing loop found in the vehicle tools and attach to the front or rear anchorage > page 386 and > page 387.
ZA WARNING
A vehicle being towed is not safe for passengers. Never allow anyone toride in a vehicle being towed, for any reason.
Front towing loop
2¢Sia
Fig. 303 Rightside of front bumper:installing the towing
loop
The threaded opening for the towing loop is located behind a cover on the right side of the front bumper. » Removethe towing loop from the vehicle tool
kit > page 368.

386

> Press inward on the upper left area of the cap with brief, strong pressure to removeit from the bumper & fig. 303.
> Insert the towing loop in the threaded opening until it stops, and then tighten it with the wheel wrench.
> After using, place the towing loop back in the vehicle tool kit.
Z\ WARNING
If the towing loop is not tightened until it stops when installing, the threads may be pulled out when towing the vehicle and result in an accident.

Emergencysituations
ZXWARNING
If the towing loop is not tightened until it stops when installing, the threads may be pulled out when towing the vehicle and result in an accident.
eee aM Roe Mic leltema 4

BFV-03) B8V-0402

Rear towing loop

Fig. 304 Rightside of rear bumper: installing the towing loop
The towing loop threaded opening is located in the right of the rear bumper cover under a cover.
> Removethe towing loop from the vehicle tool kit > page 368.
> To removethe cap from the bumper, press in on the upperarea of the cap withbrief, strong pressure and lift it up from the lower area > fig. 304.
> Tighten the towing loop in the threaded opening until it stops and then tighten it with a wheel wrench.
> After using, place the towing loop back in the vehicle tool kit.
Depending on the model, the shape of the cover can vary.

Fig. 305 Vehicle on flatbed truck (example)
Front hook up
> Align the vehicle with the centerline of the car carrier ramp.
» Attach the winch hook to the front towline eye previously installed.
Rear hook up
> Align the vehicle with the centerline of the car carrier ramp.
> Attach the winch hook to the rear towline eye previously installed.
G) Tips
Check carefully to make sure the hook-up is secure before moving the car up the flatbed truck ramp.

8V2012721B)

387

Emergencysituations
Raising the vehicle
Lifting with workshop hoist and with floor
jack The vehicle may only belifted at the lifting pointsillustrated.
=o2Sx&eOs
Fig. 306 Frontlifting point (example)
Fig. 307 Rear lifting point (example)
> Read and heed WARNING > A\.
> Locatelifting points > fig. 306 and © fig. 307. > Adjustlifting arms of workshop hoist or floor
jack to match vehiclelifting points. > Insert a rubber pad between the floor jack/
workshop hoist and the Lifting points. If you mustlift your vehicle with a floor jack to workunderneath, be sure the vehicle is safely supported on stands intendedfor this purpose.
Frontlifting point The lifting point is located on the floor pan reinforcement about at the same level as the jack mounting point > fig. 306. Do notlift the vehicle at the vertical sill reinforcement. Rear lifting point The lifting point is located on the vertical reinforcement of the lower sill for the on-board jack
> fig. 307.
388

ex BSV-0404

Lifting with vehicle jack
Refer to > page 374.
ZX WARNING
--To reduce the risk of serious injury and vehicle damage.
-- Alwayslift the vehicle only at the special workshop hoist and floor jack lift pointsillustrated > fig. 306 and > fig. 307.
-- Failure tolift the vehicle at these points could cause the vehicle totilt or fall from a lift if there is a change in vehicle weight distribution and balance. This might happen, for example, when heavy components such as the engine block or transmission are removed.
-- When removing heavy componentslike
these, anchor vehicle to hoist or add corre-
sponding weights to maintain the center of gravity. Otherwise, the vehicle mighttilt or slip off the hoist, causing serious personal injury.
@) Note
-- Be awareofthe following points before Lifting the vehicle:
-- Thevehicle should never belifted or jacked up from underneath the engineoil pan, the transmission housing, the front or rear axle or the body side members. This could lead to serious damage.
-- To avoid damage to the underbodyor
chassis frame, a rubber pad mustbein-
serted betweenthefloor jack and thelift points. -- Before driving over a workshophoist, check that the vehicle weight does not exceed the permissible lifting capacity of the hoist. -- Before driving over a workshophoist, ensure thatthereis sufficient clearance between thehoist and low partsofthe vehicle.

Accessories and technical changes

Accessories and technical changes
Warranty
Your vehicle is covered by various warranties:
-- New Vehicle Limited Warranty -- Limited Warranty Against Corrosion Perforation -- Emissions Control System Warranties: Federal
Emissions Control System Defect Warranty, Federal Emissions Performance Warranty -- Applies to: USA models: Kansas Safety Belt Limited Warranty -- Applies to: USA models: California Emissions Control Warranties: Short-term Emissions Defects Warranty, Long-term Emissions Defects Warranty, TZEV models Emissions Defects Warranty, California Emissions Performance Warranty
You can find detailed information in your Warranty & Maintenance Booklet and in the California Emissions Booklet*.
Audi Literature Shop
Service information is made available as soon as possible after a model is introduced and can be ordered in the Audi Literature Shop: http:// literature.audiusa.com
Driving in other countries
Government regulations in the United States and Canada require motor vehicles to comply with emissions regulations and safety standards.
Therefore, vehicles that were produced for the
U.S. and Canadian marketsare different from vehicles produced for other countries.
If you plan to use your vehicle outside of the
United States or Canada, it is possible that:
-- Fuel may have a significantly lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuels can cause engine damage.
-- Proper maintenance and repair work may not
be possible because special service equipment, tools, or measuring devices needed for your vehicle may notbe available.

-- Replacement parts may not always be available.
-- Navigation systems for vehicles built for the U.S.A. and Canada will not necessarily work in Europe, and may not work in other countries.
() Note
Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle resulting from these country-specific differences.
Maintenance, repairs, and technical modifications
Note the safety precautions > page 325, General information and > page 374, Raising the vehicle.
General information
Due to the increasing complexity of technologyin
these vehicles, as well as the safety and environ-
mental standards that apply, you can only perform a very limited amount of repairs and modifications to the vehicle yourself.
Proof of maintenance work maybe required to submit a claim within the warranty period.
Werecommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and that Audi Genuine Parts and Audi Genuine Accessories are used. This helps to ensure that your vehicle's functionality, performance, and safety are not impaired.
Maintenance and repairs
Your vehicle was designed to help keep maintenance requirements to a minimum. Some regular maintenanceis required to help ensure that your vehicle runs in a safe, economical, and reliable manner. Please refer to your Warranty & Maintenance Booklet for more detailed information about vehicle maintenance.
When operating the vehicle under more extreme operating conditions, for example when outside temperatures are very low or in very dusty envi-
ronments, certain maintenance should be per-
formed between the specified intervals.

8V2012721B)

389

Accessories and technical changes
Usually maintenance and repair work requires special tools, measuring devices, and other equipment that is available to trained vehicle technicians in order to help ensure that your vehicle and all of its systems operate correctly, reliably, and safely. Performing work on the vehicle incorrectly can impair the operation and reliability of your vehicle and may void one or more of your vehicle's warranties.
Technical Modifications
Interference with electronic components,their software, the wiring, and data transfer may cause malfunctions. Because of the way electronic componentsare interconnected, such malfunctions can also impair systems that are notdirectly involved. This means that you risk both a substantial reduction in the operational safety of your vehicle and increased wear of vehicle components.
Some convenience functions, such as the conven-
ience turn signal function, individual door opening function, and displays, can be reprogrammed using special workshop equipment. If functions are reprogrammed, the information and descriptions about these functions in this Owner's Manual may no longer apply to the changed functions. Audi recommends that an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility perform and verify any reprogramming procedures.
ZA\ WARNING
Maintenance procedures, repairs, or technical modifications that are performed incorrectly increase the risk of an accident and can lead to serious injuries.
ZA\ WARNING
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a potentially dangerous area and can cause serious personal injury. -- Always use extreme caution when doing any
work in the engine compartment. Always follow commonly accepted safety practices and use common sense. Never risk personal injury. -- Never perform any work in the engine compartment unless you know exactly how to

carry out the job and havethe correct technical information and the correct tools.
-- If you are uncertain about what to do, have
the work performed by an authorized Audi
dealer, an authorized Audi Service Facility, or another qualified workshop. Serious per-
sonal injury may result from improperly performed work.
C) Note
-- Maintenance procedures,repairs or technical modifications that are performed incorrectly can cause damage to the vehicle, such as corrosion.
-- If emergency repairs must be performed, take your vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon as possible.
-- Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle resulting from failure to comply with these guidelines.
@) For the sake of the environment
-- Regular maintenancecan help protect the environment.
-- Technical modifications to the vehicle can have a negative impact on fuel consumption and vehicle emissions.
@) For the sake of the environment
Undeployed airbag modules and pretensioners are classified as Perchlorate Material special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca. gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. When the vehicle or parts of the restraint system including airbag modules and safety belts with pretensioners are scrapped, all applicable laws and regulations must be observed. Your authorized Audi dealer is familiar with these requirements and we recommend that you have your dealer perform this service for you.
G) Tips
Because ofyour vehicle's aluminum body design, all service and repair procedures affecting the body should be performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi

390

Service Facility, who will perform the work according to Audi factory specifications. Only Audi Genuine Parts are used when Audi experts perform repair or service procedures. Failure to use Audi Genuine Parts or Audi Genuine Accessories or performing repairs incorrectly may result in severe vehicle damage, such as corrosion.
Accessories and parts
Consult with an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility before purchasing accessories or replacement parts. We recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and that Audi Genuine Parts and Audi Genuine Accessories are used.
Audi does not endorse the use of products and accessories that it has not evaluated, even if the productis approved by a certified testing agency or government agency.
ZA WARNING
-- Installing unapproved accessories or incorrect replacement parts can cause vehicle damage and can increasethe risk of an accident.
-- Never attach accessories, such as telephone holders or cup holders, to the airbag covers or within the airbag deploymentzone, because this increases the risk of injury if the airbag deploys.
-- Do not use license plate bracket on the front bumper that is different from the bracket installed at the factory, and do not attach any additional brackets.
() Note
A correctly-installed exterior antenna is required for operating radio equipmentin the vehicle. Otherwise, the increased electromagnetic waves can cause malfunctions in the vehicle. Observe the regulations in the country wherethe vehicle is being operated and the instructions from the radio equipment manufacturer.

Accessories and technical changes
Reporting Safety Defects
Applicable to U.S.A.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)in addition to notifying
Audi of America, Inc. 2200 Ferdinand Porsche Drive Herndon, VA 20171
If NHTSAreceives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehi-
cles, it may order recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or Audi of America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you maycall
the Vehicle Safety Hotline tollfree at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov;

8V2012721B)

391

Accessories and technical changes
or write to:
Administrator NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Ave.,
S.E. West Building
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safe-
ty from http://www.safercar.gov.
Applicable to Canada
If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect that could cause a crash, in-
jury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls. You should also notify Audi Canada.
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to
Transport Canada, DefectInvesti-
gations and Recalls, may either call Transport Canada toll-free at:
Tel.: 1-800-333-0510 or Tel.: 1-819-994-3328 (Ottawaregion and from other countries) TTY for hearing impaired: 1-888-675-6863
or contact Transport Canada by mail at:

Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Investigations Laboratory 80 Noel Street
Gatineau, QC
J8Z OA1
For additional road safety infor-
mation, please visit the Road
Safety websiteat:
English:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm
French:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/
securiteautomobile/menu.htm
Declaration of compliance for telecommunications equipment and electronic systems
The manufacturer is notliable for radio malfunctions that are caused by unauthorized changes to the equipment.
Equipment
The following equipment complies with FCC section 15 and RSS-Gen:
-- Audi adaptive cruise control* -- Audi side assist* -- Remote control key -- Tire pressure monitoring system*
FCC Part 15.19
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.

392

FCC Part 15.21
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
RSS-Gen
This device complies with Industry Canada'slicence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Accessories and technical changes

8V2012721B)

393

a a B4H-0800

Technical data

Technical data Identification data
Vehicle identification label

XXXXX XX -X-XXXX XXX XX

WOMEEMTnt, XXXXXXXX XX x XXXXXXKX

[Tye /TyPE

XXX XXX

XX XXXXXKK XX KX XK

wongenXXXXX XKW

XXX.
XXX. XXX

LACKNR./ INNENAUSST. PAINT NO./ INTERIOR

yn 1 XNKK WK / WX

M.-AUSST. / OPTIONS

EOA 7D5 4UB 6XM 5SG 5RW

2EH JOZ 1LB

1AS 1BA

3FC

5MU 7X1

FOA

9G3 OG7 OYH OJF

TL6 3KA 8EH U1A X9B QZ7

1xXW

803 908 824 D2D

7176 CV7 7KO 4X3 2K2

3L4

4KC 3Y0 413 5D2

1SA

7GB Q1A

46Q

XX. X XX. X XK. X_--XXXK
<<<

Fig. 308 Vehicle identification label
The vehicle identification label > fig. 308 is located in the luggage compartment under the cargo floor cover.
The vehicle identification label information can also be found in the Warranty and Maintenance booklet.

The sticker contains the following vehicle data:
@® Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
@ Vehicle type, engine output, transmission ® Engine and transmission codes
@ Paint and interior codes
© Optional equipment numbers
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The VIN is located in the following areas:
-- Select: the [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Service & checks > Vehicle infor-
mation.
-- On the vehicle identification label -- At the front behind the windshield*
Notes about technical data
The values may vary based on special equipment as well as market-specific equipment and measuring methods.
Please note that the specifications listed in the vehicle documentation always take precedence.
G) Tips Any technical data that is missing was not available at the time of printing.

Vehicle data

A3 Cabriolet A3 sedan A3 Sportback e-tron RS3 sedan S3 sedan

Length (in (mm))
174.4 (4,430) 175.8 (4,465) 169.6 (4,311) 176.3 (4,479) 176.1 (4,472)

Width (in (mm))
70.5 (1,793) 70.7 (1,796) 70.2 (1,785) 70.9 (1,802) 70.7 (1,796)

Width across the mirrors (in (mm))
77.1 (1,960)
77.1 (1,960) 77.4 (1,966) 77.1 (1,960) 77.1 (1,960)

Height at curb weight (in (mm))
55.4 (1,409)
55.7 (1,416) 56.1 (1,426) 55.0 (1,397) 54.8 (1,392)

394

8V2012721B)

Le
|Le

Capacities
Fuel tank, front wheel drive Fuel tank, all wheel drive Plug-in hybrid drive fuel tank Windshield washer system Windshield and headlight washer system* Windshield and headlight washer system*, S models Windshield and headlight washer system*, RS models
Weights
TAMA AA UOTM A
Fig. 309 Safety certificate
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The maximum permitted total weight @ of the vehicle is listed on the safety certificate on the side area of the door or on the driver's door pillar.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The maximum permitted load on the front axle
@ orthe rear axle @) is listed on thesafety cer-
tificate on the side area of the door or on the driver's door pillar. Load The maximum permittedload is listed on the tire pressurelabel on the driver's door pillar. Roof load The maximum permissible roof load is 165 lbs (75 kg).

Technical data
13.2 gal (50.0 L)
14.5 gal (55.0 L) 10.5 gal (40.0 L)
3.2 qt (3.0L) 5.0 qt (4.7 L) 4.2 qt (4.0L) 3.7 qtB5bD
395

AC eee eee eee 69 A/C cooling mode............ eee eee eee ee 69
AcCcCeSSOriS..... 2... cee eee eee 62,391
Active lane assist refer to Audi active lane assist.......... 139
Active rollover protection system......... 266 Retracting rollover protection.......... 266
Adaptive cruise control refer to Audi adaptive cruise control..... 129.
Adaptive light refer to Audi adaptive light.............. 48
Adjusting the additional display........... 19 Adjusting the air distribution............. 70 Adjusting the sound..................0- 257 Adjusting the temperature............... 69 Adjusting the vents. .............. 00 eee 71 Advanced key
refer to Convenience key.............--- 75 Airbags... 6 eee cece eee 276 Airbag system. ........-.0 2 - ee eee 276, 296
Advanced Airbag System components.... 283 CARG ccacans « 2 eseems @ 2 esears a 2 ewan 2 meteR w © ane 291 Children... eee cee eee 303 Child restraints: + gaan a 2 wee a 2 mom x owe 303 Components(front airbags) ............ 283 Danger of fitting a child seat on the front PaSSCNGErSeat swews x x eeas 5 o ween se eR 277 Disposal « isu ss awed + wenn a 6 na ao © nae 291 Front airbags............-.. eee eee ee 281
How do the front airbags work?......... 286 How manyairbags does myvehicle have?. 283 How the Advanced Airbag System components work together...............005 285 Important safety instructions on the knee airbag systeM.... 6... eee eee eee eee 294 Knee airbags...........-...0--00 00 ee 292 Monitoring « sews ¢ ¢ cams so ewes x ers wx oe 288 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light.......... 288
Repairs... 6... ee eee
Safety instructions.............-...0Siderainbagstas » v smu 6 © esas v & onus & & neue Warning/Indicator lights
Air pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator . 357

Air transports, + scsas ov veces oo cxween 3 v aesvaes ov
Alarm system refer to Anti-theft alarm system..........
Alignment pin (tire change)..............
All-weather lights . 2.0... 0.020.000 ee sees
ALL S@ASON TIRES: swseii < wswscin + aawen a a aoe ee
All wheel drive refer to quattro (all wheel drive)........
AMI
refer to Audi music interface........... Android Auto
refer to Audi smartphone interface......
Anti-freeze Windshield washer system.............
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) ..........
Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR)...............
Anti-theft alarm system ...........-..000-
Apple CarPlay refer to Audi smartphone interface......
ASR
refer to Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR) .......
Audi active lane assist'; coe. si ciius ceive' Cleaning the camera area.............. MessageS ... 0... cece
Audi adaptive cruise control............. Cleaning the sensor...............0005 Distance display, distance warning....... MESSAGES « ances « « ersnne 0 0 mesmo 6 sxenone eo: eres
Audi adaptive light...........0.eeeeeeee Audi connect
refer toconnect...............4.
Audi connect Infotainment Services overvieW........ eee cece eens
Audi drive select ....................00.
Audi e-tron charging system refer to Charging system (version 1).....
Audi e-tron compact charging system refer to Charging system (version 2).....
Audi magnetic ride refer to Suspension control............
Audi MuSiGinterface ssi 6 sss es wee ev ae
Audi music stream REFEPEO NN Flieie 2 neces © 0 scwvese wo vie
AudioFile: sescecs « o sanes +o wees +o anor & waan a

396

Audio player Bluetooth audio player................ 236 Wi-Fi audio player...............00055 236
AUGIONTECK ccs ¢ < ceas 3 5 Hees Fe Bee zB eR 244
Audi phone box.... 2.0... eee eee eee eee 191 Audi presense...........0 0c eee eee eee 136
MESSAGES coms = y sees = a sees go eee 4 135, 139
Audi side assist............ 0. eee eee eee 142 Cleaning the sensors..............0005 363 MessageS.... 0.0... eee eee eee eee 146 Rear cross-traffic assist. ............-.. 145
Audi smartphone interface.......... 251, 256
Audi virtual cockpit refer to Instrument cluster.............. 14
AUTO Automatic headlights.................. 48 Climate control system ..............00. 69
Auto Lock (central locking system) ......... 30
Automatic belt retractor................ 271 Automatic climate control system
refer to Climate control system (automatIC) eee eee 68, 69
Automatic transmission...............005 82 DFiViiG/ tips: = » vox s 5 wees so eames eee 8 es 84 Emergency mode.......ceeeecceeee eens 88 Hill descent control.................05. 86 Kick-dOWiles : 2 eews 5 2 eeu ¥ s ere 5 2 ee ys 87 Malfunctions « 5 sion 2 5 eewn ¥ o ween 2 wee = 82 Manual shifting (tiptronic mode)......... 86 Parking lock emergency release.......... 89 Selector levels «2 swe ee awa vs mes oo eee 84 Selector lever lock... 0.0.0... cee eee eee 82 Selector lever positions................. 82 Shift paddles woos » ecas s x euyne a a eee a Ee 86
Automatic wipe/wash system............. 54
Auxiliary climate control................ 121
AUX input... 2... cece eee eee 239
Average consumption................ 21,.22 Average speed..........-...0--0008- 21, 22
B
BACK button... 0.0... . cee eee eee 165 BagshOoks « sess & esciwna excavate @ ¥ arene wo nana 63 Balance (GOUNG). sso @ wasn wo seem wo memo 257
Band refer to Frequency band............... 228

Bass(SOUNG) « exces + x ssswone wo cease © x enawaue ¥ aa 257 Battery nccon oe mama oo enmm @ 2 amune 8 4 amine 4 0 335
Charging........... eee eee eee eee eee 336 Winter operation.................0 ee 335 also refer to High-voltage battery........ 90 Before driving « ess: sesau: cence ees see 260 Belt tensionerSixx « + wage: xs memes 2 a cea 2 oe 275 BlOWETs « masa 3 mae 4 Rae 2 face FS Soe Fe 69 Bluetooth Audio player » 2ces cams se wees ce eww se 236 Connecting acellphone............... 188 Settings.......... 0.00.22. e eee eee 256 Boost... 0... eee eee eee ee 23,93 Boosterseats:. « ese a sess sa siete oo saerene 310 Boost pressure indicator................. 23: Brake@Siscwe ss avers ow amie 6 cosues wo aires @ @ Be 161 Brake assist... 0... eee eee eee 159 Brak@ flidcis s saws 5 ¢ saws & & Hane © x eee 334 Electromechanical parking brake......... 80 Emergency braking function............. 80 New brake pads..............---000-- 161 Break-in security feature...............-. 35 Breaking in Newbrake pads..............--0000-- 161 NOWARESS: 6s ecw a 6 saci 0 seoti s aI To 346 Browser refer to Media center.................. 242 BULBS: & csniss « & aciawse 0 a aunaane a apawana ew aware & « 381 Buttons Control panel (MMI).............-.0.. 165 Multifunction steering wheel......... 17;,20 Programming (multifunction steering
wheel)... ... 0... cece eee eee eee eens 19
Switching the Infotainment system display ON/Offies « = wives = woo so eeER ee REDS Ge HS 166
Cable (USB adapter/AUX connector cable).. 239 California Proposition 65 Warning........ 326
Batteryispecifices « s saves ss meme © 0 ane « « 335 Galblist's cos = ¢ sews ¢ © aewe ¥ 9 pews oy ewe 3 193 GalboOptionsisa. + = ween se wees se ae ee Bee 200 Capacities
Fuelitanikes « wes 2 2 sna 3 2 aasacs 3s 3 wean 2 8 395 Washer fluid reservoir...............-. 395

8V2012721B)

397

Index

Care refer to Cleaning............eee eee ee 362
Car key... eee eee 31
CaRmWaSh. » sesiim « «srr % 4 omens wn comm 2 cee 362
Catalytic converter'. esis 2. exis ev ewe se oe 325
CD drive (media drives)..............004 234
Cell phone refer to Telephone..............0.0005 188
Cell phone compartment refer to Audi phone box............005 191
GeMtralllOCkiAgs. ow snes» © o aouere 0 « vonnere a & wnscene 30 Convenience key..........-.0 eee eee eee 33 Convenience opening and closing......... 39 Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 35 Remote control key............0 ee ee eee 32 S@ttinng + ¢ ewe ss mews 5 7 cows oe ewe ce eR 34
Central locking switch..............00005 34
GEFLITICSEIGHs 5 x wary 5 ¥ mone s 2 eee EE eae 392
Changing the scale...................005 17
Charge level INStrUMOENtClUSEED says ¢ x meee 2 x ose 2s Hew 93
Charging refer to Power sources..........--00000- 62
Charging clip< « gees + geepe s weve ss eee 107
Charging system (version1)............. 110
Charging system (version 2)............. 115
Charging the battery (mobile devi@S) mos « 2 sais se Hew ee ewe 191, 239, 240
Charging (plug-in hybrid drive)........... 102
Child restraints Danger of using child restraints in the front SOA ices «x sewnene a « acanwns wo eapsene wo eznwenn 6 0 epene 277 Wherecan I get additional information about child restraints and their use?..... 320
Child restraint system anchors........... 315 Child Saf@ty.c s « esas s pees ss wees eX eon a 301
Important safety instructions for using child safety seats......... 0.0.0 c cece ee eee 305 Tether anchors............000 220s eee 317 Tetheristraps s ces: x 2 ees 2 gees & eee 317
Child safety lock Power Windows. so nicne se saver eo erties oo 38 Rear doors... 0... cee ee eee eee 38
Child safety seats.............02.000005 307 Booster S@atSiies ss ees se eee s nee 8s we 310 Convertible child seats................ 308

Convertible locking retractor........... 314 How do I properlyinstall a child safety seat in MY Vehicle? vc = esen ss wees ye Kee eo we 305 Tinfamtiseatstnss « sonccs sw maname x cmumme i aoe 307 Installing a child restraint using the LATCH SVSUEMN = ccems & news 3 = eae 2 ee § ee 316 LATCH systettion « 6 sca so emia ow mens ¥ oo 316 Mounting and releasing the anchorage HOGKcas 5 2 axes ¢ = eee Fo eS co Bee bn ce 316 Safety instructions.................0- 305 SECUAIAG |i » siexens a 6 msennan x winaage 2 « enetoine aH © 312 Unused safety belts on the rear seat..... 307
Child seats Lower anchorages..........-..00--005 316
GlSSSIE VieWre « = seve « = neem 2 2 pee Ea oe & 18
Cleaning....... 2... eee eee eee eee 362
Cleaning/removing ice from windows...... 365
Cleaning Alcantara...............000 00s 365
Cleaning artificial leather............... 365
Cleaning carbon components........ 364, 365 Cleaning controlsis «cso ss sans 6 a ovsece 6 & oe 365
Cleaning decorative parts/trim....... 364, 365
Cleaning exhausttail pipes.............. 364
Cleaning plastic parts...............0.. 365
Cleaning textiles................00000. 365
Cleaning the charging clip............... 122
Cleaning the charging dock.............. 122
Cleaning the taillights.................. 363
Cleaning the windshield...............05- 54 Climate control system (automatic)........ 69
Drive select..............00 000 e ee eee 146
CLOEK scosseas 6 x. avanens os: somite a a eatin a anane 0 253
Closing Convenience closing..............-.04. 39 HGOG): zz seu « 2 eee < 8 aeme 2 Roowe ¢ Beem @ 327 Luggage compartment lid............... 36 Panoramic glass roof................005 40 POWER tOpices + seme 9 ¥ couse « EE ee ee Ge 41 Wind Ows3 ¢ 2 snwow © 2 mamas oo meas 2 8 mam 2 we 38
Cockpit (overview) ...... 00... cece ee eee 8
Color riumbef se: « « sees x = ewe se ees 5 ees 394
Coming home/Leaving home refer to Entry/exit lighting.............. 50
Command (voice recognition system) ...... 181
COMPATUMENES c.; x 2 eee xo eaee ce gaeG x oe 63
Compassin the mirror...............000. 56

398

Compliance'. « siice 2 exsee ev eee oo em ves 392
CONNEC Cass 6 & scieas ao mem Fo mes aw OR ¥ Bea 203 Audi connect e-tron services............ 207 Datta Plains: = scca ¢ = seee s apenas aes 5 as 209 Data Privacy s+ oss oo som 3 wm a 9 name 209 TinfOtainMe tier. « scesess ie © suet wo anecnos 9 0 ron 204 Infotainment services...............-- 204
connect e-tron services.............-..- 207
Connection manager..........-.0..0005 254
Connections refer to Media................--- 233,241
Consumer information.................. 389
Consumption (fuel) ................0. 21, 22
CONMEAGES crccers ov soecams ae sowzamn a mteseee a a ete a 8 198 Additional directory.............000008 255 Importing/exporting...............005 200 Memiorycapacltyins. 2 6 wesc 0 % meieze © « onnvace » 201 Storing as destination................. 218
Control buttons (operating the MMI)...... 167 Control knob with joystick function (MMI operation)... 62. eee eee 170 Convenience key............00 eee eee 31
Emergency operation.................- 77 Starting/stopping the engine............ 75 Unlocking and locking............-...0. 33 Convenience opening and closing Windows or roof... 2.6... eee eee ee 39 Convertible child safety seats............ 308 Convertible locking retractor ACtIVAtING:: « 2 acu = e eee se ewes s wae a es 314 Deactivating o wows wo wees x 6 seein 6 8 amma ¥ 314 Using to secure a child safety seat....... 314 COOLING MOMS . oxuesexe » snexsen « ¥ miemnae x enews « 69 Cooling system Adding coolant...............-.0000- 333 COOlaNtinc: « » secs = y mews +e eee Fe eee Te 332 Coolant level checking.............000. 333 Coolant temperature indicator........... 15 Cruise control system.............20--. 126 Cup holders........ 00... cee eee eee eee 62
CUFFENE CONSUMPLIOM ses 6 «woos so coves vo 21.22
D
Data plamstieus +e cases 3 2 sree so aren @ 8 rare 209
Data Privacy': swoos « 2 saws xo sas go ean soe 209
Datarecorder': « saws s © eews s & eee spew xe 163

Date cscs x x ssncens o & senses ow sneneis w ctssewes ot eet 253
Datedisplay's scenes + swron ao acne a ¥ mae ¥ 253
Daytime running lights................-. 48
Declaration of compliance...........0005 392 Defrosting (windows) .................045 70
DEF (instrument cluster)...............5. 16
Deluxe automatic climate control refer to Climate control system (automatHG), rosie ws cease = samen oan ew ite 68, 69
Demo mode refer to Presentation mode............. 219
Determining correct load limit........... 354
Digitalicompass evasces < 2 sve x 2 amass 6s oman a 56
Digital Rights Management.............. 233
Dimensions: « = sess = ¢ eee 2 ¢ eeye oo oats 2 394
Dimming the exterior mirrors............. 53)
Dimming the rearview mirror............. 53
Directory refer to Contactsa5 = «cuss 2 pees es geese 198
Displayaws s < sews x s meee ¢ v aoe os SEE Es oes 17 Cleaning'. « + ses 2 omcan eo ews © 8 ner © oe 365 Infotainment system display....... 166, 254 Instrument ClUStEr ses < c sees de oes se 2s 20 Multifunction steering wheel............ 17
DispoSalic: « + exes + ¥ saws 3 ees oe wn 3 ae 389
DISTANCE acm « o waren <2 wemE & eRe 2 Ee 21,22
Doors Childisafety lock cscs 2 2 cme es even 2 2 eae 38 Door contact switch..............000005 51 Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 35
Driver information system Changing VieWSic. s » sees «+ news x a ewes wee 17 Economytips (analog instrument cluster)... 23 Efficiency program............-.0e-0 00 23 Energy consumers(Audi virtual cockpit)... 22 Outside temperature display............. 16 Trip computer (analog instrument cluster.. 22 Trip computer (Audi virtual cockpit)....... 21. VICWEs 2c eawone a o enews oo oman woo RRS @ 2 oRUESE 18
Driver seating position................0. 261
Drives Feferto.Mediaic « «wis so ene so ear 233, 241
Drive select refer to Audi drive select............... 146
Driving safely...............0 0. e eee ee 260
Driving through water...............000- 72

8V2012721B)

399

Index

Driving times 5 «scsi + a emcwnn o temo ¥ EHO 21,,22
Driving tips Efficient driving....................00. 73
Driving track. . 2... 2. e eee eee 72 Dust filter
refer to Pollutantfilter...............0. 68
DVD drive (media drives)..............55 234
Dynamic volume refer to System volume............00-5 258
E
E-mail... eee eee 197 e-tron
NaVigatiOniss ss ecsa se eaea s apes ss eee 227 also refer to Plug-in hybrid drive......... 90 eco mode (climate control system)......... 69 ECONOMICAL KOULE » seme 2 y sees = eee 4 + nee 219 EDL refer to Electronic Differential Lock (EDL). 159 Efficiency program « ss = ss eee ss eee es sews 23 Electrical system. ....... 2. eee eee eee 334 Electric drive... 2... eee eee eee eee eee 90 Electric range... ... ee eee eee eee 227 Electromechanical parking brake.......... 80 Electromechanical steering.............. 162 Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)......... 159 Electronicimmobilizetiscs. « + eau « 2 emis o 2 ow 31
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)...... 159 Embedded SIM Cat« ecu x = eeae + ¢ ays 5 5s 204 Emergency assistance.................. 368 Emergency braking function.............. 80 Emergency flashers.............2--0000- 50 Emergency operation
DOONS = eee 5 2 ween 5 o eee 5 Ee; eee 35 Fueltillerdoor ins & sisi oe ascina oe aesae a 4 ane 324 Luggage compartment lid............... 37 Panoramic glass r00f .0. 6s ewes cease eo 40 Emergencystarting...............-.0-. 383 Emissions control system............... 324 Energy consumers..........00-00 eee eee 22
Energy management................... 163
Engine Breakingin............ 0.00 eee eee eee 72 GOOlant www: ¢ ¢ seme & o see 2 neem © Bet = 332 JUMP 'StAFEING « esr 6 «waves 6 2 meee 6 o eens 383

Jump starting (plug-in hybrid drive)... .. . 100 MessageS... 1.6... cece eee eee eee 77 Start/Stop system « cows sc eves se erew ee oe 78 Starting/stopping (button) .............. 75 Starting/stopping (key)..............0.. 74
Engine compartment Opening and closing the hood.......... 327 OVENVIEW's sass x s saan @ ¢ eae oo RweS 5 Ewe 328 Safety precautions.................... 325
Engine data refer to Sport displays..............2... 24
Engine oil AGING © acsms < < aaron ¢ § tess FS HER FE SoS 328 GHANGING) sic 2 & osm os wane ee ee oo oe 331 Checking oillevel............02-.00005 328 Consumption....................-00- 328 DIpStick:: s ¢ sins « ¢ caves vv saves go nei eve 328 Indicator light..............02.-0000- 329 Replacement interval...............0. 338 Temperature display................00. 23
Enhanced View": ween 2 x nage 3 ¢ mam se gems gg 18 Entering characters/numbers(speller)..... 172 Entering letters (speller)................ 172 Entertainment sliding menu............. 170 Entry/exit lighting. .................000. 50
Entry assistance refer to Seats... . cece eee 59
Environment
Unleaded gasoline..................0. 321 ESC
refer to Electronic Stabilization COMEROLGES Cyan « mcwonne » casas os snentne 1 6 aban ise eSIM refer to Embedded SIM card............ 204 Event Data Recorder (EDR).............. 163 Exterior lighting.................002-00- 48
EXteriOn MIRKOPS sess « sca os sesame wanes a @ 52 Folding. ....... 0... cee cece eee eee 52 Folding Settings wis ¢ ¢ easn ss sean ss row ee 34
External voice operation................ 186
F
Factory default settings Multi Media Interface................. 254
Fader (SOuUNG) es s ¢ seins se nares se ews ge ee 257

400

Index

Fastening Booster seatS...... 0.0... cee ee eee ee 310 Convertible child safety seats........... 308 Infantiseats:: « « esc xv oie © o wei ee oem 307

Fast forwarding and rewinding (audio/video file) eee eee 241

Fast forwarding (audio/video file)......... 241

Fast nOwte ssscse x 2 ones: @ e enewn ve amas @ e sernees 219

Favorites

Media....... cece ccc eee 244 Navigation..............0......0.00. 213

Jeléphon@acws + « cawy + eon os ees 3 x ewe 195

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) . 392

File formats (media drives) .............. 246

Floor matS.... 2... eee eee eee eee 265

Folding the rear seats.............-..000- 66

Foot pedals........... 2... cee ee eee eee 265

For the sake of the environment Disposing of engine oil................ 331 FueLING s « secem « = pees 5 ¢ eetee so Sees ee oes 322 Leaks... ec ee eee eee ee ee 326

Roof rack... 6... eee 67

Free text search... 22... cee eee eee 173 Média « x esse ¢ 5 sees bo oes Fe eee 2 2 ee 243 Navigation'. « cia « v swan os ewe 3 o nece © 211 Radio... 2... ee eee 229 Telephon@s.< ss ess s cess ss Sees sb veme 199

Freeze protection

COOlaNt ws « z ewe + s mews +e eee te eee 332

Frequency band...........0.2.e00. 228, 231, also refer to Frequency band........... 228

Front airbags

How they work

. 286

Frontal collisions and the laws of physics... 269

Front center armrest...............0.00- 60

Front seats... 20... 0. ee eee eee eee 58 Adjusting..............00 eee eee eee 262

Child restraints in the front seat......... 277

Current consumption............... 21, 22
FUCL GAUGE cu s eves 2 x pee 2 o eee oe 14,16 Fueltank:capacity'. « ssw x a wasn 0 x moses © 395

Gasoline... 2... eee 321 Savitig Tu@l sss 2 x sees ¢ 5 ees yo eee ge oe 146 Saving fuel consumption................ 73

Fueling Fuel filler door emergency release....... 324 FUCLQaUGC wes 3 s eae 8 ¢ wees & a ee 8 eee 16 Fuel tarikecapacity's « 5 soca es ecw « wen a 395 Opening the fuel filler door............ 322
FUUSOS%. « ssessenr oo axeias 6 opeone wo: eoettepe ox acne 379
G
GALA refer to Speed dependent volume control. 257
Garment hooks ........ eee cece nena 63 Gas discharge lamps...........-....0-5 381
Gasoline... 6... eee eee eee 321 Additives... 0.0... cc cece cece eee 322 Gasoline MIXtUNS suis x x sew 2 yews + some 321.
GAWR refer to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . 395
Glossaryof tire and loading terminology... 342
GlOVECOMPArtMHENt cwws xs cows xe res +o ee 63
G meter refer to Sport displays.................. 24
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)........ 395 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)...... 395 GVWR
refer to Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).... 0.0... e cence ee eee 395
H
Hand sire. « o cccmen «meses oe aren a wena see 188 Headlight range control...............004 48
Headlights'. « cscs se caus oo enim wo omnes 9 & ow 48
Cleaning........ 0... eee eee eee eee 363 Headlight range control................ 48 Washerisystem's = 2 sees 2 2 wen 2 ean ay we 54 Head restraints « vem s socme : pee ao deme oe 263 IAGJUSEIN jess. < 6 sisi o neue a 0 aman oa 60, 263 Removing and installing................ 60 Heated
EXtGHOF MUONS « zene sv uses ¢ eee 2 + ee 52
Rear Wind OW & 2 ove ¥ 0 mem oe wane 6 arenes 70 Seats... ieee eee 70 Washer fluid noZzZleSiiis is cies ss veee ee we 54 Heavy clothing and safety belts.......... 271
Hex socket... 2... eee cee ee 368
High-voltage battery...............000.. 91 CHANGING, sax & s aaeu ¢ & ams 3 5 cates 3 x ee 121

8V2012721B)

Index

High beam Swe: + 2 sescne + © seemie 2 w awane ew ewer © 49 High beam assistant.................0. 49
Hill descent control..............22-000- 86
Hill hold assist... 0.2... ee eee eee eee 81 also refer to Hill hold assist............. 81
Hold assist (hill)... 0... eee eee eee 81
Home addresS...........0-00 000 ee 213,218
FIOM: a ssnss 2 aeenons @ & omomews © 6) eres © eens wo & HeEE 8
Hotspot refer to Wi-Fi... ..... cece eee ee 208, 236
Howare child restraint system anchorsrelated to child safety................-.000. 315 How manyairbags does myvehicle have?.. 283 Howsafety belt pretensioners work....... 275
I
Ignition Establishing drive ready mode (plug-in hy-
brid drive@)sec «2 sens = 2 own « 2 een oe sae oo 92
Switching on/off (plug-in hybrid drive) ..... 92 Switching on/off (using the button) ....... 75 Switching on/off (using the key).......... 74 Imbalance (wheels) ..............00-005 348
Immobilizer refer to Electronic immobilizer........... 31
Important things to do before driving..... 260 Importing and exporting (contacts) ....... 200 Improperly worn safety belts............ 274 Indicator lights.................00020005 10
Airbag system. ............--0ee eee 288 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF .............. 288 Indicator lights (plug-in hybrid drive)....... 94 INTANWSEAES © scewvs oo samen ow ome oa MOM oO 307
Input Using the MMEtOWCR esc. 6 sie © a weezer « 0 6 168 Using the speller..................0.. 172
Input level (media)................005. 244 Inspection interval..............000000 338
Installing the upper tether strap on the anchorage...... ee eee eee eee eee 318 Instrument cluster................000005 14
GlESNING: + ¢ eam 2 2 same <a eR F ame gE ne 365 Me@SSAGES sei oo cmcon 3 6 omens oo Renn =H aOR 24 Plug-in hybrid drive...............00005 93 Service interval display................ 338

Instruments Adjusting illumination.................. 51
Interior lighting..................00000- 51 Internet
refer toconnect.............0005 203, 204 Internet radio........... 000.00 eee eee 237 Interval mode (windshield wipers)......... 54 iPhone
refer to Audi music interface........... 239 iTunes tagging. ... 6... cece cece eee eee 228
J
Jukebox... eee eee 235
JUMAPESbALE « nacnas © 2 eee ae eons @ os area © sree 100
JUMpiStarting sews 2 cme oo ween © 0 eeu 100, 383
K
ROY's 6 sri oo meen 2s wow © men o 2 mee 6 8 aN 31 Convenience opening and closing......... 39 Key not recognized ..........ceceeeeees TE Key recognition (climate control system)... 68 Key replacement............2..0.0000. 31 Messages ............- 0 eee eee eee eee 77 Replacing the battery.................. 32 Unlocking and locking............... 32, 33
Kick-down (automatic transmission) ........ 87 Kneeairbags:: +s esis ss eww s wean as wows a 292
Description...............0..0.0000. 292 How they Workevas » ¢ sews ¢ 5 eeu dB eR GG 293 Important safety instructions.......... 294
L
Lane assist refer to Audi active lane assist.......... 139
Lapetinters « « seccus vo sscewm vo seemnne s & one 128 LATCH: oo sason 3 wanna as aacea aw mae a © ING 315
Description...........-..002- see eee 316 Installing a child restraint............. 316 LOGAtION 5 & sis oo ome a oe ets 2 wee 9 wee 315 Mounting and releasing the anchorage hook... eee eee 316 Launch Control................2--.-0005 87 Leather care and cleaning............... 365 EeFECONtOLDUEEOM en oo sme wo scauoue aw aanene ® © 18 License plate bracket..........0.0.ee ees 391

402

Index

Licensing agreements (MMI)............. 259 Lifting Jack'. siwcic « oases « ¥ wae wo eee @ 8 374 Light/rain sensor
Automatic headlights.................. 48 Switching the rain sensor on/off.......... 54 Lighting EXterion « wes : = seen ¢ 5 eee vo ee sv Dees 48 AMGETOM cso x 2 cee xe ene oH en oe ae ae 51, BIQHES sews ev wisn oe acme wo 2 cece © = come eo as 48 Interior/reading lights................0. Sl
Listening to music refer to Media................-.- 233,241
Load... 6.6... eee eee 395 Locking and unlocking
By remote control. ...... 0... eee eee 32 With the convenience key............... 33 Low beam headlights.................... 48 Lowering the cargo floor................. 65 Luggage compartment................0- 63 COVED: = < weg = 2 tees 5 ¢ eee 5 ove # cee 64 POWEPSOURCES ccsins «6 amemens <x evawane © etetotions © ene 62 Tie-dOWns .. 0.6... eee 65 also refer to Luggage compartment...... 63 Luggage compartment lid Mechanically unlocking. ...........0e ees 37 Opening and closing................... 36
Luggage compartment net............... 65 Lumbar'Support eo isccs ss cutee oo scones a 6 anwar oe 58
M
Magnetic ride refer to Suspension control............ 146
MaiMbeMaMmee . resis oo sseune s + ocmmune a 0 ensnsne x 0 389
Maintenanceintervals...............00. 338 Making an emergency call............... 195 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)........ 325
Map Operating « « cssise so csuore so coun & wim @ o sue 220 SettingS .... 20... 60. e cece eee eee 222 UpGate » onan s 2 aways ¢ eeu + arene + Reon 211
Map Update c < x sau ¢ s eee 3 § coos x Eee 224 Massage function.............. eee eee eee 58 Media......... ce cece cece 233, 241
DYiVGS§: s x sews 5 ¢ eee 5 2 len s eee Es ee 234 Supported formats swiss vi esis se wees vee 246
Mediaicenter's » scene cei so same ee swe 9 242

Memory capacity Directory... 2... cece eee eee eee 200 JUKEBOX « wee 2 ¢ ores x 4 ome oe owes 2 eee 235
Memory card SDicardireader (MMI) i« « o coves. so cease 2 o ov 234 Supported types and formats........... 246
MENU, Buttons & cisies © « cessive w s cetsoaus % 0 saeaiens + 165 Menu language
refer to Setting the language........... 253 Menu paths (Owner's Manual)............ 167 Menus/SyMbolSisie< «sec a6 miei ao ates a 0 174 MeSSAQESS 5 o nec so mamem so eee 6 Pm so 195
MUPPOTStcs0 = x aeons 5 2 eves x 2 eeewe & e Bees 8 me 52 COMMPASS xine 6 csnuece w 6 esouen @ x cuwaena 6 6 arin 8 56 Dimming ......- 0.0 e cece cece eee 53
MMI refer to Multi Media Interface.......... 165
MMI search refer to Free text search........... 173, 243
MMI touch : «ees = s eepa s seen as weee ee es 168
Mobile device refer to Telephone...............-.04. 188
Mobile device reminder signal............ 253
MODE button ; « aes <= cece es pees be eee ee 20 Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System... 288
MP3
refer'to Jukebox: «ees se eewa ee ewe eee 235
Multifunction steering wheel Changing viewSier = «sve «a erewe + a oven a oe 17 Operating................2..0.000. 17,20 SWitching tabs: s x geaw ss seme «a ewe ¢ 17,20 Voice recognition system ............64. 19
Multi Media Interface..........0....005 165 Music collection
Refer ToJUKEDOX:}. « sence « sso « « seweise sa oom 235 MURR bce cos sir sow annie aw anemone a = emo 257
MYAUGL ys cscs oo eecae 2 3 mee oo ween © 204, 215
N
NAV/MAP button ion « «gay « eam as eam g xe 211 NaVIGStION = sexes « = neues ¢ = ees ¢ Yea FE es 211
ANNOUNCEMENES sees « 6 sees oo eee ov ere 220 Plug-in hybrid drive..............0000 227 also refer to Map: sews = 2 ees <= seen ex oe 220 Navigation (instrument cluster) ...... 178,179 NHTSA... 2.00. cece eee eee 391

8V2012721B)

Index

Number of'seats css. « csssos ov seies vo avesane oo 268
O
Occupant protectionin. « 2 eves a 2 exes + x suse 136
Occupant seating positions.............. 261 Octane rating (gasoline)................ 321 OdGITIGtEHs sex: 5 2 eau 5 x yee cs Ree Gs ee 16 Oil
refer te ENGING ibs « 2 coo s vows se ewes a 328 ON/OFF ROD: (MMDins = ¢ caus y s ome 3 © eos & 165 On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)........ 325 Online destinations
refer to Point of interest search......... 214 OHURETIAD + sees & x eees « & sees 6c oeERS ee 223 Online map update................006. 224 Online media........ 00... cee ee eee eee 237 Online services
refer to connect: « « esww + eens x we 203, 204 OPENING: « s seee ss Rene = ¥ ams oo Hee & 8 we 30
Convenience opening.................4. 39 Fuel filler door. ...... 0.0... cece ee eae 322 Hood... 0.2... eee 327 Luggage compartment lid............... 36 Panoramic glass roof.............000005 40 Power top... ... eee cece eee eee eee 41 WINdOWS': « sxe 5 2 oueay 2 ews § 2 yew «8 38 Opening and closing refer to Unlocking and locking..... 30, 32,33 Operating Multifunction steering wheel......... 17,20 Multi Media Interface................. 166 Voice recognition system.............. 181
Options MeN + wees « « wes x 5 ees 18; 167, 171
Outside temperature display.............. 14 Overview (Cockpit) .............0000 000s 8
P
Paint damage........... eee cence eee eee 364 Paint number....... 0... ee cece ee ee eens 394 Panic button. ... 0.2.0.0... eee eee eee 32
Panic function... 0.0... ce eee eee ee 32 Panoramiciglassiroof's cciseosn « iexum 2% manus i 40
Convenience opening and closing......... 39 Emergency closing..............22e-005 40

Parental control DVD... eee eee eee 244
Park assist... 22... eee eee eee 153
Parking aid... 0.0... eee eee eee 149 AdjUStING ©... eee cee ee eee 157 Cleaning sensors/camera............-- 363 Malfunction... 0.0... 00 cece eee eee eee 158 Park assist... 0... eee eee eee 153
Rearview camera............0-0e eee 151
Parking brake refer to Electromechanical parking brake.. 80
Parking lightS ws « < esas so news 5 ¥ eae 5 ocr 48
Parking lock emergency release........... 89
Parking (automatic transmission) ....... 84,85
Pass-through.......... eee eee eee eee 66
PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light........... 288
Pause (audio/video file)................. 241
Pedalsiccis: + crores o 0 sscmsme so aowtne & 5 costs a as 265
Perchlorate ls © scviss iv secu we cwoos 2 a caves wx a 389
Performance/torque display refer to Sport displays.................. 24
Personal route assistance. .............. 217
Phonebook refer to ContactS..... 0.0... cee eee eee 198
Physical principles of a frontal collision.... 269
Picture format (video) ...............005 244
Playback. (tmedia) bie x = smi 3 awoweive v & omanns ot 241
Playlist sscoses eo commis ew onwns ov maemre vo ew =o 244
Plug-in hybrid drive..............2--.45. 90 12 volt vehicle battery................ 100 Auxiliary climate control............... 121 BOOSE « sews = 3 ceeey + sauee 2 2 mee BS deme eee 97 CHANGING swssiie 6 & aren 6 w memes ow anne ww coe 102 Charging clip................-0000005 107 Charging doCkeci: s = cows se sews « eee gs 107 Charging system PIN................-. 114 Charging the high-voltage battery....... 106 Charging tithG-es: ss eeus se eee ee ees ae 108 Cleaning the charging system........... 122 Climate control...................... 121 COaStiNG les + 5 mace so same s RoR E Nee & Eon 97 COOLANE «: sisi «www a aaa a a ESO w eaHER 101 Driving. ...... 0.00.0... 0. eee eee 92 E-max (power availability)............... 99 Efficient driving « # sss v2 cies oe ore ve ee 98 Ending drive ready mode................ 92 Energy flow display.............-...0-. 99

404

Establishing drive ready mode........... 92 EV mode/hybrid mode...............045 96 High-voltage battery........... 90,91,121 High-voltage system............-..0-0- 90 Indicator lights............. 0... e ee eee 94 Inserting the fuel pump nozzle......... 101 Tintroduetion « & wvivaa sx savas « a amino © a areunits & 90
Jump start... 6.2.2.0... 2 eee eee 100
JONG StSRting ase < sas 2s gauee & 3 Bene 5 100 Power Mete?s «2 aces < o ewim 2 2 we oo mee 93 Range and statistics................... 95 Range display............. 0. eee eee eee 95 Reeuperation « sic so sees oe meee se mee os 97 Refueling ......... 0... cece eee eee 101 Setting the modes................-.00. 96 Starting the vehicle.........5..0.ee eee 92 Status displays...............0.. 112,117 Switching the ignition on/off............ 92 Tachometer sce: ¢ 2 seme 2 x eww ¢ 2 eee sg oe 93 Tiremobility Kit ececsiss + + cowseie +o smewere © sisuese m 100 Transport............0 0.00.2 eee eee 100 Vehicle Sound ssc: se cees sv eves ve enen vee 92 Mehicletoolikities os acniss 4 o amuan a 0 sewias eo 100
Pointiof interest'. iii os mien as wav 2 ¥ ee 214
Point of interest search..........000 sees 214 also refer to Point of interest........... 214
POLISHING: ses v= cocwens @ a asecens w= eeeees ww anaes ¥ oO 364
Pollen filter refer to Pollutantfilter................. 68
POllUtamb Filters, crores 1 semen oo aenene a omens © a 68
Power entry assistance refer to Seats... 6. eee eee eee 59
Power meter. ......... 0.00. e eee eee eee 93
Power seat adjustment..............0005 58
Power sources............ 62, 191, 239, 240
POWEREOP acinus sx sive oo seme @ 9 comme © a one 41 Cleaning... . 2. cece eee ee eee eee 364
Power top storage compartment.......... 43
Power Wind OWS « ws oe ones. eww a ween a ee 38 Malfunction ......... 000 e cee e eee 39
Pregnant women Special considerations when wearing a safety Delt way se seen so weiss sy eee ee Sows 7 273
pre sense refer to Audi presense................ 136
Presentation Mode... ..... cece cece ees 220
Presets (climate control system)........... 68

Presets (adios oo esis « x svevoon © x steeds = ou 231 Pressure
Tire pressure monitoring system........ 359 THESis ¢ « sayau 5 ¥ Mas 4X SGEUR Go SOR 2s BEER 350 Program guide REGO: x 2 owen so see 4 teem 2S sees oe 229 Proper occupant seating positions........ 261 Proper safety belt position.............. 272 Proper seating position PRONE PaSSenGer wee + s xewie 2 & eee so eee 2 262 OECUPANES « scaises « 6 saves wo cessor ¥ ere we ore 261 Rear passengers..............-..0005 263 Pyrotechnic elements............-..00- 389
Q
quattro (all wheel drive) ............-.-. 162 Selective wheel torque control.......... 159
Question What happens to unbelted occupants?... 269
Radio's < = sees = oars © ¢ eee ev eee eg oes ee 228 Additional station information.......... 230 Presets....... 0.00.00. eee eee eee eee 231 Radio teXtccic = sacs y ¢ sees ¢ e eeae ¢ eae 229 Station list cise ceu ss news ee mene oes 228
Radio communications equipment........ 391 RadigeQui PGhibscas <2 wens x asee evo as 391. Radio Standards Specification (RSS)....... 392 Rain/light sensor
Automatic headlights.................. 48 Switching the rain sensor on/off.......... 54 Random refer to Shuffle... 0.2.2.0... eee eee 244
Range (tank level) .............00000. 21, 22
Reading lightsicc « « scses « a casos © myazene « # meus 51 Rear
Cleaning the rear window............... 54
Rear center armrest
refer to Cup holders...........2.-.000-- 62 Rear cross-traffic assist..............0-. 145 Rear fog lamp(s)..............0.0000e eee 48 Rear lid
Escape latch......................004 368 also refer to Luggage compartment lid.... 36

8V2012721B)

405

Index

Rearview camera. « ssi . ecw ee eee se oe 151 Rear window defogger................05- 70 Recirculation:Mode eajes ss eine a y caren we ows 70
RECUPEFatONews + ¢ eewe 3 2 eas Fo eee ee ee 21. Refresh station list (radio). .............. 231 Refueling ....... 66. c cece ences 322
Plug-in hybrid drive................00. 101 Remote control key.......... eee eeee neces 31
Convenience opening and closing......... 39 Key replacement........... cece eee 31 LED « wows : wees 9 ¥ rows « ¢ eos 9g es 32 Replacing the batteryeoe:. 5 & ses ae caw sos 32 Synchronization................020-00 32
RE Pals seuss o x suonwes 6 x senses 9 a) acme & 6 econaus oo 389 Airbag system... . 6.0... cece eee eee 291
Replacement key..............-00000005 31 Replacement parts.............-.000005 391 Replacing
Light bulbs......................000. 381 Replacing wiper blades...............00. 56 Reporting Safety Defects................ 391
Reset refer to Restart (MMI)...............-. 258
Reset button (trip odometer) ............. 16 Resetting the trip odometer.............. 16
Restart (MMI) ............000 0000 ee eaee 258
Retractor csccces «oes a a caine oo onsen vv oo 271 Reverse (automatic transmission) .......... 83 Rewinding (audio/video file)............. 241 Right control button is. « ¢ ows se esa ss ee 18 RiniSis « saan & 3 maw @ & mae 2 Meee ¢ Sea 354
Gleaning's < sean = s sews 2 o enn 2 cme a 2 me 364
RINGtONeSEttINGS ca + wise s wane go eee ee 200 Rollbar
refer to Active rollover protection system. 266
ROOTOAG « + sem ¢ weews + ween as eewR 4 Ge 66, 395
ROOTRMAGCK sxx 2 sume: & & nem gx BeE ea OE Eee 66 also refer to Roof rack... 2.6.0. c eee e eee 66
Rowtelcriteria s « vias x saan a 8 rea 8 wren « 220 Route guidance
refer to Navigation............... 179,211
S
Saferdriving Habits ccs oo somes x mune x ees 260

Safety Airbag system. ......... 0.00 e eee eee 276 Belts « wes 2 x gemig 2 waren 3s MeO ao Bae Ge 268 Correct seating position............... 261 Pedalarea.......... 0. cece 265 Tel6phOne wows sz seus ¢ e sees § ees ge 188
Safety belt position..................0- 272 Safety belt height adjustment.......... 274 Safety belts worn by pregnant women.... 273
Safety belt pretensioner Service and disposal...............2... 275
Safety belts.............0....004. 268, 271
AGJUStING waxes ¢ 5 eaae + nee Ge SeOR a Hees 274 GIOSNING s 2s wees ss ame s wee es rE eo 365 Danger to passengers who do not wear a safety belt................0 200000 269 Fastening s « seem « « mowa + 2 ween © woes 2 ge 271 Height adjustment.................0. 274 Improperly Worn... 2... eee eee eee 274 Not Wort': + ¢ osws 7 6 een yo pews ve ewe ee 269 Safety belt position................... 272 Safety instructions...............0005 271 Securing child safety seats............. 312 Special considerations for pregnant womCS 273 UifSStSHi9 caw xs eww « x cama « « eww ewe 273 Warning/indicator light............... 268 Wornproperly...... 0.20... cee ee eee 270
Safety belt warning light................ 268
Safety instructions for side curtain airbags................ 299 for using child safety seats............. 305 fomusingsafety, beltS:. . cies « « onunis 6 0 oraue 271 Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System.. 290
Saving fuel Economytips (analog instrument cluster)... 23 Efficiency program (analog instrument clus-
ter) oe eee eee 23
Energy consumers(Audi virtual cockpit)... 22 REGUperationi. » cscsus o meses oo mimes © o anew 21
Seat (FadiO) ces: » 2 semes 2 o eee 4 ee 2s ewe 229
Screen weferto: Display: 2 wwe x mesos @ 6 weno 17, 20
Screwdriver ea se sees ao ears oo owas ve een 368
SD card reader (MMI) = wens « » sews ¢ 2 aque & 234
Search area (point of interest)............ 214

406

Search function refer to Free text search........... 173, 243
Seat adjustment Head) FEStraints): « saau << wave & mene s ¥ se 263
Seating capacity. ....... cece cece ee eee 268 Seating position
DIivGl': scx ¢ = qos = x peers se em Eee 261 Front (passengers « s somes «a mavens vane os 262 How to adjust the front seats........... 262 Incorrect seat position................ 264 OCCUPANES sevoes 2 5 owes +o meri 2 8 wes = we 261 Rear passengers.................000. 263
Sea EANSPOM. cccscmess sseiay « w casenia wo 6 comme © 100
Seats Adjusting .............. cee eee eee 58 Cleaning « ¢ eeu: se ees ae ees de ee eee 365 Correct seating position............... 261 Easy seatentry............0. 002 0e eae 59 FOlAING:: = = sees 2 2 eens x g cee yo ees 5 e eae 66 Number'of'seat« isscsa a a sain ov ana oo 268 Seat heating........ 0.0... eee eee eee 70
Secondary phone.................. 190,255
Selecting a source (media) .............. 241
Selection menu.............00. 18,167,171
Selective door unlocking...............0- 30
Selector lever (automatic transmission) POSIGIONS seccons oo cnewers + w serene vow wv TER wo 82
Self-learning navigation refer to Personal route assistance....... 217
Service and disposal Safety belt pretensioner............... 275
Service interval display...............0. 338
Service position refer to Replacing wiper blades.......... 55
Settings DIr@CtOry eaces x ¢ esees + © ees = © ewe oF ee 201 Maples a scenius 6 ssonius 6 a oxivane Wo oonuene © o exes 222 Media..... 2... cece eee eee eee eee 244 Navigation: « « ewew s 2 eeem x x eee se eee e 219 RadiOies. x axaiaws sx vce iv cxntewe 1 o amemces a ae 2311, System (MMI)... 0... 6. cee eee eee 253 TeléphOn@scs = = sane = oes ¢ s ees ev ree 200 Voice recognition system.............. 254 Wi-Fi hotspot.................000-00 208
Setting the language................00. 253
SHIFELIQGHEINGICAEOR «cess 2 5 cca 2 wrevrecne > wavs 24
Shift paddles (automatic transmission) ..... 86

Ship transports « = sce vo soncne vo wen» & ave 100 ShUfPleis 2 2 eer «weaned + wen Go aero oe a 244 Side airbags
DOSE PE OMe scenes 6 anecnn w 6 vaameus 3% wnecens 294 How they work... . 0.0... cee e eee eee 296 Side assist refer to Audi side assist................ 142 Side curtain airbags...............0000. 297 DeseriptiOnie: ¢ coun <2 ween se wow sy eee 297 How they work. ........ 0.00 e eee eee 299 Safety instructions.............-..0-- 299 SIM card... 6... eee 204 SiriusXM alert notifications.............. 230 Sliding/tilting sunroof refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 40 Smartphone referto Telephone..............02+00e 188
StiOW CHAINS: + = seas x 2 sees yo BeOS go eR 355
Socket refer to Power sourceS..........---2+--- 62
Software update refer to System update (MMI).......... 257
Software (MMI) Licensing agreements............00005 259 Update... 2... ee eee eee eee eee 257
NGRSIONs 2s wees cy wanes 3 2 game se eS & 2 BS 257
Sources of information about child restraints ANGMCHMUSCls. «sues av aceon 6 ansnse se axa 320
Space-saving spare tire (compact spare tire) . 377
Sparetire's x ¢ saws x 5 ews x 8 eases + Ree 7 He 377:
Spare wheels sass = sews se wows so sours eo 377
Speed dependent volume control......... 257
Speedometer........ 2. eee eee eee 14 Speed warning system.............--.0. 126 Speller. 2.2... 2. eee eee eee eee 172 Sport displays............ 0.0 e eee ee eee 24
SPOREVIEWeesis oo aecweus o auaweas we x uno oo eemuoos 3 a 18
Sporty CrivVing « saw + wows 2s wri ao were 3 6 oe 72 Start/Stop'system os <s sees se cosa enews eee 78 START ENGINE STOP (convenience key).. 75,76 Station scanning (radio)
refer to Refresh station list (radio)....... 231.
SUGCCING i: = x cwses x ¢ ews x 6 we 2 8 ee ZB 162 Locking steering (ignition lock)........... 74
Locking the steering (button) also refer to Electromechanical steering.. 162

8V2012721B)

407

Index

Steering wheel Adjusting... 2.0... c cece cece eee ee 73 Shift paddles (automatic transmission) .... 86 Steering wheel heating................. 71 also refer to Multifunction
steering wheel................. 17,19, 20
Steps for determining correct load limit... 354 Stopover (navigation) .................. 215 Storage options........ 00.0.0... e eee ee 63 Streaming
refer to Online media................. 237 S tronic (automatic transmission) .......... 82
Subtitles (DVD) .................000000- 244
Subwoofer......... 00.000 cece eee 257, 378
SUMVISONS « scans s semen a wavs os owes @ H eaoeNE 6 53 SUMPOUNG ici «0 sesuas wo amicane aw cian @ w orMUE To 257 SUSPENSION CONtrOlas ¢ ¢ wus + ¢ weewe zy caves 146
SWap'all seuss ¢ = sours + ¢ ses ¢ e teas Fe eee 194 Switching tabs
refer to Multifunction
steering wheel................. 17,19, 20
Symbols... 0.0.2... cece eee eee eee 174 Navigation ....... cece cece eee eee 220 WratfiGis:: + sue a x sem 2 x meee & 2 eee Ee oe 225 also refer to Indicator lights............. 10
Synchronization (climate control system) .... 69 System settings (MMI)................. 253 System update (MMI) w: « « cews « s ewww sx es 257 SysteniVOlUMe sony = » ems = eens =e eeeE Ye 258
T
TachOmete rics s « esau as eawe @ e wave a & ae Technical data Technical modifications................. 389 Telephone....... 0. eee eee eee eee 188
Audi phone box Connecting a mobile device............ 189 Dialing anumber.................005- 193 Options during a phone call............ 194 Playing MUSIC css ss swan ss oes ve eee a 236 SOULS casero © serine w @ pests & cuneate w & peta 200 Temperature display Coolant... 0.0... eee cee eee 14 Outside temperature................... 16 Tether anichorsis 4 ssa « came ¢ ¢ aes < & Sane 8 317 Tether strap... 2. eee eee 317

Textamessages snvves sv sowuwes « susswes wo anmnees + 6 195 also refer to Text messages............ 195
Tie-downs ...... 00... cece eee 65
TIMES: «scree a eecnane © csomes © oh apes © auemees 253
tiptronic (automatic transmission) ......... 86
Tire Mobility System (tire mobility kit) ..... 369
TiteS « scons a ¢ wom a 2 eee 2 eee se eee zc 339 Lowaprofilestines.. ccric 1s wswon «© were s 6 one 356 Mobility kit... 2.0... eee eee eee ee 369 quattro (all wheel drive)............... 162 Repailt Sets « « ssi s « esnrice ou arenes s 2 emer oo 368 Replacing............. cee eee eee eee 371 SERVICE lifewes = = seus = = aes se RE 3 eS 348 THRE PROSSUNC sus so cwniee wo cessece vo oowsaE wo 350 Tire pressure monitoring system.... 357,359 Tire pressure table.................... 351 Tire pressure (trailer towing)........... 124 Treadwear indicators.................. 348 Unidifectiotiale: 5 aes 5 2 wan sx oes ose 341 Uniform tire quality grading............ 356
Tires and wheels Glossary of tire and loading terminology .. 342 Tires and vehicle load limits............ 352
TC refer to Traffic information............. 225
Tone (sound) refer to Adjusting the sound............ 257
ToOls: » cguuze: © comes 2 2 seus 8 2 eet sb Bows & 8s 368
Torn or frayed safety belts............... 271
Touch TEPER TOIMMIL LOUGH wesc 2 2 assim = evo w os 168
Towing Front:towing lOop'. « « cacus « wears ws aresin 0s 386 Rear towing loop.............--.00 eee 387 TOW UUCKSS: = x cows s & seas = sees +s ee 386
TPMS Tire pressure monitoring system........ 357 also refer to Tires... 10... cece eee eee 357
TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) Indicator light.............. eee ee eee 361 Tire pressure monitoring system........ 359
Traffic information................ 225, 226
Trailer mode (navigation)............... 219
Trailer towing... 26... cee eee eee eee ee 124 Trailer loads « gee s sam 5 o aeeus gx meme 2 124
Transmission malfunction................ 88
Treble (sound).......... 0.00000 ee ee eee 257

408

Trip computer (analog instrument cluster)... 22 Trip computer (Audi virtual cockpit) ........ 21. Trunk lid
Trunk escape latch..............00000. 368 Turmesignialis « sss. <= suns © a ewes 3 v amenace #0 ose 49
U
Unfastening safety belts................ 273 Uniform tire quality grading............. 356 Unlocking and locking
By:remote:controls. sce <2 ccc ev eee ov oe 32 Using the lock cylinder...............0. 35 With the central locking switch.......... 34 With the convenience key............... 33 Updating stations (radio)................ 228 USB charging port.............. 62, 239, 240 USB stick refer to Audi music interface........... 239
V
Vanity TROP ses ss senesus so ames ose 6 aaneN 6 53: Vehicle
ComeClearnnng ces x i omusas 2 1 eine weaesrain © 362
Dimensions.......... 0.0 c cece e ee eee 394
Identification data................04. 394 OQUEOTSORVICC hw: oo seaiee 6 arenes 6 a arene wa 367 Raising............. 0... eee eee 388 TRatiSpOtt wes 2 esas <2 cee ce tee R EDR G 100 Vehicle battery Charge levelivs. < 2 swe ys ees 2s ween 2 6 ee 163 Vehicl@careics « + saws + 2 awa x 9 eam 2 8 een 362 Vehicle control modules.............4.. 163 Vehicle identification number............ 394
Vehicle jack. ...........0..0.0000. 368, 374
Vehicle sound...............0 000 eee eee 92
Vehicle toolkit... 0.0... cee ee eee ee 368 Version information.................08. 257 VIEW Dettori: oo cae a eves ov ome a e omnia ws i? Voice guidance
refer to Multifunction
steering wheel................. 17,19, 20
Voicemail... 6.6... cece eee eee 198 Voice recognition system..............-. 181
GOMMIANAS = won = x eau 2 see sy ee go: 182 Externalsican: «i inns 2 0 saene « seamen » wiosm @ 8 186

Multifunction steering wheel............ 19 Operating ........ 0c cee cece eee eee 181 SGCtinGS avsw s & aeeu 5 Kae 5 K REO S © ROS § 254 NOLUIM Chess eo seeeies a commas oo ones we x oO 258 VOLUIMIGE: 2 susan a 2 aceon os whe ew arte @ @ awe 257
Warning/Indicator lights Airbag system... 2.0... eee eee eee 288
Warning lights refer to Indicator lights.............0005 10
Washing matte finish paint.............. 362 Wave band
refer to Frequency band............... 228 Weights ........ 20... eee eee ee eee eee 395 What happens if you wear your safety belt too loose? .. 2... eee eee eee eee eee 272 What happens to unbelted occupants?.... 269 What impairs driving safety?............ 260 Wheellbollits «isis ov ecemene oo snngeot a ot enone # 0 354 Wheels « isisssn a x asasn 0 a oeasnes ov amenities a avenue 339.
Cleaning......... 2. eee eee eee eee 364 Glossary of tire and loading terminology... 342 Replacing « aviv © x cee v saves x ¥ eee ee oxen 371 Tire pressure monitoring system........ 359 Tires and vehicle load limits............ 352 WIhEeLWFETICH!: « & waas 2 onan gs eau 2s cere 368 When musta safety belt be replaced?..... 271 When mustthe airbag system be inspected? .288 Whereare lower anchorages located?..... 316 Wi-Fi Audi music stream... ..... 6.620220 eee 236 AUGIO PlAaVER s see % = eens = 2 ew 2 o temo c 236 Hotspot settingSic. ss scaise sv srewre so navn @ 208 Online media................0000008. 237 Using a hotspot « wins: cass sy cee se eee 204
also refer to Wi-Fi................ 208, 236
Windideflect0ors «= aceon oo saves 6 wasn 2 o aoc 44 CLEATTIIG). « «. asexsne » 0 vaunete 1 o etenene «9 enenotn ow 364
Windows Child safety lock............. 02. ee eee 38 Cleaning/removing ice................ 365 Convenience opening and closing......... 39 Opening and closing............-....-. 38 POWEF WINDOWSisn: = x wows 4 « ew & dee ge: 38

8V2012721B)

409

Index Windshield washer system........... 54, 337
Reservoir capacity...........-..00000- 395 Windshield wipers...............-00000- 54
Replacing wiper blades................. 55
Winter operation Battery': 2 = aces © s mewey : see ¢ See Gz ee 335 Car washes « mauss 5 + sean + © cevanin © % meson © ora 362
Cooling systeM...........0. 2-0 eee ee 332 Defrosting the windows................ 70 Rear window defogger..............0005 70 Removing ice from windows............ 365 Seat Héating's « seen ss woe se cers « eee es 70 SMOWCHALMS rane. as oxaicams x aeamnees ammews wo oe 355 Steering wheel heating................. 71 Windshield washer system............. 337 WIPTERUINES: 6 scams © seamen a 3 recs w 2 saaweTe 355
X
Xenon headlights.................-- 48, 381
Zz
ZOOM (Map) « v sewn x 2 gow = seem o e Rene 8 zg 220
410

It has always been Audi's policy to continuously improve its products. AUDI AG reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and to make additions or improvementsin its products without incurring any obligation to install them on products previously manufactured. This owner's manual is based on the current data
available when it was printed. Text, illustrations,
and specifications in this owner's manual are based on the mostcurrent information available at the time of printing, and shall not constitute a basis for liability claims.

These instructions may not be reproduced or translated in whole or in part without written consent of AUDI AG. All rights reserved by AUDI AG.
(4) For the sake of the environment Printed on eco-friendly paper (bleached without chlorine, recyclable).

Owner's Manual Englisch Nordamerika
8V2012721B)

11.2018

8V2012721B)